Mn-Sdm300a r6

SDM-300A
Satellite Modem
Installation and Operation Manual
Part Number MN/SDM300A.IOM Revision 6

Errata A
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject: Appendix A. Remote Control Operation
Date: June 21, 2005

Document: SDM-300A Satellite Data Modem Installation and Operation
Manual, Rev. 4, dated June 15, 2000
Part Number: MN/SDM300A.EA6
Collating Instructions: Attach this page to page A-1
Comments:
Change paragraphs A. 1and A.2 are highlighted to read:
Change Specifics:
A.1 General
Remote control and status information is transferred via a RS-485 or RS-232 serial
communications link. Commands and data are transferred on the remote control communications
link as US ASCII encoded character strings. The remote communications link is operated in a half
duplex mode. A remote controller or terminal initiates communications on the remote link. The
SDM300A never transmits data on the link unless it is commanded to do so.
A.2 Message Structure

The ASCII character format requires 11 bits/character: 1 start bit, 7 information bits with 1 parity bit
(odd/even) or 8 information bits with no parity bits, and 2 stop bits.
Messages on the remote link fall into the categories of commands and responses. Commands are
messages transmitted to a satellite modem, while responses are messages returned by a satellite
modem in response to a command.The general message structure is as follows:
• Start Character ‘<’

• Device Address 'add'
• Address De-limiter ‘/’
• Command/Response
• Qualifier ‘_’
• Optional Arguments ‘n, m, x, y, z’
• End of Message Character
Filename: T_ERRATA 1
Errata B
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject: Correct RS reference in 4.1.1 Remote Connector and Pinouts (J6)
Date: June 21, 2005

Document: SDM-300A Satellite Data Modem Installation and Operation
Manual, Rev. 6, dated June 7, 2004
Part Number: MN/SDM300A.EB6
Collating Instructions: Attach this page to page 4-4
Comments:
Change paragraph 4.1.1 to read:
Change Specifics:
4.1.1 Remote Connector and Pinouts (J6)

The remote connector is a 9-pin subminiature female D connector (J6) located on the rear panel of
the modem. Screw locks are provided for mechanical security of the mating connector.
The remote connector interfaces the M&C functions to a remote location. The remote location can
be an M&C computer located away from the modem, but attached via cable to the remote
connector. This DCE interface is user selectable for either RS-232 or RS-485. Refer to Appendix A
for a description of the remote interface commands.
Filename: T_ERRATA 1
SDM-300A
Satellite Modem
Installation and Operation Manual
Part Number MN/SDM300A.IOM

Comtech EF Data is an ISO 9001 Revision 6
Registered Company. June 7, 2004
Copyright © Comtech EF Data, 2000, 2001, 2002. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
Comtech EF Data, 2114 West 7th Street, Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA, 480.333.2200, FAX: 480.333.2161.
Customer Support
Contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department for:
• Product support or training

• Information on upgrading or returning a product
• Reporting comments or suggestions concerning manuals
A Customer Support representative may be reached at:
Comtech EF Data
Attention: Customer Support Department
2114 West 7th Street
Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA
480.333.2200 (Main Comtech EF Data Number)

480.333.4357 (Customer Support Desk)
480.333.2161 FAX
or, E-Mail can be sent to the Customer Support Department at:
[email protected]
Contact us via the web at www.comtechefdata.com.
To return a Comtech EF Data product (in-warranty and out-of-warranty) for repair or

replacement:
1. Request a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number from the Comtech EF

Data Customer Support Department.
Be prepared to supply the Customer Support representative with the model

number, serial number, and a description of the problem.
2. To ensure that the product is not damaged during shipping, pack the product in
its original shipping carton/packaging.
3. Ship the product back to Comtech EF Data. (Shipping charges should be

prepaid.)
For more information regarding the warranty policies, see Warranty Policy, p. xv.
ii
Table of Contents
Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................1–1
1.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................................1–3
1.1.1 Modem Features ..................................................................................................................................1–3
1.1.2 Standard Features ...............................................................................................................................1–3
1.1.3 Description of Interface Functions........................................................................................................1–4
1.1.4 Modes of Operation..............................................................................................................................1–4
1.2 Options ........................................................................................................................................................1–6

1.2.1 Factory-Installed Options .....................................................................................................................1–7
1.2.2 Factory- or user-Installed Options ........................................................................................................1–7
1.3 Description of FAST Options.....................................................................................................................1–8
1.4 Compatibility ...............................................................................................................................................1–9
1.5 Breakout Panels..........................................................................................................................................1–9

1.5.1 UB-300 Universal Breakout Panel........................................................................................................1–9
1.5.2 UB-530 Breakout Panel........................................................................................................................1–9
1.5.3 UB-54 Breakout Panel .......................................................................................................................1–10
1.6 Comtech EF Data Part Numbers..............................................................................................................1–10
1.7 New in this Release ..................................................................................................................................1–13
CHAPTER 2. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................2–1
2.1 Description of Monitor and Control (M&C) ...............................................................................................2–1

2.1.1 Theory of Operation .............................................................................................................................2–1
2.1.2 Remote Baud Rate...............................................................................................................................2–4
2.1.3 Remote Address ..................................................................................................................................2–4
iii
SDM-300A Satellite Modem Revision 6
Preface MN/SDM300A.IOM
2.2 Decription of the Modulator .......................................................................................................................2–5

2.2.1 Theory of Operation .............................................................................................................................2–6
2.2.2 Theory of Modulation Types.................................................................................................................2–7
2.3 Description of the Demodulator ................................................................................................................2–8
2.4 Description of the Decoder ......................................................................................................................2–10
2.5 Description of the Interface .....................................................................................................................2–11

2.5.1 Available Interfaces............................................................................................................................2–13
2.5.2 Plesiochronous/Doppler/Buffer...........................................................................................................2–13
2.5.3 Closed Network..................................................................................................................................2–14
2.5.4 Open Network ....................................................................................................................................2–14
2.6 Backward Alarm Theory and Connections.............................................................................................2–15
CHAPTER 3. INSTALLATION/UPGRADES.....................................................................................................3–1
3.1 Unpacking....................................................................................................................................................3–1
3.2 Installation ...................................................................................................................................................3–2
3.3 Software and Hardware Installation/Upgrades.........................................................................................3–4

3.3.1 Overhead Interface PCB Installation ....................................................................................................3–4
3.3.2 Hardware Upgrades .............................................................................................................................3–6
3.4 Reed-Solomon PCB ....................................................................................................................................3–6

3.4.1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................................3–6
3.4.2 Installation ............................................................................................................................................3–6
3.5 Turbo Codec Installation............................................................................................................................3–8

3.5.1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................................3–8
3.5.2 Installation ............................................................................................................................................3–9
3.6 Duplex Reed-Solomon Codec Installation..............................................................................................3–13
3.7 Data I/O Interface Connector (J8) Removal/Installation ........................................................................3–17

3.7.1 Data I/O Connector (J8) Removal ......................................................................................................3–17
3.7.2 Data I/O Connector (J8) Installation ...................................................................................................3–18
3.8 Hardware Upgrades ..................................................................................................................................3–20

3.8.1 Main PCB Firmware Chips .................................................................................................................3–20
3.8.2 Overhead Interface PCB ....................................................................................................................3–22
iv
CHAPTER 4. EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS......................................................................................................4–1
4.1 External Modem Connections....................................................................................................................4–1

4.1.1 Remote Connector and Pinouts (J6) ....................................................................................................4–4
4.1.2 Fault Connector and Pinouts (J7).........................................................................................................4–5
4.1.3 Data I/O Interface Connector (J8) ........................................................................................................4–6
4.1.4 G.703 ASYNC Interface .....................................................................................................................4–12
4.1.5 Auxiliary 1 Connector and Pinouts (J9) ..............................................................................................4–13
4.1.6 Alarms Connector and Pinouts (J10) .................................................................................................4–14
4.1.7 RF Output Connector (CP1)...............................................................................................................4–14
4.1.8 RF Input Connector (CP2)..................................................................................................................4–14
4.1.9 External Reference (CP3) ..................................................................................................................4–15
4.1.10 Power Entry........................................................................................................................................4–15
4.1.11 Ground Connector (GND) ..................................................................................................................4–15
CHAPTER 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION.....................................................................................................5–1
5.1 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................................................5–1

5.1.1 LED Indicators......................................................................................................................................5–2
5.1.2 Front Panel Keypad .............................................................................................................................5–3
5.2 Menu System...............................................................................................................................................5–4
5.3 Revision Emulation Operation...................................................................................................................5–5
5.4 Opening Screen ..........................................................................................................................................5–7

5.4.1 Functional Select: Configuration ..........................................................................................................5–7
5.4.1.1 Functional Select: Configuration: Modulator................................................................................5–8

5.4.1.2 Functional Select: Configuration: Demodulator ........................................................................5–14
5.4.1.3 Functional Select: Configuration: Interface................................................................................5–22
5.4.1.4 Functional Select: Configuration: Local AUPC ..........................................................................5–42
5.4.1.5 Functional Select: Configuration: Mux ......................................................................................5–47
5.4.1.6 Functional Select: Configuration: Flex Mux ...............................................................................5–49
5.4.1.7 Functional Select: Configuration: Save .....................................................................................5–55
5.4.1.8 Functional Select: Configuration: Recall....................................................................................5–55
5.4.2 Functional Select: Monitor..................................................................................................................5–56

5.4.3 Functional Select: Faults/Alarms........................................................................................................5–60
5.4.4 Functional Select: Stored FLTS/ALMS...............................................................................................5–65
5.4.5 Functional Select: Remote AUPU (Conditional).................................................................................5–69
5.4.6 Functional Select: Utility.....................................................................................................................5–74
5.4.6.1 Functional Select: Utility: Fixed Modem Rate ............................................................................5–74

5.4.6.2 Functional Select: Utility: Fixed Modem Rate: Code Rate/Data Rate .......................................5–74
5.4.6.3 Functional Select: Utility: Modulator ..........................................................................................5–75
5.4.6.4 Functional Select: Utility: Demodulator .....................................................................................5–80
5.4.6.5 Functional Select: Utility: Interface ............................................................................................5–84
5.4.6.6 Functional Select: Utility: System ..............................................................................................5–92
5.4.6.7 Functional Select: Utility: Modem Type ....................................................................................5–99
v
5.4.6.8 Utility: Factory Set-Up..............................................................................................................5–109
5.5 Custom Modem Defaults........................................................................................................................5–110
CHAPTER 6. MODEM TYPES..........................................................................................................................6–1
6.1 Modem Types ..............................................................................................................................................6–1

6.1.1 IDR Operation ......................................................................................................................................6–2
6.1.2 IBS Operation.......................................................................................................................................6–3
6.1.3 D&I Operation ......................................................................................................................................6–4
6.1.4 ASYNC/AUPC Operation .....................................................................................................................6–5
6.1.5 EFD Closed Network Configuration .....................................................................................................6–6
6.1.6 Custom Operation ................................................................................................................................6–7
6.1.7 SDM-100 Emulation Operation ............................................................................................................6–8
6.1.8 SDM-6000 Emulation Operation ..........................................................................................................6–9
6.2 Reed-Solomon Modes ..............................................................................................................................6–10
CHAPTER 7. CLOCKING OPTIONS ................................................................................................................7–1
7.1 Clocking Options ........................................................................................................................................7–1

7.1.1 EIA-232, EIA-422, or V.35 Master/Master............................................................................................7–1
7.1.2 EIA-232, EIA-422, or V.35 Master/Slave..............................................................................................7–1
7.1.3 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master..............................................................................................................7–2
7.1.4 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave................................................................................................................7–2
7.1.5 D&I G.703 Master/Master.....................................................................................................................7–7
CHAPTER 8. BUFFERING................................................................................................................................8–1
8.1 Buffering ......................................................................................................................................................8–1
8.2 Buffer Size ...................................................................................................................................................8–4
8.3 Doppler ........................................................................................................................................................8–4
8.4 Plesiochronous ...........................................................................................................................................8–5
8.5 Frame/Multiframe Length ...........................................................................................................................8–6

8.5.1 Multiples of the Frame Length..............................................................................................................8–6
8.5.2 Total Buffer Length...............................................................................................................................8–6
8.6 Converting Between Bits and Seconds ....................................................................................................8–6

8.6.1 Bits to Seconds ..................................................................................................................................8–6
8.6.2 Seconds to Bits ....................................................................................................................................8–6
vi
CHAPTER 9. FORWARD ERROR CORRECTION (OPTIONS) .......................................................................9–1
9.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................9–1
9.2 Viterbi...........................................................................................................................................................9–2
9.3 Sequential....................................................................................................................................................9–3
9.4 Reed-Solomon Outer Codec ......................................................................................................................9–4

9.4.1 Closed Network Modes ........................................................................................................................9–5
9.4.2 Open Network Modes ..........................................................................................................................9–5
9.5 Trellis Coding (FAST Option).....................................................................................................................9–6
9.6 Turbo Product Codec (Hardware Option) .................................................................................................9–7

9.6.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................9–7
9.6.2 End-to-End Processing Delay ..............................................................................................................9–7
9.6.3 Comparison of all TPC Modes .........................................................................................................9–8
9.7 Uncoded Operation (No FEC) ....................................................................................................................9–9
CHAPTER 10. OPEN NETWORK OPERATIONS ............................................................................................10–1
10.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................10–1
10.2 Intelsat Business System (IBS) ...............................................................................................................10–1

10.2.1 IBS Specification ................................................................................................................................10–4
10.2.2 IBS Modem Defaults ..........................................................................................................................10–5
10.2.3 IBS Primary Data Interface.................................................................................................................10–6
10.2.4 IBS Clock and Dejitter ........................................................................................................................10–6
10.2.5 IBS Framing .......................................................................................................................................10–6
10.2.6 IBS Engineering Service Channel ......................................................................................................10–6
10.2.7 IBS Scrambling ..................................................................................................................................10–6
10.3 Intermediate Data Rate (IDR)....................................................................................................................10–7

10.3.1 IDR Specification..............................................................................................................................10–10
10.3.2 IDR Modem Defaults........................................................................................................................10–11
10.3.3 IDR Primary Data Interface ..............................................................................................................10–12
10.3.4 IDR Framing.....................................................................................................................................10–12
10.3.5 IDR Engineering Service Channel....................................................................................................10–12
10.4 Drop and Insert (D&I)..............................................................................................................................10–13

10.4.1 D&I Specification..............................................................................................................................10–14
10.4.2 Theory of Operation .........................................................................................................................10–18
10.4.3 Data Interference .............................................................................................................................10–18
10.4.4 Transmitted MUX .............................................................................................................................10–18
10.4.5 Receive DEMUX ..............................................................................................................................10–19
10.4.6 Plesiochronous Buffer ......................................................................................................................10–19
10.4.7 Engineering Service Channel...........................................................................................................10–20
10.4.8 Backward Alarm ...............................................................................................................................10–20
vii
10.4.9 D&I Framing Formats.......................................................................................................................10–20

10.4.10 D&I Modem Defaults ........................................................................................................................10–23
10.4.11 D&I Primary Data Interface ..............................................................................................................10–24
10.4.12 D&I Framing .....................................................................................................................................10–24
10.5 G.703 ........................................................................................................................................................10–25
CHAPTER 11. ASYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE/AUPC ...................................................................................11–1
11.1 Asynchronous Interface/AUPC................................................................................................................11–1
11.2 AUPC..........................................................................................................................................................11–4
11.2.1 AUPC - Between Two Modems..........................................................................................................11–5
11.2.2 Self-Monitoring Local Modem AUPC Control .....................................................................................11–6
11.3 ASYNC .......................................................................................................................................................11–7

11.3.1 Terrestrial Data Interfaces..................................................................................................................11–7
11.3.2 ASYNC Data Interfaces......................................................................................................................11–7
11.3.3 Mux Operation....................................................................................................................................11–8
11.3.4 Demux Operation ...............................................................................................................................11–8
11.3.5 Buffer Operation.................................................................................................................................11–8
11.3.6 LoopTiming Operation........................................................................................................................11–9
11.3.7 Baseband Loopback Operation..........................................................................................................11–9
11.3.8 Non-ASYNC Operation ....................................................................................................................11–10
11.4 ASYNC Channel EIA-485 2- and 4-Wire operation ...............................................................................11–10

11.4.1 Valid ASYNC Baud Rates ................................................................................................................11–11
11.4.2 Front Panel Operation......................................................................................................................11–11
11.4.3 ASYNC Remote Operation...............................................................................................................11–12
11.4.4 ASYNC/AUPC Modem Defaults.......................................................................................................11–24
CHAPTER 12. ASYMMETRICAL LOOP TIMING.............................................................................................12–1
CHAPTER 13. DUPLEX REED-SOLOMON CODEC .......................................................................................13–1
CHAPTER 14. 8-CHANNEL MULTIPLEXER ...................................................................................................14–1
14.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................14–1
14.2 Installation .................................................................................................................................................14–2
14.3 8-Channel Multiplexer Specifications .....................................................................................................14–4
14.4 8-Channel Multiplexer 100-pin Connector (J10).....................................................................................14–5
viii
CHAPTER 15. FLEX MUX ................................................................................................................................15–1
15.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................15–1
15.2 Installation .................................................................................................................................................15–6
15.3 50-Pin Connector Assignments...............................................................................................................15–8
CHAPTER 16. FAST ACCESSIBLE OPTIONS................................................................................................16–1
16.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................16–1
16.2 FAST Accessible Options ........................................................................................................................16–1
16.3 FAST System Theory................................................................................................................................16–3
16.4 Implementation .........................................................................................................................................16–3
16.5 Variable Data Rates ......................................................................................................................................16–6
CHAPTER 17. FLASH UPGRADING................................................................................................................17–1
CHAPTER 18. TROUBLESHOOTING ..............................................................................................................18–1
18.1 System Checkout......................................................................................................................................18–1
18.2 Interface Checkout....................................................................................................................................18–2

18.2.1 Modulator Checkout ...........................................................................................................................18–3
18.2.2 Demodulator Checkout ......................................................................................................................18–6
18.3 Fault Isolation............................................................................................................................................18–8

18.3.1 System Faults/Alarms ........................................................................................................................18–8
18.3.2 Faults/Alarms Display ......................................................................................................................18–12
18.3.3 Faults/Alarms Analysis.....................................................................................................................18–12
18.3.4 Remove and Replace Power Supply................................................................................................18–19
18.3.5 Remove and Replace the Fan Assembly .........................................................................................18–20
CHAPTER 19. SPECIFICATION.......................................................................................................................19–1
19.1 Specification Summary ............................................................................................................................19–1
19.2 Environmental and Physical Specifications...........................................................................................19–3
19.3 Remote Control Specifications................................................................................................................19–4
19.4 Modulator Specifications .........................................................................................................................19–5

19.4.1 Digital Data Rate ................................................................................................................................19–5
19.4.2 Modulation and Encoding Types ........................................................................................................19–7
19.4.3 Scrambling Types ..............................................................................................................................19–8
ix
19.4.4 Differential Encoder............................................................................................................................19–8

19.4.5 BPSK BIT Ordering ............................................................................................................................19–8
19.4.6 Interleaver (Reed-Solomon Codec)....................................................................................................19–8
19.4.7 Transmit Frequency (IF).....................................................................................................................19–9
19.4.8 Frequency Reference.........................................................................................................................19–9
19.4.9 Transmit Frequency Change Time.....................................................................................................19–9
19.4.10 Phase Noise.......................................................................................................................................19–9
19.4.11 Transmit IF Output Switch................................................................................................................19–10
19.4.12 Transmit IF Power............................................................................................................................19–10
19.4.13 Modulator Power Offset ...................................................................................................................19–10
19.4.14 Modulated IF Output Shape .............................................................................................................19–10
19.4.15 Spurious Emissions..........................................................................................................................19–10
19.4.16 Modulator Phase Error .....................................................................................................................19–10
19.4.17 Transmit IF Test Modes ...................................................................................................................19–11
19.4.18 Modulator Spectrum Rotation...........................................................................................................19–11
19.5 Demodulator Specifications...................................................................................................................19–12

19.5.1 Digital Data Rate ..............................................................................................................................19–12
19.5.2 Demodulation and FEC Decoding Types .........................................................................................19–13
19.5.3 Descrambling Types ........................................................................................................................19–14
19.5.4 Differential Encoder..........................................................................................................................19–14
19.5.5 BPSK BIT Ordering ..........................................................................................................................19–14
19.5.6 Deinterleaver (Reed-Solomon Codec) .............................................................................................19–15
19.5.7 Demodulator Spectrum Rotation ......................................................................................................19–15
19.5.8 Frequency Reference.......................................................................................................................19–15
19.5.9 Transmit Frequency Change Time...................................................................................................19–15
19.5.10 Phase Noise.....................................................................................................................................19–15
19.5.11 Transmit IF Output Switch................................................................................................................19–15
19.5.12 Demodulator IF Input Shape ............................................................................................................19–16
19.5.13 Channel Spacing/Adjacent Carrier Performance..............................................................................19–16
19.6 BER Performance Specifications ..........................................................................................................19–16

19.6.1 Performance with Noise, Viterbi Decoder, and Open Network Mode...............................................19–17
19.6.2 Performance with Noise, Viterbi Decoder, and Closed Network ......................................................19–17
19.6.3 Performance with Noise, Viterbi Decoder, and Reed-Solomon (Optional).......................................19–18
19.6.4 Performance with Noise, 56 kbps and Sequential Decoder (Optional) ............................................19–18
19.6.5 Performance with Noise, 1544 kbps and Sequential Decoder .........................................................19–19
19.6.6 Performance with Noise at 1544 kbps, Sequential Decoder, and Reed-Solomon ..........................19–19
19.6.7 8-PSK Performance with Noise and With/Without Reed-Solomon...................................................19–20
19.6.8 Performance with Noise, Viterbi Decoder, and Offset QPSK ...........................................................19–20
19.6.9 Performance with Noise, Uncoded (1/1) BPSK, QPSK, and Offset QPSK.......................................19–21
19.6.10 Performance with Noise Turbo Product Codec (Optional) ...............................................................19–21
19.6.11 BER Threshold.................................................................................................................................19–21
19.7 Acquisition Time .....................................................................................................................................19–22

19.7.1 Receive IF Carrier Acquisition Range ..............................................................................................19–22
19.7.2 Receive IF Carrier Reacquisition......................................................................................................19–22
19.7.3 AGC Output......................................................................................................................................19–24
x
19.8 Interface Specifications..........................................................................................................................19–23

19.8.1 Transmit Clock Source.....................................................................................................................19–23
19.8.2 Send Clock Timing Source...............................................................................................................19–23
19.9 Terrestrial Interface Types .....................................................................................................................19–26

19.9.1 Universal ..........................................................................................................................................19–26
19.9.2 EIA-232 Specification.......................................................................................................................19–27
19.9.3 V.35 Specification V.10, V.11 Specification, Circuit Supported........................................................19–28
19.9.4 EIA-422/EIA-449 MIL-188-114A Specification .................................................................................19–29
19.9.5 G.703 (Optional with Overhead Card)..............................................................................................19–30
19.10 System Specifications............................................................................................................................19–31

19.10.1 Loopback Modes..............................................................................................................................19–31
19.10.2 Test Modes ......................................................................................................................................19–31
19.10.3 Remote Control ................................................................................................................................19–32
19.10.4 Modem Remote Address..................................................................................................................19–32
19.10.5 Monitored Signals ............................................................................................................................19–32
19.10.6 Modem Emulation Modes.................................................................................................................19–33
19.10.7 Inoperability Modes ..........................................................................................................................19–33
19.11 Dimensional Evelope..............................................................................................................................19–34
APPENDIX A. REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION ........................................................................................... A–1
GLOSSARY ................................................................................................................................................... g–1
INDEX .....................................................................................................................................................i–1
xi
Figures
Figure 1-1. Block Diagram ....................................................................................................................................1–2
Figure 2-1. M&C Block Diagram ...........................................................................................................................2–2
Figure 2-2. Modulator Block Diagram ...................................................................................................................2–5
Figure 2-3. Demodulator Block Diagram...............................................................................................................2–8
Figure 2-4. Interface Block Diagram ...................................................................................................................2–12
Figure 3-1. Installation of the Mounting Bracket, KT/6228-1.................................................................................3–3
Figure 3-2. Overhead Interface PCB Installation ..................................................................................................3–5
Figure 3-3. Reed-Solomon Codec Installation ......................................................................................................3–7
Figure 3-4. Turbo Codec Installation ..................................................................................................................3–10
Figure 3-5. Firmware Location............................................................................................................................3–11
Figure 3-6. PCB Location ...................................................................................................................................3–15
Figure 3-7. Installation of the Duplex Reed-Solomon Module ............................................................................3–16
Figure 3-8. Data I/O connector (J8) Removal/Installation...................................................................................3–19
Figure 3-9. Main Board Field-Changeable Chips................................................................................................3–21
Figure 3-10. Overhead Board Field-Changeable Chips......................................................................................3–22
Figure 4-1. Basic Modem, 25-Pin D Connector ....................................................................................................4–3
Figure 4-2. (V.35) 34-Pin Winchester Connector..................................................................................................4–3
Figure 4-3. EIA-422/449, 37-Pin D Connector ......................................................................................................4–3
Figure 4-4. Overhead Option, 50-Pin D Connector ................................................................................................4–3
Figure 4-5. 8-Channel, 100-Pin MUX Connector ..................................................................................................4–3
Figure 5-1. Front Panel View ................................................................................................................................5–1
Figure 5-2. Keypad ...............................................................................................................................................5–3
Figure 5-3. Menu Tree ..........................................................................................................................................5–6
Figure 5-4. RF Loopback ....................................................................................................................................5–17
Figure 5-5. IF Loopback......................................................................................................................................5–18
Figure 5-6. Baseband Loopback.........................................................................................................................5–27
Figure 5-7. Interface Loopback...........................................................................................................................5–28
Figure 7-1. EIA-422, EIA-232, or V.35 Master/Master Clocking Diagram.............................................................7–3
Figure 7-2. EIA-422, EIA-232, or Master/Slave Clocking Diagram .......................................................................7–4
Figure 7-3. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master Clocking Diagram...............................................................................7–5
Figure 7-4. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave Clocking Diagram ................................................................................7–6
Figure 7-5. D&I G.703 Master/Master Clocking Diagram .....................................................................................7–8
Figure 8-1. Clock Slip ...........................................................................................................................................8–2
Figure 8-2. Doppler Shift.......................................................................................................................................8–3
Figure 9-1. Viterbi Decoder with Open Network BER Data ................................................................................9–11
Figure 9-2. Viterbi Decoder with Closed Netwrok BER Data ..............................................................................9–12
Figure 9-3. Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon ................................................................................................9–13
Figure 9-4. Sequential BER Data (56 kbps)........................................................................................................9–14
Figure 9-5. Sequential Decoder, Reed-Solomon 1544 kbps ..............................................................................9–15
Figure 9-6. Sequential Decoder BER with Reed-Solomon 1544 kbps................................................................9–16
Figure 9-7 8-PSK with/without Reed-Solomon .................................................................................................9–17
Figure 9-8. Viterbi Decoder and Offset QPSK ....................................................................................................9–18
Figure 9-9. Uncoded 1/1 BPSK, QPSK, and Offset QPSK .................................................................................9–19
Figure 9-10. Turbo product Codec......................................................................................................................9–20
xii
Figure 10-1. IBS Interface Block Diagram ..........................................................................................................10–3

Figure 10-2. IDR Interface Block Diagram ..........................................................................................................10–9
Figure 10-3. D&I with Asynchronous Overhead Block Diagram .......................................................................10–16
Figure 10-4. D&I with Asynchronous Overhead Data Flow ..............................................................................10–17
Figure 10-5. E1 Framing Formats.....................................................................................................................10–21
Figure 10-6. T1 Framing Formats.....................................................................................................................10–22
Figure 11-1. ASYNC/AUPC Block Diagram........................................................................................................11–3
Figure 11-2. Remote ASYNC Connection Diagram for Y Cable.......................................................................11–13
Figure 11-3. Remote ASYNC Connection Diagram for Breakout Panel ...........................................................11–13
Figure 12-1. Transmit Section of the Asymmetrical Loop Timing Block Diagram ...............................................12–3
Figure 12-2. Receive Section of the Asymmetrical Loop Timing Block Diagram ................................................12–4
Figure 14-1. 8-Channel Multiplexer PCB (AS/5985) ...........................................................................................14–2
Figure 14-2. 8-Channel Multiplexer Installation ..................................................................................................14–3
Figure 15-1. Flex MUX (AS/6450) ......................................................................................................................15–2
Figure 15-2. Flex Mux Multiplexer Installation ....................................................................................................15–7
Figure 18-1. Fault Isolation Test Setup...............................................................................................................18–2
Figure 18-2. Typical Output Spectrum (with Noise) ............................................................................................18–5
Figure 18-3. Typical Output Spectrum (without Noise) .......................................................................................18–5
Figure 18-4. Typical Eye Constellations .............................................................................................................18–7
Figure 19-1. Dimensional Envelope Pre-1999 ..................................................................................................19–35
Figure 19-2. Dimensional Envelope Post-1999 ................................................................................................19–36
xiii
Tables
Table 1-1. Options ................................................................................................................................................1–6
Table 1-2. FAST Options and Required Configurations .......................................................................................1–8
Table 1-3. Comtech EF Data Part Numbers .......................................................................................................1–10
Table 1-4. Data Interface Connector (J8) Matrix.................................................................................................1–11
Table 1-5. SDM-300A Software Selection Table ................................................................................................1–11
Table 1-6. SDM-300A Spares/Accessories ........................................................................................................1–12
Table 3-1. Connector (J8) Matrix ........................................................................................................................3–17
Table 4-1. Modem Rear Panel Connection...........................................................................................................4–2
Table 4-2. Remote Connector and Pinouts (J6) ...................................................................................................4–4
Table 4-3. Fault Connector and Pinouts (J7)........................................................................................................4–5
Table 4-4. 25-Pin D Connector Pinouts ................................................................................................................4–7
Table 4-5. 34-Pin Winchester Connector Pinouts (V.35) ......................................................................................4–8
Table 4-6. 37-Pin Connector Pinouts (Optional) ...................................................................................................4–9
Table 4-7. 50-Pin Connector Pinouts..................................................................................................................4–10
Table 4-8. Flex Mux 50-Pin Connector Definition ...............................................................................................4–12
Table 4-9. AUX 1 Connector and Pinouts (J9)....................................................................................................4–13
Table 4-10. Alarms Connector and Pinouts (J10)...............................................................................................4–14
Table 5-1. LED Indicators .....................................................................................................................................5–2
Table 5-2. Revision Emulation Operation .............................................................................................................5–5
Table 5-3. Custom Modem Defaults .................................................................................................................5–110
Table 6-1. Modem Types......................................................................................................................................6–1
Table 6-2. IDR Parameter Settings.......................................................................................................................6–2
Table 6-3. IBS Parameter Settings .......................................................................................................................6–3
Table 6-4. D&I Parameter Settings.......................................................................................................................6–4
Table 6-5. N x 64 Chart ........................................................................................................................................6–4
Table 6-6. Asynchronous Parameter Settings ......................................................................................................6–5
Table 6-7. Comtech EF Data Closed Network Parameter Settings ......................................................................6–7
Table 6-8. SDM-100 Emulation Parameter Settings.............................................................................................6–8
Table 6-9. SDM-6000 Emulation Parameter Settings...........................................................................................6–9
Table 6-10. Reed-Solomon Modes.....................................................................................................................6–10
Table 8-1. Minimum Doppler/Plesiochronous Buffer Capacity Requirements ......................................................8–7
Table 9-1. Turbo Product Coding Processing Delay Comparison ........................................................................9–8
Table 10-1. IBS Specifications............................................................................................................................10–4
Table 10-2. IBS Modem Defaults........................................................................................................................10–5
Table 10-3. IDR Specifications .........................................................................................................................10–10
Table 10-4. IDR Modem Defaults .....................................................................................................................10–11
Table 10-5. D&I Specifications .........................................................................................................................10–14
Table 10-6. D&I Modem Defaults ......................................................................................................................10–23
Table 10-7. G.703 Specifications.......................................................................................................................10–25
Table 11-1. Setting AUPC Parameters................................................................................................................11–4
Table 11-2. ASYNC Remote Operation.............................................................................................................11–12
Table 11-3. Local EIA-232 to Remote EIA-232.................................................................................................11–14
Table 11-4. Local EIA-232 to Remote EIA-485 (4-Wire)...................................................................................11–15
Table 11-5. Local EIA-232 to Remote EIA-485 (2-Wire)...................................................................................11–16
xiv
Table 11-6. Local EIA-485 (4-Wire) to Remote EIA-232...................................................................................11–17

Table 11-7. Local EIA-485 (4-Wire) to Remote EIA-485 (4-Wire).....................................................................11–18
Table 11-8. Local EIA-485 (4-Wire) to Remote EIA-485 (2-Wire).....................................................................11–19
Table 11-9. Local EIA-485 (2-Wire) to Remote EIA-232...................................................................................11–20
Table 11-10. Local EIA-485 (2-Wire) to Remote EIA-485 (4-Wire)...................................................................11–22
Table 11-11. ASYNC/AUPC Modem Defaults ..................................................................................................11–24
Table 15-1. System Specification .......................................................................................................................15–3
Table 15-2. Multiplexer Specification..................................................................................................................15–4
Table 15-3. Demultiplexer Specific Specifications ..............................................................................................15–5
Table 15-4. 50-Pin Connector Assignments .......................................................................................................15–8
Table 16-1. FAST Option and Required Configurations .....................................................................................16–2
Table 18-1. Conversion to S/N and Eb/No Chart................................................................................................18–4
Table 18-2. SDM-300A Fault Tree......................................................................................................................18–9
Table 19-1. Specification Summary....................................................................................................................19–1
Table 19-2. Environmental and Physical Specifications .....................................................................................19–3
Table 19-3. Remote Control Specifications ........................................................................................................19–4
Table 19-4. Modulator Specifications .................................................................................................................19–5
Table 19-5. Modulator Digital Data Rate.............................................................................................................19–5
Table 19-6. Modulation and Encoding Types .....................................................................................................19–7
Table 19-7. Demodulator Digital Data Rate .......................................................................................................19–12
Table 19-8. Demodulation FEC Decoding .........................................................................................................19–14
Table 19-9. BER Performance Reference Tables .............................................................................................19–17
Table 19-10. Viterbi Decoder with Open Network BER Data.............................................................................19–18
Table 19-11. Viterbi Decoder with Closed Network BER Data .........................................................................19–18
Table 19-12. Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon............................................................................................19–19
Table 19-13. Sequential BER Data (56 kbps)...................................................................................................19–19
Table 19-14. Sequential Decoder BER Data (1544 kbps) ................................................................................19–20
Table 19-15. Sequentail Decoder BER Data (Reed-Solomon).........................................................................19–20
Table 19-16. 8-PSK Specification.....................................................................................................................19–21
Table 19-17. Viterbi Decoder and Offset QPSK ...............................................................................................19–21
Table 19-18. Uncoded (1/1) BPSK, QPSK, and Offset QPSK..........................................................................19–22
Table 19-19. Turbo Product Code ....................................................................................................................19–22
Table 19-20. Acquisition Time ..........................................................................................................................19–23
Table 19-21. Test Modes..................................................................................................................................19–32
xv
This page is intentionally left blank.
xvi
About this Manual

This manual provides installation and operation information for the Comtech EF Data
SDM-300A Satellite Modem. This is a technical document intended for earth station
engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for the operation and maintenance of
the SDM-300A.
Related Documents
The following documents are referenced in this manual:
• Comtech EF Data UB-300 Universal Breakout Panel Installation and Operation

Manual
• Comtech EF Data UB-54 Universal Breakout Panel Installation and Operation
Manual
• Comtech EF Data SDR-54A Satellite Demodulator Installation and Operation
Manual
• Comtech EF Data Space Link Remote System User’s Guide
• INTELSAT Earth Station Standards 308, 309, 310, and 314
• International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee V.35 and G.721
• UB-530 Universal Breakout Panel Installation and Operation Manual
Conventions and References
Cautions and Warnings

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury. CAUTION may also be used to indicate other
CAUTION unsafe practices or risks of property damage.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,

could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
IMPORTANT indicates a statement that is associated with the task

being performed. .
IMPORTANT
xvii
Examples of
Multi-Hazard
Formats
Metric Conversion
Metric conversion information is located on the inside back cover of this manual. This
information is provided to assist the operator in cross-referencing English to Metric
conversions.
Recommended Standard Designations

Recommended Standard (RS) Designations are interchangeable with the designation of
the Electronic Industries Association (EIA).
Trademarks
Product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged.
Reporting Comments or Suggestions Concerning this Manual

Comments and suggestions regarding the content and design of this manual will be
appreciated. To submit comments, please contact the Comtech EF Data Technical
Publications department: [email protected]
xviii
ELECTRICAL SAFETY
The SDM-300A Satellite Modem has been shown to comply with the following safety standard:
• EN 60950: Safety of Information Technology Equipment, including electrical business
machines.
The equipment is rated for operation over the range 85 to 264 volts AC. It has a maximum
power consumption of 60 watts.
FUSES
The SDM-300A Satellite Modem is fitted with two fuses, one each for line and neutral
connections. These are contained within the body of the IEC power connector, behind a small
plastic flap.
• For 230 volt AC operation, use T0.75A, 20mm fuses.

• For 115 volt AC operation, use T1.25A fuses, 20mm fuses.
For continued operator safety, always replace the fuses with the
correct type and rating.
IMPORTANT
Environmental
The SDM-300A shall not be operated in an environment where the unit is exposed to
extremes of temperature outside the ambient range 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F), precipitation,
condensation, or humid atmospheres above 95% RH, altitudes (un-pressurised) greater
than 2000 metres, excessive dust or vibration, flammable gases, corrosive or explosive
atmospheres.
Operation in vehicles or other transportable installations that are equipped to provide a

stable environment is permitted. If such vehicles do not provide a stable environment,
safety of the equipment to EN60950 may not be guaranteed.
xix
Installation
The installation and connection to the line supply must be made in compliance to local or
national wiring codes and regulations.
The SDM-300A is designed for connection to a power system that has separate ground,
line and neutral conductors. The equipment is not designed for connection to power
system that has no direct connection to ground.
The SDM-300A is shipped with a line inlet cable suitable for use in the country of
operation. If it is necessary to replace this cable, ensure the replacement has an equivalent
specification. Examples of acceptable ratings for the cable include HAR, BASEC and
HOXXX-X. Examples of acceptable connector ratings include VDE, NF-USE, UL, CSA,
OVE, CEBEC, NEMKO, DEMKO, BS1636A, BSI, SETI, IMQ, KEMA-KEUR and
SEV.
International Symbols:
Symbol Definition Symbol Definition
~ Alternating Current Protective Earth
Fuse Chassis Ground
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive

In accordance with the Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 91/263/EEC,
this equipment should not be directly connected to the Public Telecommunications
Network.
xx
EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)

In accordance with European Directive 89/336/EEC, the SDM-300A Satellite Modem
has been shown, by independent testing, to comply with the following standards:
Emissions: EN 55022 Class B - Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference

characteristics of Information Technology Equipment.
(Also tested to FCC Part 15 Class B)
Immunity: EN 50082 Part 1 - Generic immunity standard, Part 1: Domestic, commercial

and light industrial environment.
Additionally, the SDM-300A has been shown to comply with the following standards:
EN 61000-3-2 Harmonic Currents Emission
EN 61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker
EN 61000-4-2 ESD Immunity
EN 61000-4-4 EFT Burst Immunity
EN 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity
EN 61000-4-6 RF Conducted Immunity
EN 61000-4-8 Power frequency Magnetic Field Immunity
EN 61000-4-9 Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity
EN 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips, Interruptions, and Variations Immunity
EN 61000-4-13 Immunity to Harmonics
In order that the Modem continues to comply with these standards,

observe the following instructions:
IMPORTANT
• Connections to the transmit and receive IF ports (Type N, Type F, TNC or BNC,
connectors) should be made using a good quality coaxial cable - for example
RG58/U (50Ω) or RG59/U (75Ω).
• All 'D' type connectors attached to the rear panel must have back-shells that
provide continuous metallic shielding. Cable with a continuous outer shield
(either foil or braid, or both) must be used, and the shield must be bonded to the
back-shell.
• The equipment must be operated with its cover on at all times. If it becomes
necessary to remove the cover, the user should ensure that the cover is correctly
re-fitted before normal operation commences.
xxi
Warranty Policy
This Comtech EF Data product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship
for a period of two years from the date of shipment. During the warranty period, Comtech
EF Data will, at its option, repair or replace products that prove to be defective.
For equipment under warranty, the customer is responsible for freight to Comtech EF
Data and all related custom, taxes, tariffs, insurance, etc. Comtech EF Data is responsible
for the freight charges only for return of the equipment from the factory to the customer.
Comtech EF Data will return the equipment by the same method (i.e., Air, Express,
Surface) as the equipment was sent to Comtech EF Data.
Limitations of Warranty
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper installation or
maintenance, abuse, unauthorized modification, or operation outside of environmental
specifications for the product, or, for damages that occur due to improper repackaging of
equipment for return to Comtech EF Data.
No other warranty is expressed or implied. Comtech EF Data specifically disclaims the

implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for particular purpose.
Exclusive Remedies
The remedies provided herein are the buyer's sole and exclusive remedies. Comtech EF
Data shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential
damages, whether based on contract, tort, or any other legal theory.
Disclaimer
Comtech EF Data has reviewed this manual thoroughly in order that it will be an easy-to-
use guide to your equipment. All statements, technical information, and
recommendations in this manual and in any guides or related documents are believed
reliable, but the accuracy and completeness thereof are not guaranteed or warranted, and
they are not intended to be, nor should they be understood to be, representations or
warranties concerning the products described. Further, Comtech EF Data reserves the
right to make changes in the specifications of the products described in this manual at any
time without notice and without obligation to notify any person of such changes.
If you have any questions regarding your equipment or the information in this manual,
please contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department.
xxii
Chapter 1. Introduction
The SDM-300A is a complete, self-contained unit in a standard, one-rack unit (1 RU), 19-inch
(48 cm), rack-mountable enclosure weighing approximately 9 lbs (4 kg). The unit was
constructed using modular design and consists of from two to five Printed Circuit Boards
(PCBs), depending on the configuration. The modem consists of two major, replaceable
assemblies as follows:
• Rear panel, main PCB, and power supply

• Upper and lower enclosures (chassis) and the front panel
The front panel of the modem contains all Monitor and Control (M&C) function indicators used
for operating the modem. The modem can be operated remotely via the M&C connection on the
rear panel.
SDM-300A
Satellite Modem
1–1
Introduction MN/SDM300A.IOM
Refer to Figure 1-1for a system block diagram.
2x10 -5 REFERENCE
SDM-300A 2x10 -7 REF (OPT)
SATELLITE
BOP MODEM
(Optional) DATA IF OUTPUT TRANSMIT
CLK ENCODER/ CP 1
RF
MODULATOR EQUIPMENT
CUSTOMER J8 SCT 50 TO 180 MHZ
-5 TO -30 DBM
DATA I\O +5 TO -20 DBM OPTION
J8 INTERFACE
CP3 EXT REF
AUX 1 x (OPTION)
TTL FAULTS J9
ANTENNA
x POWER 90 TO 264 VAC,
FAULT SUPPLY 47 TO 63 HZ
x
FORM C J7 FAULT
CONTACTS RELAYS
AUX
x CIRCUITS
ALARMS x J10 ALARM
FORM C RELAYS
CONTACTS DATA
x
x I/Q IF INPUT RECEIVE
REMOTE J6 DEMOD/ CP2 RF
SERIAL M&C SAT CLK DECODER
50 TO 180 MHZ EQUIPMENT
INTERFACE AGC
-30 TO -55 DBM
Figure 1-1. Block Diagram

Notes:
1. The UB-530 universal breakout panel (BOP) is an option for breaking out the V.35,
G.703, RS-232, or RS-422 signals from the 50-pin data I/O connector.
2. When the modem is equipped with a 50-pin data I/O connector, the use of the BOP is
required to interface the customer data connector to the modem.
3. Contact Comtech EF Data Customer Support department for information concerning
universal breakout panels.
1–2
1.1 Overview
The SDM-300A Satellite Modem is a high performance, full-duplex, digital-vector,
modulator/demodulator that meets the open network requirements of the INTELSAT Earth
Station Standards (IESS) -308, -309, and -310 emulation specifications for the following:
• Intermediate Data Rate (IDR)

• INTELSAT Business Services (IBS)
• Satellite Multiservice System (SMS)
Additionally, the modem is used for many closed network satellite communication systems.
1.1.1 Modem Functions

Modulator Demodulator
Performs filtered BPSK, QPSK, Offset QPSK, and 8-PSK Performs filtered BPSK, QPSK, Offset QPSK, and 8-PSK
modulation onto a variable frequency/amplitude carrier. demodulation from carriers of variable frequencies/amplitudes.
Encodes the data for the appropriate decoder. Decodes the data.
Scrambles the data. Descrambles the data.
Monitors and displays the modulator status without Monitors and displays the demodulator status without interrupting
interrupting service. service
Performs self-test. Performs self-test.
Provide send clock timing.
1.1.2 Standard Features

• Differential encoder/decoder
• Built-in scramblers/descramblers
• TX and RX frequency synthesizers
• Multi-rate FEC convolutional Viterbi and Sequential Decoder
• Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST)
• Built-in self test
• Asymmetrical loop timing
• IDR Engineering Service Circuit (ESC) channel option of 64k data or two audio
channels
• Space Link Remote Control (SLRC)
• Selectable near or far end, baseband or interface loopback with any overhead option
enabled
1–3
1.1.3 Description of Interface Functions

An interface consists of a device having the following functions:
• Terrestrial Data Interface or a Terrestrial Voice Interface including terrestrial interface

to Engineering Service Channels (ESC).
• Multiplex various types of ESCs into the data.
• Demultiplex various types of ESCs from the data.
• Buffer the RX data.
• Monitor and display the interface status without interrupting service.
• Perform Self-Test.
1.1.4 Modes of Operation

The following modes of operation are supported:
• ASYNC Overhead Interface with AUPC (see Note 1) • SDM-100 Emulation

• CDM Compatibile • SDM-650 Emulation
• Custom (see Note 2) • SDM-6000 Emulation
• Drop & Insert (D&I) • SDM-300 Emulation
• EFD Closed Network • SDM-308 Emulation
• IDR • SDM-309 Emulation
• IBS • CDM Compatible
Notes:
1. The ASYNC/AUPC option allows an additional overhead channel to be multiplexed
and demultiplexed from the data carrier.
2. The Custom mode of operation enables the programming of the modem for emulating
most proprietary modems.
Two mechanisms are provided for uplink power control within a closed network.
• One method, which requires the optional ASYNC/AUPC interface card, is used for
control between two links to sustain sufficient transmit power to maintain a
programmed Eb/No at both ends.
• The second method is used for self-monitoring the carrier from the same uplink with the
local demodulator, requires no additional hardware, and is software-selectable. This
method is appropriate for applications such as paging networks, where the uplink is
transmitting to receive-only devices.
The modem interfaces between the channel unit or Multiplexer (MUX) and Intermediate
Frequency (IF) converter equipment operating in a 50 to 180 MHz band. An internal channel
unit, conforming to IESS-308, -309, and -310 emulation specifications, provides overhead
designated for an ESC.
1–4
The modem is used in Single Channel Per Carrier (SCPC) applications within the following
specifications:
• Modulation type of QPSK, BPSK, 8-PSK, or Offset QPSK

• Forward Error Correction of 1/2, 3/4, 7/8, 1/1 or 2/3
• Symbol rate of 4.8 ks/s to 2.5 Ms/s
The modem can be configured to add overhead/framing to the data. Available modulation types
include:
• Bi-Phase Shift Keying (BPSK)

• Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK)
• Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (OQPSK)
• 8- Phase Shift Keying (8-PSK)
1–5
1.2 Options
Table 1-1. Options

Option Decsription & Comments
50Ω IF Impedance -20 dB return loss 50 to 180 MHz
nd
-20 to +5 dBm IF output Output 2 Harmonics: < 45 dBc at data rates < 64 kbps
< 50 dBc at data rates ≥ 64 kbps
Sequential, Viterbi, Modem can be supplied with any combination of:
Reed-Solomon or
• Sequential
Turbo Product Codec
• Viterbi
Notes:
R-S concatenates with Viterbi or Sequential • Reed-Solomon
ONLY. • Turbo
For Turbo, Revision C (or later) main board is
required.
OQPSK
8-PSK, 2/3 rate, IESS-310 Requires Viterbi and Reed-Solomon Codec
8-PSK, 2/3 rate, EFD Mode Requires Viterbi Codec
8-PSK, 3/4 rate, Turbo Requires Turbo Product Codec
Asynchronous Overhead Includes automatic uplink power control (AUPC)
IBS and IDR Overhead
Drop & Insert Overhead
RS-422/RS-449 Interface
48 VDC Input Power
Single Data/Code Rate
≤ 512 kbps maximum data rate
≤ 5.0 Mbps maximum data rate
High Stability Reference Internal stability = ± 0.2 PPM, with the ability to drive out the external reference
connector
Asymmetrical Loop Timing (ASLT)
Transmit Only
Receive Only
Mux Available in: 4- or 8-Channel

Flex Mux
Eurocomm Interface Requires Overhead Card
G.703 Interface with DB-15 and BNC (Closed Requires Overhead Card
Network)
2 x ADPCM Voice in 64 kbps IBS Frame Requires Overhead Card
RS-530 Interface
RS-232 Interface
V.35 Interface
-7
High Stability Internal Clock Stability ± 2 x 10
IESS-315 Srambling Turbo Mode
1–6
1.2.1 Factory-Installed Options

Consult a Comtech EF Data Customer Support representative for modem options. The
following options are installed at the factory:
• Output Impedance: 75Ω (50Ω Optional)

• High Stability Reference Oscillator
• High-power version (+5 to -20 dBm)
1.2.2 Factory- or User-Installed Options

Consult a Comtech EF Data Customer Support representative for modem options. The
following options can be factory- or user-installed:
• Turbo Product Codec (TPC)

• INTELSAT/Closed Network TX or RX Reed-Solomon
• Overhead (G.703/IBS/IDR/ASYNC/AUPC/D&I)
• MUX:
♦ 4-Channel (SYNC)
♦ 8-Channel (SYNC)
♦ 4-Channel (ASYNC)
♦ 8-Channel (ASYNC)
♦ 4-Channel (ASYNC/SYNC)
♦ 8-Channel (ASYNC/SYNC)
• Flex MUX
1–7
1.3 Description of FAST Options

The modem has a variety of hardware options available as shown in Table 1-3. Hardware
options are available through conventional means as well as through Comtech EF Data’s FAST
system. Offset QPSK mode is available through the FAST feature. For detailed descriptions of
the FAST feature and all options, refer to Chapter 18.
Note: Comtech EF Data has included a DEMO Mode in the Utility Menu. This feature will
allow the operator to experience any of the FAST options. This feature has a 60-minute time
limit, after which, the unit will return to its previous configuration.
Table 1-2. FAST Options and Required Configurations
ASYNC/AUPC Overhead
Open Network (IDR/IBS)

High Variable Data Rate
Low Variable Data Rate
SYNC or ASYNC/SYNC
SYNC or ASYNC/SYNC
Reed–Solomon Codec
Sequential Decoder
Asymmetrical Loop
8-Channel ASYNC,
4-Channel ASYNC,
(up to 4.375 Mbps)
(up to 512 kbps)
Viterbi Decoder
Drop & Insert

Data Rate
Timing
Single
8-PSK
Turbo
Hardware
Basic Platform z z
SDM-300A 1 1
FAST Options z z z z z z
FAST Options with

z
Reed Solomon Hardware
FAST Options with z z z

Overhead Hardware 2 2 2
FAST Options with

Reed Solomon And z z z z
Overhead Hardware
8 Channel Mux z z
Flex Mux z
Notes:
1 The basic modem is shipped with either Sequential or Viterbi decoder.
2 Requires G.703 Interface module and Overhead card.
3 Either IBS OptionOption or IDR Option includes 2xADPCM voice in 64 kbps IBS.
4 Either Simplex Reed-Solomon or Turbo Codec is installed, not both.
5 Duplex Reed-Solomon and Turbo can be installed together, however, only select one at a time.
1–8
1.4 Compatibility
The SDM-300A is functionally compatible with many Comtech EF Data modems. When
properly configured, the unit will interoperate with the following Comtech EF Data modems:
• CDM-550/550T (Viterbi and Turbo only) • SDM-6000

• CDM-600/600L (Viterbi, Open Network, • SDM-8000
and Turbo only)
• SDM-100/100A • SDM-308-4
• SDM-300L (L1, L2 or L3) • SDM-308-5
• SDM-650B • SDM-309
1.5 Breakout Panels

1. The UB-530 universal breakout panel (BOP) is an option for breaking out the V.35, G703,
RS-232, and RS-422 signals as well as the overhead ESC and Alarm signals.
2. When the modem is equipped with a 50-pin data I/O connector, the BOP is required to
interface with the customer data.
3. The UB-54 breakout panel (BOP) is an option for MUX only.
1.5.1 UB-300 Universal Breakout Panel

The UB-300 universal breakout panel can function as an IDR, D&I, or ASYNC/AUPC data
breakout panel in one small rack-mountable unit.
Note: The 25-pin connector at J3 on the UB-300 is not an RS-530 pinout.
For more information, refer to the Comtech EF Data UB-300 Universal Breakout Panel
Installation and Operation Manual.
1.5.2 UB-530 Breakout Panel

Alternate Part for UB-300.
The UB-530 functions ths same as UB-300, except, the UB-530 has an RS-530 25-pin Data I/O
connector at J3.
For more information, refer to the Comtech EF Data UB-530 Breakout Panel Installation and
Operation Manual.
1–9
1.5.3 UB-54 Breakout Panel

The UB-54 breakout panel functions with the MUX option as a rack-mountable unit.
For more information, refer to the Comtech EF Data UB-54 Breakout Panel Installation and
Operation Manual.
1.6 Comtech EF Data Part Numbers
Table 1-3. Comtech EF Data Part Numbers

Options Decription of Options
Chassis CEFD F/P Duplex CEFD RX Only CEFD TX Only
KT/7999 KT/7999 KT/7999
OL/7625-1 LB/7989-1 LB/7989-1
LB/7989-1 OL/7625-1 OL/7625-1
SS/300A-0020 SS/300A-0021
Primary Input Power 90-264 VAC -48 VDC
KT/8000-1 KT/8000-2
Baseboard Configuration 75Ω, -5 dB Out 50Ω, -5 dB Out 75Ω, -5 dB Out 50Ω, -5 dB Out
-7 -7
PL/6093-1 PL/6093-3 H/S 10 H/S 10
PL/6093-5 PL/6093-7
75Ω, +5 dB Out 50Ω, +5 dB Out
PL/6093-2 PL/6093-4 75Ω, +5 dB Out 50Ω, +5 dB Out
-7 -7
H/S 10 H/S 10
PL/6093-6 PL/6093-8
Interface Board 25-Pin Overhead – 50P 50-Pin Interface Flex Mux
PL/5727-1 PL/5305-2 PL/6167-1 PL/6450-1
PL/5309-2 PL/6451-1
37-Pin 8-Channel Mux V.35 34-Pin G.703/ASYNC

PL/6031-1 PL/5985 PL/6032-01 W/Overhead
PL/6029-1 PL/5305-2
PL/7838-1
Reed-Solomon (R-S) TX R-S RX R-S
Board PL/6284 PL/6285
Duplex Reed-Solomon TX/RX
Module PL/9658-1
Turbo Board PL/9394-1
AC Power Cord Standard European/French Australian
CA/17725 CA/17850 WI/865516035-AUS
IEC-320 United Kingdom

CA/90025-5ft CA/PWR83221
1–10
Table 1-4. Data Interface Connector (J8) Matrix

Electrical Interface
Mechanical Connector Type RS-232 RS-422 V.35 G.703 Other
25-Pin D, Female X X (RS-530) X
34-pin Winchester, Female (Block) X
37-Pin D, Female X (RS-449)
50-Pin D Female Overhead X X X X Notes 1,2
50-Pin D Female, Non-Overhead X X X Note 2
100-Pin Mini-D, Female, 8-Ch Mux X
50-Pin D, Female, Flex Mux Only X
15-Pin D, Female BNC,Female X
(SD& RD)
Notes:
1. 50-Pin Overhead Board (PL/5305-2) required for IBS, IDR, D&I, and AUPC/ASYNC.
2. The 50-Pin D are used with (SMS-7000) Redundancy Switch and Breakout Panels.
Table 1-5. SDM-300A Software Selection Table

Part Number Description
SS/300A-0001 SDM300A, Software Selection for Single Data Rate
SS/300A-0002 SDM300A, Software Selection for Variable Data Rate 2.4 to 512 kbps
SS/300A-0003 SDM300A, Software Selection for Variable Data Rate 2.4 to 5000 kbps
SS/300A-0004 SDM300A, Software Selection for Viterbi Decoder
SS/300A-0005 SDM300A, Software Selection for Sequential Decoder
SS/300A-0006 SDM300A, Software Selection for Asymmetrical Loop Timing
SS/300A-0007 SDM300A, Software Selection for 8-PSK Modulation
SS/300A-0008 SDM300A, Software Selection for G.703 Operation
SS/300A-0009 SDM300A, Software Selection for IDR Operation
SS/300A-00010 SDM300A, Software Selection for IBS Operation
SS/300A-00011 SDM300A, Software Selection for AUPC with ASYNC Operation
SS/300A-00012 SDM300A, Software Selection for Drop & Insert Operation
SS/300A-00013 Reserved
SS/300A-00014 SDM300A, Software Selection for 4 Channel MUX Card, SYNC
SS/300A-00015 SDM300A, Software Selection for 8 Channel MUX Card, SYNC
SS/300A-00016 SDM300A, Software Selection for 4 Channel MUX Card, ASYNC
SS/300A-00017 SDM300A, Software Selection for 8 Channel MUX Card, ASYNC
SS/300A-00018 SDM300A, Software Selection for Reed-Solomon, RX Mode
SS/300A-00019 SDM300A, Software Selection for Reed-Solomon, TX Mode
SS/300A-00020 SDM300A, Software Selection for Receive Only Mode
SS/300A-00021 SDM300A, Software Selection for Transmit Mode Only
SS/300A-00022 SDM300A, Software Selection for Offset QPSK Modulation
SS/300A-00023 Reserved
SS/300A-00024 SDM300A, Software Selection for AUPC (No ASYNC) Operation
1–11
Table 1-6. SDM-300A Spares/Accessories

Part No. Description Comments
KT/8000-1 Chassis – AC Power Supply
KT/8000-2 Chassis – DC Power Supply
PS/AC65W01P02 AC Power Supply
PS/DC-DC5V65W DC Power Supply
PL/6093-1 - 5 dB output, 75Ω
PL/6093-2 + 5 dB output, 75Ω
PL/6093-3 - 5 dB output, 50Ω
PL/6093-4 + 5 dB output, 50Ω
PL/6093-5 - 5 dB output, 75Ω, High Stability 10-7
PL/6093-6 + 5 dB output, 75Ω, High Stability 10-7
PL/6093-7 - 5 dB output, 50Ω, High Stability 10-7
PL/6093-8 + 5 dB output, 50Ω, High Stability 10-7
PL/6284 Intelsat Reed-Solomon Board – TX Reed-Solomon is not
available with Turbo.
PL/6285 Intelsat Reed-Solomon Board – RX Reed-Solomon is not
available with Turbo.
PL/9394-1 TX/RX Turbo Codec Board Requires Main Board
PL/6093-X, Rev. C
Note: Turbo is only compatible with PL/9658-1 Reed-
Solmon Duplex Mode.
PL/9658-1 Duplex Reed-Solomon Can be installed with
Turbo.
KT/9672-1 TX/RX Turbo Codec Upgrade Kit Requires Main Board
PL/6093-X, Rev. C
Note: Turbo is not available with TX/RX Reed-Solomon.
Interfaces
PL/5305-2 50-Pin Overhead/Interface (AUPC with ASYNC) Hardware KT/5305-2
KT/9521-1 FAST upgrade to activate: G.703; IDR; IBS; ASYNC; Requires FAST
D&I upgrade
PL/5727-1 25-Pin D Type Interface Board
PL6031-1 37-Pin D Type Interface Board
PL/6167-1 50-Pin D Type Interface (No Overhead)
PL/6032-1 34-Pin “Winchester” Block V.35 Interface Board
PL/7838-1 G.703; ASYNC Personality Board Requires Overhead
Board
PL/6450 Flex MUX Board
Note: Overhead Board is not available with Flex MUX.

PL/6451 Flex MUX Board Personality Board
PL/5985 8-Channel MUX Board
PL/6029-1 8 Channel MUX Personality Board
CIM-25: IP enabled M&C Interface Contact CEFD
Customer Support
1–12
1.7 New in this Release

This manual was reformatted in accordance with Comtech EF Data procedures.
General – Manual completely revised. Only technical changes are provided in this paragraph.
Incorporate FW/6535AJ1, Version No. 7.1.8

Updated Comtech EF Data Part Numbers
Added Turbo Codec installation.
Added Duplex Reed-Solomon Codec installation.
Added Flash Upgrading.
Added Remove and Replace Power Supply.
Added Remove and Replace the fan Assembly.
1–13
1–14
Chapter 2. Functional Description
2.1 Description of Monitor and Control (M&C)

The M&C monitors the modem and provides configuration updates to other modems within the
modem when necessary.The modem configuration parameters are maintained in battery-backed
RAM, which provides total recovery after power-down situation.The M&C functions include
extensive fault and status reporting.All modem functions are accessible through a local front
panel interface and a remote communications interface.
A block diagram of the M&C is shown in Figure 2-1.
2.1.1 Theory of Operation

The M&C card is composed of the following subsections:
• Microcontroller with Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)

• Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC)
• Read Only Memory (ROM)
• Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
• Read Access Memory (RAM)
• Universal ASYNC
• User Interface
• Fault and Alarm Relays
2–1
Functional Description MN/SDM300A.IOM
FAULT
MODEM AND ALARM
RELAYS
11 MHz ROM
CLOCK (M&C,
BULK,
BOOT)
MICRO-
2 CONTROLLER RAM AND
I C BUS
DAC REAL
TIME
CLOCK
ADC
EIA-232
9-PIN
OR
REMOTE
EIA-485
Figure 2-1. M&C Block Diagram
2–2
The heart of the M&C card is the Dallas 80C310 microcontroller operating at 11 MHz. This
microcontroller contains 256 kbytes of internal RAM. The ROM at U8 is 29F040 (512 kbytes).
• ROM access times must be ≥ 150 ns. The RAM can be 8 or 32 kbytes in size.
• This RAM chip is internally battery-backed and contains a real time clock used by the
M&C.
The non-volatile RAM on the M&C module allows the module to retain configuration
information without prime power for 1 year (approximately). If the modem is powered down,
the following sequence is carried out by the M&C microcontroller.
1. When power is applied to the M&C, the microcontroller checks the non-volatile
memory to see if valid data has been retained. If valid data has been retained, the
modem is reconfigured to the parameters maintained by the RAM.
2. If the non-volatile memory fails the valid data test, a default configuration from ROM is
loaded into the system.
The UART supports serial ASYNC communications channels (remote port) with a maximum
data rate of 19200 bps. The UART is a built-in peripheral of the microcontroller. The
communications type can be RS-232, RS-485 (2-wire), RS-485 (4-wire), and software
selectable.
The DAC supplies a voltage that controls the contrast of the display. The ADC monitors all the
voltages from the power supply. The DAC and ADC are mapped to the microcontroller with an
Integrated Circuit (IC) bus.
The user interface includes the following parts:
• Front panel
• Status LEDs
• Keyboard
• Sounder (beeper)
All functions are memory-mapped to the microcontroller.
2–3
2.1.2 Remote Baud Rate

The remote communications baud rate and parity are programmed by the front panel control in
the Utility: System menu (refer to Chapter 5). The programmed baud rate and parity are
maintained indefinitely in RAM on the M&C module. The parity bps can be set to EVEN or
ODD. The available baud rate are listed below:
• 110
• 150
• 300
• 600
• 1200
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 19200
2.1.3 Remote Address

To communicate with the established remote communications protocol, configure each modem
for one address between 1 and 255. Each modem on a common remote communications link
(RS-485) must have a distinct address. Use the front panel control in the Utility: System menu
(Chapter 5) to program the address.
An RS-485/RS-232 communications link remotely controls and monitors all modem functions.
Use the 2- or 4-wire, half-duplex RS-485 interface to connect between two or more modems
and switches on a common communications link. Use the RS-232 interface to communicate
with a single modem.
Note: Address 0 is reserved as a global address which simultaneously addresses all devices on a
given communications link.
2–4
2.2 Description of the Modulator

The modulator provides PSK modulated carriers within the 50 to 180 MHz range. The types of
modulation that encode the transmitted baseband data from the interface PCB are:
• BPSK
• QPSK
• Offset QPSK
• 8-PSK
Refer to Section 2.2.2 for a description of each modulation type.
A block diagram of the modulator is shown in Figure 2-2.
OPTIONAL
FRAMING UNIT OPTIONAL
DATA INTERFACE REED-SOLOMON MUX
CLK IBS/IDR, ASYNC/AUPC
DROP & INSERT ENCODER
MONITOR
&
SCT SCT CONTROL
PLL CONVOLUTIONAL
OPTIONAL ENCODER
REFERENCE
DIGITAL
BPF SIGNAL
PROCESSING
POWER LEVEL LPF RF

LO BPF
CONTROL OUTPUT
RF LOOPBACK
OUTPUT
Figure 2-2. Modulator Block Diagram
2–5

The modulator is composed of eight basic subsections. These subsections are divided into the
baseband processing section and the RF section of the modulator. The modulator controls all
programmable functions on this module. Fault information from the modulator is sent to the
M&C.
The major modulator subsections are:
• Scrambler/Differential Encoder
• Convolutional Encoder
• Programmable Vector Rotation
• I/Q Nyquist Filters
• Modulator
• RF Synthesizer
• Output Amplifier
• Output Level Control
If the modem is so equipped, the optional overhead or Reed-Solomon PCB first processes the
data. The data is then sent to the scrambler for energy dispersal, and then to the differential
encoder. The differential encoder is a 2-bit encoder, which allows for resolution of two of the
four ambiguity states of the QPSK or Offset QPSK demodulator.
The data is sent to the convolutional encoder for encoding the baseband data. The code rates
1/2, 3/4, 7/8, and 2/3 are based on the symbol rate range of 2.4 kbps to 2.5 Mbps.
• For Viterbi codes, the convolutional encoder encodes the data at 1/2 rate. If the selected
code rate is 3/4, then 2 of every 6 symbols are punctured. For 3 bits in, there are 4 symbols
out.
• For Sequential codes, the convolutional encoder generates the parity bits from the input data
stream, which allows for error correction at the far end of the link. The rate of the encoder
may be 1/2, 3/4, 7/8, and 2/3.
For example, the 7/8 rate puts out 8 symbols for every 7 bits in. In QPSK (or Offset
QPSK) mode, the data is split into two separate data streams to drive the I and Q channels
of the modulator. Refer to Section 2.2.2 for the theory of modulation types.
After the convolutional encoder, the data is sent to a programmable vector rotation circuit. This
feature provides the user with data communications compatibility for spectrum reversal of the I
and Q channels before and after satellite transmission.
The I and Q channel data then pass through a set of variable rate digital Nyquist filters.
2–6
Direct Digital Modulation follows the two identical digital Nyquist filters. Symbol rates up to
2.5 Mbps can be achieved automatically.
The modulated carrier is applied to the RF section for conversion to the correct output
frequency. The spectral shape will be identical to that of the input data streams, but
double-sided about the carrier frequency.
The RF synthesizer provides the proper frequencies to convert the modulator IF to the desired
output frequency in the 50 to 180 MHz range. The synthesizer has a single loop, and
incorporates a Direct Digital Synthesis (DDS) chip to accommodate 1 Hz steps over a range of
130 MHz. The RF section has a frequency stability of ± 1 x 10-5. An optional 2 x 10-7
Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator (TCXO) can be installed.
The signal is sent to the output amplifier. The amplifier takes the low level signal from the
modulator section and amplifies the signal to the proper level for output from the module. The
amplifier circuitry provides programmable control of the output level over a range of -5 to -30
dB, in 0.1 dB steps. The amplifier has power leveling of ± 0.5 dB to maintain the stability of the
output level over time and temperature. The +5 dB output option is capable of outputting +5 to -
20 dBm.
2.2.2 Theory of Modulation Types

The modulation types for the modem include BPSK, QPSK, Offset QPSK, or 8-PSK.
The PSK data transmission encoding method uses the phase modulation technique. This method
varies the phase angle of the carrier wave to represent a different bit value for the receiver. The
higher levels of modulation are required for an operating range that has a limited bandwidth.
The order of modulation is represented by mPSK, where “m” relates to the number of discrete
phase angles. Refer to the following list for a brief description of the modulation types.
BPSK 2 discrete phase angles represent the 2 possible states of a symbol.

QPSK 4 discrete phase angles represent the 4 possible states of a symbol.
8PSK 8 discrete phase angles represent the 8 possible states of a symbol.
Note: The code rate determines the number of symbols per bit.
2–7
2.3 Description of the Demodulator

A block diagram of the demodulator is shown in Figure 2-3.
The demodulator converts PSK modulated carriers within the 50 to 180 MHz range to a
demodulated baseband data stream. The converted modulation types are BPSK, Offset QPSK,
QPSK, and 8-PSK (refer to Section 2.2.2 for a description of modulation types). The
demodulator then performs FEC on the data stream using Viterbi or Sequential decoding
algorithms.
LOOPBACK
RF INPUT
SWITCH AGC LPF BPF BPF
RF INPUT
50 TO 180 MHz
A TO D
CONVERTER
LO #1 LO #2
REF REFERENCE
VCXO DIGITAL
SIGNAL
PROCESSING
OC XO
OPT REF SEQUENTIAL VITERBI OPTIONAL
HIGH PLL DECODER DECODER TURBO DIGITAL
STABILITY CODEC CLOCK
RECOVERY-
EXT REFERENCE LOOP
OPTIONAL
REED-SOLOMON
CODEC
DOPPLER/
MUX PLESIOCHRONOUS INTERFACE
BUFFER
OPTIONAL
OVERHEAD DEFRAMING
IBS/IDR, ASYNC/AUPC
DROP & INSERT
Figure 2-3. Demodulator Block Diagram
2–8

The demodulator functions as an advanced, digital, coherent-phase-lock receiver and decoder.
Demodulator faults are also reported to the front panel. The demodulator consists of the
following basic subsections.
• Digital Costas Loop

• RF Section
• Automatic Gain Control
• Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
• Soft Decision Mapping
• Programmable Vector Rotation
• Digital Nyquist Filters
• FEC Decoder
• Digital Clock Recovery Loop
• Decoder
The modulated IF signal at 50 to 180 MHz enters the RF module for conversion to an IF
frequency. The IF is then sampled by an A to D converter and digitally demodulated. The I and
Q data is then sent to the digital Nyquist filters, resulting in a filtered, digital representation of
the received signal. The digital data is then sent to four separate circuits:
• Automatic Gain Control

• Carrier Recovery (Costas) Loop
• Clock Recovery Loop
• Soft Decision Mapping
The AGC provides a gain feedback signal to the RF section. This closed loop control ensures
that the digital representation of the I and Q channels is optimized for the Costas and Clock
loops, as well as the soft-decision mapping circuitry.
When the active decoder determines that the modem is locked, the M&C stops the sweep and
begins the de-stress process. This involves fine-tuning the DDS based on the phase error in the
Costas loop. The de-stress process continues as long as the modem is locked. If the carrier is
interrupted, the M&C resumes the sweep process.
The digital Costas loop, in conjunction with a Direct Digital Synthesizer (DDS), performs the
carrier recovery function. The Costas loop consists of a Costas phase detector, loop filter, and
DDS, all implemented digitally. The DDS performs the function of a Voltage-Controlled
Oscillator (VCO) in an analog implementation, but can be easily programmed to the desired
center frequency via the M&C. The output of the DDS is sent to the RF module and provides
the reference to which the local oscillator is locked. The M&C sweeps the local oscillator (via
DDS programming) through the user-specified sweep range.
The digital clock loop, in conjunction with another DDS, performs the clock recovery function.
The clock loop consists of a phase detector, loop filter, and DDS, all implemented digitally. The
DDS performs the function of a VCO in an analog implementation. The recovered data and
symbol clocks are then used throughout the demodulator.
2–9
The soft decision mapper converts the digital I and Q data to 3-bit soft decision values. These
values are then fed to the programmable vector rotation circuit, providing compatibility with
spectrum reversal of the I and Q channels.
The output of the vector rotation circuit is then sent to the Viterbi decoder and optional
Sequential decoder. The output is then sent to the optional Reed-Solomon or Overhead PCB.
2.4 Description of the Decoder

The SDM-300A can be configured in any of the following configurations:
• Basic SDM-300A (Sequential or Viterbi Decoder)
• FAST options (Sequential or Viterbi Decoder)
• FAST options with Reed-Solomon hardware (Sequential or Viterbi Decoder)
• FAST options with Overhead hardware (Sequential or Viterbi Decoder)
• FAST options with Reed-Solomon and Overhead hardware

(Sequential or Viterbi Decoder)
2–10
2.5 Description of the Interface

The terrestrial interface functions include:
• MUX various types of ESC into the data

• Buffering the receive data
• DEMUX various types of ESC from the data
• Monitoring and displaying the interface status without interruption of service
The interface block diagram is shown in Figure 2-4.
The terrestrial interfaces for the modem are defined by data communication standards RS-
530/RS-449, RS-232, or V.35. The interface receivers and drivers for these standards, as well as
the handshake signals for all formats, are selectable through the front panel menus.
Overhead can be added to the terrestrial data for other modes of operation. The format of the
overhead data is dependent on the mode of operation and requires one of the following options
used with the interface PCB:
• ASYNC/AUPC
• D&I
• IBS
• IDR
2–11
INTERFACE
LOOPBACK
TX OVERHEAD
OVERHEAD RECEIVERS TXSAT
PROCESSORS DATA
BASEBAND TX
LOOPBACK OVERHEAD
MUX
TX TERR LINE
DATA RECEIVERS TX
CLOCK RS CODEC
MUX
SCT
DROP/INSERT
EXT
RXTERR LINE PLESIOCHRONOUS RX RXSAT

DATA DRIVERS BUFFER OVERHEAD DATA
DEMUX
RXCLK
OVERHEAD
RX PROCESSORS
SCT
CLOCK
EXT MUX
TXCLK
HI STAB
LINE
RX OVERHEAD
DRIVERS
BWA
BACKWARD
FORM C RELAY
ALARMS DRIVERS
RELAYS
FLT
MODEM FAULTS FORM C RELAY MICRO-
(FORM C) RELAYS DRIVERS CONTROLLER
TTL
MODEM FAULTS
(TTL) DRIVERS
Figure 2-4. Interface Block Diagram
2–12
2.5.1 Available Interfaces

The following data interfaces are available for the SDM-300A:
• EIA-232 (25-Pin D Sub)

• EIA-422 (37-Pin D Sub)
• EIA-530 (25-pin D Sub)
• G.703 (BNC and DB15)
• V.35 (34-Pin Winchester)
2.5.2 Plesiochronous/Doppler/Buffer
Data from the DEMUX section is fed into a buffer. This buffer size is user-selectable in bit
increments that correspond to the length of an IESS-308 satellite superframe. The increments
range from 1 to 32 ms. Refer to the interface specifications for a list of valid entries for each of
the selected formats. The buffer automatically centers on resumption of service, either from the
front panel or remotely. The startup buffer will overfill when centering to match the satellite
frame to the terrestrial frame with a maximum slide of 0.5 ms.
The fill status is available as a monitor and is accurate to 1%. Overflows or underflows are
stored in the stored fault section of the M&C status registers, along with the date and time of the
incident (which are provided by the modem internal clock). These are stored in battery-backed
RAM.
A normal selection is to have the data clocked out of the buffer by an external clock. This
procedure removes the Doppler from the receive satellite data.
The operator may select from four other clock sources as a backup:
• Insert clock (D&I mode only)

• RX satellite
• Internal clock source
• TX terrestrial
Problems occurring on any of the selected clocks will cause the modem to substitute the satellite
clock and a fault will be signaled.
2–13
2.5.3 Closed Network

Typically, the closed network operation does not add overhead to the terrestrial data. The closed
network operation is not dictated by a specification. The terrestrial data and clock are passed
through the baseband loopback relay and are translated from the selected baseband format to
TTL. The data is re-synchronized by the clock and the data stream is then output to the
modulator through the interface loopback device.
The receive data from the demodulator/decoder is input to the buffer. User data from the
DEMUX section may be optionally input to the buffer.
The front panel interface provides four clock selections clocking the data out of the buffer:
• Internal Clock (SCT)

• RX Recovered Clock (RXCLK)
• External Clock (EXT)
• TX Clock Dejittered (TXCLK)
If either RXCLK, SCT, or EXT is selected and then fails, the interface will automatically switch
to RX Sat CLK as the source. The receive data and selected clock are translated to the levels of
the selected baseband interface and output through the baseband loopback relay.
2.5.4 Open Network

The modem is a high-performance, full-duplex, digital-vector modulator/demodulator. The
modem meets the open network requirements of the INTELSAT IESS-308 and -309
specifications for IDR, IBS, and EUTELSAT SMS.
2–14
2.6 Backward Alarm Theory and Connections

Four sets of TX and RX backward alarms are available to implement the structure defined in
IESS-308. Backward alarms are sent to the distant side of an IDR link to signal that trouble has
occurred at the receive side (which may have resulted from an improper transmission).
INTELSAT specifies that any major failure of the downlink chain will generate a backward alarm.
Implementation is straightforward in a simple, single-destination link. The modem has a

demodulator fault relay which de-energizes in the event of a receive fault. For this relay to be
connected to the appropriate backward alarm input, the Fault menu for this signal includes the
appropriate overhead framing faults.
This signal also includes faults in the downlink chain, since major problems with the antenna, Low
Noise Amplifier (LNA), down converter, and other components will cause an interruption in
service and fault the modem.
The outputs of the demodulator fault relay are available as follows:
• Pins DF-C and DF-NO on the 50-pin D IDR interface connector (J8)
• 9-pin D modem fault connector (J7)
The relay contacts are named for the faulted state. If a receive fault does not occur, DF-C is
connected to DF-NO. The preferred method of using a backward alarm in a single-destination
system is to connect the signals at the IDR data interface (at the modem in a non-redundant
system, or at the protection switch, if used).
Signal Pin #
GND DB50-2
BWI1 DB50-12
BWI2 DB50-13
BWI3 DB50-14
BWI4 DB50-15
DF-C DB50-16
DF-NO DB50-50
This method signals faults on all four alarm channels, and is compatible with a redundancy system.
The method assumes that the same modem handles traffic in both directions in each
single-destination link.
To handle more complicated systems, connect the appropriate outputs of the Demod fault relay to
the appropriate backward alarm inputs. In a multi-destination system, connect the relay to the
particular backward alarm assigned to that link. Refer to IESS-308 for further clarification.
2–15
A backward alarm being received on a particular link is detected by one of the two following
methods:
• The backward alarm output drives a FORM C relay with all three contacts available on
the data connector.
• The status of all transmit and receive backward alarms may be read through the RS-232
or RS-485 remote interface connector that is integrating a modem or switch into a
computer network.
In addition to the four backward alarms for IDR and two backward alarms (primary and
secondary) for IBS, all modes support the following faults:
• MOD (modulator equipment)

• DEM (demodulator equipment)
• CEQ (common equipment)
Each fault is indicated by a FORM C relay contact and an open collector output.
2–16
Chapter 3. Installation/
Upgrades
The equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Use ESD precautionary procedures when
CAUTION touching, removing, or inserting PCBs.
3.1 Unpacking
The modem and manual are packaged in pre-formed, reusable, cardboard cartons containing
foam spacing for maximum shipping protection.
Do not use any cutting tool that will extend more than 1 inch into the
container. This can cause damage to the modem.
CAUTION
Unpack the modem as follows:
1. Cut the tape at the top of the carton indicated by OPEN THIS END.
2. Remove the cardboard/foam space covering the modem.
3. Remove the modem, manual, and power cord from the carton.
4. Save the packing material for storage or reshipment purposes.
5. Inspect the equipment for any possible damage incurred during shipment.
6. Check the equipment against the packing list to ensure the shipment is correct.
7. Refer to Section 3.2 for installation instructions.
3–1
Installation/Upgrades MN/SDM300A.IOM
3.2 Installation
The modem arrives fully assembled from the factory. After unpacking the modem, install the
modem as follows:
Modem Installation (Optional):
Refer to Figure 3-1. Use the following mounting kit, KT/6228-1.
QTY Part Number Description

2 FP/6138-1 Bracket, Rear Support
4 HW/10-32x1/2RK Bolt #10 Rack
2 HW/10-32x1/4 SHC Screw, Socket 10-32 x 1/4 inch
Tools Required:
Screw Driver Phillips

5/32 - inch SAE Allen Wrench
1. If required, install the mounting bracket (KT/6228-1) in equipment rack (Figure 3-1).
Install and tighten the bracket bolts.
2. Loosen the screw with flat washer located on the left side of modem chassis. Mount the
modem chassis into the equipment rack and slide the screw with flat washer through the
slot of the mounting bracket. Tighten the screw sufficiently to allow the modem chassis
to slide in the bracket.
3. Connect the cables to the proper locations on the rear panel.
3–2
Figure 3-1. Installation of the Optional Mounting Bracket, KT/6228-1
3–3
3.3 Software and Hardware Installation/Upgrades
3.3.1 Overhead Interface PCB Installation

The overhead interface PCB may be installed at the factory or in the field. The overhead
interface PCB is required to access certain options and functionality of the modem. Observe the
following:
• If the overhead interface PCB is installed at the factory, then the 50-pin interface relay
card will be pre-installed.
• If the overhead interface PCB is installed in the field, then one of four connector/card
combinations will have been shipped with the overhead interface PCB.
This equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by ESD.

Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or inserting
CAUTION PCBs.
The following tool is required to install the overhead interface PCB:
Description Application
Phillips  Screwdriver To remove and replace cross-point screws.
Use the following information to install the overhead interface PCB as a daughter card on the
main PCB. Refer to Figure 3-2 for the installation location of the overhead interface daughter
card.
Turn the power off before installation. High current VDC is present. Failure
to do so could result in damage to the modem components.
CAUTION
1. Turn off the modem and unplug the power supply.

2. Remove the rear panel retaining screws. Using the finger pulls, slide the main modem
assembly out from the rear of the modem chassis.
3. Install the overhead interface PCB, face down, onto the main PCB by mating the male
header connectors with the female header connectors in the position shown in
Figure 3-2.
4. Align the overhead interface PCB standoffs with the main PCB mounting holes. Install
the four mounting screws and washers.
3–4
The mounting hardware must be installed to provide proper

grounding between the overhead interface PCB and the main PCB.
CAUTION
5. After completing the installation procedure, turn on the modem. Select the desired
modem option to use the overhead card.
Overhead PCB
Figure 3-2. Overhead Interface PCB Installation
3–5
3.3.2 Hardware Upgrades
3.4 Reed-Solomon PCB
3.4.1 Unpacking

CAUTION PCBs.
1. Remove the Reed-Solomon PCB and mounting hardware from the cardboard
caddypack and anti-static material.
2. Check the packing list to ensure the shipment is complete.
3. Inspect the Reed-Solomon PCB for any shipping damage.
3.4.2 Installation
The following tool is required to install the overhead interface PCB:
Use the following information to install the Reed-Solomon Codec PCB as a daughter card on
the main PCB.
Refer Figure 3-3 for installation location of the Reed-Solomon daughter card.
to do so could result in damage to modem components.
CAUTION
3. Install the Reed-Solomon PCB to the main PCB by mating the male SIMM connectors
with the female SIMM connectors in the position shown in Figure 3-3.
3–6
4. After completing the above installation procedure, turn on the modem. If the
Reed-Solomon PCB was installed properly, the Utility: Modem Type menu will
display: “Card #2 Type Reed Solomon” or “Card #3 Type Reed Solomon
03” if both boards were installed.
Reed-Solomon Cards
(TX, RX, or Duplex in Either Slot)
Figure 3-3. Reed-Solomon Codec Installation
3–7
3.5 Turbo Codec Installation

The Turbo Card is installed in the same slots as the Reed-Solomon PCBs. While the Reed-
Solomon uses two cards (TX and RX), the Turbo Codec uses only a single card.
Upgrading requires installation of the Turbo Codec module, installation of

new M&C firmware, and installation of new Bulk firmware.
CAUTION
Seven Turbo code rates/modulations are supported:
• BPSK 5/16
• BPSK 21/44
• QPSK 3/4
• Offset QPSK 3/4 (requires Offset QPSK optioned modem)
• 8-PSK 3/4 (requires 8-PSK optioned modem)
• QPSK 1/2
• Offset QPSK 1/2 (requires Offset QPSK optioned modem)
3.5.1 Unpacking

CAUTION PCBs.
1. Remove the Turbo Upgrade Kit that includes the following items:
• PL/9394-1 (Turbo Codec Module)

• FW/6535-1V or later version (M&C firmware)
• FW/6094W or later version (Bulk firmware)
• Installation instructions.
2. Check the packing list to ensure the shipment is complete.

3. Inspect the Turbo Codec card for any shipping damage.
3–8
3.5.2 Installation
The following tool is required to install the Turbo Codec card:
PLCC, Type IC Puller To firmware IC’s from the Main PCB.
SDM-300A Satellite Modem shall have Revision C (or later) Main board for Turbo upgrade.
There are two ways to determine the revision status:
Method 1: Provide the Serial Number of the modem to Comtech EF Data for verification
of the revision status.
Method 2: If the first two digits of the modem Serial Number begin with 99, 00, or 01,
corresponding to the year of the manufacture, then the modem Main board is
Revision C.
a. If the Serial Number starts with 98 then it is either Revision B or
Revision C and it is necessary to check with Comtech EF Data
Customer Support department.
b. Serial Numbers beginning with 97 or subsequent are not eligible for
upgrade.
Install the Turbo Codec Card on the Main PCB:
Refer Figure 3-4 for installation location of the Turbo Codec card.
to do so could result in damage to modem components.
CAUTION

3. If required: Card #1 Overhead Board Removal – Remove the four rear panel screws
around the 50-pin I/O switch module. Unplug the I/O module, and then remove the
seven mounting screws around the 50-pin I/O switch module. Unplug the I/O module,
then remove the seven mounting screws holding the Overhead board and carefully lift
the board out.
4. If required: Reed-Solomon Removal – Remove the Reed-Solomon boards from the
SIMM sockets by pushing the spring clips outward while the rocking the board
vertically, then lift the board out.
5. Turbo Codec Installation – Align the Turbo board with either of the SIMM sockets
while holding it vertically with components toward the Rear panel. Seat the connector
into the socket and tilt the board toward the Front Panel until the spring clips lock the
board into place.
6. Replace the top cover and reinstalled the two side screws.
7. Turn on the AC power. Modem will reinitialize.
3–9
Notes:
1. In this configuration, the Modem allows only Data Rates and Formats valid for
Turbo.
2. Open Network modem types cannot be selected.
Turbo Codec Installed
Figure 3-4. Turbo Codec Installation
3–10
Note: If replacement Firmware IC’s were sent with the Turbo Codec, perform the IC
replacement procedures.
Firmware Installation:
1. Remove existing firmware, U86 and U74 (Figure 3-5) with the PLCC type IC puller (if
puller is not available, use an ice-pick type tool to alternately and carefully pry upward at
opposite corners of the IC.
U74 U86
TURBO CODEC
INSTALLED
Figure 3-5. Firmware Location
2. Install the replacement firmware, noting that the DOT mark should be oriented toward the
beveled corner of the socket before pushing the IC into the socket. U86 is located next to
3–11
the lithium battery NV-RAM (large Black or Yellow IC, U95). U74 is located in the center
socket position.
3. If required, reinstalled the Overhead card and secure with seven mounting screws then
replug the I/O Module into the rear panel location. Reinstall the four mounting screws.
4. Reposition the top cover so forward edge mates under the front Panel lip. While holding in
place, reinstall the two slide screws.
5. Turn on the AC power to the modem. Modem shall re-initialize.
Turbo Setup
1. Press the [→] or [←] arrow key until the screen reads: Function Select: Utility, then press
the <ENTER> key.
2. Press the [→] arrow key until the screen reads: Utility: Modem Type, then press the
<ENTER> key.
3. Press the [↑] or [↓] arrow key until the screen reads: Modem Type: Custom, or Modem
Type EFD, then press the <ENTER> key. Now press Clear.
4. Press the [→] arrow key until the screen reads: Utility: Modulator, the press the
<ENTER> key.
5. Press the [→] arrow key until the screen reads: Encoder Type, the press the <ENTER>
key, then [↑] arrow key to get “Turbo”, press <ENTER>.
6. Press Clear, then press the [→] arrow key until the screen reads: Utility: Demodulator, the
press the <ENTER> key.
7. Press the [→] arrow key until the screen reads: Decoder Type, the press the <ENTER>
key, then [↑] arrow key “Turbo”, press <ENTER>.
Notes:
1. In this configuration, the modem will allow only valid Data Rates and Formats for
Turbo.
2. Open-Network modem types cannot be selected.
3–12
3.6 Duplex Reed-Solomon Codec Installation

Notes:
1. A Duplex Reed-Solomon Codec can be installed at the factory or added as a field-
installed upgrade to modem currently deployed.
2. Turbo and Duplex Reed-Solomon can be populated at the same time.
Upgrading requires installation of the Duplex Reed-Solomon module, new M&C firmware, new
Bulk firmware, and installation of Turbo firmware.An Upgrade kit includes the following items:
Upgrade Kit Part Number KT/9658-1

Item # Component
1 PL/9658-1 Duplex Reed-Solomon Module
2 FW/6535-1AA or later version (M&C Firmware)
3 FW/6094W or later version (Bulk Firmware)
4 Installation Instructions
5 FW/9600C or later version (Turbo Firmware – If installed)
The SDM-300A shall have a Revision C or greater Main Board for the Duplex Reed-Solomon
upgrade. There are two ways to determine the revision status:
1 Provide the SN of the modem to Comtech EF Data for verification of the

revision status.
2 If the first 2-digits off the modem SN start with 99, 00, or 01 corresponding to
the year of manufacture, then the modem Main board is Revision C.
• If the SN starts with 98 then it is either Revision B or C and it is

necessary to check with the factory.
• SNs beginning with 97 or earlier are not eligible for upgrade.
Observe all normal precautions for handling electrostatic-sensitive

devices.
CAUTION
3–13
Duplex Reed-Solomon Installation:
1. Disconnect the AC power to the unit.

2. Remove the (2) side screws near the front of the modem. Slide top cover back and lift off.
*3. Card 1 Removal, refer to Figure 3-6. If unit has top board (Card 1 – Overhead board), remove
the (4) rear panel screws around the 50-Pin I/O switch module. Unplug the I/O module, then
Remove the (7) mounting screws holding the Overhead board and carefully lift it off.
4. Simplex Reed-Solomon removal, refer to Figure 3-6. Remove all Simplex Reed-Solomon
Boards if installed, from the SIMM sockets by pushing the spring clips outward while rocking
the board vertically, then lift out.
5. Duplex Reed-Solomon installation, refer to Figure 3-7. Align the Duplex Reed-Solomon board
with either of the SIMM sockets while holding it nearly vertical with components toward Rear
Panel. Seat the connector into the socket and tilt the board toward the Front Panel until the
spring clips lock the board into place.
6. Firmware installation, refer to Figure 3-7 If replacement
Firmware IC’s where sent with the Duplex Reed- Solomon Board,
Remove existing Firmware, U86 and U74 with PLCC type IC
puller. If puller not available, use ice pick type tool to alternately,
carefully pry upward at opposite corners of IC.
7. Install the replacement Firmware, noting that the Dot mark should be oriented toward the
beveled corner of the socket before pushing the IC into the socket. U86 is located next to the
lithium battery NV-RAM (Large Black or Yellow IC, U95). U74 is located in the center socket
position.
*8. If step #3 was required, re-install the Overhead board with its (7) mounting screws then re-plug
the I/O Module into the Rear Panel location and install its (4) mounting screws.
9. Replace the Top Cover so forward edge mates under Front Panel lip. While holding in place, re-
install the (2) side screws.
10. Turn on the AC power to the modem. Modem will re-initialize.
* Dependent steps – Other procedures shall be accomplished prior to performing steps indicated by an *.
3–14
I/O
SIMM
SOCKETS
CARD 1
OVERHEAD
BOARD
Figure 3-6. PCB Location
3–15
U74 U86
DUPLEX
REED-SOLOMON
CODEC
Figure 3-7. Installation of the Duplex Reed-Solomon Module
3–16
3.7 Data I/O Interface Connector (J8) Removal/Installation

Note: The following procedures outline the removal and installation of the Data I/O connector
(J8). These procedures are written with the assumption that the same configured connector will
be reinstalled. However, the operator does have an option to install a different configured
connector. Refer to Table 3-1 for a matrix explaining connector options.
Table 3-1.Connector (J8) Matrix

Modem RS-422/ Flex
Configuration RS-232 RS-449 V.35 G.703 Mux Mux
25-pin Connector X X X
34-pin Connector X
37-pin Connector X
50-pin Connector X X X X X
100-pin D Connector X
15-pin/ BNC X
3.7.1 Data I/O Connector (J8) Removal

1. (For Ribbon-Configured Connector PL/6031.) Remove Data I/O connector (J8)
(Figure 3-5) as follows:
a. Remove four screws securing the rear panel to the chassis.
b. Pull out rear panel to gain access to disconnect connector (J8).
c. Disconnect connector (J8) from the PCB.
d. Remove the four screws securing connector (J8) to the rear panel.
e. Remove the connector (J8).
2. (For Part No. PL/5509-1.) Remove 50-pin Data I/O connector (J8) as follows:
a. Remove the four screws securing the connector (J8) to the rear panel.
b. Establish a grip on connector (J8) and pull backwards until separation of the
connectors is obtained.
c. Remove connector (J8).
3–17
3.7.2 Data I/O Connector (J8) Installation

1. (For Ribbon-Configured Connector PL/6031.) Install Data I/O connector (J8)
(Figure 3-5) as follows:
a. Position connector (J8) in rear panel.
Use care when connecting the data I/O connector (J8) to the PCB.
Damage to the connector pins may render the data I/O connector
CAUTION (J8) unserviceable. Misalignment can be the result.
b. Connect connector (J8) to the PCB.
c. Secure connector (J8) to the rear panel with four screws.
d. Position the rear panel to mate with the chassis and secure with four screws.
2. (For Part No. PL/5509-1.) Install 50-pin Data I/O connector (J8) as follows:
Use care when connecting the Data I/O connector (J8) to the PCB.
Damage to the connector pins may render the data I/O connector
CAUTION (J8) unserviceable. Misalignment can be the result.
a. Connect connector (J8) to the PCB.
b. Secure connector (J8) using four screws.
3–18
For Ribbon-Configured Connector
For 50-Pin Connector with Overhead Interface Board
Figure 3-8. Data I/O Connector (J8) Removal/Installation
3–19
3.8 Hardware Upgrades
3.8.1 Main PCB Firmware Chips
The main PCB has two field-changeable firmware chips. If necessary, these
chips can be removed and new chips added to allow for additional options,
enhancements, or repairs. Currently, there are no foreseeable requirements
for this task. See Figure 3-9 for the locations of the field-changeable chips.
3–20
Figure 3-9. Main Board Field-Changeable Chips
3–21
3.8.2 Overhead Interface PCB

The overhead interface PCB has four field-changeable firmware chips. If necessary, these chips
can be removed and new chips added to allow for additional options, enhancements, or repairs.
Currently, there are no foreseeable requirements for this task. See Figure 3-10 for the locations
of the field-changeable chips.
FIELD
CHANGEABLE
CHIPS
Figure 3-10. Overhead Board Field-Changeable Chips
3–22
Chapter 4. External Connections
4.1 External Modem Connections

When a breakout panel, such as the UB-300, is not required, the rear panel connectors provide all
necessary external connections between the modem and other equipment. Table 4-1 lists these
connectors, and Figures 4-1 through 4-5 show their locations.
Notes:
1. Refer to the Comtech EFData UB-300 Universal Breakout Panel Installation and
Operation Manual for connecting the UB-300 breakout panel.
2. Refer to the Comtech EFData UB-54 Breakout Panel Installation and Operation
Manual for connecting the UB-54 breakout panel in a MUX option configuration.
4–1
External Connections MN/SDM300A.IOM
Table 4-1. Modem Rear Panel Connectors

Connector Type
Name Ref. Desig. Function
TX/IF OUTPUT CP1 BNC RF Output
RX/IF INPUT CP2 BNC RF Input
EXTERNAL REF CP3 BNC Input for EXT REF clock
REMOTE J6 9-pin D Remote Interface
FAULT J7 9-pin D FORM C Fault Relay Contacts
DATA I/O J8 25-pin D Data Input/Output (standard modem)
34-pin V.35
37-pin D RS-422
50-pin D Data Input/Output (modem with
D&I/ASYNC/AUPC/IDR/IBS option)
50-pin D Without Overhead Card
100-pin D MUX option only
15-pin D & BNC G.703 T1, E1/ASYNC Interface Adapter
AUX 1 J9 9-pin D (TTL) Faults
Satellite Clock
Demod I/Q
Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Out
ALARMS J10 9-pin D FORM C Alarm
Relay Contacts
AC INPUT NONE IEC Modem Power
GROUND NONE 10-32 Stud Grounding
Note: The European EMC Directive (EN55022, EN50082-1) requires using properly shielded
cables for DATA I/O. These cables must be double-shielded from end-to-end, ensuring a
continuous ground shield.
4–2
J6 J9 EX REF RX/IF INPUT TX/IF OUTP UT

REMOTE AUX 1
CP3 CP2 CP1

FAULT ALARMS
J7 J10
Figure 4-1. Basic Modem, 25-Pin D Connector

REMOTE AUX 1
CP3 CP2 CP1

FAULT ALARMS
J7 J10
Figure 4-2. (V.35) 34-Pin Winchester Connector

REMOTE AUX 1
CP3 CP2 CP1

FAULT ALARMS
J7 J10
Figure 4-3. RS-422/449, 37-Pin D Connector

REMOTE AUX 1
CP3 CP2 CP1

FAULT ALARMS
J7 J10
Figure 4-4. Overhead Option, 50-Pin D Connector
J6 J9 EX REF RX/IF INPUT TX/IF OUTPUT

REMOTE AUX 1
CP3 CP2 CP1

FAULT ALARMS
J7 J10
Figure 4-5. 8-Channel, 100-Pin MUX Connector
4–3
4.1.1 Remote Connector and Pinouts (J6)

The remote connector is a 9-pin subminiature female D connector (J6) located on the rear panel of
the modem. Screw locks are provided for mechanical security of the mating connector.
The remote connector interfaces the M&C functions to a remote location. The remote location can
be an M&C computer located away from the modem, but attached via cable to the remote
connector. This DCE interface is user selectable for either RS-232 or RS-484. Refer to Appendix
A for a description of the remote interface commands.
Refer to Table 4-2 for pinout information.
Table 4-2. Remote Connector and Pinouts (J6)

Pinout
RS-232 RS-485
Name Name
Pin # Name Pin # (2-Wire) (4-Wire)
1 1 GND
2 RD (RX) 2
3 TD (TX) 3
4 4* +RX/TX +TX
5 GND 5* -RX/TX -TX
6 DSR 6
7 RTS 7
8 CTS 8* +RX/TX +RX
9 9* -RX/TX -RX
*For 2-Wire Operation:

• Only two wires are required.
• Tie pins 4 and 8 together (both +).
• Tie pins 5 and 9 together (both -).
4–4
4.1.2 Fault Connector and Pinouts (J7)

The fault connector provides Form C contact closures for fault reporting. The three Form C
summary fault contacts, ratings 1A maximum at 24 VDC, 0.5A at 120 VAC, are Modulator,
Demodulator, and Common Equipment.
The fault interface connection is a 9-pin subminiature female D connector (J7) located on the rear
panel of the modem. Screw locks are provided for mechanical security on the mating connector.
Refer to Table 4-3 for pinout information.
Table 4-3. Fault Connector and Pinouts (J7)

Pin # Signal Function Name
1 Common equipment is not faulted NO
2 COM
3 Common equipment is faulted NC
4 Modulator is not faulted NO
5 COM
6 Modulator is faulted NC
7 Demodulator is not faulted NO
8 COM
9 Demodulator is faulted NC
Note: A connection between the common (COM) and normally open (NO) contacts
indicates no fault.
To obtain a system summary fault, connect all the Form C contacts in parallel.
4–5
4.1.3 Data I/O Interface Connector (J8)

The Data I/O interface connector conducts data input and output signals to and from the modem,
and connects to the customer’s terrestrial equipment, breakout panel, or protection switch. The
modem is currently available with a choice of four Data I/O connectors, as follows:
• 25-pin D connector is the standard connector shipped with a base platform modem.
• 50-pin D connector is the standard connector when the modem is ordered with the
optional overhead PCB or if the overhead PCB has been installed in the field.
• 50-pin D that can be ordered with the basic modem, but it does not include the
Overhead Card. This is used with breakout panels and switches.
• 37-pin D is an alternate connector available upon special request for the base platform
modem.
• 34-pin Winchester is an alternate connector available upon special request for the base
platform modem.
• 50-pin D connector is used when the optional Flex MUX Overhead Board is installed.
• 100-pin D connector is used when the Optional 8-Channel MUX Board is installed.
The Data I/O pinout is different for each of the interface configurations. For pinout information,
refer to the appropriate table as follows:
Standard 25-pin D connector Table 4-4

Optional: 34-pin Winchester connector Table 4-5
Optional: 37-pin D connector Table 4-6
4–6
Table 4-4. 25-Pin D Connector Pinouts

25-Pin D Connector
Pin # RS-422 RS-232 V.35
1 SHLD SHLD SHLD
2 SD-A TXD SD-A
3 RD-A RXD RD-A
4 RS-A RTS RTS
5 CS-A CTS CTS
6 DM-A DSR DSR
7 SIGGND SIGGND SIGGND
8 RR-A DCD RLSD
9 RT+B SCR+B
10 RR-B
11 TT+B SCTE+B
12 ST+B SCT+B
13 CS+B
14 SD+B SD+B
15 ST-A ST SCT-A
16 RD+B RD+B
17 RT-A RXC SCR-A
18 LL LL LL
19 RS+B
20* MC-A MC MC-A
21 DF DF DF
22 DM+B
23* MC+B MC+B
24 TT-A TXC SCTE-A
25 MF MF MF
*Note: Use the MASTER clock for EXTERNAL clock input. This clock input should
equal the data rate unless the Asymmetrical Loop Timing Option (ASLT) is available.
The ASLT option allows selection of different clock rates that vary from the digital data
rate. Refer to the Utility: Modem Type: Modem Options menu for the ASLT option
information.
4–7
Table 4-5. 34-Pin Winchester Connector Pinouts (V.35)

Pin # Name
A Ground
B Ground
C Request to Send (RTS)
D Clear to Send (CTS)
E Data Set Ready (DSR)
F Receive Line Signal Detect (RLSD)
P Send Data A (SD-A)
R Receive Data A (RD-A)
S Send Data B (SD+B)
T Receive Data B (RD+B)
U Serial Clock Transmit External A (SCTE-A)
V Serial Clock Receive A (SCR-A)
W Serial Clock Transmit External B (SCTE+B)
X Serial Clock Receive B (SCR+B)
Y Serial Clock Transmit A (SCT-A)
c (CC) External Reference Clock A (EXC-A)
d (DD) External Reference Clock B (EXC+B)
m (MM) Modulator Fault (MF)
n (NN) Demodulator Fault (DF)
a(AA) Serial Clock Transmit B (SCT+B)
Note: Pins H, J, K, L, M, N, Z, a (AA), b (BB), e (EE), f (FF), h (HH), j (JJ), k (KK),

l (LL) have no connection.
The modem is available with a Winchester V.35 as the data I/O connector (PL/6032). There is a
jumper on the unit that either opens or closes the CC line. The interface is shipped with jumpers
in positions 2 and 3, because:
1. Comtech EF Data has determined that several locations use Fireberd test equipment
and a conflict will occur if CC is connected between the modem and the Fireberd.
2. Placing the jumper in positions 2 and 3 opens up the CC line, because the
TTC/Fireberd test equipment interfaces use the line for DTE/DCE control.
3. Grounding pin CC at the Fireberd interface will change the Fireberd  to a DCE
device.
4. Comtech EF Data uses the CC and DD for the input master clock (same as the external
clock input to the modem). To input an external clock, change the jumper to positions 1
and 2 (the pin closest to the Winchester connector).
4–8
Table 4-6. 37-Pin Connector Pinouts (Optional)

Pin # RS-422/MIL-188-144
1, 19 Shield
3 MF
4 SD-A
5 ST-A
6 RD-A
7 RS-A
8 RT-A
9 CS-A
11 DM-A
13 RR-A
16 MC-A
17 TT-A
20, 37 SIGGND
21 DF
22 SD+B
23 ST+B
24 RD+B
25 RS+B
26 RT+B
27 CS+B
29 DM+B
31 RR+B
34 MC+B
35 TT+B
There are jumpers on the PL/6031 RS-422 interface. Place the jumpers on the center pin and the
pin towards the Master Clock (MC) to allow an external clock input on pins 16 and 34.
If desired, place the jumpers on the TR side to allow an external clock input on pins 12 and 30.
Place the jumpers on the TR side for Demand Assigned Multiple Access (DAMA) applications.
4–9
Table 4-7. 50-Pin Connector Pinouts

50-Pin D Connector
Pin # IDR IBS Async D&I
1 GND GND GND GND
2 GND GND GND GND
3 AGC Out AGC Out AGC Out AGC Out
4 RS-422 TXOctA In ESC TXDB In (RS-485 only)
5 RS-422 TXOctB In ESC TXDA In (232 only) ESC TXDA In ESC TXD In (232 only)
(RS-485 and RS-232)
6 RS-422 RXOctA Out ESC RXDB Out (RS-485 only)
7 RS-422 RXOctB Out ESC RXDA Out (232 only) ESC RXDA Out ESC RXD Out (RS-232)
(RS-485 and RS-232)
8 BWO1_C RS-422 RX Oct A
9 BWO2_C RS-422 RX Oct B
10 BWO3_C PRIMARY_C PRIMARY_C
11 BWO4_C SECONDARY_C SECONDARY_C
12 BWAI 1 V.35/RS-422 SCTE/TT-A V.35/RS-422 SCTE/TT A
13 BWAI 2 V.35/RS-422 SCTE/TT-B V.35/RS-422 SCTE/TT B
14 BWAI 3 RS-422 TX Oct A
15 BWAI 4 RS-422 TX Oct B
16 Demod Fault C
17 Def Maint Alrm
18 G.703 SDB In G.703 SDB In G.703 SDB In G.703 SDB In
19 RS-422 ExtClkB In V.35/RS-422 EXCB In V.35/RS-422 EXCB In RS-422 EXCB In
20 G.703 RDB Out G.703 RDB Out G.703 RDB Out G.703 RDB Out
21 RS-422 8k TClkA Out V.35/RS-422 ST-A Out V.35/RS-422 ST-A Out
22 RS-422 8k TClkB Out V.35/RS-422 ST-B Out V.35/RS-422 ST-B Out
23 RS-422 8k RClkA Out V.35/RS-422 RT-A Out V.35/RS-422 RT-A Out
24 RS-422 8k RClkB Out V.35/RS-422 RT-B Out V.35/RS-422 RT-B Out
25 BWO1_NC ESC TCLK Out (RS-232)
26 BWO2_NC ESC RCLK Out (RS-232)
27 BWO3_NC PRIMARY_NC PRIMARY_NC
28 BWO4_NC SECONDARY_NC SECONDARY_NC
29 Aud1-B In (or 64SDB) V.35/RS-422 RTS-B V.35/RS-422 RTS-B
30 Aud1-B Out (or 64RTB) V.35 RLSD/RS-422 RR-B V.35 RLSD/RS-422 RR-B
31 Aud2-B In (or 64STB) V.35/RS-422 CTS-B V.35/RS-422 CTS-B
32 Aud2-B Out (or 64RDB) V.35 DSR/RS-422 DM-B V.35 DSR/RS-422 DM-B
33 DF DF DF DF
34 G.703 SDA In G.703 SDA In G.703 SDA In G.703 SDA In
35 RS-422 ExtClkA In V.35/RS-422 EXCA In V.35/RS-422 EXCA In RS-422 EXCA In
36 G.703 RDA Out G.703 RDA Out G.703 RDA Out G.703 RDA Out
37 RS-422 8k TXDA In V.35/RS-422 SD-A In V.35/RS-422 SD-A In G.703 DDO-A Out
38 RS-422 8k TXDB In V.35/RS-422 SD-B In V.35/RS-422 SD-B In G.703 DDO-B Out
39 RS-422 8k RXDA Out V.35/RS-422 RD-A Out V.35/RS-422 RD-A Out G.703 IDI-A In
40 RS-422 8k RXDB Out V.35/RS-422 RD-B Out V.35/RS-422 RD-B Out G.703 IDI-B In
41 BWO1_NO ESC DSR (RS-232)
42 BWO2_NO
43 BWO3_NO PRIMARY_NO PRIMARY_NO
44 BWO4_NO SECONDARY_NO SECONDARY_NO
45 Aud1-A In (or 64SDA) V.35/RS-422 RTS-A V.35/RS-422 RTS-A
46 Aud1-A Out (or 64RTA) V.35 RLSD/RS-422 RR-A V.35 RLSD/RS-422 RR-A
47 Aud2-A In (or 64STA) V.35/RS-422 CTS-A V.35/RS-422 CTS-A
48 Aud2-A Out (or 64RDA) V.35 DSR/RS-422 DM-A V.35 DSR/RS-422 DM-A ESC DSR (RS-232)
49 MF MF MF MF
50 Demod Fault NO
4–10
Notes:
1. IDR configuration connector pinouts:
a. Backward alarm relay contacts are named for normal no fault conditions
(BWOx-C connected to BWOx-NC if no fault).
b. Backward alarm inputs should be grounded or pulled logic low to clear the
alarm.
c. Signals MF, DF, and DMA are open-collector, high-impedance (if faulted). A
backup protection switch uses MF and DF if the modem is used in a redundant
system.
d. Relay contacts DF-C and DF-NO are named for faulted condition (DF-C
connected to DF-NO, unless demodulator [Demod] fault).
2. D&I/ASYNC interface connector pinouts:
a. With regard to alarm relay contacts, COMM is connected to NO when there is
no fault. COMM is connected to NC in a faulted condition.
b. Signals MF, DF, and DMA are open-collector, high-impedance (if faulted). A
backup protection switch uses MF and DF if the modem is used in a redundant
system.
3. The breakout panel provides the external connections between the modem and the
terrestrial equipment when the modem has a 50-pin connection.
4–11
4.1.4 G.703/ASYNC Interface

The G.703 T1, E1/ASYNC Interface Adapter has three BNC connectors and a 15-pin
subminiature D connector.
• BNC connectors SD (J2) and RD (J3) support the G.703 unbalanced 75Ω TX and RX
data interfaces.
• BNC connector MC (J4) supports the 75Ω unbalanced Master Clock interface.
The 15-pin D connector (J5) supports the G.703 balanced TX and RX data, balanced Master
Clock, Open Collector MOD and DEMOD fault, and asynchronous overhead data interfaces.
Table 4-8 shows the pinouts for the 15-pin D connector.
This interface does not support access to IBS or IDR overhead signals and does not support
D&I.
Table 4-8. G.703/ASYNC Pin Assignments
Pin # Signal
1 SD-
9 SD+
2 GND
4
3 RD-
11 RD+
5 ETXB
12 ETXA
6 ERXB
13 ERXA
7 MC-
8 MC+
10 N.C.
14 MODFLT
15 DMDFLT
4–12
4.1.5 Auxiliary 1 Connector and Pinouts (J9)

The auxiliary 1 (AUX 1) connector provides:
• MOD and DEMOD (TTL) faults

• Satellite clock
• Satellite I&Q
• Automatic Gain Control (AGC) output voltage
The faults are open collector levels that indicate a modulator or demodulator failure. A logic “1”
indicates the faulted condition. AGC_OUT is a programmable voltage, 0 to 10V, for a receive
signal level between -25 and -60 dBm. AUX 1 connection is a 9-pin female D connector (J9)
located on the rear panel of the modem. Screw locks are provided for mechanical security on the
mating connector. Refer to Table 4-9 for pinout information.
Table 4-9. AUX 1 Connector and Pinouts (J9)

1 Satellite Clock - SAT_CLK-
2 No Connection NC
3 Satellite Clock + SAT_CLK+
4 MODULATOR TTL Fault MDFLTTTL
5 Ground GRN
6 RX Q Channel Eye RX_Q
7 DEMODULATOR TTL Fault DFLTTTL
8 RX I Channel Eye RX_I
9 Agc Output AGC
4–13
4.1.6 Alarms Connector and Pinouts (J10)

The alarm connector provides Form C contact closures for alarm reporting. The two Form C
summary fault contacts are Modulator and Demodulator.
The alarm connection is a 9-pin female D connector (J10) located on the rear panel of the modem.
Screw locks are provided for mechanical security on the mating connector. Refer to Table 4-10 for
pinout information.
Table 4-10. Alarms Connector and Pinouts (J10)

1 Alarm 1 is faulted NO
2 COM
3 Alarm 1 is not faulted NC
5 COM
8 COM
• Alarm 1 = Not used

• Alarm 2 = TX
• Alarm 3 = RX
To obtain a system summary alarm, connect all the Form C contacts in parallel.
4.1.7 RF Output Connector (CP1)

CP1 is a BNC connector for the transmit IF signal. The output impedance is 75Ω (50Ω optional),
and the output power level is -5 to -30 dBm, with +5 to -20 dBm optional. In normal operation, the
output will be a {O}QPSK or BPSK modulated result of the Data I/O connector between 50 and
180 MHz, in 1 Hz steps.
4.1.8 RF Input Connector (CP2)

CP2 is a BNC connector for the receive IF signal. The input impedance is 75Ω (50Ω optional). For
normal operation, the desired carrier signal level should be between -30 and -55 dBm. Signals
between 50 and 180 MHz are selected and demodulated to produce clock and data at the Data I/O
connector.
4–14
4.1.9 External Reference (CP3)

CP3 is a BNC connector for an external reference. The input impedance is 75Ω. For normal
operation, the reference signal is ≥ 0 dBm.
Valid External Reference frequencies are 1, 5, 10, and 20 MHz.
4.1.10 Power Entry
4.1.10.1 AC Power Connector

A standard, detachable, non-locking, 3-prong power cord (IEC plug) supplies the Alternating
Current (AC) power to the modem. Observe the following:
Input Power 55W maximum, 40W typical

Input Voltage 90 to 132 or 175 to 264 VAC
Unit switches ranges automatically
Connector Type I.E.C
Fuse Protection 1A slo-blo
Line and neutral fusing
5 mm type fuses
4.1.10.2 48VDC Option

Specifications include:
Input Power 55W maximum, 40W typical

Input Voltage 38 to 64 VDC
Connector Type 20A, 3 screw terminal block
Fuse Protection 2A slo-blo
4.1.11 Ground Connector (GND)

A #10-32 stud on the rear panel of the modem is used for connecting a common chassis ground
among all equipment.
Note: The AC power connector provides the safety ground.
4–15
4–16
Front Panel Operation MN/SDM300A.IOM
Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL

OPERATION
5.1 Front Panel

The modem front panel (Figure 5-1) enables control of modem configuration parameters and
displays the modem status.
Figure 5-1. Front Panel View
The front panel features include:

• 32-character, 2-line LCD display
• 6-button keypad for local control
• 10 LEDs to provide overall status at a glance
All functions are accessible at the front panel by entering one of six pre-defined Function Select
categories or levels:
• Configuration
• Monitor
• Faults/Alarms
• Stored Faults/Alarms
• Remote AUPC (ASYNC mode only)
• Utility
5–1
5.1.1 LED Indicators

The 10 LEDs on the front panel indicate modem summary faults, status, and alarms. Table 5-1
lists the indicators.
Table 5-1. LED Indicators

Name LED Meaning
Faults
Transmit Red A fault condition exists in the transmit chain.
Receive Red A fault condition exists in the receive chain.
Common Red A common equipment fault condition exists.
Stored Yellow A fault has been logged and stored.
The fault may or may not be active.
Status
Power On Green Power is applied to the modem.
Transmitter On Green Transmitter is currently on.
This indicator reflects the actual condition of the transmitter, as opposed
to the programmed condition.
Carrier Detect Green Decoder is locked.
Test Mode Yellow Flashes when the modem is in a test configuration.
Alarms
Transmit Yellow A transmit function is in an alarm condition.
Receive Yellow A receive function is in an alarm condition.
5–2
5.1.2 Front Panel Keypad

The front panel keypad permits local operation of the modem. The keypad consists of six keys
(Figure 5-2).
ENTER
CLEAR
Figure 5-2. Keypad
Each key provides one or more logical functions. These functions are defined in the following
table.
ENTER This key is used to select a displayed function or to execute a modem configuration
change.
CLEAR This key is used to back out of a selection or to cancel a configuration change, which has
not been executed using [ENTER]. Pressing [CLEAR] generally returns the display to the
previous selection.
Left and Right These keys are used to move to the next selection or to move the cursor for certain
Diamond Keys functions.
Note: Throughout this chapter, [←] and [→] are used to indicate left and right diamond
keys.
Top and Bottom These keys are used primarily to change configuration data (numbers). At times, they are
Diamond Keys also used to move from one section to another.
Note: Throughout this chapter, [↑] and [↓] are used to indicate top and bottom diamond
keys.
The modem responds by beeping whenever a key is pressed:
• A single beep indicates a valid entry and the appropriate action was
taken.
• A double beep indicates an invalid entry or a parameter is not

available for operation.
5–3
5.2 Menu System

Note: The menus show features and options that are not available. However, they are shown to
preserve the menu structure and reserve the structure for the future. This does not imply an
intent or obligation to add these features or options in the future.
Use the Main menu in Figure 5-3 as a quick reference for accessing the modem functions.When
the modem power is applied, the base level of the menu system displays the sign-on message:
• Line 1 of the sign-on message is the modem model number and

current modem type and setting.
• Line 2 is the version number of the M&C software.
The main level of the menu system is Function Select. To access this level from the sign-on
message, press the [←] or [→] keys. From the Function Select menu, select one of the functional
categories:
• Configuration
• Monitor
• Faults/Alarms
• Stored Faults/Alarms
• Remote AUPC (ASYNC mode only)
• Utility
Press [←] or [→] to move from one selection to another. When line 2 displays the desired
function, select that level by pressing [ENTER]. After entering the appropriate functional level,
press [←] or [→] to move to the desired function.
To view or change the modem’s configuration, enter the Configuration level from the Function
Select menu. Once in the Configuration menu, press [←] or [→] to scroll through the
Configuration menu selection:
• Modulator
• Demodulator
• Interface
• Local AUPC (ASYNC Mode or Local Modem AUPC only)
• MUX (Optional)
• Flex MUX (Optional)
• Save
• Recall
Press [ENTER] to select the desired Configuration menu option. To view the options for the
selected configuration parameters, press [←] or [→]. To change a configuration parameter, press
[ENTER] to begin the change process.
5–4
Press [↑] or [↓] to change the parameters. After the display represents the correct parameters,
press [ENTER] to execute the change. This action initiates the necessary programming by the
modem.
To undo a parameter change prior to execution, press [CLEAR].
Notes:
1. Menus or commands that are specific to certain modem configurations are only
accessible after selecting the appropriate modem configuration. This prevents
incompatible parameters from accidentally being selected.
2. All of the windows are accessible in the Custom mode. Take caution not to select
incompatible parameters, as the modem does not shut out incompatible command choices
in the Custom mode.
5.3 Revision Emulation Operation

To program an emulation mode from Version 1.1.1 through the current version, use the revision
emulation feature in the Utility Modem Type menu.
Table 5-2. Revision Emulation Operation

Software Version Firmware Rev Description of Change
1.1.1 FW/6535-1 - Original Issue.
2.1.1 FW/6535-1 A Updated menus to reflect current application.
3.1.1 FW/6535-1 B Added reflash capability.
4.1.1 FW/6535-1 C To allow the flex mux to operate in a T1/E1 mode.
4.1.2 FW/6535-1 D Loop timing and clocking in D&I mode.
5.1.1 FW/6535-1 E Added FAST Option OQPSK 1/2, 3/4, and 7/8.
5.1.2 FW/6535-1 F Modem external reference.
6.1.9 FW/6535-1 U Added Turbo.
6.1.11 FW/6535-1 W Updated menus to reflect current application.
7.1.6 FW/6535-1 AA Added Duplex Reed-Solomon
7.1.13 FW/6535-1 AP Updated menus to reflect current application.
5–5
SELECT:
CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION
MODULATOR MODULATOR
DEMODULATOR TX-X CODE RATE/DATA RATE
INTERFACE TX-IF FREQUENCY
LOCAL AUPC TX-IF OUTPUT
MUX TX POWER LEVEL
FLEX MUX SCRAMBLER
SAVE DIFFERENTIAL ENCODER
RECALL CARRIER MODE
MODEM REFERENCE
RS ENCODER
DEMODULATOR
RX-X CODE RATE/DATA RATE
RX-IF FREQUENCY
DESCRAMBLER
DIFFERENTIAL DECODER
RF LOOPBACK
IF LOOPBACK
BER THRESHOLD
SWEEP CENTER
SWEEP RANGE
REACQUISITION
RS DECODER
INTERFACE
TX-CLOCK SOURCE/PHASE
EXT-CLK FREQUENCY
BUFFER CLOCK/SIZE
RX CLOCK PHASE
B-BAND LOOPBACK
INTERFACE LOOPBACK
LOOP TIMING
TX/RX DATA FAULT
TX/RX 2047 PATTERN
TX/RX CODING FORMAT
SERVICE CHANNEL ADJUST
DROP/INSERT FORMAT
DROP/INSERT CHANNEL
ASYNC TX/RX BAND
ASYNC TX/RX LENGTH
ASYNC TX/RX STOP
ASYNC TX/RX PARITY
LOCAL AUPC
AUPC ENABLED
NOMINAL POWER
MINIMUM POWER
MAXIMUM POWER
TARGET Eb/No
TARGET RATE
LOCAL CL ACTION
REMOTE CL ACTION
Figure 5-3. Function Select: Configuration Menu Tree
5–6
5.4 Opening Screen

This screen is displayed whenever power is first applied to the unit.
SDM-300A CUSTOM
VER: X.X.X
Press [→] key to go to the any of the following FUNCTION SELECT menu screens
• CONFIGURATION
• MONITOR
• FAULTS/ALARMS
• STORED FLTS/ALMS
• UTILITY
Note: At any time, pressing CLEAR will return to a main heading.
5.4.1 FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION
FUNCTION SELECT
CONFIGURATION
Press [→] key to go to any of the following sub-menus. Press <ENTER> to review or edit the
menu.
CONFIGURATION MODULATOR Permits the user to fully configure the modulator portion of the
modem.
CONFIGURATION DEMODULATOR Permits the user to fully configure the demodulator portion of
the modem.
CONFIGURATION INTERFACE Permits the user to fully configure the interface portion of the
modem.
CONFIGURATION SAVE Permits the user to fully configure the save portion of the
modem
CONFIGURATION RECALL Permits the user to fully configure the recall portion of the
modem
5–7
5.4.1.1 FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: MODULATOR
CONFIGURATION
MODULATOR
Press <ENTER > to review or edit the following commands.
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: MODULATOR:

TX-X CODE RATE
TX-A QPSK 1/2

64.000 Kbps
TX-B QPSK 1/2

128.000 Kbps
TX-C QPSK 1/2

256.000 Kbps
TX-D QPSK 1/2

512.000 Kbps
TX-V QPSK 1/2

38.400 Kbps
5–8
Upon entry, the current transmitter rate is displayed with the flashing cursor on the first
character of the code rate on line 1. Line 2 displays the data rate. Press [←] or [→] to make the
selection. To select one of the four pre-assigned rates (A, B, C, or D) press [ENTER] and use
the [↑] or [↓] to the desired selection and press [ENTER] to execute the change.
To change the data rate using the variable rate selection, press [ENTER] when TX-V is
displayed. A flashing cursor is displayed on the first character of the coding type on line 1.
Press [←] or [→] to move the flashing cursor, and [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the digit at
the flashing cursor. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Notes:
1. When the TX rate has been programmed, the transmitter is automatically turned off to
prevent swamping of other channels. To turn the transmitter on, use the TX-IF Output
function.
2. Code Rate 3/4 not compatible with a combination of a CSC Closed Modulator Type and
Sequential Encoder.
Code Rate Data Rate Range

Non-Turbo Requirements
BPSK 1/2 2.4 to 1250 kbps
{O}QPSK 1/2 4.8 to 2500 kbps
{O}QPSK 3/4 7.2 to 3750 kbps
{O}QPSK 7/8 8.4 to 4375 kbps
8PSK 2/3 64 to 5000 kbps
{O}QPSK 1/1 9.6 to 5000 kbps
Turbo Requirements
BPSK 21/44 2.4 to 1193.181 kbps
BPSK 5/16 2.4 to 781.25 kbps
{O}QPSK 1/2 4.8 to 2386.363 kbps
{O}QPSK 3/4 7.2 kbps to 3750 kbps
8PSK 3/4 384 to 5000 kbps
Notes:
1. Max Symbol Rate = 2500 ksps.
2. Max Data Rate for Low var. Rate = 512 kbps.
3. OQPSK Option only = OQPSK 1/2, 3/4, or 7/8.
5–9

TX-IF FREQUENCY
TX-IF FREQUENCY
70.000000 MHz
Programs the modiulator TX-IF frequency between 50 and 180 MHz, in 1 Hz steps.
Upon entry, the current transmitter frequency is displayed with the flashing cursor on the first
character. Press [←] or [→] to move the flashing cursor, and [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease
the digit at the flashing cursor. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: When the transmitter frequency is changed, the transmitter is automatically turned off to
prevent the possible swamping of other channels. To turn the transmitter on, use the TX-IF
Output function.
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: MODULATOR: TX-IF

OUTPUT
TX-IF OUTPUT
OFF
Programs the modulator output On or Off. Upon entry, the current status of the output is
displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
5–10

TX POWER LEVEL (CONDITIONAL)
TX POWER LEVEL
+ 0.0 dBm
Conditional: An offset can be added through the Function Select:

Utility menu to remove losses or gains in the system.
IMPORTANT
Programs the modulator output power level ranges within:
-5 to –30 dBm Normal Range

+5 to –20 dBm High Power Option
-129 to +104 dBm User Offset Adjust
Note: The front panel display may be changed in the power-offset utility. Using that function
does not change the actual output power level.
The window displays AUPC_PWR when the AUPC is turned on in the AUPC Configuration
menu. Upon entry, the current transmitter power level is displayed with the flashing cursor on
the first character. Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the output power level in 0.1 dBm
steps. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: The high power oscillator option is +5 to –20 dB.
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: MODULATOR:SCRAMBLER
SCRAMBLER
ON
Programs the scrambler: On or Off. Upon entry, the current status of the scrambler is displayed.
Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
5–11

DIFF. ENCODER
DIFF. ENCODER
ON
Programs the Differential Encoder: On or Off. Upon entry, the current status of the scrambler is
Always Off in Turbo mode.

IMPORTANT

CARRIER MODE
CARRIER MODE
NORMAL-MODULATED
Programs the modem for alternate carrier modes.
All modes, except Normal-Modulated are Test Modes.

IMPORTANT
Four modes of operation are available:
NORMAL-MODULATED This mode is normally selected.
CENTER-CW Generates a CW-carrier at the current modulator frequency. This can be used to
measure the output frequency
DUAL-CW Generates a dual side band suppressed carrier signal. Side bands are at one-half of
the symbol rate from the carrier. This is used to check the channel balance and
carrier null.
OFFSET-CW Generates a single, upper, side-band-suppressed carrier signal. The upper side band
is at one-quarter of the symbol rate from the carrier. When inverted spectrum is
selected, this generates a single, lower, side-band-suppressed carrier.
Upon entry, the Center mode is displayed. To activate this test mode, press [ENTER]. Press [↑]
or [↓] to select the desired mode. To return to the Configuration menu, press [CLEAR].
Note: When [CLEAR] is pressed, the modem is configured to the state before CW mode was
invoked. The transmitter is automatically turned off to prevent the possible swamping of other
channels. To turn the transmitter on, use the IF Output function.
5–12

MODEM REFERENCE
MODEM REFERENCE
INTERNAL
Select one of the following:
INTERNAL
EXT 1 MHz (see Note)
EXT 5MHZ (see Note)
EXT 10MHZ (see Note)
EXT 20 MHZ (see Note)
OUPUT 10 MHz (High Stability Option only)
Note: If any EXT REF is selected for the modem reference and there is no input to CP3, the
modem will detect an alarm and automatically switch to the internal clock.
Upon entry, the INTERNAL mode is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection. Press
[ENTER] to execute the change.

RS ENCODER (CONDITIONAL)
RS ENCODER
OFF
Conditional: Reed-Solomon option only.

Programming the Reed-Solomon Encoder automatically turns off the RF transmitter
(because of symbol rate changes). If none of the proper overhead types and data rates
IMPORTANT apply, the Reed-Solomon encoder program in the on state will be rejected (double beep).
Programs the Reed-Solomon Encoder: On or Off. Upon entry, the current status of the Reed-Solomon
encoder is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
5–13
5.4.1.2 FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: DEMODULATOR
CONFIGURATION
DEMODULATOR
Press <ENTER > to review or edit the subsequent commands.
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: DEMODULATOR:

RX-X CODE RATE
RX-A QPSK 1/2

64.000 Kbps
RX-B QPSK 1/2

128.000 Kbps
RX-C QPSK 1/2

256.000 Kbps
RX-D QPSK 1/2

512.000 Kbps
RX-V QPSK 1/2

38.400 Kbps
5–14
Upon entry, the current transmitter rate is displayed with the flashing cursor on the first
character of the code rate on line 1. Line 2 displays the data rate. Press [←] or [→] to make the
selection. To select one of the four pre-assigned rates (A, B, C, or D) press [ENTER] and use
the [↑] or [↓] to the desired selection and press [ENTER] to execute the change.
To change the data rate using the variable rate selection, press [ENTER] when RX-V is
displayed. A flashing cursor is displayed on the first character of the coding type on line 1.
Press [←] or [→] to move the flashing cursor, and [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the digit at
the flashing cursor. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: Code Rate 3/4 not compatible with a combination of a CSC Closed Modulator Type and
Sequential Encoder.

Non-Turbo Requirements
{O}QPSK 1/2 4.8 to 2500 kbps
{O}QPSK 3/4 7.2 to 3750 kbps
{O}QPSK 7/8 8.4 to 4375 kbps
8PSK 2/3 64 to 5000 kbps
{O}QPSK 1/1 9.6 to 5000 kbps
Turbo Requirements
BPSK 21/44 2.4 to 1193.181 kbps
BPSK 5/16 2.4 to 781.25 kbps
{O}QPSK 1/2 4.8 to 2386.363 kbps
{O}QPSK 3/4 7.2 kbps to 3750 kbps
8PSK 3/4 384 to 5000 kbps
Notes:
1. Max Symbol Rate = 2500 ksps.
2. Max Data Rate for Low var. Rate = 512 kbps.
3. OQPSK Option only = OQPSK 1/2, 3/4, or 7/8.
5–15

RX-IF FREQUENCY
RX-IF FREQUENCY
70.000000 MHz
Programs the demodulator RX-IF Frequency: 50 To 180 MHz, In 1 Hz Steps. Upon entry, the current
receive frequency is displayed with the flashing cursor on the first character. Press [←] or [→] to move
the flashing cursor, and [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the digit at the flashing cursor. Press [ENTER]
to execute the change.
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: DEMODULATOR: DESCRAMBLER
DESCRAMBLER
ON
Programs the Descrambler: On or Off. Upon entry, the current status of the descrambler is displayed.
Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.

DIFF. DECODER
DIFF. DECODER
ON
Programs the Differential Decoder: On or Off. Upon entry, the current status of the differential decoder is
Always Off in Turbo mode.

IMPORTANT
5–16

RF LOOP BACK
RF LOOP BACK
OFF
This is a Test Mode.

IMPORTANT
Programs the RF Loopback Operation: On or Off. Upon entry, the current status of the RF
loopback is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection. Press [ENTER] to execute the
change.
When RF loopback is turned on, the demodulator is programmed to the same frequency as the
modulator. When RF loopback is turned off, the demodulator is tuned to the previous
frequency. RF loopback nullifies IF loopback. Figure 5-4 shows a block diagram of RF
loopback operation.
CUSTOMER IBSDATA
or IDR ENCODER/ TX = 70 MHz TRANSMIT RF
DATA INTERFACE MODULATOR EQUIPMENT
ANTENNA
REMOTE SERIAL
INTERFACE MICRO-
COMPUTER POWER SUPPLY AC POWER
FAULT INDICATORS
RX = 73 MHz
DEMODULATOR/ RECEIVE RF
DECODER RF LBK = 70 MHz EQUIPMENT
LOOPBACK CHANGES DEMOD

RECEIVE FREQUENCY TO
70 MHz WITHOUT LOSING
ORIGINAL PROGRAMMING
SATELLITE MODEM INFORMATION.
Figure 5-4. RF Loopback
Note: When RF loopback is turned on, the demodulator receive frequency is programmed to be the same frequency as
the modulator transmit frequency. This test mode will verify the satellite link without changing the programmed
frequency of the demodulator. When RF loopback is turned off, the demodulator is programmed back to the previous
frequency.
5–17

IF LOOP BACK
IF LOOP BACK
OFF

IMPORTANT
Programs the IF Loopback Operation: On or Off. When IF loopback is turned on, the
demodulator input is connected to the modulator output through an internal attenuator. The
demodulator is programmed to the same frequency as the modulator. An attenuator within the
modem connects the IF Out to the IF In. When IF loopback is turned off, the demodulator is
tuned to the previous frequency and is reconnected to the IF input. IF loopback nullifies RF
loopback.
Figure 5-5 shows a block diagram of IF loopback operation.
CUSTOMER IBS, IDR or 308-2 ENCODER/ TRANSMIT RF

DATA INTERFACE MODULATOR EQUIPMENT
REMOTE SERIAL
ANTENNA
INTERFACE MICRO-
FAULT INDICATORS
DECODER EQUIPMENT
SATELLITE MODEM
Figure 5-5. IF Loopback
Note: When IF loopback is turned on, the demodulator is looped back to the modulator inside the modem and the
demodulator is programmed to the same frequency as the modulator. This test mode will verify the operation of the
modem. When IF loopback is turned off, the demodulator is programmed back to the previous frequency and is
reconnected to the IF input.
5–18

BER THRESHOLD
BER THRESHOLD
NONE
Sets the BER threshold. If the BER threshold set is exceeded, a receive fault will be indicated
by the modem status indicators. BER threshold may be set from 1.0 E-3 to 1.0 E-8, or may be
disabled by specifying NONE.
pon entry, the current setting of the BER threshold is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to select the
desired setting. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.

SWEEP CENTER
SWEEP CENTER
+ 0 Hz
Programs the Sweep Center Frequency Range: -35,000 to +35,000 Hz. When in directed sweep,
the value from the sweep monitor screen (when the modem was last locked) should be entered
for the sweep center frequency.
5–19

SWEEP RANGE
SWEEP RANGE
60000 Hz
Programs the overall travel of the sweep width range during acquisition in the directed sweep
mode. The sweep width may be set from 0 to 70,000 Hz. When set at 70000 Hz, the modem is
in the normal acquisition mode. The smaller the range, the faster the modem will lock, provided
the receive carrier center frequency is within the RX IF frequency sweep range.
Upon entry, the current programmed setting is displayed. Press [←] or [→] to move the flashing
cursor. Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the digit at the flashing cursor. Press [ENTER] to
execute the change.

REACQUISITION
REACQUISITION
0 SECONDS
Programs the sweep reacquisition mode time duration. This is the time that the modem will
remain in a narrow sweep after loss of acquisition. After this timer runs out, the modem will
return to the normal acquisition sweep. The reacquisition time is 0 to 999 seconds.
Upon entry, the current programmed setting is displayed with a flashing cursor on the first
character. Press [←] or [→] to move the flashing cursor. Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease
the digit at the flashing cursor. Select the number of seconds desired for the reacquisition mode.
Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
5–20

RS DECODER (CONDITIONAL)
RS DECODER
OFF
Programs the Reed-Solomon Decoder: On, Correction Off, or Off.
Upon entry, the current status of the Reed-Solomon decoder is displayed. Use [↑] or [↓] to
select one of the following modes:
ON Enables the Reed-Solomon decoder to provide data error corrections.
CORRECTION_OFF Turns off the Reed-Solomon decoder data error correction circuitry. Data
flow is then routed through normal data paths without error corrections.
OFF The RS decoder is normally disabled (off position). To execute any of the
Reed-Solomon decoder modes, enter the desired Reed-Solomon decoder
and select the desired mode.
If none of the proper overhead types or data rates apply, the Reed-
Solomon decoder in the on state will be rejected (double beep). With
the Reed-Solomon decoder turned on (not off or Correction off), the
IMPORTANT corrected BER will be reported from the outer decoder (Reed-Solomon
decoder).
5–21
5.4.1.3 FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE
CONFIGURATION
INTERFACE
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE:

TX CLOCK SOURCE
TX CLOCK SOURCE
TX TERRESTRIAL
Programs the clock source for the modem transmitter clock to the following configurations:
TX TERRESTRIAL Sets the TX clock to recover timing from the incoming clock/data.
SCT (INTERNAL) Sets the TX clock to operate from the modem internal clock (this is also the
fallback clock).
Note: When loop timing is enabled, SCT (LOOP) is displayed instead of SCT
(INTERNAL).
EXT. CLOCK/DATA CLOCK Sets the TX clock to operate from the external clock on the data I/O connector.
Ext Clock: TX Data Rate and Ext.Clock frequency shall match or ASLT option.
The correct frequency must be programmed into EXT-CLK FREQ.
Upon entry, the current transmit clock setting is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make the
selection. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
5–22

TX CLOCK PHASE
TX CLOCK PHASE
AUTO
Transmit Clock Phase: AUTO, NORMAL, or INVERT
Note: AUTO is the default.
Upon entry, the current setting of the TX clock phase is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make the
selection. When AUTO is selected, the modem will automatically select NORMAL or INVERT
to properly phase the TX clock with the TX data. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE:EXT-CLK FREQ
EXT-CLK FREQ
1544.000 KHz
Programs the EXT REF clock input frequency between 8.000 to 10000.000 kHz.
Note: The clock rate shall be equal to the data rate unless the asymmetrical loop timing option
is present.
This clock frequency can be any multiple of 600 Hz from 2.4 to 64 kHz, and can be any
multiple of 8 kHz from 64 kHz to 4.376 MHz. This can be used for the Doppler/plesiochronous
buffer clock. It can be a referenced to SCT. Use the master clock input on J8 for the external
master clock . The external reference on CP3 only allows for 1, 5, 10, and 20 MHz external
reference input.
Upon entry, the current setting for the external clock is displayed. Press [←] or [→] to increase
or decrease the digit at the flashing cursor. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
5–23

BUFFER CLOCK (CONDITIONAL)
BUFFER CLOCK
RX (SATELLITE)
Programs the interface buffer output clock to one of the following modes:
RX (SATELLITE) Sets the output buffer clock to the satellite clock.
SCT (INTERNAL) Sets the buffer clock to operate from the modem internal clock. This is also the fallback clock.
EXT. CLOCK Sets this clock source to the external clock.
TX TERRESTRIAL Sets the buffer output clock to recover timing from the incoming TX data clock.
INSERT CLOCK Selects the recovered clock from the insert data input received from the terrestrial equipment.
Upon entry, the current setting of the plesiochronous buffer clock is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓]
to make the selection. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: Insert Clock selection is only available when D&I overhead is enabled as the RX
Overhead type or when Modem Type is D&I.
5–24
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE: BUFFER SIZE

(CONDITIONAL)
Conditional: The Bits or Milliseconds menu is displayed depending

upon whether Bits or Milliseconds is selected under the Utility:
IMPORTANT Interface Buffer Program menu.
BUFFER SIZE
384 BITS
BUFFER SIZE
6 MILLI SECONDS
Sets the size of the buffer in either Bits or Milliseonds.
Upon entry, the current buffer length is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to select the desired buffer
size. The buffer size is displayed in seconds or bits. Enter the Utility: Interface menu to change
the buffer units to seconds or bits.
If selecting seconds, choose from 1 to 99 ms, in increments of 1 ms ≤ 2.6 Mbps or 0

(Bypass).
If selecting bits, choose from 32 to 262144 bits, in increments of 16 bits.
When D&I is selected for modem type, the buffer units are automatically set to ms. The user
may select as follows:
For Receive D&I overhead:

E1CAS format nn = 7.5, 15, or 30 (milli-seconds)
T1IBS/T1S/T1ESFS format nn = 6, 12, 24, or 30 (milli-seconds)
all other D&I formats nn = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 (milli-seconds)
Note: To have the modem calculate the plesiochronous shift, set the buffer units to ms. When a
specific buffer depth is desired, set the buffer units to bits. Select bits or ms from the Utility:
Interface menu.
5–25

BUFFER CENTER
BUFFER CENTER
YES / NO
This command is used to center the buffer. Choose YES and press [ENTER] twice to center the
buffer.
Press [ENTER} twice to center the buffer.

RX CLOCK PHASE
RX CLOCK PHASE
NORMAL
Sets the Receive Clock Phase in either the Normal or Invert position.
Upon entry, the current status of the RX Clock is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make the
5–26

B-BAND LOOP BACK
B-BAND LOOP BACK

OFF

IMPORTANT
Baseband Loopback Operation: On or Off
When baseband loopback is turned on, the data and timing signals are switched from the
demodulator to the modulator on the modem side of the interface. The DTE baseband signals
are also looped back from the transmitter data and clock to receiver data and clock on the
customer side of the interface. This is a bi-directional loopback of the baseband data. Refer to
Figure 5-6 for a block diagram of baseband loopback operation.
IBS OR IDR
CUSTOMER ENCODER/ TRANSMIT RF
DATA MODULATOR EQUIPMENT
INTERFACE
ANTENNA
REMOTE SERIAL
INTERFACE
MICRO-
FAULT INDICATORS
DECODER EQUIPMENT
SATELLITE MODEM
Figure 5-6. Baseband Loopback
Note: When baseband loopback is turned on, data is looped back on the customer side of the interface. This is a bi-directional loopback of
the baseband data. This test mode will verify the customer equipment and cabling between the modem and the customer equipment. The
baseband loopback is not bi-directional in D&I.
5–27

INTRFC LOOP BACK
INTRFC LOOP BACK

OFF
Interface Loopback Operation: On or Off
Note: This command is available only when the overhead interface PCB or Reed-Solomon PCB
is installed.
When INTERFACE LOOPBACK is turned on, data is looped back at the modem side of the
interface. This is a bi-directional loop back of the data after the base band data has had the
overhead added. Refer to Figure 5-7 for the interface loopback block diagram.
Upon entry, the current status is displayed. [↑] or [↓] to make the selection. Press [ENTER] to
execute the change.
IBS or IDR
CUSTOMER ENCODER/ TRANSMIT RF
DATA MODULATOR EQUIPMENT
INTERFACE
ANTENNA
REMOTE SERIAL
INTERFACE MICRO- AC POWER
POWER SUPPLY
COMPUTER
FAULT INDICATORS
DECODER EQUIPMENT
SATELLITE MODEM
Figure 5-7. Interface Loopback
Note: When interface loopback is turned on, data is looped back on the modem side of the interface. This is a
bi-directional loopback of the data after the baseband data had the 16/15 overhead added. This test mode will
verify the internal channel unit interface operation.
5–28
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE:LOOP TIMING
LOOP TIMING
OFF
Loop Timing: On or Off
Programs the transmit clocking to the RX satellite clock.
TX and RX data rates must be equal unless the asymmetrical loop timing option is enabled.
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE:TX DATA FAULT

(CONDITIONAL)
TX DATA FAULT
NONE
Conditional: This command is only available when the overhead

interface PCB is installed.
IMPORTANT This is a test mode.
TtRANSMIT DATA FAULT. Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection. Press [ENTER] to execute
the change.
NONE The transmit interface fault Data/AIS is not activated.
ALARM INDICATION SIGNAL Sets transmit interface fault Data/AIS to monitor a fault
(AIS) condition of all 1s from customer data input to the modem.
DATA Sets transmit interface fault Data/AIS to monitor a fault

condition of all 1s or 0s. This is referred to as a data-stable
condition, which means that the data is not transitioning.
5–29
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE: RX DATA

FAULT (CONDITIONAL)
RX DATA FAULT
NONE

IMPORTANT
Receive data fault. Select a receive interface fault monitor of NONE, AIS, or DATA.
The data monitored for RX data is coming from the satellite.
NONE The receive interface fault Data/AIS is not activated.
ALARM INDICATION SIGNAL (AIS) Sets receive interface fault Data/AIS to monitor a fault condition of all 1s from
customer data input to the modem.
DATA Sets receive interface fault Data/AIS to monitor a fault condition of all 1s or 0s. This
is referred to as a data-stable condition, which means that the data is not
transitioning.

TX 2047 PATTERN (CONDITIONAL)
TX 2047 PATTERN
OFF

IMPORTANT This is a Test Mode.
Programs the transmitter to On or off to insert a 2047 pattern instead of the normal transmit
data. Upon entry, the current status is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection. Press
5–30
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE:RX 2047

PATTERN (CONDITIONAL)
RX 2047 PATTERN
OFF

IMPORTANT interface PCB is installed.
Programs the modem to receive a 2047 pattern as the normal receive data, and allows the BER
monitor to work on that 2047 pattern. Upon entry, the current status is displayed. Press [↑] or
[↓] to select on or off. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE:TX CODING

FORMAT (CONDITIONAL)
TX CODING FORMAT
AMI
Conditional: this menu is only available when the TX G.703 interface is

programmed. This requires that the optional Overhead card is installed.
IMPORTANT
Programs the transmitter for B8ZS, AMI (T1), or HDB3 (E1) coding of the baseband data.
Upon entry, the current coding format is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection. Press
5–31
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE:RX CODING

RX CODING FORMAT
AMI
Conditional: This menu is only available when the RX G.703 interface is

programmed. This requires that the optional Overhead card is installed.
IMPORTANT
Programs the receiver for B8ZS, AMI (T1), or HDB3 (E1) coding. Upon entry, the current
coding format is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection. Press [ENTER] to execute the
change.

SERVICE CHANNEL ADJUST
SERVICE CHANNEL
ADJUST
Conditional: this menu is only available when IDR has been selected
for modem type in the Utility menu and the Overhead card is installaed.
IMPORTANT
This configuration function is used to set service channel audio levels at TX-1, TX-2, RX-1 or
RX-2 (+10.0 to -20.0 dBm)
Upon entry, press [←] or [→] to select the desired service channel. To adjust the service
channel level, press [ENTER]. Press [↑] or [↓] to adjust the service channel. Press [ENTER] to
execute the change.
5–32
Examples:
CHANNEL: TX-1
LEVEL = -5 dBm
CHANNEL: TX-2
LEVEL = -5 dBm
CHANNEL: RX-1
LEVEL = -5 dBm
CHANNEL: RX-2
LEVEL = -5 dBm
5–33
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE:DROP FORMAT

(CONDITIONAL)
DROP FORMAT
T1
Conditional: The menu is only available when the optional D&I have
been selected for Modem Type in the Utility menu and the Overhead
IMPORTANT card is installed.
Select the desired drop data channel signaling. The choices are:
E1-CCS E1 Common Channel Signaling

E1-CAS E1 Channel Associated Signaling
E1-31-TS E1 No Multiframe Sync Alignment
T1 T1 Data (D4)
T1-ESF T1 Extended Super Frame
T1-S T1 Special Signaling
T1-ESF-S T1 Extended Super Frame Special Signaling
Upon entry, the current drop data channel signal is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make the
5–34
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE:INSERT

INSERT FORMAT
T1
Select the desired insert data channel signaling. The choices are:
E1-CCS E1 Common Channel Signaling

E1-CAS E1 Channel Associated Signaling
E1-31-TS E1 No Multiframe Sync Alignment
T1 T1 Data (D4)
T1-ESF T1 Extended Super Frame
T1-S T1 Special Signaling
T1-ESF-S T1 Extended Super Frame Special Signaling
Upon entry, the current insert data channel signal is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make the
5–35
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE:DROP

CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS (CONDITIONAL)
DROP CHANNEL
ASSIGNMENTS
Program the drop channels into one of the following time slots:
DROP SAT CHANNEL TERR For T1, T1_ESF, T1_S, T1_ESF_S

DROP SAT T-SLOT TERR For all other formats
Upon entry, drop channel 1 and the current time slot are displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to select the
drop channel to be programmed.
Press [ENTER] to begin programming. Press [↑] or [↓] to select the time slot for each available
drop channel by increasing or decreasing the digit at the flashing cursor. Press [ENTER] to
execute the change.
DROP SAT -----> 1

CHANNEL TERR -> 1
DROP SAT -----> 1

T-SLOT TERR -> 1
5–36
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE:INSERT

CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS (CONDITIONAL)
INSERT CHANNEL
ASSIGNMENTS
Program the satellite channels into one of the following desired terrestrial frame slots:
INSERT SAT CHANNEL TERR For T1, T1_ESF, T1_S, T1_ESF_S

INSERT SAT T-SLOT TERR For all other formats
Upon entry, satellite channel 1 and the current terrestrial frame slot are displayed. Press [↑] or
[↓] to select the satellite channel to be programmed. Press [ENTER] to choose the satellite
channel to be programmed. Press [↑] or [↓] to select the terrestrial frame slot for each available
satellite channel by increasing or decreasing the digit at the flashing cursor. If a time slot is
unused, select NI (Not Inserted). Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
INSERT SAT ---> 1

CHANNEL TERR -> 1
INSERT SAT ---> 1

T-SLOT TERR -> 1
5–37
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE:ASYNC TX

BAUD (CONDITIONAL)
ASYNC TX BAUD
110 bps
Conditional: The menu is only available when the Modem Type =

ASYNC and requires that the Overhead card is installed.
IMPORTANT
Programs the ASYNC Overhead Transmit Baud Rates (bps): 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
Upon entry, the current status of the ASYNC TX baud rate is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to
select one of the baud rates. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE: ASYNC RX

BAUD (CONDITIONAL)
ASYNC RX BAUD
110 bps

IMPORTANT
ASYNC Overhead Receive Baud Rates (bps): 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400
Upon entry, the current status of the ASYNC RX baud rate is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to
select one of the baud rates. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
5–38
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE: ASYNC TX

LENGTH (CONDITIONAL)
ASYNC TX LENGTH
7 BITS

IMPORTANT
Programs the ASYNC Overhead Transmit Word Length: 5, 6, 7 or 8 bits
Upon entry, the current status of the ASYNC TX word length is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to
make the selection. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE:ASYNX RX

LENGTH (CONDITIONAL)
ASYNC RX LENGTH
7 BITS

IMPORTANT
Programs the ASYNC Overhead Receive Word Length: 5, 6, 7 or 8 bits
Upon entry, the current status of the ASYNC RX word length is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to
make the selection. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
5–39
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION:

INTERFACE:ASYNC TX STOP (CONDITIONAL)
ASYNC TX STOP
2 BITS

IMPORTANT
Programs the ASYNC Overhead Transmit Stop Bits: 1 or 2.
Upon entry, the current status of the ASYNC TX stop bits is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make
the selection. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE: ASYNC RX

STOP (CONDITIONAL)
ASYNC RX STOP
2 BITS

IMPORTANT
Programs the ASYNC Overhead Receive Stop Bits: 1 or 2.
Upon entry, the current status of the ASYNC RX stop bits make the selection. Press [ENTER]
to execute the change.
5–40
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE: ASYNC TX

PARITY (CONDITIONAL)
ASYNC TX PARITY
EVEN

IMPORTANT
Programs the ASYNC Overhead Transmit Parity: Even, Odd, or None
Upon entry, the current status of the ASYNC TX parity is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: INTERFACE:ASYNC RX

PARITY (CONDITIONAL)
ASYNC RX PARITY
EVEN

IMPORTANT
Programs the Receive Parity: Even, Odd, or None
Upon entry, the current status of the ASYNC RX parity is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make
5–41
5.4.1.4 FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: LOCAL AUPC

(CONDITIONAL)
CONFIGURATION
LOCAL AUPC
Conditional: This menu is displayed when Local Modem AUPC = ON

located under the Utility: Modem Type menu.
IMPORTANT
The menu is available in several modes:
Self-Monitoring AUPC with 1 In this mode ASYNC is not used. This does not require the Overhead card or
Modem: the Reed-Solomon cards.
Remote AUPC between 2 Modems: The optional Overhead card is installed and the Modem Type is ASYNC
located under the Utility: Modem Type menu. In this mode ASYNC is available
or,
The optional Reed-Solomon cards are installed and the Modem Type is AUPC
located under Utility: Modem Type menu.
Press [ENTER] to review or edit sub-menus that follow. The selections are On or Off.
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: LOCAL AUPC:

AUPC ENABLE (CONDITIONAL)
AUPC ENABLE
OFF

IMPORTANT
Programs the AUPC: ON or OFF.
Upon entry, the current status is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection. Press
5–42

NOMINAL POWER (CONDITIONAL)
NOMINAL POWER
-10.0 dBm

IMPORTANT
Programs AUPC Nominal Power Value Range: -5 to -30 dBm, in 0.5 dBm steps
Upon entry, the current nominal power value is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or
decrease the digit at the flashing cursor. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.

MINIMUM POWER (CONDITIONAL)
MINIMUM POWER
-30.0 dBm

IMPORTANT
Programs the AUPC Minimum Power Level Range: -5 to –30 dBm, in 0.5 dBm steps.
Programs the minimum power level of the AUPC. Upon entry, the current minimum power
value is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the digit at the flashing cursor. Press
5–43

MAXIMUM POWER (CONDITIONAL)
MAXIMUM POWER
-5.0 dBm

IMPORTANT
Programs the AUPC Maximum Power Level Range: -5 to –30 dBm, in 0.5 dBm steps
Programs the maximum power level of the AUPC. Upon entry, the current maximum power
value is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the digit at the flashing cursor. Press

TARGET Eb/No (CONDITIONAL)
TARGET EB/NO
6.0 dB

IMPORTANT Manufacturer does not recommend a setting greater than 15.5 dB.
Programs Eb/N0 Target Set Point Range: 3.2 to 16.0 dB, in 0.1 dB steps
Programs the Eb/N0 target set point. Upon entry, the current value is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓]
to increase or decrease the digit at the flashing cursor. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
5–44

TRACKING RATE (CONDITIONAL)
TARGET RATE
0.5 dB/Min

IMPORTANT
Programs Maximum Tracking Rate Range: 0.5 to 6.0 dBm/minute, in 0.5 dBm/minute steps
Programs the maximum tracking rate of the AUPC. Upon entry, the current value is displayed.
Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the digit at the flashing cursor. Press [ENTER] to
execute the change.

LOCAL CL ACTION (CONDITIONAL)
LOCAL CL ACTION
HOLD
Conditional: This menu is displayed when Local Modem AUPC =- ON

IMPORTANT
Programs the Local Carrier Loss: HOLD, NOMINAL, or MAXIMUM
Upon entry, the current value is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to change the value at the flashing
cursor. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
5–45

REMOTE CL ACTION (CONDITIONAL)
REMOTE CL ACTION
HOLD

IMPORTANT
Programs the Remote Carrier Loss:
HOLD Upon Carrier Loss (CL) the carrier level remains at the level just before carrier loss.
NOMINAL Upon CL the TX Carrier Level reverts to the Nominal Power Level programmed under
Configuration: Local AUPC: Nominal Power.
MAXIMUM Upon CL the TX Carrier level is programmed to the level programmed under
Configuration: Local AUPC: Maximum Power.
5–46
5.4.1.5 FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: MUX

(OPTIONAL/CONDITIONAL)
Conditional: This menu is available only if the optional MUX card

(slot #1) is installed.
IMPORTANT
CONFIGURATION
MUX
The multiplexer (MUX) system provides for 1 to 8 tributary channels to be multiplexed onto a
single aggregate carrier. Independent tributary data rates from 600 bps to 4000 kbps in 100 bps
increments are supported. This option is used primarily with the SDR-54A receiver, that has the
8-channel DEMUX board installed.
Up to 8 tributaries can be configured. For each tributary, choose the following:
• Data Rate
• Interface Type
• Mode
• ASYNC Format
• Clock
• Data Phase
5–47
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: MUX:TRIBUTARY #N
TRIBUTARY #N
2048.0Kbps RS422
N = 1 through 7
TRIBUTARY #8
DISABLED RS232
Range: 0.6 to 4000.0 kbps (in 100 bps steps) or DISABLED, RS232, or RS422
Select the tributary number (1 through 8), data rate (0.6 to 4000 kbps), and interface type
(RS-232 or RS-422). Repeat these selections for up to 8 tributaries.
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: MUX:TRIBUTARY #N
TRIBUTARY #N
CLK:NRM DATA:NRM
N = 1 through 8
NRM or INV (for both clock and data phase)
Select the clock type and data phase type for each tributary.
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: MUX:TRIBUTARY#N
TRIBUTARY #N
MD: SYNC AF:7E2
N = 1 through 8
MODE: SYNC or ASYNC ASYNC FORMAT: 7E1, 7O1, 7N2, 7E2, 7O2, 8N1 or 8N2
5–48
Select the mode. If ASYNC is chosen, select the ASYNC FORMAT as well.
Note: If only 4-Channel SYNC/ASYNC is enabled, only tributaries 1 to 4 will be displayed.
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: MUX:

AGGREGATE DATA RATE
AGGREGATE DR
2305.3 Kbps
3.7 to 4001.3 kbps > 4001.3 or < 3.7 kbps, status only
The aggregate data rate is the sum of all tributary data rates plus the multiplex overhead
5.4.1.6 FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: FLEX MUX

(OPTIONAL/CONDITIONAL)
CONFIGURATION
FLEX MUX
Conditional:This menu is available only if the optional FLEX MUX

card is installed, and Modem Type = CUSTOM with Overhead Type =
IMPORTANT FLEX MUX.
Flex Mux is offered as a factory or field installed interface. Simultaneous operation of a main
data channel and three overhead channels are supported. The main data channel is a G.703 type
electrical interface at E1 (2048 kbps) or T1 (1544 kbps) terrestrial data rate and supports both
pass through and D&I modes of operation. AUPC, ASYNC data and voice channels are
supported in the three overhead channels.
• Channel (Main Data) # 1: G.703, E1 or T1

• Channel (Overhead) # 2: ADPCM (Audio)
• Channel (Overhead) # 3: EIA-232, EIA-422, or AUPC
• Channel (Overhead) # 4: EIA-232, EIA-485 or AUPC
The modulator and demodulator data rates are status only. Only the code rate can be changed.
The data rate displayed includes data rates of all channels plus 1.3 kbps (if applicable) fixed
overhead. When calculating the symbol rate based on the programmed code rate, D&I overhead
(16/15 if enabled) and Reed-Solomon overhead (126/112 or 219/201 if enabled) must be
included.
5–49
FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: FLEX MUX:

TX CHAN #1 MODE
TX CHAN #1 MODE
D&I ENABLED
TX CHANNEL 1 MODE: D&I ENABLED, T1/E1 ENABLED, or DISABLED
Normal D&I/G.703 menus are operational.

TX CHAN #1 DATA RATE
TX CHAN #1 DR
64.0 Kbps
TX CHANNEL 1 DATA RATES: 1544.0 Kbps or 2048.0 Kbps for bypass

N * 64.0 Kbps for D&I
Note: DR command is not displayed if DISABLED was selected for MODE.

TX CHAN #2 MODE
TX CHAN #2 MODE
ADPCM ENABLED
TX CHANNEL 2 MODE: ADPCM ENABLED or ADPCM DISABLED
This command enables ADPCM 32Kbps operation.
5–50

TX CHAN #3 MODE
TX CHAN #3 MODE
SYNC RS422
TX CHANNEL 3 MODE: ASYNC RS232, SYNC RS232, ASYNC RS422, SYNC RS422,
AUPC, or DISABLED
Async communications are fixed at 10 bits per word.
AUPC can be enabled only on either Tributary 3 or Tributary 4. The AUPC channel operates at
600 bps.

TX CHAN #3 DR
64.0 Kbps
SYNC RS422: 0.6 to 4000.0 kbps

All other modes: 0.6 to 64.0 kbps
Channels 3 and 4 data rates are in steps of 100 bps.
Note: DR command is not displayed if AUPC or DISABLED were selected for MODE.

TX CHAN #3 PHASE
TX CHAN #3 PHASE
CLK:NRM DATA:NRM
TX CHANNEL 3 PHASE: NRM or INV (for both clock and data phase)
Note: PHASE command is not displayed if AUPC or DISABLED were selected for MODE.
5–51

TX CHAN #4 MODE
TX CHAN #4 MODE
ASYNC RS485
TX CHANNEL 4 MODE: ASYNC RS232, SYNC RS232, ASYNC RS485,

AUPC, or DISABLED
Async communications are fixed at 10 bits per word.
AUPC can be enabled only on either Tributary 3 or Tributary 4. The AUPC channel operates at
600 bps.

TX CHAN #4 DR
9.6 Kbps
TX CHANNEL 4 DATA RATE: 0.6 to 64.0 kbps
Channels 3 and 4 data rates are in steps of 100 bps.

TX CHAN #4 PHASE
TX CHAN #4 PHASE
CLK:NRM DATA:NRM
TX CHANNEL 4 PHASE: NRM or INV (for both clock and data phase)
Note: PHASE command is not displayed if AUPC or DISABLED were selected for MODE.
5–52

RX CHAN #1 MODE
RX CHAN #1 MODE
D&I ENABLED
RECEIVE CHANNEL 1 MODE: D&I ENABLED, T1/E1 ENABLED, or DISABLED
Normal D&I/G.703 menus are operational.

RX CHAN #1 DATA RATE
RX CHAN #1 DR
64.0 Kbps
RECEIVE CHANNEL 1 DATA RATE: 1544.0 Kbps or 2048.0 Kbps for bypass,
N * 64.0 Kbps for D&I
Note: DR command is not displayed if DISABLED was selected for MODE.

RX CHAN #2 MODE
RX CHAN #2 MODE
ADPCM DISABLED
RECEIVE CHANNEL 2 MODE: ADPCM ENABLED or ADPCM DISABLED
Allows ADPCM 32Kbps operation.

RX CHAN #3 MODE
RX CHAN #3 MODE
SYNC RS422
5–53
RECEIVE CHANNEL 3 MODE: ASYNC RS232, SYNC RS232, ASYNC RS422, SYNC
RS422,AUPC, or DISABLED

RX CHAN #3 DR
64.0 Kbps
RECEIVE CHANNEL 3 DATA RATE: SYNC RS422: 0.6 to 4000.0 kbps

All other modes: 0.6 to 64.0 kbps

RX CHAN #3 PHASE
RX CHAN #3 PHASE
CLK:NRM DATA:NRM
RECEIVE CHANNEL 3 PHASE: NRM or INV (for both clock and data phase)
Note: PHASE is not displayed if AUPC or DISABLED were selected for MODE.

RX CHAN #4 MODE
RX CHAN #4 MODE
ASYNC RS485
RECEIVE CHANNEL 4 MODE: ASYNC RS232, SYNC RS232, ASYNC RS485,

AUPC, or DISABLED

RX CHAN #4 DR
9.6 Kbps
5–54
RECEIVE CHANNEL 4 DATA RATE: 0.6 to 64.0 kbps
Note: DR is not displayed if AUPC or DISABLED were selected for MODE.

RX CHAN #4 PHASE
RX CHAN #4 PHASE
CLK:NRM DATA:NRM
RECEIVE CHANNEL 4 PHASE: NRM or INV (for both clock and data phase)
Note: PHASE is not displayed if AUPC or DISABLED were selected for MODE.
5.4.1.7 FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: SAVE
CONFIGURATION
SAVE
CONFIGURATION #N SAVE: N = 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
The Configuration Save menu allows programming of configuration parameters into memory on
the M&C. There are five memory locations that may be used to store specific configuration
setups that are used frequently.
After changing the configuration parameters to the desired settings, enter the Configuration
Save menu and select memory location 1 through 5. Press [ENTER] to execute the save.
5.4.1.8 FUNCTION SELECT: CONFIGURATION: RECALL
CONFIGURATION
RECALL
CONFIGURATION #N RECALL: N = 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
The Configuration Recall menu allows the user to recall a previously saved configuration setup.
Upon entry, select memory location 1 through 5 by pressing [↑] or [↓]. Press [ENTER] to
execute the recall.
5–55
SELECT:
MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR
RAW BER
CORRECTED BER
Eb/No
RECEIVED SIGNAL
SWEEP FREQUENCY
BUFFER FILL
FRAME ERRORS
Figure 5-8. Function Select: Monitor Menu Tree
5.4.2 FUNCTION SELECT:MONITOR
FUNCTION SELECT
MONITOR
FUNCTION SELECT: MONITOR: RAW BER
RAW BER
2.4 E-3
Raw BER Range: < m.m E-e to > m.m E-e, or No Data
Displays the current BER or “No Data” (if carrier is not locked).
Notes:
1. Low limit is based on performance.
2. High limit is based on data/code rate.
Press[←] or [→] to move the flashing cursor, and [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the selected
kbps. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
5–56
FUNCTION SELECT MONITOR:CORRECTED BER
CORRECTED BER
4.0 E-3
Corrected BER Range: 1.0 E-3 to 1.0 E-12, or No Data
Displays the current corrected BER or “No Data” (if carrier is not locked).
Notes:
2. High limit is 1.0 E-12.
FUNCTION SELECT MONITOR:EB/NO
EB/NO
16.0 dB
Eb/No Range: 2.0 to 16.0 dB, or No Data
Displays the current Eb/N0 or “No Data” (if carrier is not locked).
Notes:
1. Low limit is based on the data rate.
2. High limit is 16.0 dB.
5–57
FUNCTION SELECT MONITOR:RECEIVE SIGNAL
RECEIVE SIGNAL
-45.0dBm
Receive Signal Range: -25.0 to -60.0 dBm
Displays the current receive signal level.
FUNCTION SELECT MONITOR:SWEEP FREQUENCY
SWEEP FREQUENCY
+ 0 Hz
Sweep Frequency Range: -35,000 to +35,000 Hz, or No Data
Displays the current offset frequency or “No Data” (if carrier is not locked).
FUNCTION SELECT MONITOR:BUFFER FILL
BUFFER FILL
50%
Buffer Fill Status: 1 to 99%.
Displays the current plesiochronous buffer fill status (percent).
5–58
FUNCTION SELECT MONITOR:FRAME ERRORS (CONDITIONAL)
FRAME ERRORS
n.n E-e
2047 errors
n.n E-e
Conditional:This menu available only when the optional Overhead

card is installed.
IMPORTANT
Frame Errors Range: < mm.m E-e to > mm.m E-e, or No Data
Displays the current framing pattern bit error rate or “No Data” (if carrier is not locked).
Monitors the currently selected READ_ERROR function.
Notes:
2. High limit is based on the data/code rate.
3. This screen is only available when OVERHEAD PCB is installed.
Frame Errors Measured when framed modes of operation are active.
2047 Errors Measured when the RX 2047 PATTERN (under Configuration: Interface menu) is tuned On.
5–59
SELECT:
FAULTS/ALARMS FAULTS/ALARMS FAULTS/ALARMS
MODULATOR
DEMODULATOR
TX INTERFACE
RX INTERFACE
COMMON
BACKWARD ALARMS
Figure 5-9. Functional Select: faults/Alarms Menu Tree
5.4.3 FUNCTION SELECT:FAULTS/ALARMS
FUNCTION SELECT
FAULTS/ALARMS
Press <ENTER > to review or edit the following sub-menus.
Line 2 of the display shows the current Faults/Alarms status in real time. For each parameter
monitored, fault status is displayed as one of the following:
• “–” indicates that no fault or alarm exists.

• “+” indicates that a fault exists, and will cause switching in a redundant system.
• Reversed contrast “+” indicates an active alarm.
Unlike faults, alarms do not cause switching to occur. To display labels for individual faults or
alarms, press [ENTER].
Press [←] or [→] to move the flashing cursor to make the selection. The label for that
Fault/Alarm is then displayed on line 1 of the display. Press [CLEAR] to exit this level of
operation and return to the previous level.
5–60
FUNCTION SELECT: FAULTS/ALARMS: MODULATOR
MODULATOR
---------
IF SYNTHESIZER Modulator IF synthesizer fault.
DATA CLOCK SYN Transmit clock synthesizer fault. Indicates the internal Voltage Controlled
Oscillator (VCO) has not locked to the incoming data clock.
I CHANNEL I channel data activity fault.
Q CHANNEL Q channel data activity fault.
AGC LEVEL TX IF AGC level fault.
MODEM REF ACT MODEM REF activity alarm.
MODEM REF PLL MODEM REF PLL not locked.
MODULE Modulator module fault.
CONFIGURATION Modulator configuration fault.
FUNCTION SELECT: FAULTS/ALARMS: DEMODULATOR
DEMODULATOR
+------
CARRIER DETECT Carrier detect fault. Indicates the decoder is not locked.
IF SYNTHESIZER Demodulator IF synthesizer fault. Indicates the IF synthesizer is not locked.
I CHANNEL I channel activity fault. Indicates a loss of activity in the I channel of the
quadrature demodulator.
Q CHANNEL Q channel activity fault. Indicates a loss of activity in the Q channel of the
quadrature demodulator.
BER THRESHOLD Secondary alarm result of the BER threshold set in the DEMOD
Configuration menu.
MODULE Demodulator/decoder module fault.
CONFIGURATION Demodulator/decoder configuration fault.
5–61
FUNCTION SELECT: FAULTS/ALARMS: TX INTERFACE
TX INTERFACE
---+----
TX DROP Drop interface hardware fault. Typically indicates that the drop interface
PLL is not locked (D&I only).
TX DATA/AIS Data or AIS. When data fault is selected in the Interface Configuration
menu, the fault indicates a data stable condition. This indicates the data is
all 1s or 0s (i.e., data is not transitioning). When AIS is selected, the alarm
indicates the data is all 1s from customer data input to the modem. When
None is selected in the Interface Configuration menu, the TX Data/AIS
Fault/Alarm is not activated.
Note: AIS is an alarm, not a switching fault.
TX CLK PLL Transmitter phase-locked loop fault. Indicates the transmitter

Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) is not locked.
TX CLK ACTIVITY Activity detector alarm of the selected interface transmit clock. The
interface will fall back to the internal clock when this alarm is active.
TX AUDIO 1 CLIP IDR TX audio for channel 1 is clipped.
TX AUDIO 2 CLIP IDR TX audio for channel 2 is clipped.
CONFIGURATION TX interface configuration fault.
Indicates the TX interface cannot execute a programmed configuration

parameter.
5–62
FUNCTION SELECT: FAULTS/ALARMS: RX INTERFACE
RX INTERFACE
---------------
BUFFER UNDERFLOW Buffer underflow alarm. Indicates that a buffer underflow has occurred.
BUFFER OVERFLOW Buffer overflow alarm. Indicates that a buffer overflow has occurred.
RX DATA/AIS Data or AIS. When data fault is selected in the Configuration Interface
menu the fault indicates a data stable condition. This indicates the data
coming from the satellite is all 1s or 0s (i.e., data is not transitioning).
When AIS is selected, the Alarm indicates the data is all 1s from the
satellite. When None is selected in the Configuration Interface menu, the
RX Data/AIS Fault/Alarm is not activated.
Note: AIS is an alarm, not a switching fault.
FRAME BER Frame BER fault. Indicates that the frame BER exceeds 1-3.
BACKWARD ALARM Backward alarms.
BUFFER CLK PLL Buffer clock phase-locked loop fault. Indicates the buffer clock PLL is not
locked.
BUFFER CLK ACT Activity detector alarm of the selected interface receive clock. The
interface will fall back to the satellite clock when this fault is active.
DEMUX LOCK DEMUX lock fault. Indicates that the DEMUX is not locked.
RX 2047 LOCK RX 2047 lock alarm. Indicates the RX 2047 data pattern is not locked.
Note: This alarm is only active if RX 2047 is ON.
BUFFER FULL Buffer full alarm. Indicates the buffer is less than 10% or greater than 90%
full.
RX INSERT Insert interface hardware fault. Typically indicates the insert interface PLL
is not locked. This fault is only available when D&I is selected for modem
type.
RX AUDIO 1 CLIP IDR RX audio for channel 1 is clipped.
RX AUDIO 2 CLIP IDR RX audio for channel 2 is clipped.
CONFIGURATION Configuration alarm
5–63
FUNCTION SELECT: FAULTS/ALRMS: COMMON
COMMON
-------
BATTERY/CLOCK Battery or clock fault.
-12V SUPPLY -12V power supply fault.
+12V SUPPLY +12V power supply fault.
+5V SUPPLY +5V power supply fault.
SELF TEST Built in self-test fault.
CONTROLLER Controller fault. Typically indicates the controller has gone through a
power on/off cycle.
INTERFACE MODULE Interface module fault. Typically indicates that the interface module is
missing or will not program.
5.4.3.1 FAULTS/ALARMS:BACKWARD ALARMS (CONDITIONAL)
BACKWARD ALARMS
--------------
Conditional: Only available with IDR Modem Type or Overhead Type

selected.
IMPORTANT
BW Alarm RX #4 Receive backward alarm #4 indicator.
BW Alarm TX #4 Transmit backward alarm #4 indicator.
5–64
SELECT:
STORED FLTS/ALMS STORED FLTS/ALMS STORED FLTS/ALMS
MODULATOR
DEMODULATOR
TX INTERFACE
RX INTERFACE
COMMON
BACKWARD ALARMS
UNAVAL SECONDS
CLEAR
Figure 5-10. Functional Select: Stored Ftls/Alms Menu Tree
5.4.4 FUNCTION SELECT:STORED FLTS/ALMS
FUNCTION SELECT
STORED FLTS/ALMS
Press <ENTER > to review or edit the following sub-menus.
The modem stores the first 10 (Flt0 through Flt9) occurrences of fault status changes in the
applicable major fault category.
Each fault status change is stored with the time and date of the occurrence of the fault. Stored
faults may be viewed by entering the stored faults level from the Select menu. Refer to Faults
and Alarms menus for fault explanations. UNAVAL SECONDS fault information.
Stored faults are not maintained through controller power-on reset cycle. However, the last
known time is maintained in nonvolatile Random Access Memory (RAM). On power-up, a
common equipment fault is logged (Flt0) with that last known time and date. Also on power-up,
an additional common equipment fault is logged (Flt1) to indicate the power-up time and date.
The power-down and power-up times are logged as common equipment fault 0 and common
equipment fault 1, respectively.
On entering the stored faults level, press [←] or [→] to move between the fault groups and the
“Clear Stored Faults?” selections. The time and date of the first stored fault status (Flt0) for the
selected group will be displayed alternately on line 2 of the display. Press [↑] or [↓] to cycle
through the selected group’s stored fault status (Flt0 through Flt9). To display the fault status
associated with the displayed time and date, press [ENTER]. To identify the fault, press [←] or
[→] to move the flashing cursor. To clear the currently logged stored faults, press [ENTER]
when the “Clear Stored Faults/Yes?” selection is displayed.
Note: Faults are stored in time sequence, with the oldest fault status change stored in Flt0, and
the most recent in Flt9. Only the first 10 fault status changes are stored. All stored faults, which
have not been used, indicate “No Fault” on the display.
5–65
FUNCTION SELECT: STORED FLTS/ALMS: MODULATOR
MODULATOR X
STORED TIME/DATE
Displays the stored date and time of a fault or alarm, such as:
IF SYNTHESIZER MODEM REF ACT

DATA CLOCK SYN MODEM REF PLL
I CHANNEL MODULE
Q CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
AGC LEVEL
FUNCTION SELECT: STORED FLTS/ALMS: DEMODULATOR
DEMODULATOR X
STORED TIME/DATE
CARRIER DETECT BER THRESHOLD

IF SYNTHESIZER MODULE
I CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
Q CHANNEL
FUNCTION SELECT: STORED FLTS/ALMS: TX INTERFACE
TX INTERFACE X
STORED TIME/DATE
TX DROP TX AUDIO 1 CLIP

TX DATA/AIS TX ADUIO 2 CLIP
TX CLK PLL CONFIGURATION
TC CLK ACTIVITY
5–66
FUNCTION SELECT: STORED FLTS/ALMS: RX INTERFACE
RX INTERFACE X
STORED TIME/DATE
BUFFER UNDERFLOW DEMUX LOCK

BUFFER OVERFLOW RX 2047 LOCK
RX DATA/AIS BUFFER FULL
FRAME BER RX INSERT
BACKWARD ALARM RX AUDIO 1 CLIP
BUFFER CLK PLL RX AUDIO 2 CLIP
BUFFER CLK ACT CONFIGURATION
FUNCTION SELECT: STORED FLTS/ALMS: COMMON
COMMON X
STORED TIME/DATE
BATTERY/CLOCK SELF TEST

-12 VOLT SUPPLY CONTROLLER
+12 VOLT SUPPLY INTERFACE MODULE
+5 VOLT SUPPLY
5–67
FUNCTION SELECT: STORED FLTS/ALMS:BACKWARD ALRMS

(CONDITIONAL)
BACKWARD ALRMS X
STORED TIME/DATE
Conditional: Only available with IDR selected.

IMPORTANT
BW ALRM RX #4 BW ALRM TX #4
BE ALRM RX # 1 BE ALRM TX # 1
FUNCTION SELECT: STORED FLTS/ALMS: UNAVAILABLE

SECONDS (CONDITIONAL)
UNAVAL SECONDS X
STORED TIME/DATE
Conditional: Only available with Reed-Solomon selected.

IMPORTANT
NOTE: A fault is indicated if the Reed-Solomon Codec could not correct bit errors in one block
of serialized data in any given second.
FUNCTION SELECT: STORED FLTS/ALARMS: CLEAR
CLEAR ??
STORED FAULTS
5–68
SELECT:
REMOTE AUPC REMOTE AUPC REMOTE AUPC
CONFIGURATION
AUPC ENABLE
B-BAND LOOP BACK
TX 2047 PATTERN
MONITOR
2047 ERRORS
Figure 5-11. Functional Select: Remote AUPC Menu Tree
5.4.5 FUNCTION SELECT:REMOTE AUPC (CONDITIONAL)
FUNCTION SELECT
REMOTE AUPC
Conditional: This is only available when the ASYNC / AUPC

overhead option is selected from the Modem Type menu, located
under the Utility: Modem Type menu.
Requires either the Overhead card installed with the ASYNC/AUPC
IMPORTANT option or the Reed-Solomon card installed with AUPC option.
To view or change the remote AUPC functions, enter the Remote AUPC menu from the
Function Select menu on the front panel. After entering the Remote AUPC menu, press [← ] or
[→] to select the Configuration or Monitor menu. Enter the selected menu by pressing
[ENTERING]. Press [← ] or [→] to view the selected configuration parameters.
5–69
FUNCTION SELECT: REMOTE AUPC: CONFIGURATION

(CONDITIONAL)
REMOTE AUPC
CONFIGURATION

FUNCTION SELECT: REMOTE AUPC: CONFIGURATION: AUPC

ENABLE (CONDITIONAL)
AUPC ENABLE
OFF

Programs the AUPC feature On or Off at the far end of the link. This requires that modems at
both ends of the link are locked to function. This is for control or displays last known status.
5–70
FUNCTION SELECT: REMOTE AUPC: CONFIGURATION:B-BAND

LOOP BACK (CONDITIONAL)
B-BAND LOOP BACK

OFF

IMPORTANT Requires either the Overhead card installed with the ASYNC/AUPC
option or the Reed-Solomon card installed with AUPC option.
Programs the remote baseband loopback On or Off at the far end of the link. Modems at both
ends of the link must be locked.
This is for control or displays last known status.
FUNCTION SELECT: REMOTE AUPC: CONFIGURATION:TX 2047

PATTERN
TX 2047 PATTERN
OFF
Conditional: This is only available when the ASYNC/AUPC overhead

option is selected from the Modem Type menu, located under the
Utility: Modem Type menu.
IMPORTANT Requires either the Overhead card installed with the ASYNC / AUPC
option or the Reed-Solomon card installed with AUPC option.
Programs the remote TX 2047 PATTERN On or Off at the far end of the link. Modems at both
ends of the link must be locked.
This program is for control or displays last known status.
5–71
FUNCTION SELECT: REMOTE AUPC:MONITOR (CONDITIONAL)
REMOTE AUPC
MONITOR

option or the Reed-Solomon card installedwith AUPC option.
FUNCTION SELECT: REMOTE AUPC: MONITOR: 2047 ERRORS
2047 ERRORS
n.n E-e

option or the Reed-Solomon card with AUPC option.
Receive 2047 BER. This is a monitor point that displays the current Receive 2047 BER at the
far end of the link. Modems at both ends of the link must be locked. This program is for control
or displays last known status.
If no data is available, “No Data” is displayed.
5–72
SELECT:
UTILITY UTILITY UTILITY
MODULATOR FIXED MODEM RATE
DEMODULATOR
INTERFACE MODULATOR
SYSTEM TX-IF CODE RATE/DATA RATE
MODEM TYPE MOD POWER OFFSET
FACTORY SET-UP MODULATOR TYPE
ENCODER TYPE
TX BPSK ORDERING
MOD SPECTRUM
TX-RS INTERLEAVE
TX IESS-310 MODE
TX IESS-315 TURBO MODE
TX SYMBOL RATE
TX MODE
DEMODULATOR
RX-IF CODE RATE/DATA RATE
DEMODULATOR TYPE
RX BPSK ORDERING
DECODER TYPE
DEMOD SPRECTUM
RX-RS INTERLEAVE
RX IESS-310 MODE
MODEM TYPE SYSTEM RX IESS-315 TURBO MODE
CODE/DATA RATE TIME/DATE RX SYMBOL RATE
MODEM TYPE REMOTE BAUD RATE RX MODE
G.703 OPERATION REMOTE ADDRESS MAX PACKET SIZE
MODEM EMULATION REMOTE TYPOE
REV EMULATION OPERATION MODE INTERFACE
CURRENT VERSION YEAR DISPLAY TX/RX OVERHEAD TYPE
MODEM OPTIONS TEST MODE STATUS TX/RX TERR INTERFACE
CARD TYPE LAMP TEST BUFFER PROGRAM
CARD OPTIONS SELF TEST FRAMING STRUCTURE
LOCAL MODEM AUPC M&C FIRMWARE RTS TX-IF CNTRL
MODEM SERIAL BOOT FIRMWARE TX/RX DATA PHASE
CARD SERIAL # FPGA FIRMWARE E1 INSERT CRC
CONFIGURATION CODE DISPLAY CONTRAAST IDR BACKWARD
EXT AGC. MIN PWR ASYNC TX/RX TYPE
EXT AGC. MAX PWR IDR TX/RX ESC TYPE
MASTER RESET CTS DELAY
Figure 5-12. Function Select: Utility Menu Tree
5–73
5.4.6 FUNCTION SELECT:UTILITY
FUNCTION SELECT
UTILITY
5.4.6.1 FUNCTION SELECT: UTLITY: FIXED MODEM RATE

(CONDITIONAL)
UTILITY
FIXED MODEM RATE
Conditional: this menu is displayed when the modem has the Single
Data Rate option and the code/data rates are not programmed.
IMPORTANT
5.4.6.2 FUNCTION SELECT: FIXED MODEM RATE: CODE RATE/DATA

RATE
CR: _____________
DR: ___________Kb
• If CR/DR is blank, enter the code and data rate one time only.
• If CR/DR is displayed, then the fixed code/data rate is shown
5–74
5.4.6.3 FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY:MODULATOR
UTILITY
MODULATOR
Select information to view using the [←] [→] arrow keys, then press ENTER.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODULATOR:

ASSIGN TRANSMIT FILTERS
TX-A QPSK 1/2

64.000 Kbps
Assign Transmit Filters: A, B, C, D or V
This menu allows the user to set values for the pre-assigned filter selection to be displayed in
the configuration menu.
Select one of four pre-defined transmitter code/data rate combinations (A, B, C, or D):
TX-A QPSK 1/2 TX-B QPSK 1/2

64.000 Kbps 128.000 Kbps
TX-C QPSK 1/2 TX-D QPSK 1/2

256.000 Kbps 512.000 Kbps
or:
Select the variable rate selection (V).
TX-V QPSK 1/2

38.400 Kbps
Change the modulation type, code rate, or data rate value as follows:
5–75
• A flashing cursor is displayed on the first character of the coding type on line 1.
• Press [ENTER].Press [↑] or [↓] to change the modulation type and code rate as
desired.
• Press [←] or [→] to move to the data rate, and [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the
digit at the flashing cursor.
• Press [ENTER] to execute the change.

{O}QPSK 1/2 4.8 to 2500 kbps
{O}QPSK 3/4 7.2 to 3750 kbps
{O}QPSK 7/8 8.4 to 4375 kbps
8PSK 2/3 64 to 5000 kbps
{O}QPSK 1/1 9.6 to 5000 kbps
Turbo Only
BPSK 21/44 2.4 to 1193 kbps
BPSK 5/16 2.4 to 781.25 kbps
{O}QPSK 1/2 4.8 to 2500 kbps
{O}QPSK 3/4 7.2 to 3750 kbps
8PSK 3/4 384 to 5000 kbps
Notes:
Sequential Encoder.
2. Maximum Symbol Rate: 2500 kbps
3. Option: Maximum Data Rate for Low Var Rate: 512 kbps
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODULATOR: MOD POWER OFFSET
MOD POWER OFFSET

+ 0.0 dB
Modulator Power Offset Range: -99.9 To +99.9 dB, in 0.1 Db steps
This value is the offset to the modulator output power readout in the Configuration menu. This
screen does not actually change the modulator power level, but displays an offset value in the
monitor.
Note: Anything except 0.0 dB will cause ADJ to be displayed for the TX power level.
5–76
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODULATOR:MODULATOR TYPE
MODULATOR TYPE
INTELSAT OPEN
Transmit Filter Type: INTELSAT OPEN, EFD CLOSED, CSC CLOSED, FDC CLOSED,
or SDM-51 COMPATIBLE
Notes:
1. Selectable only when EFD, ASYNC, AUPC or CUSTOM is selected for the modem
type in the Utility: Modem Type menu.
2. CSC CLOSED Modulator Type is not compatible with a 3/4 Code Rate and Sequential
Encoder Type combination.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODULATOR:

ENCODER TYPE (CONDITIONAL)
ENCODER TYPE
TURBO
Encoder Type: VITERBI , SEQUENTIAL or TURBO
Must have Viterbi, Sequential, and/or Turbo board/options enabled.
Notes:
1. Preset to Viterbi if modem type is IBS, IDR, or D&I.
2. A Sequential Encoder Type and a 3/4 Code Rate combination is not compatible with a
CSC CLOSED Modulator Type.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODULATOR:TX BPSK ORDERING
TX BPSK ORDERING
STANDARD
TX BPSK Bit Ordering: STANDARD or NON-STANDARD
5–77
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODULATOR:MOD SPECTRUM
MOD SPECTRUM
NORMAL
Mod Spectrum: NORMAL or INVERT
Programmable vector rotation allows selecting NORMAL or INVERT for spectrum reversal of
the I and Q baseband channels.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODULATOR:TX-RS INTERLEAVE

(CONDITIONAL)
TX-RS INTERLEAVE
8 DEEP
Transmit Reed-Solomon Interleaving Depth: 4, 8, or 16
Conditional: Only available when TX RS board is installed

IMPORTANT
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODULATOR:TX IESS-310 MODE

(CONDITIONAL)
Note: Only available with Reed-Solomon and 8-PSK 2/3.
TX IESS-310 MODE
OFF
Select: ON or OFF
Conditional: Only available when 8-PSK option and RS option are

installed and selected.
IMPORTANT
An On indication enables 8-PSK 2/3 with Reed-Solomon.
5–78
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODULATOR:TX IESS-315 MODE

(CONDITIONAL)
TX IESS-315 MODE
OFF
Select: ON or OFF
Conditional: Only available when encoder is TURBO.

IMPORTANT
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODULATOR: TX SYMBOL RATE
TX SYMBOL RATE
64.000 Ksps
Status only: 4.800 to 2500 kbps. Provides symbol rate corresponding to the data rate, code
rate(s), modulation, and overhead (framing) programmed into the modulator.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODULATOR: TX MODE
TX MODE
CONTINUOUS
Status only: Continuous or Brust
5–79
5.4.6.4 FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: DEMODULATOR
UTILITY
DEMODULATOR
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: DEMODULATOR: ASSIGN RECEIVE

FILTERS
RX-A QPSK 1/2

64.000 Kbps
Assign Receive Filters: A, B, C, D or V
This menu allows the user to set values for the pre-assigned filter selection to be displayed in
the configuration menu.
Select one of four pre-defined receive code/data rate combinations (A, B, C, or D):
RX-A QPSK 1/2 RX-B QPSK 1/2

64.000 Kbps 128.000 Kbps
RX-C QPSK 1/2 RX-D QPSK 1/2

256.000 Kbps 512.000 Kbps
or:
Select the variable rate selection (V).
RX-V QPSK 1/2

38.400 Kbps
Change the modulation type, code rate , or data rate values as follows:
5–80
• A flashing cursor is displayed on the first character of the coding type on line 1.
• Press [ENTER]. Press [↑] or [↓] to change the modulation type and code rate to the
desired value.
• Press [←] or [→] to to the data rate, and [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the digit at
the flashing cursor.
• Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Notes:
Sequential Encoder.
2. Max symbol rate: 2500 bps
3. Max data rate for low variable rate option: 512 kbps

{O}QPSK 1/2 4.8 to 2500 kbps
{O}QPSK 3/4 7.2 to 3750 kbps
{O}QPSK 7/8 8.4 to 4375 kbps
8PSK 2/3 64 to 5000 kbps
{O}QPSK 1/1 9.6 to 5000 kbps
Turbo Only
BPSK 21/44 2.4 to 1193 kbps
BPSK 5/16 2.4 to 781.25 kbps
{O}QPSK 1/2 4.8 to 2500 kbps
{O}QPSK 3/4 7.2 to 3750 kbps
8PSK 3/4 384 to 5000 kbps
5–81
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: DEMODULATOR:DEMODULATOR

TYPE (CONDITIONAL)
DEMODULATOR TYPE
INTELSAT OPEN
Conditional: DEMODULATOR TYPE is selectable only when EFD,

Custom, ASYNC, or AUPC is selected for modem type in the Utility:
IMPORTANT Modem Type menu.
Receive Filter Type: INTELSAT OPEN, EFD CLOSED, CSC CLOSED, or FDC CLOSED
Notes:
1. RX FILTER TYPE is selectable only when Custom is selected for modem type in the
Utility Modem Type menu.
2. CSC CLOSED Demodulator Type is not compatible with a 3/4 Code Rate and Sequential
Decoder Type combination.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: DEMODULATOR: DECODER TYPE

(CONDITIONAL)
DECODER TYPE
VITERBI
Conditional: Must have Viterbi, Sequential, and/or Turbo

board/options enabled.
IMPORTANT
Decoder Type: VITERBI, SEQUENTIAL, or TURBO
Preset to Viterbi when modem type is IBS, IDR, or D&I.
Note: A Sequential Decoder Type and a 3/4 Code Rate combination is not compatible with a CSC
Closed Demodulator Type.
5–82
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: DEMODULATOR: RX BPSK

ORDERING
RX BPSK OREDERING
STANDARD
Receive BPSK Bit Ordering: STANDARD or NON-STANDARD
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: DEMODULATOR: DEMOD SPECTRUM
DEMOD SPECTRUM
NORMAL
Programmable Vector Rotation: NORMAL or INVERT
This command is used for spectrum reversal of the I and Q baseband channels.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: DEMODULATOR: RX-RS INTERLEAVE

(CONDITIONAL)
RX-RS INTERLEAVE
8 DEEP
Range: 4, 8, or 16 DEEP
Conditional: This menu is active only when Reed-Solomon is

installed and RS Option is On (under Confioguration: Demodulator).
IMPORTANT
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: DEMODULATOR: RX IESS-310 MODE

(CONDITIONAL)
RX IESS-310 MODE
OFF
Select: ON or OFF
5–83
Conditional: Only available when the 8PSK option is selected and

Reed-Solomon option is installed and selected.
IMPORTANT

(CONDITIONAL)
RX IESS-315 MODE
OFF
Select: ON or OFF
Conditional: Only available when the decoder is TURBO.

IMPORTANT
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: DEMODULATOR: RX SYMBOL RATE
RX SYMBOL RATE
64.000 Ksps
Status Only. Programmale with 4.800 to 2500 ksps. Provides the symbol rate corresponding to
the data rata, code rate(s), modulation, and overhead (framing) programmed into the
demodulator.

(CONDITIONAL)
RX IESS-315 MODE
OFF
Select: ON or OFF
Conditional: Only available when encoder is TURBO.

IMPORTANT
5–84
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: DEMODULATOR: RX MODE
RX MODE
CONTINUOUS
Select: Continuous or Brust.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: DEMODULATOR: RX MAX PACKET

SIZE
MAX PACKET SIZE

2048
Maximum packet size range is: 48 to 1048576 bits.
5.4.6.5 FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE
UTILITY
INTERFACE
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE: TX OVERHEAD TYPE
TX OVERHEAD TYPE
NONE
None, IDR, IBS, DROP & INSERT, ASYNC, AUPC, or IBS-309
Note: Overhead types are selectable only when Custom is selected for modem type in the
5–85
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE: RX OVERHEAD TYPE
RX OVERHEAD TYPE
NONE
None, IDR, IBS, DROP & INSERT, ASYNC, AUPC, IBS-309
Note: Overhead types are selectable only when Custom is selected for modem type in the
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE:TX-RX TERR INTERFACE

(CONDITIONAL)
TX-RX TERR INTERFACE

RS422
EIA-232, EIA-422, V.35 or G.703
Conditional: G.703 is available only when the Overhead interface

PCB is installed.
IMPORTANT
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE:BUFFER PROGRAM
BUFFER PROGRAM
BITS
Allows selection of either BITS or MILLISECONDS for the receive buffer.
For the modem to calulate buffer size, select Milliseconds.

For a specific buffer depth, select Bits.
This menu indicates the Bits or Milliseonds menu is displayed under

Configuration: Interface Buffer Size.
IMPORTANT
5–86
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE: FRAMING STRUCTURE
FRAMING
STRUCTURE
Displays the currently selected framing type and structure of the data. This function is used with
the buffer program in milliseconds (ms) for plesiochronous buffer slips.
Upon entry, the framing type (T1 or E1) is displayed on Line 1. The framing structure of each
type (None or G.704) is displayed on Line 2. Press [←] or [→] and [↑] or [↓] to select framing
structure and type. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE: FRAMING STRUCTURE:

FRAMING STRUCTURE: T1 FRAMING
T1 FRAMING
STRUCTURE: G.704
NONE or G.704
type (None or G.704) is displayed on Line 2.
Press [←] or [→] and [↑] or [↓] to select framing structure and type. Press [ENTER] to execute
the change.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE: FRAMING STRUCTURE:

FRAMING STRUCTURE: E1 FRAMING
E1 FRAMING
STRUCTURE: G.704
NONE or G.704
5–87
type (None or G.704) is displayed on Line 2.
Press [←] or [→] and [↑] or [↓] to select framing structure and type. Press [ENTER] to execute
the change.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE: RTS TX-IF CNTRL
RTS TX-IF CNTRL

OFF
Programs the modem to allow a Request To Send (RTS) signal to enable the output when data is
ready for transmission.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE: TX DATA PHASE
TX DATA PHASE
NORMAL
TX data phase relationship. Use this option to select Normal or Invert for the TX data relationship
to the selected TX clock.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE: RX DATA PHASE
RX DATA PHASE
NORMAL
NORMAL or INVERT
RX data phase relationship. Use this option to select Normal or Invert for the RX data relationship
to the selected RX clock.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE: E1 INSERT CRC

(CONDITIONAL)
E1 INSERT CRC
ON
5–88
Conditional: This menu is displayed if the optional Overhead card is

installed and the optional D&I feature is enabled.
IMPORTANT
EI INSERT CRC enable sfunction. Use this option to turn the CRC-4 on the insert side of the
E1 ON or OFF. The default for this function is ON. If the equipment cannot use the CRC-4
signal, disable the signal by selecting OFF.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE: IDR BACKWARD ALARM

CONTROL (CONDITIONAL)
IDR BACKWARD
ALARM CONTROL
Conditional: This selection is available only when Modem Type = IDR

is enabled.
IMPORTANT
Controls IDR monitor and alarm functions when not using a communications link. Use this
option to select ON or OFF for the RX and TX alarms.
Press [↑] or [↓] to select the backward alarm RX or TX numbers 1 through 4. Press [ENTER] to
execute the change.
BW ALARM RX #4 BW ALARM TX #4
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
5–89
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE: ASYNC TX TYPE

(CONDITIONAL)
ASYNC TX TYPE
RS232
EIA-232, EIA-485(4-Wire), or EIA-485(2-Wire)
Conditional: This selection is available only when Modem Type =

ASYNC is enabled and the Overhead card is installed.
IMPORTANT
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE: ASYNC RX TYPE

(CONDITIONAL)
ASYNC RX TYPE
RS232
EIA-232, EIA-485(4-WIRE), or EIA-485(2-WIRE)
Conditional: This selection is available only when Modem Type =

ASYNC is enabled and the Overhead card is installed.
IMPORTANT
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE: IDR TX ESC TYPE

(CONDITIONAL)
IDR TX ESC TYPE

2-32K AUDIO
2-32K AUDIO or 64K DATA
5–90

is enabled and the Overhead card is installed.
IMPORTANT
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE:IDR RX ESC TYPE

(CONDITIONAL)
IDR RX ESC TYPE

2-32K AUDIO
2-32K AUDIO or 64K DATA

is enabled and the Overhead card is installed.
IMPORTANT
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: INTERFACE:CTS DELAY
CTS DELAY
0 SECONDS
Range: 0 to 60 seconds
Sets the delay in seconds for the Clear To Send (CTS) signal output.
5–91
5.4.6.6 FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY:SYSTEM
UTILITY
SYSTEM
Select information to view using [←] or [→} arrow keys, then press [ENTER].
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: TIME/DATE
TIME: 12:00:00AM
DATE: 7/04/1976
Time of day and date display/set function.
The current time and date in the modem’s memory are displayed when selected. To change the
modem time and/or date, press [ENTER]. Press [←] or [→] to position the cursor over the
parameter to be changed. Press [↑] or [↓] to change the parameter. Once the parameters are
displayed as desired, press [ENTER] to set the time and date.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM:REMOTE BAUD RATE
REMOTE BAUD RATE

9600 bps EVEN
BAUD: 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600, 300, 150, or 110
PARITY: EVEN, ODD or NONE
The parity and baud rate settings of the modem are displayed.
To change the modem baud rate and/or parity, press [ENTER]. Press [←] or [→] to position the
cursor over the parameter to be changed. Press [↑] or [↓] to change the parameter. Once the
parameters are displayed as desired, press [ENTER] to set the baud rate and parity. The parity can
be set to EVEN, ODD, or NONE. The baud rate can be set from 110 to 19200 bps.
5–92
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: REMOTE ADDRESS
REMOTE ADDRESS
1
Range: 1 to 255
The current modem address is displayed. To change the remote address, press [ENTER]. Press
[↑] or [↓] to make the selection. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: Address 0 is reserved as a Global Address.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: REMOTE TYPE
REMOTE TYPE
RS485 (2-WIRE)
EIA-485(2-Wire), EIA-485(4-Wire) or EIA-232
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: OPERATION MODE
OPERATION MODE
DUPLEX
DUPLEX, TRANSMIT ONLY or RECEIVE ONLY
Programs the modem for selected type of operation.
Note: When TRANSMIT ONLY or RECEIVE ONLY are selected, the

appropriate faults are masked from the Faults and Stored Faults menus.
IMPORTANT
5–93
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM:YEAR DISPLAY
YEAR DISPLAY
2 - DIGIT
2 - Digits or 4 - Digits
Displays the year in 2- or 4-digit format. To change the remote address, press [ENTER]. Press [↑]
or [↓] to make the selection. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: TEST MODE STATUS
TEST MODE STATUS

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Test mode status indicator. The following modem test modes are listed and display a “+” when
a test mode is active:
• RS CORR OFF
• INTRFC LOOP BACK (requires Overhead card)
• B-BAND LOOP BACK
• RF LOOP BACK
• IF LOOP BACK
• CARRIER MODE
• RX 2047 Pattern (requires Overhead card)
• TX 2047 Pattern (requires Overhead card)
To view the test modes, press [ENTER]. Press [←] or [→] to view the selections.
5–94
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST ??
PRESS ENTER
Lamp test function. Press <ENTER> to turn the front panel indicators on for 3 seconds.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: SELF TEST
SELF TEST
OFF
OFF, AUTO, or RUN
Select an option. After completion of the test, SELF TEST (“PASSED” or “FAILED”) is
displayed.
• OFF bypasses built-in self test.

• AUTO initiates built-in self test when turning on modem.
• RUN initializes self test.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: M&C FIRMWARE
M&C FIRMWARE
FW/NNNNN-DD
Displays the M&C module firmware number.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM M&C FIRMWARE:

MONTH:DAY:YEAR
M&C FIRMWARE
MM/DD/YYYY
Press <ENTER> to display the month, day, and year.
5–95
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: BOOT FIRMWARE
BOOT FIRMWARE
FW/NNNNNN
Displays the M&C Boot firmware number.

Press <ENTER> to display the month, day, and year.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: BOOT FIRMWARE:

VERSION NUMBER
BOOT FIRMWARE
VER: x.x.x
Press <ENTER> to display the version number.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: FPGA FIRMWARE
FPGA FIRMWARE
FW/NNNNN-DD
Press ENTER to display the FPGA module firmware number.

Displays Month:Day:Year. Press <ENTER> to display the month, day, and year.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: FPGA FIRMWARE:

TURBO FIRMWARE
TURBO FIRMWARE
FW/NNNNNN-DD
Press <ENTER> to display the Turbo module firmware number.
5–96
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: DISPLAY CONTRAST
DISPLAY CONTRAST
LEVEL: 64
Range: 0 to 100
Sets the contrast setting of the Front Panel menu.
Press [ENTER] to begin. Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the number at the flashing
cursor, from 0 to 100. Press [ENTER] to execute the change
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: EXT AGC: MIN PWR
EXT AGC: MIN PWR

0.0 Volts
Range: 0.0 to 10.0, in 0.5V steps
Sets the AGC voltage for a RX signal level of -25.0 dBm. Upon entry, the current external AGC
voltage level is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the AGC voltage level in
0.5V steps. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: For any receive signal level between -25.0 and -60.0 dBm, the software will interpolate
the required AGC voltage.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: EXT AGC: MAX PWR
EXT AGC: MAX PWR

10.0 Volts
Range: 0.0 to 10.0, in 0.5V steps
Sets the AGC voltage for a RX signal level of -60.0 dBm. Upon entry, the current external AGC
voltage level is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the AGC voltage level in
0.5V steps. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: For any receive signal level between -25.0 and -60.0 dBm, the software will interpolate
the required AGC voltage.
5–97
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: DEMO
DEMO MODE
ON
Enabling the DEMO mode will set all the modem parameters to the
factory default values.
CAUTION
Turn on all available FAST options in the modem for 60 minutes. During this time period, the
operator is encouraged to implement the features and discover the capabilities of the different
options. After the 60-minute time limit, the modem resets to its default values.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: SYSTEM: MASTER RESET
MASTER RESET
HARD/SOFT
Initiating a hard reset will reset the modem and place the default
configuration settings in ROM. Initiating a soft reset will reset the
CAUTION
modem hardware, but saves the current configuration settings.
Select [ENTER] once to access HARD or SOFT.
1. Press [←] or [→] to make the selection.

2. Press [ENTER].
3. Press [→] five times to move the cursor to YES.
4. Select YES and press [ENTER] again.
Note: All saved configurations will be deleted upon executing the hard reset. The following
parameters do not revert to default settings after a hard reset:
• Address
• Parity
• Baud Rate
• Remote Type
• Ext AGC: Min Pwr
• Ext AGC: Max Pwr
• Display Contrast
5–98
5.4.6.7 FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODEM TYPE
UTILITY
MODEM TYPE
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODEM TYPE:

CODE RATE/DATA RATE
CR: ______________
DR: _____________Kb
A one-time displayed menu for entering the code/data rates for Single-Rate modems.
Code Rate:________________________________
Data Rate:_______________________________kb
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODEM TYPE: MODEM TYPE
MODEM TYPE
CUSTOM
Select from the following types of modem operation:
Modem Type Description

Custom Access to all modem type dependent menus.
EFD Closed Network operation
IBS IESS-309 compliant with RS = 112/126 and interoperable with legacy EFD equipment programmed
to IBS Modem Type.
IDR IESS-308 compliant operation.
D&I IESS-308-5 Drop & Insert operation.
ASYNC ASYNC (/AUPC) – requires the installation of the Overhead card. Provides AUPC operation an a
separate ASYNC channel.
AUPC AUPC – Using the TX and RX Reed-Solomon cards. Provides AUPC operation only and No
ASYNC channel.
VSAT-IBS Intersat compliant mode. No overhead. RS=201/219
CDM-220 Comtech EF Data compatible.
Use caution when modifying the CUSTOM Type, as it accepts all changes
to the modem, including incompatible parameter changes. Only
CAUTION
experienced modem operators who are familiar with all of the controls
should use CUSTOM type.
5–99
When the modem is changed from one type of operation to another, it is reset to the default
configurations of the new modem type.
• If the type entered matches the existing modem type, parameters will not change. If the
modem type is changed to Custom, parameters will not change.
• If the modem type selection is not permitted, that type of operation may not be an
available option. Select MODEM OPTIONS and OVERHEAD OPTIONS to see which
modem operations are allowed.
• If the modem type is changed to Custom, no parameters will be changed.

G.703 OPERATION (CONDITIONAL)
G.703 OPERATION
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED or BALANCED
Note: G.703 Personality I/O PCB must be installed.
5–100
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODEM TYPE: MODEM EMULATION
MODEM EMULATION
DISABLED
This command allows selection of the following modem emulation types:
SDM-100 15.7.1
SDM-300 6.2.2
SDM-308-4 * 4.03
6.05
7.03
SDM-308-5 * 6.08
SDM-309 * 6.04
SDM-650 4.12A *
4.16
SDM-6000 5.1.1
* Requires the overhead card to be installed.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODEM TYPE: REV EMULATION
REV EMULATION
CURRENT_VERSION
CURRENT VERSION or FUNCTIONAL X
Programs an emulation mode of a previous functional revision.
Note: The number displayed in the CURRENT VERSION position increases with each
software version change.
Upon entry, the CURRENT VERSION is displayed. Press [↑] or [↓] to select the
FUNCTIONAL version. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Notes:
1. Programming a current version (default) allows all features and options (if installed) to
operate normally.
2. Programming a FUNCTIONAL version (X) eliminates any changes that affect the later
version. The revision emulation feature affects only functional changes.
3. A correction change (e.g., VER 3.1.2) remains fixed in accordance with the latest
version. Since the revision emulation default is the current version, program the
functional version at the start of each operation.
5–101
5. The revision emulation feature does not affect some interface changes for the direct
operation of the modem (Configuration save/recall, test mode screen in the
Utility/System, all factory setup modes, etc.).
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODEM TYPE:MODEM OPTIONS
MODEM OPTIONS
+ + - + - - - + + + + + - - +
Status Only
Displays the installed modem options.
If the option is installed, a “+” symbol is displayed. To view the available options press
[ENTER]. Observe for the flashing cursor. Press the [←] [→] arrows to move from one symbol
to the next. The first line will display the option. The second line will display the status:
Option Code Legend

HIGH POWER (0 or +) 0 = Not Installed, Factory Upgradable
HIGH STABILITY (0 or +) - = Not Installed, FAST Upgradable
ASLT (- or +) + = Installed
VITERBI (- or +) x = Not Installed, Field Upgradable
SEQUENTIAL (- or +)
SINGLE RATE (- or +)
LOW RATE VAR (- or +)
FULL RATE VAR (- or +)
CARD #1 PCB (x or +)
8PSK 2/3 (- or +)
TX only (0 or +)
RX only (0 or +)
OQPSK (- or +)
BURST (- or +)
The actual choices displayed in the sub-menus may vary according

to which FAST options have been enabled. Where a FAST option
affects a menu, this is shown in the descriptive text.
IMPORTANT
5–102
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODEM TYPE:CARD #1 TYPE
CARD #1 TYPE
OVERHEAD 01
Status Only: OVERHEAD 01, MUX 01, FLEX MUX 01, or NOT INSTALLED
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODEM TYPE: CARD #2 TYPE
CARD #2 TYPE
REED SOLOMON 03
Status Only: REED SOLOMON 02, REED SOLOMON 03, TURBO INSTALLED, DUPLEX
REED-SOLOMON, or NOT INSTALLED
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODEM TYPE: CARD #3 TYPE
CARD #3 TYPE
REED SOLOMON 02
Status Only: REED SOLOMON 02, REED SOLOMON 03, TURBO INSTALLED, DUPLEX
REED-SOLOMON DUPLEX, or NOT INSTALLED
5–103
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODEM TYPE: CARD #1 OPTIONS
CARD #1 OPTIONS
+++++
Status Only:
OVERHEAD 01 LIST:
G.703 (- or +)
IBS (- or +)
ASYNC/AUPC (- or +)
D&I (- or +)
IDR (- or +)
MUX 01 LIST:
4 CHANNEL SYNC (- or +)
8 CHANNEL SYNC (- or +)
4 CHANNEL ASYNC (- or +)
8 CHANNEL ASYNC (- or +)
CARD #2 OPTIONS
++
Status Only:
REED-SOLOMON 02 LIST:
INTELSAT (- or +)
AUPC (- or +)
REED-SOLOMON 03 LIST:
INTELSAT (- or +)
AUPC (- or +)
DUPLEX REED-SOLOMON
INTELSAT (- or +)
AUPC (- or +)
5–104
CARD #3 OPTIONS
++
Status Only:
REED SOLOMON 02 LIST:

INTELSAT (- or +)
AUPC (- or +)
REED SOLOMON 03 LIST:

INTELSAT (- or +)
AUPC (- or +)
DUPLEX REED-SOLOMON
INTELSAT (- or +)
AUPC (- or +)
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODEM TYPE:LOCAL MODEM AUPC
LOCAL MODEM AUPC

OFF
ON or OFF
Configures the modem for the self-monitoring Local Modem AUPC mode and for local TX
power control (self-monitoring) due to severe rain fade.
Notes:
1. The self-monitoring Local Modem AUPC mode is not used when the ASYNC/AUPC
interface option is installed.
2. The Modem must be configured for Duplex operation and the demod locked to the
modulator signal. Refer to Section A.1.4.1.1 for additional information.
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODEM TYPE: MODEM SERIAL #
MODEM SERIAL #
012345678
Status Only
5–105
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODEM TYPE: CARD #1 SERIAL #
CARD #1 SERIAL #
012345678
Status Only, if installed.
CARD #2 SERIAL #
012345678
CARD #3 SERIAL #
012345678
5–106

CONFIGURATION CODE - MODEM
CONFIGURATION
CODE - MODEM
Comtech EF Data-supplied code. Press <ENTER>
1)AAAAAAAAAA
2)AAAAAAAAAA
On entry, the current configuration code is displayed with the flashing cursor on the first
Entering this code enables the corresponding modem option. To purchase an option, contact an
Comtech EF Data marketing representative for more information.

CONFIGURATION CODE – CARD #1 (CONDITIONAL)
Applies only if Card #1 is installed.
IMPORTANT
CONFIGURATION
CODE – CARD #1
1)AAAAAAAAAA
2)AAAAAAAAAA
Comtech EF Data marketing representative for more information.
5–107
FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: MODEM TYPE:CONFIGURATION

CODE – CARD #2 (CONDITIONAL)
IMPORTANT
CONFIGURATION
CODE – CARD #2
1)AAAAAAAAAA
2)AAAAAAAAAA
Comtech EF Data marketing representative for more information

CONFIGURATION CODE – CARD #3 (CONDITIONAL)
IMPORTANT
CONFIGURATION
CODE – CARD #3
1)AAAAAAAAAA
2)AAAAAAAAAA
5–108
Comtech EF Data marketing representative for more information
5.4.6.8 FUNCTION SELECT: UTILITY: FACTORY SET-UP
UTILITY
FACTORY SET-UP
This command is used for factory configuration only. Unauthorized

persons must not change factory setup. Doing so will cause modem
CAUTION
failure.
5–109
5.5 Custom Modem Defaults

Note: The following parameters do not revert to default settings after a hard reset:
• Address/Parity/Baud Rate • EXT AGC Max Power

• Remote Type • Display Contrast
• EXT AGC MIN Power
Table 5-3. Custom Modem Defaults

Data Rate A Date Rate A
TX Rate A 64 kbps, QPSK 1/2 RX Rate A 64 kbps, QPSK 1/2
TX Rate B 128 kbps, QPSK 1/2 RX Rate B 128 kbps, QPSK 1/2
TX Rate C 256 kbps, QPSK 1/2 RX Rate C 256 kbps, QPSK 1/2
TX Rate D 512 kbps, QPSK 1/2 RX Rate D 512 kbps, QPSK 1/2
TX Rate V 38.4 kbps, QPSK 1/2 RX Rate V 38.4 kbps, QPSK 1/2
IF Frequency 70 MHz IF Frequency 70 MHz
IF Output Off Descrambler On
Power Output 0.0 dBm Differential Encoder On
Scrambler On RF Loopback Off
Differential Encoder On IF Loopback Off
Carrier Mode Normal-Modulated BER Threshold None
Modem Reference Internal Sweep Center 0 Hz
RS Encoder Off Sweep Range 60000 Hz
Reacquisition 0 seconds
RS Decoder Off
Interface
TX Clock Source TX Terrestrial RX Coding Format AMI
TX Clock Phase Auto Channel, Level (TX/RX) -5 dBm
EXT-CLK Frequency 1544 kHz Drop Format T1
Buffer Clock RX (Satellite) Insert Format T1
Buffer Size 384 bit/s or 6 mseconds Drop SAT Channel Terr, others T-Slot Terr
RX Clock Phase Normal Insert SAT Channel Terr, other T-Slot Terr
B-Band Loopback Off ASYNC TX Baud 110 kbps
Interface Loopback Off ASYNC RX Baud 110 kbps
Loop Timing Off ASYNC TX Length 7 bit/s
TX Data Fault None ASYNC RX Length 7 bit/s
RX Data Fault None ASYNC TX Stop 2 bits
TX 2047 Pattern Off ASYNC RX Stop 2 bits
RX 2047 Pattern Off ASYNC TX Parity Even
TX Coding Format AMI ASYNC RX Parity Even
5–110
Table 5-3. Custom Modem Defaults (Continued)

Configuration Local AUPC
AUPC Enabled Off Target Eb/N0 0.6 dB
Nominal Power -10.0 dB Tracking Rate 0.5 dB/min
Minimum Power -30.0 dBm Local CL Action Hold
Maximum Power -5.0 dBm Remote CL Action Hold
Configuration Mux
Tributary Frequency #1 2048 kbps Tributary #1 to #7 SYNC
Tributary Frequency #2 to #7 256 kbps Tributary #8 ASYNC
Tributary Interface #1 and #8 RS422 Tributary Clock Data CLK:NRM
Data NRM
Tributary Interface #2 to #7 RS232 Aggregate DR 2305 kbps
Configuration Flex Mux
TX Chan # 1 Mode D&I Enabled RX Chan # 1 Mode D&I Enabled
TX Chan # 1 DR 64.0 kbps RX Chan # 1 DR 64.0 kbps
TX Chan # 2 Mode ADPCM Disabled RX Chan # 2 Mode ADPCM Disabled
TX Chan # 3 Mode SYNC RS232 RX Chan # 3 Mode SYNC RS232
TX Chan # 3 Phase CLK: NRM DATA: NRM RX Chan # 3 Phase CLK: NRM DATA: NRM
TX Chan # 4 Mode ASYNC RS485 RX Chan # 4 Mode ASYNC RS485
TX Chan # 4 Phase CLK: NRM DATA: NRM RX Chan # 4 Phase CLK: NRM DATA: NRM
Function Select Monitor
RAW BER 2.4 E-3 Sweep Frequency 0 Hz
Corrected BER 4.0 E-3 Buffer Fill 50%
Eb/N0 16.0 dB Frame Errors n.n E-e
Receive Signal -45 dB
Function Select Remote AUPC
AUPC Enable Off TX 2047 Pattern Off
B-Band Loopback Off 2047 Errors n.n E-e
5–111

Utility
Data Rate A Date Rate A
TX Rate V 38.4 kbps, QPSK 1/2 RX Rate V 38.4 kbps, QPSK 1/2
MOD Power Offset 0 dB Demodulator Type INTERNAL Open
Modulator Type INTELSAT Open Decoder Type Viterbi
Encoder Type Turbo RX BPSK Ordering Standard
TX BPSK Ordering Standard DEMOD Spectrum Normal
MOD Spectrum Normal RX-RS Interleave 8 deep
TX-RS Interleave 8 deep RX-IESS-310 Mode Off
TX-RS Duplex (Alternate) N=225, K=205, I=8 RX-IESS-315 Mode Off
TX-RS Duplex Default RX-RS Duplex (Alternate) N=225, K=205, I=8
TX-IESS-310 Mode Off RX-RS Duplex Default
TX-IESS-315 Mode Off RX Symbol Rate 64 ksps
TX Symbol Rate 64 Ksps RX Mode Continuous
TX Mode Continuous Max Packet Size 2048
Utility Interface
TX Overhead Type None Backward Alarm RX #4 On
RX Overhead Type None Backward Alarm RX #3 On
TX Terr Interface RS422 Backward Alarm RX #2 On
RX Terr Interface RS422 Backward Alarm RX #1 On
Buffer Program Bits Backward Alarm TX #4 On
Framing Structure T1 Framing Structure: G.704 Backward Alarm TX #3 On
E1 Framing Structure: G.704
RTS TX-IF CNTRL Off Backward Alarm TX #2 On
TX Data Phase Normal Backward Alarm TX #1 On
RX Data Phase Normal ASYNC TX Type RS232
E1 Insert CRC On ASYNC RX Type RS232
IDR TX ESC Type 2-32k Audio
IDR RX ESC Type 2-32k Audio
CTS Delay
5–112

Utility System
Time 12:00:00 AM Self Test Off
Date 7/04/76 M&C Firmware FW/NNNNNN-DDR
MM/DD/YYYY
Remote Baud Rate 9600 bit/s Boot Firmware FW/NNNNNN-DDR
MM/DD/YYYY
Remote Address 1 FPGA Firmware MM/DD/YYYY
Remote Type RS485 (2-Wire) Display Contrast 64
Operational Mode Duplex EXT AGC: Min Pwr 0 volts
Year Display 2-Digit EXT AGC: Max Pwr s
Utility ModemType
G.703 Operation Unbalanced Card #2 Type Reed-Solomon 03
Modem Emulation Disabled Card #3 Type Reed-Solomon 03
Rev Emulation Current Version Local Modem AUPC Off
Card #1 Type Overhead 01
5–113
5–114
Chapter 6. Modem Type
6.1 Modem Types

Refer to Table 6-1 for configuring the modem to the following types of operation. Each
type allows the user to operate the modem under the requirements of the configuration
specifications listed below.
Table 6-1. Modem Types

Configuration Specification
IDR ( Intermediate Data Rate) IESS-308
IBS (INTELSAT Business Service) IESS-309, Legacy EFD equipment when RS=ON,
K/N =112/126
VSAT IBS INTELSAT compliant mode with NO Overhead and
RS = 201/219
D&I (Drop & Insert) IESS-308-5
ASYNC Asynchronous Overhead, including AUPC
AUPC AUPC on Reed-Solomon Card, No Async
EFD Closed Network
Custom Access all modes
CDM Comtech EF Data Compatible
Emulation Types Specifications
SDM-100 Emulates SDM-100 remote protocol
SDM-6000 Emulates SDM-6000 remote protocol
Revision Emulation Emulates earlier released software remote protocol
6-1
Modem Types MN/SDM300A.IOM
6.1.1 IDR Operation

To operate the modem in the IDR configuration, the following cards must be
installed in the modem:
• Overhead G.703/IDR/IBS/ASYNC/AUPC/D&I card (PL/5305-1)

• 50-pin D relay adapter card (PL/5509)
The IDR option is a FAST feature that must be enabled using the front panel and
the Utility: Modem Type menu. Table 6-2 lists the parameters that are accessible
once the IDR modem type is enabled.
Table 6-2. IDR Parameter Settings

Parameter Front Panel Setting Reference Menu
Modem Type IDR Utility: Modem Type
TX Data/Code Rate TX-V, QPSK 3/4 Configuration: Modulator
TX-IF Output ON Configuration: Modulator
RX Data/Code Rate RX-V, QPSK 3/4 Configuration: Demodulator
TX Clock Source TX Terrestrial, Internal, Ext. Configuration: Interface
Reference
Buffer Clock Source Satellite, TX Terrestrial, Internal, Configuration: Interface
Ext. Reference
TX Coding Format AMI, B8ZS, HDB3, or B6ZS Configuration: Interface
RX Coding Format AMI, B8ZS, HDB3, or B6ZS Configuration: Interface
Backward Alarm Control TX-1, TX-2, TX-3, TX-4 Utility: Interface
RX-1, RX-2, RX-3, RX-4
ON or OFF
Service Channel Adjust TX-1, TX-2, RX-1, RX-2 levels Configuration: Interface
The IDR modem type is an open network application, primarily used for voice
circuits. IDR has a fixed overhead structure.
6-2
6.1.2 IBS Operation

To operate the modem in the IBS configuration, the following cards must be

The IBS option is a FAST feature that must be enabled using the front panel and
the Utility: Modem Type menu. Table 6-3 lists the parameters that are accessible
once the IBS modem type is enabled.
Table 6-3. IBS Parameter Settings

Modem Type IBS Utility: Modem Type
TX Clock Source TX Terrestrial, Internal, Ext. Reference Configuration: Interface
Buffer Clock Source Satellite, TX Terrestrial, Internal, Ext. Configuration: Interface
Reference
TX Coding Format AMI, B8ZS, or HDB3 Configuration: Interface
RX Coding Format AMI, B8ZS, or HDB3 Configuration: Interface
The IBS modem type is an open network application, primarily used for data
circuits. IBS has a variable overhead structure that is dependent on the transmitted
data rate.
6-3
6.1.3 D&I Operation

To operate the modem in the Drop & Insert configuration, the following cards
must be installed in the modem:

The D&I option is a FAST feature that must be enabled using the front panel and the
Utility:Modem Type menu Table 6-4 lists the parameters that are accessible once the
D&I modem type is enabled.
Table 6-4. D&I Parameter Settings

Parameter Front Panel Settings Reference Manual
Modem Type D&I Utility: Modem Type
TX Data/Code Rate TX-V, QPSK 1/2 (NX64) Configuration: Modulator
RX Data/Code Rate RX-V, QPSK 1/2 (NX64) Configuration: Demodulator
TX Clock Source TX Terrestrial Configuration: Interface
Buffer Clock Source Insert Clock Configuration: Interface
TX Coding Format HDB3 Configuration: Interface
RX Coding Format HDB3 Configuration: Interface
Drop Format E1CCS/E1CAS (E1) Configuration: Interface
Insert Format E1CCS/E1CAS (E1) Configuration: Interface
In D&I operation, the transmit data rate is a fractional portion of the trunk T1 or E1
terrestrial input. The N stands for the number of 64 kbps time slots available for
transmission. Table 6-5 TX data rates for D&I with the corresponding number of time
slots available for each data rate.
Table 6-5. N x 64 Chart

Time Slots TX Data Rate Time Slots TX Data Rate
1 64 kbps 10 640 kbps
2 128 kbps 12 768 kbps
3 192 kbps 15 960 kbps
4 256 kbps 16 1024 kbps
5 320 kbps 20 1280 kbps
6 384 kbps 24 1536 kbps
8 512 kbps 30 1920 kbps
6-4
6.1.4 ASYNC/AUPC Operation

To operate in the Asynchronous/AUPC configuration, the following cards must be

The ASYNC/AUPC option is a FAST feature that must be enabled using the front panel
and the Utility: Modem Type menu. Table 6-6 lists that are accessible once the
ASYNC/AUPC modem type is enabled.
Table 6-6. Asynchronous Parameter Settings

Modem Type ASYNC Utility : Modem Type
TX Data/Code Rate TX-V, BPSK 1/2 or QPSK Configuration: Modulator
1/2, 3/4, or 7/8
RX Data/Code Rate RX-V, BPSK 1/2 or QPSK Configuration: Demodulator
1/2, 3/4, or 7/8
Encoder Type Viterbi/Sequential Utility: Modulator
Decoder Type Viterbi/Sequential Utility: Demodulator
ASYNC TX Baud 110 to 38400 bit/s Configuration: Interface
ASYNC RX Baud 110 to 38400 bit/s Configuration: Interface
ASYNC TX Length 5 to 8 bits Configuration: Interface
ASYNC RX Length 5 to 8 bits Configuration: Interface
ASYNC TX Stop 1 or 2 bits Configuration: Interface
ASYNC TX Parity Even or Odd Configuration: Interface
ASYNC RX Parity Even or Odd Configuration: Interface
Local AUPC ON or OFF Configuration: Local AUPC
Nominal Power -5 to -30 dBm Configuration: Local AUPC
Minimum Power -5 to -30 dBm Configuration: Local AUPC
Maximum Power -5 to -30 dBm Configuration: Local AUPC
Tracking Rate 0.5 to 6.0 dBm/min. Configuration: Local AUPC
Remote AUPC ON or OFF Function Select: Remote AUPC
AUPC Enable ON or OFF Function Select: Remote AUPC
Baseband Loopback ON or OFF Function Select: Remote AUPC
6-5
Asynchronous Overhead with AUPC is a closed network application that gives the user
the ability to communicate from the hub site to the remote site through the added
overhead. The user can use the AUPC feature that remotely controls the remote modem’s
power level, according to parameters programmed by the user. The user can also
remotely monitor and control the remote modem by sending remote commands over the
link via the overhead. This can be done by a local terminal or Monitor and Control
system.
6.1.5 EFD Closed Network Operation

The modem does not require any additional hardware installed to operate in Comtech
EFD Closed Network configuration. The basic modem configuration, which includes the
25-pin D Data I/O connector, supports V.35, EIA-422, and EIA-232 data with no
overhead. The Comtech EF Data closed network configuration allows the SDM-300A to
be compatible with any Comtech EF Data closed network application.
The modem can be compatible with other closed network applications by selecting
different modulator and demodulator types. Fairchild and Comstream compatible closed
network systems can be supported with the modem. When selecting these modulator and
demodulator types, the modem becomes compatible with Fairchild or Comstream closed
network modems that may be at the distant end of the link.
The modem can also support SDM-51 receive-only Remote Space Link Controlled
(SLRC) modems. These receive-only modems are used in closed network applications
where a small amount of overhead is used for monitor and control functions by the
transmitting modem. The modem would become a transmit-only modem when the
SDM-51 compatible modulator type has been selected.
To operate the modem in the SDM-51 compatible configuration, the modem does not
require any additional hardware installed. The 25-pin D Data I/O connector supports
either EIA-422 or EIA-232 data that is used in the SDM-51, SDM-52, or SDR-54
receive-only modems. Refer to Table 6-7 for Comtech EFD Closed Network parameter
settings.
6-6
Table 6-7. Comtech EFD Closed Network Parameter Settings

Modem Type EFD Utility: Modem Type
Buffer Clock Source Satellite Clock Configuration: Interface
Modulator Type EFD Closed (All modulator types Utility: Modulator
are accessible)
Encoder Type Viterbi or Sequential Utility: Modulator
Demodulator type EFD Closed (All modulator types Utility: Demodulator
are accessible)
Decoder Type Viterbi or Sequential Utility: Demodulator
TX Overhead Type None Utility: Interface
RX Overhead Type None Utility: Interface
Interface Type EIA-422, EIA-232, V.35, G.703 (see Utility: Interface
Note)
Buffer Program Bits or Milliseconds Utility: Interface
RTS TX-IF Cntrl OFF or ON Utility: Interface
CTS Delay 0 Seconds Utility: Interface
Note: To use G.703, the modem must have the required G.703 Overhead board (PL/5305-1)
installed.
6.1.6 Custom Operation

Note: If the modem serves as the backup unit for a rack of modems having different
hardware and FAST options, then the backup modem shall have all of the features and
hardware found in the other modems.
Operating in Custom mode allows access to all front panels menus, including the Utility
menus. The Custom operation mode is manly used when the modem must function with
no overhead in an open network application. For example, to use the modem in the IDR
mode of operation with overhead (308-2), the following steps are taken:
1. Select the IDR modem type, so that the modem loads the IDR default parameter.
2. Select the Custom modem type, which allows Access to the modulator and
demodulator overhead type.
3. Select NONE for the overhead types.
A protection switch can make use of the Custom operation mode when the modem is
configured as a backup modem. Because the backup modem is operating in Custom
Mode, the switch can program all the backup modem parameters. Thus, the one backup
modem can be made compatible with all of the various application types found in the
rack.
6-7
6.1.7 SDM-100 Emulation Operation

The SDM-100 Emulation feature of the modem provides remote protocol compatibility
with existing SDM-100 modems, which makes several applications possible:
• Add an SDM-300A to a rack of SDM-100s with a protection switch.
• Replace an SDM-100 requiring service with SDM-300A.
• Use SDM-300A as the backup modem for a rack containing a mix of SDM-100
and SDM-300A modems.
SDM-100 Emulation is typically a closed network application, with no added overhead.

The modem does not required any additional hardware to operate in SDM-100
Emulation. The basic modem configuration, which includes the 25-pin D Data I/O
connector, supports V.35, EIA-422, and EIA-232 data.
Refer to Table 6-8 for SDM-100 emulation parameter settings.
Table 6-8. SDM-100 Emulation Parameter Settings

Parameter Front Panel Settings Reference Menu
Modem Emulation SDM-100 Utility: Modem Type
Modulator Type INTELSAT Open, CSC Closed, Utility: Modulator
FDC Closed, EFD Closed
Demodulator Type INTELSAT Open, CSC Closed, Utility: Demodulator
FDC Closed, EFD Closed
Interface Type EIA422, EIA232, V.35 Utility: Interface
Buffer Program Bits or Milliseconds Utility: Interface
RTS TX-IF Cntrl OFF or ON Utility: Interface
6-8
6.1.8 SDM-6000 Emulation Operation

The SDM-6000 Emulation allows the SDM-300A to be compatible with the SDM-6000
remote protocol. This modem type is used for mixing SDM-300A modems with SDM-
6000 modems that are in service, allowing the user to:
• Add an SDM-300A to a rack of SDM-6000s with a protection switch.
• Replace an SDM-6000 requiring service with SDM-300A.
• Use SDM-300A as the backup modem for a rack containing a mix of SDM-300A
and SDM-6000 modems.
The SDM-6000 Emulation can be an open or closed network application. If SDM-6000

application requires the use if IDR, IBS, D&I, or ASYNC overhead, then the Overhead
PCB must be installed in the SDM-300A, and the applicable FAST option shall be
enabled using the front panel.
Refer to Table 6-9 for SDM-6000 emulation parameter setting.
Table 6-9. SDM-6000 Emulation Parameter Settings

Modem Emulation SDM-6000 Utility: Modem Type
Modulator Type INTELSAT Open, CSC Closed, FDC Utility: Modulator
Closed, EFD Closed, SDM-51
Compatible
Demodulator Type INTELSAT Open, CSC Closed, FDC Utility: Demodulator
Closed, EFD Closed
Interface Type EIA-422, EIA-232, V.35, G.703 Utility: Interface
Buffer Program Bits or Milli-Seconds Utility: Interface
RST TX-IF Cntrl OFF or ON Utility: Interface
Note: The SDM-6000 software version compatibility is displayed on the second line of the Utility:
Modem Type: Modem Emulation menu.
6-9
6.2 Reed-Solomon Modes

Reed-Solomon polynomial is compatible with Intelsat (IESS-308, IESS-309,
IESS-310, and IESS-314). Table 6-10 shows the Reed-Solomon parameter used
for various configurations.
Table 6-10. Reed-Solomon Modes
Modem Menu 1,2 Description

Configuration
Utility Modem Modulator TX or Utility Modulator
Type Demodulator RX or Demodulator 4 Overhead Type Scrambler N K T I Mode
Rate 3
D&I 8-PSK 2/3 IESS-310 ON + TCM/IDR 309 219 201 9 4 IESS-310 Compliant (8-
Intelsat Open Small carrier PSK 2/3 only)
IDR 8-PSK 2/3 IESS-310 ON + TCM/IDR V.35 219 201 9 8
Intelsat Open (T1, E15, T25, E25)
EFD QPSK EFD Closed No Overhead EFD MOD V.35 225 205 10 8
EFD 8-PSK 2/3 EFD CLOSED No Overhead EFD MOD V.35 219 201 9 4
IESS-310 ON
ASYNC QPSK EFD CLOSED ASYNC Overhead EFD MOD V.35 225 205 10 8
ASYNC 8-PSK 2/3 EFD CLOSED ASYNC Overhead EFD MOD V.35 219 201 9 4 Non-IESS-310
IESS-310 ON Compliant 8-PSK 2/3
VSAT IBS QPSK Intelsat Open VSAT IBS 309 219 201 9 4 only
(Compliant = No IESS-308/309 Compliant
Overhead) (Open) only
D&I QPSK Intelsat Open IDR Small Carrier 309 126 112 7 4
(D&I)
IDR QPSK Intelsat Open IDR, T1 Intelsat V.35 225 205 10 4 Non-IESS modes For All
IDR QPSK Intelsat Open IDR, E1 Intelsat V.35 219 201 9 4 other Rate (BPSK,
IDR QPSK Intelsat Open IDR, T25 Intelsat V.35 194 178 8 4 QPSK, Offset QPSK,
8-PSK 5/65, 16-QAM5)
IDR QPSK Intelsat Open IDR, E25 Intelsat V.35 194 178 8 4
IBS QPSK Intelsat Open IBS 309 126 112 7 4 Legacy EFD (IBS)
IESS-314 Compliant (8-PSK 2/3 only) Same as IESS-310 Compliant 8-PSK 2/3
Where:
N = Coded Reed-Solomon block length (Number of bytes)
K = Uncoded Reed-Solomon block length (Number of bytes)
T = Maximum number of byte corrections (T =[N-K] /2)
I = Interleave Depth
6-10
Notes:
1. For IESS-308/309 compliant operation, it is necessary to enable
INTELSAT OPEN under both the Utility: Modulator and Utility:
Demodulator menus before selecting an open network type from the
Modem Type menu under Utility: Modem Type.
2. For IESS-310 (8-PSK 2/3) compliant operation, it is necessary to make the
selections in the previous step and select TX IESS-310 Mode = On under
the Utility: Modulator menu and select RX IESS-310 Mode = ON under
Utility: Demodulator menu.
3. Data Rate is TX-X or RX-X under Configuration: Modulator or
Configuration: Demodulator menus.
4. When the modulator type is not 8-PSK, the IESS-310 ON/OFF selection
has no effect.
5. Not applicable for the SDM-300A modem. Shown for reference only.
6-11
6-12
Chapter 7. Clocking Options
7.1 Clocking Options

Clocking of the data from the terrestrial equipment to the satellite (and vice
versa) will depend on the application.
7.1.1 EIA-232, EIA-422, or V.35 Master/Master
Refer to Figure 7-1 for:
• Clocking block diagram

• Transmit clock options
• Buffer clock options
• V.35 timing signals
• EIA-422 timing signals
7.1.2 EIA-232, EIA-422, or V.35 Master/Slave
Refer to Figure 7-2 for:

• V.35 timing signals
• EIA-422 timing signals
The use of loop timing in the modem is an option for both EIA-422 and V.35
operation.
SCT (LOOP): SCT (INTERNAL) clock no longer applies when the modem has loop timing on
The TX clock source is now recovered from the RX satellite data. This recovered
clock is put out on the ST line and is used to clock the terrestrial equipment. The
TX terrestrial clock is now essentially the same as the RX satellite clock, except
that it has been buffered by the terrestrial equipment.
7-1
Clocking Options MN/SDM300A.IOM
Step Procedure
1 Select TX TERRESTRIAL for the TX clock source when in loop timing, if the user
equipment is being slaved off the modem. The SCT (LOOP) indication serves as a
reminder that the SCT internal clock is now the recovered clock, not the internal oscillator.
2 Select SCT (LOOP) when the terrestrial equipment does not provide a TX terrestrial clock
7.1.3 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master

Use this application when both earth stations have high stability clocks and the
received data is to be clocked to the local network. Refer to Figure 7-3 for:

The disadvantage of the master/master application is that the receive data will
slip, as the clocks will not be synchronized. If the buffer is properly set up, the
slips will be an exact frame length, causing minimum loss of data. By using very
high stability clocks, the expected time between slips can be several days.
Loss of the buffer clock will mean the buffer will not be emptied and data will
not be available. The buffer clock will normally revert to the low stability
internal reference automatically.
7.1.4 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave

Use this application when the far end earth station does not have local access to a
high stability reference clock, or when it is not required to synchronize with a
local clock. Refer to Figure 7-4 for:

• Buffer clock options for using external loop timing
Modem loop timing does not apply for G.703 operation.

IMPORTANT
The terrestrial equipment must select loop timing to recover the clock off the
receive data and use that recovered clock for the transmit data.
The disadvantage of the master/slave application is that the signal received at the
slave station is subject to Doppler shift. The length of the buffer at the master end
will need to be twice the length that is normally required, compensating for the
Doppler shift on the outward and return paths.
7-2
TXCLOCK = TX TERRESTRIAL
SD
TT
HIGH
STABILITY
OSCILLATOR
ST INTERNAL
OSCILLATOR
DTS BOP TRANSMIT
EXT REF RECEIVE
TX
TERRESTRIAL
SATELLITE
DATA
RD
CLOCK
RT BUFFER RECOVERY
CLOCK
BUFFER CLOCK = TX TERRESTRIAL
MASTER

CLOCK
RT
CLOCK BUFFER
RECOVERY DATA RD
SATELLITE
TX
TERRESTRIAL
EXT REF
RECEIVE
TRANSMIT DTS
ST BOP
INTERNAL
OSCILLATOR
HIGH
STABILITY
OSCILLATOR
TT
SD
MASTER
Figure 7-1. EIA-422, EIA-232, or V.35 Master/Master Clocking Diagram
7-3
SD
TT
HIGH
STABILITY
OSCILLATION
TX
ST TERRESTRIAL
INTERNAL
OSCILLATOR
DTS BOP TRANSMIT
EXT REF RECEIVE
SATELLITE
RD DATA
CLOCK
RT BUFFER RECOVERY
CLOCK
MASTER
BUFFER CLOCK = RX (SATELLITE CLOCK)
CLOCK
RT
DATA BUFFER
CLOCK DATA RD
SATELLITE
EXT REF
RECEIVE
TRANSMIT BOP DTS
ST
INTERNAL
OSCILLATOR
(LOOP)
TIMING
HIGH SELECTED)
STABILITY
OSCILLATION
TT
SD
SLAVE
Figure 7-2. EIA-422, EIA-232, or V.35 Master/Slave Clocking Diagram
7-4
TXCLOCK + TX TERRESTRIAL
DATA
SD CLOCK
RECOVERY CLOCK
HIGH
STABILITY
OSCILLATOR
TX
TERRESTRIAL INTERNAL
OSCILLATOR
DTS BOP TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
SATELLITE
DATA
RD DATA CLOCK
BUFFER RECOVERY
CLOCK CLOCK

MASTER
CLOCK
RECOVERY BUFFER
SATELLITE
TX
TERRESTRIAL
RECEIVE
TRANSMIT BOP DTS

HIGH
INTERNAL STABILITY
OSCILLATOR OSCILLATOR
CLOCK
RECOVERY
TX CLOCK = TX TERRESTRIAL
MASTER
Figure 7-3. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master Clocking Diagram
7-5
TX CLO CK + TX T ERRES TRIA L

SD DATA
CLO CK
RECO V ERY
CLOCK
HIG H
STAB ILITY
O SCILLATO R
TX
TE RRESTRIAL INTERNAL
O SCILLATO R
DTS BO P TRA NSM IT
RECEIVE
TX
TERRESTRIAL
SATE LLITE
DATA
RD DATA CLO C K
CLO CK BUFFER RECO V ERY
CLOCK
BUF FER CLO CK = TX TERRE STRIA L

M ASTER
BUFFER CLO CK = RX (S ATELLIT E CLO CK)
CLO CK RD
BUFFER
REC O V ERY
SATE LLITE
TX
TERRESTRIAL
RECEIVE
TRA N SM IT
HIG H BO P DTS
INTERNAL STAB ILITY
O SCILLATO R O SCILLATO R
N O TE : TE RREST RIAL
EQ UIPM ENT MUS T
R ECO V ER T HE CL O CK
SD FRO M R ECEIV ED DATA .
CLOCK
RECOVERY
TX CLOC K = TX TERRE STRIAL

SLAVE
Figure 7-4. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave Clocking Diagram
7-6
7.1.5 D&I G.703 Master/Master
In the D&I configuration, the most typical clocking option is the

master/master application. Refer to Figure 7-5 for:
• Blocking diagram
7-7
T X C L O C K = T X T E R R E S T R IA L
SD DDI DDI
SD
DROP S E N D D A TA
MUX
CLOCK
DDO DDO
CLOCK
RECO VERY
TX
TERRESTRIAL IN T E R N A L
O S C I L L AT O R
DT S TRANSMIT
BO P RECEIVE
EXTERNAL REF.
IDI IDI INSERT

CLOCK
RECOVERY S A T E L L IT E
CLOCK
IN SERT CLOCK
BUFFER
MUX RECOVERY
RD IDO IDO D A TA
RX CLO CK = INSERT
M ASTER
R X CLO CK = IN SERT
IDO IDO RD
D A TA
CLOCK INSERT
BU F FER
RECO V ERY MUX
CLO CK
S A T E L L IT E INSERT
CLOCK IDI IDI
RECOVERY
EXTERNAL REF.
RECEIVE
TRANSMIT BO P D TS
TX
TERRESTRIAL N O TE : F O R M A ST ER/SL AV E
IN T E R N A L O PER ATIO N IN G .70:
O S C I L L AT O R
SEL ECT TE RR EST RIA L
EQ U IPM EN T SL AVE -SID E.
CLO CK
RECOVERY TH E M O D EM SET TIN G S
R EM AIN A S M AST ER /MA ST
TH E U SER EQU IPM EN T W IL

DDO DDO N EED TO RE CO V ER T HE
TIM IN G F RO M T H E REC EIVE
CLO CK
D ATA IF A M A STE R/SL AVE
S E N D D A TA DROP C LO C K AR R AN G E ME NT IS
MUX D ESIR ED.
DDI DDI SD
T X C L O C K = T X T E R R E S T R IA L
MASTER
Figure 7-5. D&I G.703 Master/Master Clocking Diagram
7-8
Chapter 8. Buffering
8.1 Buffering
The purpose of a receive buffer is two reasons:
• Plesiochronous buffering of two dissimilar clock frequencies (normally the far

end transmit clock verses the local network clock). The clocks may be very close
in frequency to each other and will normally slip at a constant rate. Figure 8-1
shows plesiochronous operation for dissimilar clocks. If incoming traffic is too
fast, an occasional bit will be lost. If incoming traffic is too slow, an occasional
bit will be repeated.
• Doppler buffer of the signal of the satellite. The Doppler shift results from the
“figure 8” (Figure 8-2) station keeping movement performed by the satellite in
space over a period of one day. Doppler shift should not result in a clock slip, as
the buffer will constantly fill and empty.
If the two earth stations are configured as master/slave, then the buffer need only be
configured for Doppler operation. The buffer will then have sufficient capacity for the
Doppler shift on the outward and return paths.
A buffer set up for Doppler operation only, will typically require less depth than one
intended for both Doppler and plesiochronous operation.
Revision 6 8–1
Buffering SDM300A.IOM
PLESIOCHRONOUS OPERATION
f1
f1 IS NOT EXACTLY EQUAL TO f 2
f2
1) INCOMING TRAFFIC TOO FAST 2) INCOMING TRAFFIC TOO SLOW
BIT 1
BIT 1
BIT 1
BIT 2 ERROR BIT 1 ERROR
BIT 2
BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 2
BIT 3 BIT 3
BIT 4 BIT 3
BIT 5 BIT 5 BIT 3

BIT 4
BIT 6 BIT 4
BIT 6
BIT 5
BIT 7 BIT 5
BIT 7
BIT 6 BIT 6
INTERFACE INTERFACE
Figure 8-1. Clock Slip
8–2
SATELLITE MOTION AND ORBITAL INCLINATION
N A A SATELLITE IS MAINTAINED AT AN
GEO-SYNCHRONOUS ASSIGNED GEOSTATIONARY
INCLINED ORBIT LOCATION THROUGH THE USE OF
GROUND COMMAND ADJUSTMENTS
TO ITS N/S AND E/W LOCATION. THIS
SATELLITE PROCESS, KNOWN AS SATELLITE
NOMINAL STATION-KEEPING, IS USED TO KEEP
GEO-SYNCHRONOUS
POSITION THE SATELLITE DRIFT WITHIN
EQUATORIAL ORBIT
CERTAIN BOUNDARIES.
AS STATION-KEEPING FUEL
S BECOMES EXHAUSTED, THE N/S
STATION-KEEPING IS LIMITED
TO PRODUCE A MORE INCLINED
ORBIT, THUS PROLONGING THE
LIFE OF THE SATELLITE.
N
A
THE N/S MOTION CHANGES THE
PATH FROM THE SATELLITE TO THE
EARTH, RESULTING IN FREQUENCY
SATELLITE CHANGES KNOWN AS THE DOPPLER
C N/S EFFECT.
MOTION
Figure 8-2. Doppler Shift
8–3
8.2 Buffer Size

Refer to Table 8-1.
The depth of the receive buffer will depend on four parameters:
• Doppler shift caused by satellite

• Stability of each clock (plesiochronous/Doppler operation)
• Frame/Multiframe length of multiplexed data format
• Allowable time between clock slips
8.3 Doppler
A geostationary satellite should be positioned directly over the equator and orbit
with a duration of 24 hours. In practice, the exact inclination of the satellite
(relative to the equator) is influenced by the earth, moon, and sun’s gravity, as
well as solar wind. Station keeping motors are required to maintain the orbital
position.
When viewed from the earth, the satellite appears to prescribe and ellipse in
space, degrading to a “figure 8” as the angle of inclination increases.
The orbit of the satellite can result in a peak-to-peak altitude variation of ± 2%

(85 km), while the station keeping of a newly launched satellite will typically be ±
0.1° (150 km). The total effect will be 172 km relative to the nominal 42,164 km
radius.
Depending upon the location of the earth station relative to the satellite, the
variation in propagation delay will typically be 1.15 ms (up to satellite and back
down), therefore a buffer depth of 2 ms is sufficient to cope with most
commercial satellites.
Since station keeping involves using fuel in the motors, the “lifetime” of the
satellite can be extended by allowing the satellite to drift into a wider “figure 8”
and using the motor less often.
The older satellites will be found in a more inclined orbit with the station keeping
varying in latitude by as much as ± 4°. The total effect of the inclined orbit may
result in a typical variation in path delay of 35 ms.
8–4
8.4 Plesiochronous
The stability of station reference clocks is normally 1 x 10-12 (derived from a
cesium standard). While the stability is exceptionally high, the two clocks are not
in synchronization with each other and will eventually pass by each other.
The clock used for the transmit signal is passed over the satellite, but will not be
used at the receive earth station where a national network derives its time locally.
A buffer will fill up with data using the clock from the satellite and will empty
using the local clock. The object of the buffer is to ensure that the buffer
overflows or underflows at regular, determinable intervals (typically every 40
days).
The buffer depth required (from center to end) will be:
Minimum slip period (seconds) * [stability of far end (transmit) clock + stability of
local clock]
For example:
Far end (transmit) clock stability 1 x 10-9

Local (buffer) clock 1 x 10-11
Minimum clock slip 40 days
Buffer Depth = (40 x 24 x 60 x 60) x (1 x 10-9 + 1 x 10-11) = 3.49 ms
Because the buffer will either fill or empty (depending on the frequency
relationship of the two clocks), the total buffer depth will be 2 x 3.49 ms = 6.98
ms.
8–5
8.5 Frame/Multiframe Length

The depth of the receive buffer required has been discussed in Section 8.4, and is
applicable to all unframed data.
When the data is framed (such as 2048 kbps G732 or 1544 kbps G733), it is
desirable to provide slips in predefined locations. The advantage of organized slip
locations (in relation to the frame) is that multiplexing equipment does not lose
sync and outages on any channel are kept to a minimum.
A 2048 kbps frame structure commonly used is G732. This has a frame length of
256 bits with 16 frames per multiframe (4096 bits total, or 2 ms).
8.5.1 Multiples of the Frame Length

If this setting is set to NONE, the user can choose any buffer depth.
8.5.2 Total Buffer Length

T1 and E1 framing structure under G.704 is available. When this is selected, the
buffer length is restricted to the size of the buffer. Using the examples from the
three previous sections, the total buffer depth (end to end) will be:
Doppler + Plesiochronous (rounded up to the nearest multiframe)

1.15 ms + 6.98 ms = 8.13 ms
If the frame length is 2 ms, then the nearest multiframe will be 10 ms, or 20,480
bits.
8.6 Converting Between Bits and Seconds
8.6.1 Bits to Seconds

1/Data Rate x Bits = Seconds.
8.6.2 Seconds to Bits

Data Rate x Seconds = Bit.
8–6
Table 8-1. Minimum Doppler/Plesiochronous Buffer Capacity Requirements

Buffer Capacity (ms)
Satellite Orbit Inclination For Various Circuit Configuration
(Degrees) Master/Master Master/Slave
0.1 (Nomnal) 1.5 2.4
0.5 2.5 4.4
1.0 3.9 7.4
1.5 5.5 10.4
2.0 6.9 13.2
2.5 8.5 16.4
3.0 9.9 19.2
4.0 12.9 25.2
Notes:
1. The above minimum buffer capacities include a factor of two to allow the buffer to start in the
center and then drift in either direction. In the Master/Slave case, where the TX timing at one end
of the link is derived from the demodulator and used to TX back to either the station which
originated the timing signal or to a different station, another factor of two has been applied to the
Doppler contribution to account for the passage of the timing signal twice through the satellite.
2. Adding the buffer requirements due to satellite delay variations (Doppler) and that due to the
interfacing of different national clocks (plesiochronous) derived the above capacities.
3. Actual buffer capacity is likely to be larger due to the need to slip primary order streams on a
multiframe basis.
8–7
8–8
Chapter 9. Forward Error
Correction (Options)
9.1 Introduction
As standard, the SDM-300A is equipped with four Forward Error Correction (FEC)
encoders/decoders – Viterbi, Sequential, concatenated Reed-Solomon, and Trellis (which
is available with the 8-PSK FAST option). The constraint lengths and encoding
polynomials are not only Open Network compatible, but also are Closed Network
compatible with the vast majority of existing modems from other manufacturers.
Comtech EF Data has performed compatibility testing to ensure inter-operability.
Turbo Coding represents a very significant

development in the area of FEC, and optionally,
the SDM-300A may be fitted with Turbo
Product Code. The Turbo card is a plug-in
daughter Card (SIMM
modules), located in the same slot as the Reed-Solomon cards (Reed-Solomon cards shall
be removed.) Turbo may be field upgradeable.
• The Turbo option provides data rate capability up to 5 Mbps, and code rates
limited to:
BPSK Rate = 5/16 or 21/44

OQPSK / QPSK Rate = 1/2, 3/4
8-PSK Rate = 3/4
Turbo Product Coding provides the best Forward Error Correction technology currently
available, and is now offered with a sufficient range of code rates and modulation types
that link performance can be optimized under any conditions.
9–1
Forward Error Correction (Options) MN/SDM300A.IOM
9.2 Viterbi
The combination of convolutional coding and Viterbi decoding has become an almost
universal standard for satellite communications. The SDM-300A complies with the
Intelsat IESS 308/309 standards for Viterbi decoding with a constraint length of seven.
This is a de facto standard, even in a closed network environment, which means almost
guaranteed inter-operability with other manufacturer’s equipment.
It provides very useful levels of coding gain, and its short decoding delay and error-burst
characteristics make it particularly suitable for low data rate coded voice applications.
It has a short constraint length, fixed at 7, for all code rates. (The constraint length is
defined as the number of output symbols from the encoder that are affected by a single
input bit.) By choosing various coding rates (Rate 1/2, 3/4, or 7/8) the user can trade off
coding gain for bandwidth expansion.
• Rate 1/2 coding gives the best improvement in error rate, but doubles the
transmitted data rate, and hence doubles the occupied bandwidth of the signal.
• Rate 7/8 coding, at the other extreme, provides the most modest improvement in
performance, but only expands the transmitted bandwidth by 14 %.
A major advantage of the Viterbi decoding method is that the performance is independent
of data rate, and does not display a pronounced threshold effect (i.e., does not fail rapidly
below a certain value of Eb/No). This is not true of the Sequential decoding method, as
explained in the section below. Note that in BPSK mode, the SDM-300A only permits a
coding rate of 1/2. Because the method of convolutional coding used with Viterbi, the
encoder does not preserve the original data intact, and is called non-systematic.
9–2
9.3 Sequential
Although the method of convolutional coding and Sequential decoding appears to be very
similar to the Viterbi method, there are some fundamental differences. To begin with, the
convolutional encoder is said to be systematic - it does not alter the input data, and the
FEC overhead bits are simply appended to the data. Furthermore, the constraint length, k,
is much longer (Rate 1/2, k=36. Rate 3/4, k= 63. Rate 7/8, k=87). This means that when
the decoding process fails (that is, when its capacity to correct errors is exceeded) it
produces a burst of errors, which is in multiples of half the constraint length.
An error distribution is produced which is markedly different to that of a Viterbi decoder.

This gives rise to a pronounced threshold effect. A Sequential decoder does not fail
gracefully - a reduction in Eb/No of just a few tenths of a dB can make the difference
between acceptable BER and a complete loss of synchronization. The decoding algorithm
itself (called the Fano algorithm) uses significantly more path memory (4 kbits in this
case) than the equivalent Viterbi decoder, giving rise to increased latency. Furthermore, a
fixed computational clock is used to process input symbols, and to search backwards and
forwards in time to determine the correct decoding path.
At lower data rates there are sufficient number of computational cycles per input symbol
to permit the decoding process to perform optimally. However, as the data rate increases,
there are fewer cycles available, leading to a reduction in coding gain. This is clearly
illustrated in the performance curves that follow. For data rates above ~1 Mbps, Viterbi
should be considered the better alternative. The practical upper limit at this time is 2.048
Mbps.
9–3
9.4 Reed-Solomon Outer Codec
It cannot be emphasized strongly enough that the purpose of the concatenated Reed-
Solomon is to dramatically improve the BER performance of a link under given
noise conditions. It should NOT be considered as a method to reduce the link EIRP
requirement to produce a given BER. Factors such as rain-fade margin, particularly
IMPORTANT
at Ku-band, are extremely important, and reducing link EIRP can seriously degrade
the availability of such a link.
The concatenation of an outer Reed-Solomon (R-S) Codec with Viterbi decoder first
became popular when Intelsat introduced it in the early 1990's. It permits significant
improvements in error performance without significant bandwidth expansion.
The coding overhead added by the R-S outer Codec is typically around 10%, which
translates to a 0.4 dB power penalty for a given link. Reed-Solomon codes are block
codes (as opposed to Viterbi and Sequential, which are convolutional), and in order to be
processed correctly the data must be framed and de-framed. Additionally, Reed-Solomon
codes are limited in how well they can correct errors that occur in bursts. This,
unfortunately, is the nature of the uncorrected errors from both Viterbi and Sequential
decoders, which produce clusters of errors that are multiples of half the constraint length.
(This is particularly severe in the case of Sequential, where the constraint lengths are
considerably longer than Viterbi).
For this reason, the data must be interleaved following R-S encoding, and is then de-
interleaved prior to decoding. This ensures that a single burst of errors leaving the Viterbi
or Sequential decoder is spread out over a number of interleaving frames, so errors
entering the R-S decoder do not exceed its capacity to correct those errors.
In the case of the SDM-300A, different R-S code rates are used, according to the mode of
operation:
9–4
9.4.1 Closed Network Modes

A 225, 205 code is used in EFD closed network modes. (225, 205 means that data is put
into blocks of 225 bytes, of which 205 bytes are data, and 20 bytes are FEC overhead.)
These two codes were chosen because they fit well into Comtech EF Data’s clock
generation scheme, and they have almost identical coding gain.
The increase in coding gain is at the expense of delay. The interleaving/de-interleaving

delay and the delay through the decoder itself can be as high as 25 kbps. At very low data
rates, this equates to several seconds, making it highly unsuitable for voice applications.
Additionally, the deinterleaver frame synchronization method can add significantly to the
time taken for the demodulator to declare acquisition.
9.4.2 Open Network Modes

Code Rate Mode
219, 201 Standard IESS308 E1, and IESS 310 mode
225, 205 Standard IESS308 T1
194, 178 Standard IESS308 T2/E2
126, 112 Standard IESS309 modes
A characteristic of concatenated R-S coding is the very pronounced threshold effect. For
any given modem design, there will be a threshold value of Eb/No below which the
demodulator cannot stay synchronized. This may be due to the carrier-recovery circuits,
or the synchronization threshold of the primary FEC device, or both. In the SDM-300A,
and Rate 1/2 operation, this threshold is around 4 dB Eb/No. Below this value, operation
is not possible, but above this value, the error performance of the concatenated RS system
produces exceptionally low error rates for a very small increase in Eb/No.
Care should be taken not to operate the demodulator near its sync threshold. Small
fluctuations in Eb/No may cause total loss of the link, with the subsequent need for
CAUTION the demodulator to re-acquire the signal.
9–5
9.5 Trellis Coding (FAST Option)

In the other FEC methods described, the processes of coding and modulation are
independent - the FEC Codec has no knowledge of, or interaction with the modulator.
However, there are schemes in which the coding and modulation are combined together,
where the encoder places FEC symbols in a precise manner into the signal constellation.
This can yield an overall improvement in performance, and is used in higher-order
modulation schemes, such as 8-PSK, etc. When convolution coding is used, the overall
coded modulation approach is referred to as Trellis Coded Modulation (TCM).
Ungerboeck was an early pioneer, and developed optimum mapping and decoding
schemes. However, the decoding scheme was seen as complex, and expensive, and
Qualcomm Inc. developed a variation on the theme, which uses a Viterbi decoder at the
core, surrounded by adjunct processing. The scheme is able to achieve performance very
close to the optimum Ungerboeck method, but with far less complexity, and is called
pragmatic Trellis Coded Modulation.
Now, Intelsat recognized that, as more and more high power transponders are put in to
service, the transponders are no longer power limited, but bandwidth limited. In order to
maximize transponder capacity, they looked at 8-PSK as a method of reducing the
occupied bandwidth of a carrier, and adopted Qualcomm’s pragmatic TCM, at Rate 2/3.
A Rate 2/3 8-PSK/TCM carrier occupies only 50% of the bandwidth of a Rate 1/2 QPSK
carrier. However, the overall coding gain of the scheme is not adequate by itself, and so
Intelsat’s IESS-310 specification requires that the scheme be concatenated with an outer
R-S Codec. When combined, there is a threshold value of Eb/No of around 6 dB, and
above approximately 7 dB, the bit error rate is better than 1 x 10-8.
The detractions of the concatenated R-S approach apply here also, along with more
stringent requirements for phase noise and group delay distortion – the natural
consequences of the higher-order modulation.
The SDM-300A fully implements the IESS-310 specification at data rates up to 18 Mbps.
In accordance with the specification, the R-S outer code can be disabled. Performance
curves for both cases are illustrated in this chapter.
9–6
9.6 Turbo Product Codec (Hardware Option)
9.6.1 Introduction
Turbo coding is an FEC technique developed
within the last few years, which delivers
significant performance improvements
compared to more traditional techniques. Two
general classes of Turbo
Codes have been developed, Turbo Convolutional Codes (TCC), and Turbo Product
Codes (TPC, a block coding technique). Comtech EF Data has chosen to implement an
FEC Codec based on TPC. A Turbo Product Code is a 2 or 3 dimensional array of block
codes. Encoding is relatively straightforward, but decoding is a very complex process
requiring multiple iterations of processing for maximum performance to be achieved.
Unlike the popular method of concatenating a Reed Solomon Codec with a primary FEC
Codec, Turbo Product Coding is an entirely stand-alone method. It does not require the
complex interleaving/de-interleaving of the RS approach, and consequently, decoding
delays are significantly reduced. Furthermore, the traditional concatenated RS schemes
exhibit a very pronounced threshold effect – a small reduction in Eb/No can result in total
loss of Demod and decoder synchronization. TPC does not suffer from this problem – the
Demod and decoder remain synchronized down to the point where the output error rate
becomes unusable. This is considered to be a particularly advantageous characteristic in a
fading environment. Typically, in QPSK, 8-PSK mode the Demod and decoder can
remain synchronized 2 – 3 dB below the Viterbi/Reed-Solomon or TCM cases.
With this revision of the SDM-300A, Comtech EF Data now provides the best Forward
Error Correction technology currently available, offering a very broad range of TPC code
rates, combined with the entire range of modulation types.
9.6.2 End-to-End Processing Delay

In many cases, FEC methods that provide increased coding gain do so at the expense of
increased processing delay. However, with TPC, this increase in delay is very modest.
Table 9-1 shows, for the SDM-300A, the processing delays for the major FEC types,
including the three TPC modes:
9–7
Table 9-1. Turbo Product Coding processing delay comparison
FEC Mode (64 kbps data rate) End-to-end delay, ms

Viterbi, Rate 1/2 12
Sequential, Rate 1/2 74
Viterbi Rate 1/2 + Reed Solomon 266
Sequential Rate 1/2 + Reed Solomon 522
Turbo Product Coding, Rate 3/4, {O}QPSK 79
Turbo Product Coding, Rate 21/44, BPSK 64
Turbo Product Coding, Rate 5/16, BPSK 48
Note that in all cases, the delay is inversely proportional to data rate, so for 128 kbps, the
delay values would be half of those shown above.
It can be clearly seen that the concatenated Reed-Solomon cases increase the delay very
significantly (due mainly to interleaving/de-interleaving), while the TPC cases yield
delays which are less than or equal to Sequential decoding.
9.6.3 Comparison of all TPC Modes
Occupied
Eb/No at Eb/No at Spectral Bandwidth for
Symbol Rate
Mode BER = 10-6 BER = 10-8 Efficiency 1 Mbps
Carrier
QPSK Rate 1/2 Viterbi

6.0 dB 7.2 dB 1.00 bits/Hz 1.0 x bit rate 1190 kHz
(see Note 1)
BPSK Rate 21/44 Turbo 2.8 dB 3.3 dB 0.48 bits/Hz 2.1 x bit rate 2493 kHz
BPSK Rate 5/16 Turbo < 4.0 < 4.0 dB 0.31 bits/Hz 3.2 x bit rate 3808 kHz
QPSK / OQPSK Rate 1/2 3.5 dB

3.0 dB 1.00 bits/Hz 1.0 x bit rate 1190 kHz
Turbo
QPSK / OQPSK Rate 3/4 4.3 dB

3.9 dB 1.50 bits/Hz 0.67 x bit rate 793 kHz
Turbo
8-PSK Rate 2/3 TCM
6.1 dB 6.6 dB
and RS (IESS-310) 1.82 bits/Hz 0.56 x bit rate 666 kHz
(see Note 2)
8-PSK Rate 3/4 Turbo 7.0 dB 8.0 dB 2.25 bits/Hz 0.44 x bit rate 529 kHz
9–8
Notes:
1. The occupied bandwidth is defined at the width of the transmitted spectrum taken at the
–10 dB points on the plot of power spectral density. This equates (approximately) to
1.19 x symbol rate for the SDM-300A TX filtering.
2. Included for comparison purposes.
Observe that the 8-PSK Rate 3/4 Turbo performance closely approaches that of the Rate
2/3 TCM/Reed-Solomon case – the BER performance is within approximately 0.4 dB.
However, it should be noted that the Rate 3/4 Turbo mode is 20% more bandwidth
efficient than the TCM case. The additional advantages of Turbo (lower delay,
performance during fades etc) should also be considered.
9.7 Uncoded Operation (No FEC)

There are occasions where a user may desire to operate a satellite link with No FEC of
any kind. For this reason, the SDM-300A offers this uncoded mode for three modulation
types - BPSK, QPSK and Offset QPSK. However, the user should be aware of some of
the implications of using this approach.
PSK demodulators have two inherent undesirable features. The first of these is known as
‘phase ambiguity’, and is due to the fact the demodulator does not have any absolute
phase reference, and in the process of carrier recovery, the demodulator can lock up in
any of K phase states, where K = 2 for BPSK, K = 4 for Offset QPSK. Without the ability
to resolve these ambiguous states there would be a 1-in-2 chance that the data at the
output of the demodulator would be wrong, in the case of BPSK. For Offset QPSK, the
probability would be 3 in 4.
The problem is solved in the case of BPSK by differentially encoding the data prior to
transmission, and then performing the inverse decoding process. This is a very simple
process, but has the disadvantage that it doubles the receive BER. For every bit error the
demodulator produces, the differential decoder produces two.
The problem for QPSK is more complex, as there are 4 possible lock states, leading to 4
ambiguities. When FEC is employed, the lock state of the FEC decoder can be used to
resolve two of the four ambiguities, and the remaining two can be resolved using serial
differential encoding/decoding. However, when No FEC is being used, an entirely
different scheme must be used. Therefore, in QPSK, a parallel differential
encoding/decoding technique is used, but has the disadvantage that it again doubles the
receive BER.
Offset QPSK is a different situation again, where the ambiguities result not only from not
having an absolute phase reference, but also not knowing which of the two parallel paths
in the demod, I or Q, contains the half-symbol delay. Another type of differential
encoding is used, but yet again the error rate is doubled, compared to ideal.
NOTE: Whenever uncoded operation is selected, the modem automatically uses the
differential encoder/decoder appropriate for the modulation type. It cannot be disabled.
9–9
The second problem inherent in PSK demodulators is that of ‘data false locking’.
In order to accomplish the task of carrier recovery, the demodulator must use a non-linear
process. A second-order non-linearity is used for BPSK, and a fourth-order non-linearity
is used for QPSK. When data at a certain symbol rate is used to modulate the carrier, the
demodulator can lock at incorrect frequencies, spaced at intervals of one-quarter of the
symbol rate away from the carrier. Fortunately, when FEC decoding is used, the decoder
synchronization state can be used to verify the correct lock point has been achieved, and
to reject the false locks.
However, if uncoded operation is used, there is no way to recognize a data false lock. The
demodulator will indicate that it is correctly locked, but the data out will not be correct.
Comtech EF Data strongly cautions users when using uncoded operation.

If the acquisition sweep width exceeds one quarter of the symbol rate,
CAUTION there is a very high probability that the demodulator will false lock.
As an example, if 64 kbps QPSK uncoded is used, the symbol rate will be half of this
rate, or 32 ksymbols/second. One quarter of this equals 8 kHz. Therefore, the absolute
maximum acquisition sweep range, which should be considered, is ± 8 kHz. If there is
any frequency uncertainty on the incoming carrier, this should be subtracted from the
sweep width. The problem becomes progressively better with increasing symbol rate.
Comtech EF Data is not responsible for incorrect operation if

the user does not adhere to these guidelines when using uncoded
CAUTION operation.
9–10
1/2 Rate
‘ ‘ 3/4 Rate ‘ 7/8 Rate
Specification
Figure 9-1. Viterbi Decoder with Open Network BER Data
9–11
‘ 1/2 Rate 3/4 Rate

‘ 7/8 Rate
‘
Specification
Figure 9-2. Viterbi Decoder with Closed Network BER Data
9–12
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
BER
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-10
1/2 RATE 3/4 RATE 7/8 RATE
SPECIFICATIONS
3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0

Eb/N0 (dB)
Figure 9-3. Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon
9–13
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
BER
10-7
10-8
1/2 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate
10-9 SPECIFICATIONS
10-10
3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0

Eb/N0 (dB)
Figure 9-4. Sequential BER Data (56 kbps)
9–14
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
BER
10-7
10-8
1/2 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate
10-9 SPECIFICATIONS
10-10
3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0

Eb/N0 (dB)
Figure 9-5. Sequential Decoder, Reed-Solomon 1544 kbps
9–15
‘ 1/2 Rate ‘ 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate

‘
Specification
Figure 9-6. Sequential Decoder BER with Reed-Solomon 1544 kbps
9–16
Figure 9-7. 8-PSK with/without Reed-Solomon
9–17
‘ 1/2 Rate 3/4 Rate

‘
‘7/8 Rate
Specification
Figure 9-8. Viterbi Decoder and Offset QPSK
9–18
‘ 1/1 Rate
Specification
Figure 9-9. Uncoded 1/1 BPSK, QPSK, and Offset QPSK
9–19
1.0E-05
1.0E-06
Specification Limit
QPSK Rate 1/2
Specification Limit
1.0E-07 8PSK Rate 3/4
BER
1.0E-08
Specification Limit
QPSK Rate 3/4 Coding
1.0E-09
Specification Limit
BPSK Rate 21/44
Note: BPSK 5/16 is 1.0E-09 at
1.0E-10
2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0
Eb/No (dB)
Figure 9-10. Turbo Product Codec
9–20
Chapter 10. Open Network
Operations
10.1 Introduction
This chapter summarizes the functionality and specifications of the various Open
Network operating modes (IBS, IDR, Drop & Insert, and G.703).
10.2 Intelsat Business System (IBS)
IBS operation adds a proportional overhead (1/15) to the terrestrial data. The terrestrial
data and clock are passed through the baseband loopback relay and are translated from
the selected baseband format to Transistor-Transistor Logic (TTL). The data is scrambled
synchronously with the multiframe sync in the multiplexer. The scrambler is enabled
using the front panel.
External input and output for an ESC in EIA-232 format is provided on the interface. The
ESC runs asynchronously at approximately 1/2000 of the terrestrial data rate. If the ESC
clock is used, the channel runs at 1/512 of the terrestrial data rate. The overhead
containing framing, the ESC channel, and faults from the modem are multiplexed with
dejittered terrestrial data. The multiplexed data stream is output to the modulator through
the interface loopback device.
The receive data from the demodulator is input through the same interface loopback
device. The receive data is demultiplexed and synchronously descrambled by the
demultiplexer. The backward alarm is reported to the M&C and output by Form C relay
contact. The ESC is output by an EIA-232 driver. The terrestrial data output from the
demultiplexer is input to a plesiochronous buffer.
10–1
Open Network Operations MN/SDM300A.IOM
The front panel interface provides four clock selections clocking the data out of the
buffer:

• External Reference Clock (EXT)
• TX Clock Dejittered (TXCLK)
If either RXCLK or EXT is selected and then fails, the interface automatically switches
to SCT as the source.
AIS is detected in the receive data and reported to the M&C.
The receive data and selected clock are translated to the levels of the selected baseband
interface and output through the baseband loopback relay.
The octet path is used for transferring a clock pulse to the distant end terrestrial
equipment. The clock pulse rate is the IBS data rate ÷ 8. Refer to Figure 10-1 for a block
diagram of the IBS interface.
10–2
Figure 10-1. IBS Interface Block Diagram
10–3
10.2.1 IBS Specifications
Table 10-1. IBS Specifications

Parameter Specification
Composite Data Rates Supported N x 64 kbps from 64 kbps to 2048 kbps, with 1/15 overhead
Primary Data Circuits Supported G.703 1.544 Mbps SD, RD
G.703 2.048 Mbps SD, RD
EIA-422/449, V.35
Engineering Service Channel
Earth Station-to-Earth Station EIA-232 TD, RD, DSR, RTS
Channel Asynchronously sampled at 1/2000 of the primary channel data rate
Data rate is 1/512 of primary data if an EIA-232 clock is provided
Octet Clock Pulse Data rate ÷ 8
Octet high with every 8th bit
EIA-232 Specification
Circuit Supported RD, TD, DSR, RTS, CTS
Amplitude (RD, RTS) True: 14V ± 11V
False: -14V ± 11V
Amplitude (TD, DSR, CTS) True: 11V ± 2V
False: -11V ± 2V
Impedance 5000 ± 2000Ω < 2500 pF
Baud Rate Max: 1/2000 times the data rate
Faults
Modulator Fault Open collector output, 15V maximum, 20 mA maximum current sink
Fault is open circuit
Demodulator Fault Open collector output, 15V maximum, 20 mA maximum current sink
Fault is open circuit
Backward Alarms Primary and secondary alarms
Backward Alarm Output Form C contacts available
10–4
10.2.2 IBS Modem Defaults
Table 10-2. IBS Modem Defaults

Data Rate A Data Rate A
TX Rate V 128 kbps, QPSK 1/2 RX Rate V 128 kbps, QPSK 1/2
IF Output OFF Decoder Type Viterbi
Mod Power Offset 0 dB Differential Decoder ON
Power Output -10 dBm (see Note) Demodulator Type Intelsat Open Net
Differential Encoder ON IF Loopback OFF
Modulator Type Intelsat Open Net RF Loopback OFF
Encoder Type Viterbi Sweep Center Freq. 0 Hz
CW Mode Normal (OFF) Sweep Range 60000 Hz
Mod Power Fixed 0 dB Sweep Reacquisition 0 seconds
Mod Spectrum Normal BER Threshold NONE
Demod Spectrum Normal
Interface
TX Clock Source TX Terrestrial Buffer Size 384
Buffer Clock Source Receive Satellite IBS Scrambler ON
TX Clock Phase Auto IBS Descrambler ON
RX Clock Phase Normal Frame Structure T1 Data G.704
External Reference Freq. 1544 kHz Frame Structure E1 Data G.704
Baseband Loopback OFF Frame Structure T2 Data G.743
Interface Loopback OFF Frame Structure E2 Data G.742
TX Coding Format AMI Loop Timing OFF
RX Coding Format AMI TX Overhead Type IBS
TX 2047 OFF RX Overhead Type IBS
RX 2047 OFF TX Terr Interface G.703
TX Data/AIS Fault NONE RX Terr Interface G.703
RX Data/AIS Fault NONE TX Data Phase Normal
Buffer Programming Bits RX Data Phase Normal
10–5
10.2.3 IBS Primary Data Interfaces

• Accepts and outputs primary data through the 50-pin connector using G.703. The
data rate is T1 or E1 rates only.
• Accepts and outputs primary data through the 50-pin connector using EIA-422.
The data rate is at multiples of 64 kbps up to a maximum of 2048 kbps.
• Accepts and outputs primary data through the 50-pin connector using V.35. The
data rate is at multiples of 64 kbps up to a maximum of 2048 kbps.
10.2.4 IBS Clock and Dejitter

Performs clock and data recovery on the G.703 format. Clock dejitter and data
encoding/decoding is done as with the IDR configuration.
10.2.5 IBS Framing

Multiplexes/demultiplexes the primary data in compliance with the standard IESS-309
overhead ratio of 1/15 (4 overhead bytes per 60 data bytes) and provides the rate
exchanged transmit clock to the modulator portion of the base modem.
10.2.6 IBS Engineering Service Channel

Bi-directional processing of the components of the ESC channel, including the
asynchronous or synchronous EIA-232 data channel, and fault/alarm indications.
10.2.7 IBS Scrambling

Provides the synchronous scrambling/descrambling of the satellite framed data specified
in IESS-309. Base modem scrambling/descrambling is assumed to be disabled in this
mode.
10–6
10.3 Intermediate Data Rate (IDR)
IDR operation adds 96 kbps overhead to the terrestrial data. The terrestrial data rates
supported are:
• 1.544 Mbps (T1) + 96k = 1640 Mbps on the data rate menu
• 2.048 Mbps (E1) + 96k = 2144 Mbps on the data rate menu
The terrestrial data is passed through the baseband loopback relay and is translated from
the G.703 format to TTL with a recovered clock.
Overhead data can include two ADPCM audio channels or one 64 kbps data channel,
four backward alarms, and an EIA-422 format 8 kbps synchronous data channel
multiplexed with the dejittered terrestrial data. If the 64 kbps option is selected, the data
path is through the normal ADPCM audio path. The audio or 64 kbps option is selected
from the Utility Interface menu (Chapter 6), using the IDR TX ESC TYPE and IDR RX
ESC TYPE commands.
The interface for the audio is a 600Ω transformer-balanced input. The ADPCM audio
channels are encoded according to CCITT G.721.
The backward alarms are level-translated to TTL by threshold comparators set to 2.5V. A
1K pull-up resistor to +5V is connected to each alarm input.
The multiplexed data stream is output to the modulator through the interface loopback
device. The receive data from the demodulator is input through the same interface
loopback device. The receive data is demultiplexed to produce:
• Receive terrestrial data

• 2 ADPCM audio channels or one 64 kbps data channel
• 4 backward alarms
• 8 kbps synchronous data channel
• 1 octet path
The 8 kbps synchronous data channel is formatted for EIA-422. The terrestrial data
output from the DEMUX is input to a plesiochronous buffer. The front panel interface
provides four clock selections clocking the data out of the buffer:

• External Reference Clock (EXT)
• TX Clock (TXCLK)
If either RXCLK or EXT is selected and then fails, the interface automatically switches
to SCT recovered clock as the source.
10–7
The AIS is detected in the receive data and reported to the M&C. The M&C control
inserts AIS into the TX data path.
The receive data and selected clock are translated to conform to the G.703 interface, and
output through the baseband loopback relay.
Four sets of transmit and receive backward alarms are available to implement the
structure defined in IESS-308. Backward alarms are sent to the distant side of an IDR
link to signal that trouble has occurred at the receive side (which may have resulted from
an improper transmission).
The octet path is used for transferring a clock pulse to the distant end terrestrial
equipment. In IDR applications, this is the ESC EIA-422 data rate divided by 8 (for
example, 8 kbps ÷ 8 = 1 kbps). If the octet path is used, then the clock pulse must be
1 kbps; otherwise, it can be ignored.
Implementation is straightforward in a simple, single destination link. INTELSAT

specifies that any major failure of the downlink chain is to generate a backward alarm.
The modem has a demodulator fault relay which de-energizes in the event of a receive
fault.
The fault tree for this signal includes the appropriate overhead framing faults in order for
this relay to be connected to the appropriate backward alarm input. This signal also
includes faults in the downlink chain, since major problems with the antenna, Low Noise
Amplifier (LNA), down converter, and other components will cause an interruption in
service and fault the modem. Refer to Chapter 4 for connection information.
The desired faults must be hardwired into either the UB-300 or UB-530 breakout panel or
the SMS-7000 data switch module in order to take advantage of the backward alarm
capabilities. Otherwise, the user can turn them OFF under the Utility/Interface/IDR
Backward Alarm control or ground them out at the connector.
Refer to Figure 10-2 for a block diagram of the IDR interface.
10–8
Figure 10-2. IDR Interface Block Diagram
10–9
10.3.1 IDR Specifications
Table 10-3. IDR Specifications

Primary Data Rates Supported
G.703 1544 kbps
2048 kbps
ESC Audio 2 channels at 32 kbps duplex ADPCM channel
ESC Data (Optional) 64 kbps duplex data (in place of audio channels)
Audio Encoding CCITT G.721
Audio Interface Type 600Ω transformer balanced 4-wire
Audio Input Level -20 to +10 dBm for 0 dBm, 1 dB steps
Audio Output Level -20 to +10 dBm for 0 dBm, 1 dB steps
Filtering Internal 300 to 3400 Hz, input and output
ESC Data Interface Type EIA-422
ESC Data Rate 8 kbps
ESC Data Circuits Supported SD, ST, RD, RT, Octet in, Octet out
Data Signal Phasing Per EIA-449, data changes on the rising clock transition, is
sampled on the falling clock edge
Octet Clock Pulse Octet high in with every 8th bit, aligns with frame bit d8
Faults and Alarms
Backward Alarms Supported 4 input, 4 output
Backward Alarm Inputs 1 kΩ pull up to +5V, set below 2V to clear
Backward Alarm Outputs Form C Relay, NO, NC, C
Demodulator Fault Relay NO, C contacts available for backward alarm inputs
Deferred Maintenance Alarm Open collector, high impedance IF fault, 15V maximum, 20 mA
maximum
Note: A 64 kbps data channel may be substituted for the two audio channels.
10–10
10.3.2 IDR Modem Defaults
Table 10-4. IDR Modem Defaults

IF Output OFF Demodulator Type Intelsat Open Net
Mod Power Offset 0 dB V.35 Scrambler ON
Power Output -10 dBm (see Note) Differential Decoder ON
Scrambler ON Decoder Type Viterbi
Modulator Type INTELSAT Open Net RF Loopback OFF
Interface
TX Clock Source TX Terrestrial Buffer Size 384
Buffer Clock Source Receive Satellite IBS Scrambler ON
TX Clock Phase Auto IBS Descrambler ON
Baseband Loopback OFF Frame Structure T2 Data G.743
Interface Loopback OFF Frame Structure E2 Data G.742
TX Coding Format AMI Loop Timing OFF
RX Coding Format AMI TX Overhead Type IDR
TX 2047 OFF RX Overhead Type IDR
RX 2047 OFF TX Terr Interface G.703
TX Data/AIS Fault NONE RX Terr Interface G.703
Buffer Programming Bits RX Data Phase Normal
Note: 0 dBm if High Power option is installed.
10–11
10.3.3 IDR Primary Data Interfaces

When configured for IDR operation, the board performs these functions:
• Receives and performs clock and data recovery on incoming G.703 T1 and E1
pseudo-ternary data.
• Clock dejitter is performed per G.823 and G.824, and any data decoding (AMI,
B8Z5, or HDB3) required per G.703 is also accomplished.
10.3. 4 IDR Framing

Multiplexes in compliance with the standard IESS-308 96 kbps ESC overhead onto the
data and provides both the data and rate exchanged clock to the modulator portion of the
base modem.
Performs the corresponding demultiplexing of RX satellite data received from the

demodulator portion of the modem. Resulting G.703 data is optionally encoded (AMI,
B8Z5, or HDB3) before being output on the 50-pin connector.
10.3.5 IDR Engineering Service Channel

Bi-directional processing of the components of the ESC channel, including the ADPCM
audio channels, 8 kbps data channel, and fault indications specified by IESS-403 and
IESS-308.
Option of using the ADPCM portion of the satellite overhead for a single 64 kbps ESC
data channel in addition to (and with the same format as) the 8 kbps data channel.
10–12
10.4 Drop and Insert (D&I)

Note: If required, refer to Chapter 3 for installation of the overhead interface PCB.
The D&I MUX works in conjunction with the interface card to enable the modem to
transmit or receive fractional parts of a T1 data stream.
• Refer to Figure 10-3 for a block diagram of the D&I with ASYNC overhead.
• Refer to Figure 10-4 for a block diagram of the D&I overhead data flow.
The D&I option provides fully compliant baseband processing in accordance with
INTELSAT IESS-308 Rev. 6 for the terrestrial information rate of 2048 kbps (E1).
N x 64 kbps data rates are allowed over the satellite link (see the specifications for
N = X). The interface also supports IESS-308 Rev. 6 transmission and reception
parameters with a G.703 1544 kbps (T1) terrestrial interface. The interface module
provides interface to transmission level framing compliant to IESS-309 data type 2.
Control parameters including T1 or E1 may be set by the customer in the Configuration
Interface menu either from the front panel or remotely through the EIA-232 interface.
Selection of the transmit and receive data rates may be made in 64 kbps increments and
may be independent of each other. The actual satellite rates are 16/15 of the transmit or
receive data rate to include overhead per IESS-308 Rev. 6 (this is transparent to the user).
Select the actual terrestrial time slots to be transmitted or received under the
Configuration Interface menu. The user can select (either from the front panel or through
the EIA-232 interface) any time slots from 1 to 31 for E1, or channels from 1 to 24 for
T1. The E1 access to time slot 0 is not allowed.
Time slots may be selected in arbitrary order. Some time slots contain framing
information instead of data. This allows for greater flexibility in the selection process.
The configuration menu allows time slots to be selected for transmission or reception up
to the maximum permitted limits by the particular transmit or receive data rate.
The satellite overhead includes an ESC. Use of this channel is not specified by IESS-308
and IESS-309. Comtech EF Data uses the ESC to implement a sampled EIA-232 data
link, which works at data rates up to 1/2000 of the satellite rate.
10–13
10.4.1 D&I Specifications
Table 10-5. D&I Specifications

Primary Data Circuits Supported T1 DSD, DRD, ISD, IRD
E1 DSD, DRD, ISD, IRD
Primary Data Rates Supported 1544 kbps per G.703
2048 kbps per G.703
Satellite Data Rates Supported N x 64 kbps
N = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 16, 20, or 24 (T1)
N = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 16, 20, 24, or 30 (E1)
Terrestrial Framing Supported G.732/G.733, G.704
Satellite Overhead Rate 1/15 of data rate per IESS-308 Rev. 6 and IESS-309 Rev. 3
Drop Time Slot Selection 1 to 24 (T1)
(Time Slot 0 not Allowed) 1 to 31 (E1)
Arbitrary order
Insert Time Slot Selection 1 to 24 (T1)
(Time Slot 0 not Allowed) 1 to 31 (E1)
Arbitrary order
Interface Type Transformer coupled symmetrical pair
Terrestrial Input Data Rate T1 1544 kbps ± 100 bps
E1 2048 kbps ± 130 bps
Pulse Width T1 324 ± 50 ns
E1 244 ± 25 ns
SD Amplitude T1 3.0 +0.3/-1.5 V-pk into 100Ω
E1 3.0 +0.3/-1.5 V-pk into 120Ω
RD Amplitude T1 3.0 ± 0.3 V-pk into 100Ω
E1 3.0 ± 0.3 V-pk into 120Ω
Pulse Mask T1 G.703.2
E1 G.703. 6
Line Code Selectable AMI, B8ZS, HDB3
Jitter Attenuation T1, per AT&T 43802
T1, per CCITT G.824
E1, per CCITT G.823
Transmit Clock Reference Normal (derived from drop SD)
Internal (10-5 accuracy)
External (EIA-422 input)
Plesiochronous Buffer Included in receive path
Buffer Clock Reference Derived from insert input
External (EIA-422)
Internal
10–14
Table 10-5. D&I Specifications (Continued)

Buffer Depth
T1, T1_ESF, E1_CCS, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 ms
E1_31_TS
E1_CAS 7.5, 15, or 30 ms
Depth Status Monitored accurate to 1%
Buffer Centering Automatic (start of service), manual
Overflows/Underflows Logged as stored fault
ESC Data Interface Type EIA-232
ESC Data Rate 1/2000 of satellite data rate, maximum (over sampled)
(Maximum Asynchronous)
ESC Data Circuits SD, RD, DSR
Supported
Faults and Alarms
Backward Alarms 1 (looped per IESS-309)
Supported
Backward Alarm Output Sums into secondary alarm
Modulator Fault Open collector, 15V maximum, 20 mA maximum, used by protection switch, if in
system
Demodulator Fault Open collector, 15V maximum, 20 mA maximum, used by protection switch, if in
system
10–15
TRANSMIT SECTION
ALARM
BW ALARM MONITORS
ALARM
MONITOR FRAMING/TIMING
SCRAMBLER P/O
LOGIC (MUX) INT MODEM
LPBK
RS-232
ES TO ES ASYNC INTERFACE
TX DEJITTER
P/O TERDAT
DSD-A DROP
T1/E1 BASE
G.703 INTERFACE BAND
DSD-B MUX
LPBK TERCLK
DRD-A
T1/E1
G.703 INTERFACE
DRD-B
CLOCK
SYNTHESIS
RECEIVE SECTION
ALARM
MONITORS
FORM C
P/O PRIMARY
INT
LPBK FORM C
DESCRAMBLER ALARMS
SECONDARY
BW
ALARMS
DEFRAME/TIMING
LOGIC (DEMUX) RS-232
ES TO ES ASYNC
INTERFACE
CLK
PLESIOCHRONOUS INSERT P/O
DATA IRD-A
BUFFER MUX BASE T1/E1
BAND G.703
INTERFACE
IRD-B
LPBK
ISD-A
T1/E1
INTERFACE G.703
ISD-B
SATELLITE CLOCK
INTERNAL CLOCK CLOCK

RECEIVE TERR CLOCK SYNTHESIS
EXTERNAL REFERENCE CLOCK
Figure 10-3. D&I with Asynchronous Overhead Block Diagram
10–16
Figure 10-4. D&I with Asynchronous Overhead Data Flow
10–17

The main features of the D&I option are as follows:
• Data interface
• Transmit MUX
• Receive DEMUX
• ESC
• Backward alarm
10.4.3 Data Interference

Data interface contains transformer-balanced data interfaces that support CCITT G.703
parameters and dejitter. This is compatible with AT&T Digital Speech Interpolation
(DSI) service. Data inputs and outputs named are listed below:
Data Inputs Drop send data input A and B (DSD-A and DSD-B)
Insert send data input A and B (ISD-A and ISD-B)
Data Outputs Drop receive data output A and B (DRD-A and DRD-B)
Insert receive data output A and B (IRD-A and IRD-B)
The system is frequently used with the drop receive data output signal (DRD-A, -B)
looped to feed the insert send data input signal (ISD-A, -B). This is accomplished at the
far end of any redundancy switching in order to allow transmit and receive chains to be
switched independently. The zero substitution codes (Alternate Mark Inversion [AMI],
B8ZS, and HDB3) are user-selectable during configuration.
A data loopback function on the insert data is available in this section. This enables the
user to determine that the T1 or E1 data parameters correctly match those of this
interface. The drop data is always hard-wired into loopback.
10.4.4 Transmitted MUX

The data stream is transmit MUX with a 1/15 overhead channel and the resultant
information rates are interfaced to the Mod/Demod/Coder sections of the modem. A
phase-locked loop generates the output clock (with overhead), using the input clock as a
reference. The input clock is normally the recovered clock from the data interface. If a
valid input signal is not present, the interface falls back to a 10-5 accuracy reference clock
generated in the modem, and will transmit a valid IESS-308 framing pattern. If this
occurs, the link will remain open at the far end and a fault will be signaled.
The transmit data will be replaced with an all 1s pattern (AIS) in the event of certain
failures, in accordance with IESS-308.
10–18
As a test mode, the transmit data can be replaced with a 2047 pattern. This selection
overrides the AIS. Only user data bits are replaced with the pattern, while the
Engineering Service Channel (ESC) (including framing and alarms) will operate
normally.
The composite MUX data stream is normally fed to the modem for further processing
(scrambling and K=7 Viterbi encoding). The composite data stream may be looped back
at this point as a test function, called interface loopback, when the transmit data rate
matches the receive data rate. This allows the operator to test the entire interface as the
ESC is looped to itself through the DEMUX. The plesiochronous buffer may also be
checked, since user data passes through this circuit.
10.4.5 Receive DEMUX

The receive data with overhead is processed in the DEMUX. This circuit checks and
synchronizes to the frame pattern and separates the user data from the Engineering
Service Channel (ESC). If the DEMUX is receiving a correct and synchronized signal, it
will signal the modem that the MUX system is locked (MUXlock) and passing data. This
is indicated by interrogating the modem, a green LED on the interface and sending the
signal into the receive fault tree in accordance with IESS-308. Under certain fault
conditions defined by IESS-308, the receive user data will be replaced by a pattern with
all 1s, and a fault will be signaled.
10.4.6 Plesiochronous Buffer

Data from the DEMUX section is fed into a plesiochronous buffer. This buffer size is
user-selectable in bit increments that correspond to the length of an IESS-308 satellite
superframe. The increments range from 1 to 32 ms. Refer to the interface specifications
for a list of valid entries for each of the selected formats. The buffer automatically centers
on resumption of service, either from the front panel or remotely. The startup buffer will
overfill when centering to match the satellite frame to the terrestrial frame with a
maximum slide of 0.5 ms. In general, manual centering will not be plesiochronous.
The fill status is available as a monitor and is accurate to 1%. Overflows or underflows
are stored in the stored fault section of the M&C status registers, along with the date and
time of the incident (which are provided by the modem internal clock). These are stored
in battery-backed RAM.
A normal selection is to have the data clocked out of the buffer by an external clock. This
procedure removes the Doppler from the receive satellite data.
The operator may select from four other clock sources as a backup:
• Insert clock (D&I mode only)

• RX satellite
• Internal clock source
• TX terrestrial
10–19
Problems occurring on any of the selected clocks will cause the modem to substitute the
satellite clock and a fault will be signaled.
10.4.7 Engineering Service Channel (ESC)

The ESC uses certain bits of the satellite overhead to implement an EIA-232 data
channel. The two types of available data channels are asynchronous and synchronous.
The asynchronous channel works by over-sampling input and output EIA-232 data, so
that a clock signal is not required. Data rates up to 1/2000 of the satellite rate may be
used. Synchronous data channels are also allowed at a rate of 1/512 of the data rate of the
modem. The synchronous channel requires use of the TX clock provided by the modem
for operation.
10.4.8 Backward Alarm

A backward alarm signal is included in the D&I overhead. The signal is sent to the distant
side of a satellite link to indicate trouble with the receive side, which may be a result of
improper transmission. The M&C computer monitors the receive side of the link. In the
event of trouble, the M&C sends an alarm over the transmit side to the distant end. This
alarm signal indirectly includes faults in the downlink chain, since major problems with
the antenna, Low Noise Amplifier (LNA), or down converter, etc., will cause an
interruption in service and fault the modem. Reception of a backward alarm is indicated
as one of the events that causes a secondary alarm. The modem may be interrogated from
the front panel or by using the EIA-485 or EIA-232 interface to identify the cause of the
alarm.
10.4.9 D&I Framing Formats

The D&I framing formats used in the modem can be divided into T1 and E1 categories, as
follows:
T1_ESF T1 Extended Super Frame

T1 T1 D4 Framing
T1_ESF_S T1 Extended Super Frame Special
T1_S T1 D4 Framing Special
E1_CCS E1 Common Channel Signaling
E1_CAS E1 Channel Associated Signaling
E1_31_TS E1 31 Time Slots
Each format is further explained in Figures 10-5 and 10-6.
10–20
Figure 10-5. E1 Framing Formats
10–21
Figure 10-6. T1 Framing Formats
10–22
10.4.10 D&I Modem Defaults
Table 10-6. D&I Modem Defaults

IF Output OFF Decoder Type Viterbi
Mod Power Offset 0 dB Differential Decoder ON
Power Output -10 dBm (see Note 2) Demodulator Type Intelsat Open Net
Modulator Type INTELSAT Open Net RF Loopback OFF
Interface
TX Clock Source TX Terrestrial Buffer Size 1 mS
Buffer Clock Source Insert Frame Structure T1 Data G.704
TX Clock Phase Auto Frame Structure E1 Data G.704
Baseband Loopback OFF Loop Timing OFF
Interface Loopback OFF TX Overhead Type D&I
TX Coding Format AMI RX Overhead Type D&I
RX Coding Format AMI TX Terr Interface G.703
TX 2047 OFF RX Terr Interface G.703
RX 2047 OFF
IBS Scrambler ON IBS Descrambler ON
Drop Data Format T1 (see Note 1) Insert Data Format T1 (see Note 1)
TX Data/AIS Fault NONE
Buffer Programming mS RX Data Phase Normal
10–23
Notes:
1. When selecting E1_CAS or E1_CCS D&I data format, the defaults in the D&I data channels are offset by 1
from 16 and up. When programming from E1_CAS or E1_CCS to any other format, the D&I channels are
defaulted to straight through.
2. 0 dBm if High Power option is installed.
10.4.11 D&I Primary Data Interfaces

When configured for D&I operation, multiplexing/demultiplexing follows the IBS
satellite frame structure and ESC features, but with the following changes:
• Accepts and outputs primary data through the 50-pin connector using G.703.
• The data rate must be at T1 or E1 rates only. This includes additional links for
Drop Data Out and Insert Data In.
• Clock recovery, dejitter, and encoding/decoding are performed as before.
10.4.12 D&I Framing

The IBS satellite framing/deframing is applied only to selected time slots of the data’s
G.704 terrestrial structure.
10–24
10.5 G.703
Note: If required, refer to Chapter 3 for installation of the interface PCB.
G.703 data is either in AMI, B8ZS (8 zero) suppression, or HDB3 (3 zero) suppression
formats. There is not a coexisting clock that is on a separate line for G.703 data. The
clock is derived from the data stream within the modem and in the user equipment.
Loop timing, if desired, must occur in the customer equipment for the link to operate in
Master/Slave. The modem cannot do loop timing in G.703 operation because the modem
does not emit an ST signal for the Transmit Clock Source.
The modem can be placed in loop timing under EIA-422 or V.35 operation. Therefore, a
master/slave relationship easily occurs. This causes the receive clock to be placed on the ST
line to the terrestrial equipment. The customer equipment can then clock the transmit data to
the modem using the ST line that has been derived from the RX recovered clock.
10.5.1 G.703 Specifications
Table 10-7. G.703 Specifications

Primary Data Circuits Supported T1 SD, RD
E1 SD, RD
Data Rates T1 1544 kbps ± 100 bps
E1 2048 kbps ± 130 bps
Pulse Width T1 324 ± 50 Ns
E1 244 ± 25 Ns
SD Amplitude T1 3V +0.3/-1.5V-pk into 100Ω
E1 3V +0.3/-1.5V-pk into 120Ω
RD Amplitude T1 3V +0.3/-1.5V-pk into 100Ω
E1 3V +0.3/-1.5V-pk into 120Ω
E1 G.703. 6
Jitter Attenuation T1 G.824
E1 G.823
Line Code AMI, B8ZS, B6ZS, HDB3
10–25
10–26
Chapter 11. Asynchronous
Interface/AUPC
11.1 Asynchronous Interface/AUPC

The asynchronous (ASYNC) interface option provides the interface for terrestrial data
and a single ASYNC overhead channel. Typically used for earth-station-to-earth-station
communication, the overhead channel is MUXed onto the data and transmitted at an
overhead rate of 16/15 of the main channel. The AUPC feature works with the ASYNC
option to allow remote communication between a local modem and a remote modem.
Refer to Figure 11-1 for a modem block diagram with the ASYNC/AUPC interface
option.
G.703, EIA-422, or V.35 interfaces are available for terrestrial data input and output.
These interfaces can be selected via the front panel.
EIA-485 or EIA-232 interfaces are available for ASYNC channel input and output. These
interfaces can also be selected from the front panel. Fixed 1/15 overhead is added to the
data when an ASYNC channel is being used. With the ASYNC channel enabled, the
terrestrial data rate can be from 8 to 2048 kbps. The ASYNC channel I/O protocol can be
as follows:
Baud 110 to 38400

Data Bits 5 to 8
Parity odd, even, or none
Stop Bits 1 or 2
Note: Certain combinations of baud rate, data rate, parity, and stop bits will limit the
maximum baud rate allowed for continuous throughput based on terrestrial data rate.
11–1
ASYNC/AUPC Interface MN/SDM300A.IOM
ASYNC overhead is a 1/15 rate overhead channel composed of the following:
• Framing information
• EIA-232 or EIA-485 data
• Valid data flags
• AUPC information (if installed)
• Parity bits
The rate of asynchronous data transfers may be selected by the operator, with the
maximum rate available limited to 1.875% of the synchronous data rate.
Note: The asynchronous overhead structure is an Comtech EF Data standard, and is not
compatible with IBS or IDR overhead formats.
The ASYNC interface PCB also provides its own Doppler buffer, which has a maximum
depth of 32 ms at the highest terrestrial data rate. Buffer fill status can be checked in the
Monitor menu on the front panel of the modem. Depth selection and centering of the
buffer are provided in the Configuration Interface menu.
11–2
AUPC DATA FROM M&C

G.703
TERR DATA M
INPUT
EIA-422
TERR CLOCK FIFO O
TERR DATA
V.35
D
MUX TERR OVERHEAD CLOCK U
PLL L
INTERFACE CNT SIGNALS INTERFACE CNT SIGNALS A
T
O
EIA-485 ASYNC DATA R
UART ASYNC DATA
T
E EIA-232
R
R
M&C CONTROL
E
S
T
R
I AUPC DATA TO M&C
A D
G.703 E
L TERR DATA
TERR DATA
EIA-422 RX CLK M
TERR CLOCK ENABLE O
4 OUTPUT RX DATA
V.35
BUFFER CLK SOURCES D
DMUX RX CLK U
PLL INTERFACE
L
INTERFACE SIGNAL SIGNALS A
T
O
ASYNC DATA
EIA-485 UART R
EIA-232
Figure 11-1. ASYNC/AUPC Block Diagram
11–3
11.2 AUPC
There are two modes of AUPC location:
AUPC between two modems Maintains a target Eb/No programmed into the modem at each end.
Self-Monitoring AUPC with one Maintains a target Eb/No for a modem that receives its own carrier from
modem the satellite.
The menu below is enabled by selecting Local Modem AUPC = ON, located under the
Utility: Modem Type menu. This menu sets the AUPC parameters for both the self
monitoring with one modem and the AUPC between two modems.
Table 11-1. Setting AUPC Parameters

AUPC ENABLE Enables the AUPC to function locally. (Configuration: Local AUPC menu)
NOMINAL POWER Output power level. Can be used for problem conditions, if chosen.
MINIMUM POWER Sets minimum output power to be used.
MAXIMUM POWER Sets maximum output power to be used.
TARGET NOISE Desired Eb/N0 of the local modem.
TRACKING RATE Sets speed at which modems will adjust to output power.
LOCAL CL ACTION Defines action that local modem will take if it loses carrier (Maximum,
Minimum, or Hold).
REMOTE CL ACTION Defines action that local modem will take if remote modem reports carrier
loss (Maximum, Minimum, or Hold).
LINK
MODEM
MODEM A MODEM B
AUPC Between Two Modems Self-Monitoring AUPC with One Modem
11–4
With Local AUPC On, set modems (A and B), if modem A loses carrier:
1. Modem A sets its output power (MAXIMUM, MINIMUM, OR HOLD) as specified by

LOCAL CL ACTION.
2. Modem A then sends a “lost carrier” command to modem B.
3. Modem B sets its output power (MAXIMUM, MINIMUM, OR HOLD) as specified by

REMOTE CL ACTION.
4. Once modem A has reacquired the carrier, it sends commands to modem B to achieve the
desired Eb/N0. During this time, modem B sends commands to modem A to increase or
decrease power to maintain modem B’s target Eb/N0.
Notes:
1. Modem B will not make changes to modem A if the Eb/N0 is within 0.5 dB of the
target noise.
2. Modem B will not control modem A transmitting output level if the target noise
for modem B is set within 15.5 to 16.0 dB and the receive signal to the modem is
sufficient that the receive noise is 16 dB or better
3. Modem A will be transmitting at the maximum output if the local carrier loss
action is set to maximum.
4. Caution shall be observed when setting the target Eb/N0 above 15.5 dB, the
maximum limit is established at 16.0 dB.
5. Local carrier loss always takes priority over remote carrier loss
6. The RX AUPC link is dead when the carrier is lost.
11.2.1 AUPC – Between Two Modems

This mode of AUPC operation allows each of the two modems to operate in a closed link
to control the output of the other modem in a manner that preserves a target Eb/No.
Hardware Corresponding Software (FAST)

Overhead Card ASYNC/AUPC. This provides AUPC and an ASYNC channel.
TX and RX Reed-Solomon AUPC. An ASYNC channel is not available.
Cards
Selecting ASYNC from the Modem Type menu when the Overhead Card is installed or
by selecting AUPC from the Modem Type menu the Reed-Solomon cards are installed
enables APUC operation. The Modem type is located under the Utility: Modem Type
menu.
To operate, AUPC is enabled on both modems and they are setup as described in Table
11-1.
11–5
11.2.1.1 Remote AUPC

This feature allows the user to monitor and control a remote modem location using the
front panel or serial port of the local modem. The operator can set or reset the following
commands:
• Baseband loopback
• TX 2047 pattern
• AUPC enable
11.2.1.1.1 Remote Modem AUPC Configuration and Monitor

The menu for this feature is remote AUPC, which is at the same level as the
Configuration and Monitor menus. The menus are structured as follows:
Menu Description
Function Select Remote AUPC Press <ENTER> to proceed.
Remote AUPC Configuration Press <ENTER> to proceed.
AUPC Enable Select On to enable Remote AUPC.
B-Band LoopBack Select On to place the unit at the distant end of the link in
loopback.
TX 2047 Pattern Select On for the distant end to TX a 2047 pattern. Select Off to
stop the pattern distant end.
Remote AUPC Monitor Press <ENTER> to proceed.
2047 Error This indicates the BER at the distant end measured from the 2047
pattern. This requires that the 2047 pattern is tuned On at the near
end.
11.2.2 Self-Monitoring Local Modem AUPC Control

This AUPC mode allows the modem to adjust its carrier power to maintain a target
Eb/No while it monitors its own carrier returned through the satellite. This is often used
in broadcast applications where a hub maintains control of the outbound carrier that is
delivered to many remotes. This requires that the Earth Station is located within the
satellite footprint.
The self-monitoring AUPC does not require any special hardware or software options.
However, if the Overhead Card or Reed-Solomon Cards are installed, do not select either
the ASYNC or AUPC from the Modem Type menu located under the Utility: Modem
Type menu, because these are used for AUPC between two modems.
To setup the modem for the self-monitoring operation, enter the Local Modem AUPC
menu located under the Utilit: Modem Type menu and select On. This enables the
Configuration: Local AUPC menu to permit adjustment of the AUPC parameters
described in Table 11-1.
11–6
Notes:
1. Comtech EF Data does not recommend increasing the power to the satellite
without consulting with the satellite controller.
2. Be careful not to set carrier output too high when there is a loss of carrier due to
severe weather and the CL loss action is set to Maximum.
3. Do not use the distant end RX signal to compensate for local rain fade unless
allowances are made for a narrow window for TX level changes.
11.3 ASYNC
The modem supports terrestrial data interfaces and the ASYNC Overhead interfaces.
11.3.1 Terrestrial Data Interfaces

Two I/O interfaces are provided for the terrestrial data source: EIA-422 and V.35. The
operator must select the terrestrial interface type from the front panel under the Utility
Interface menu. Once selected, I/O data is routed to and from the appropriate drivers and
receivers.
11.3.2 ASYNC Data Interfaces

The EIA-485 and EIA-232 I/O interfaces are provided for the ASYNC data source. The
operator must select the ASYNC data interface type from the front panel under the Utility
Interface menu. Once selected, the I/O data is routed to and from the appropriate drivers
and receivers.
EIA-485 (2-wire) requires connecting the TX + and RX + as one wire and tying TX and
RX for the second wire at the Data I/O/ This connection is not facilitated inside the
modem with relays.
Example:
TX
E 50-PIN
S BOP MODEM
C
RX
11–7
11.3.3 MUX Operation

The MUX receives terrestrial and ASYNC data from the selected receivers. The
terrestrial data flows into a small “First In/First Out” (FIFO) buffer. The FIFO buffer
aids in the rate exchange between the terrestrial data rate and the overhead rate. The
terrestrial clock or an internal clock can clock the data into the MUX.
ASYNC data is received by the RX section of a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/

Transmitter (UART) programmed by the M&C for the correct data protocol. The
incoming ASYNC data is sampled with a 16x clock in the middle of the bit time.
AUPC data is received from a serial M&C interface. The overhead clock is generated
from the terrestrial data clock by a phase-locked loop. Inside the multiplexer, overhead
bits (1/16) are added to create a sub-frame, frame, and multi-frame structure. The AUPC
data from the M&C interface and the ASYNC data are inserted into the framing structure.
The framed data is output to the modulator card on the modem at the overhead rate.
11.3.4 DEMUX Operation

The DEMUX section functions in a “reverse” manner to the MUX side. Data, including
overhead, is received from the Demod card in the modem at the overhead rate.
The DEMUX locates the framing in the overhead and locks to the frame sync pattern
generated by the multiplexer on the transmitting end. Once locked to the framing, the
terrestrial data is clocked into the Doppler buffer with the overhead clock and an enable
line.
The ASYNC channel data is stripped out of the frame structure, and is buffered in the TX
portion of a UART. The UART then transmits the data with the selected protocol to the
appropriate drivers to the end user. The AUPC data is also stripped from the frame
structure and is sent to the M&C via a serial interface.
11.3.5 Buffer Operation

The buffer has two serial interfaces to the M&C interface. The first serial interface is
used to download the desired buffer size. The second serial interface is used to provide
the M&C with the information necessary to calculate the fill status of the buffer. Three
discrete lines are provided:
• One line to center the buffer on command.

• Two lines to indicate either an overflow or underflow condition.
11–8
The Doppler buffer receives data clocked by the overhead clock from the Demod and an
enable line from the DEMUX. The data is stored in RAM. Four options are allowed to
clock the data out of the buffer:
• TX
• RX
• Internal
• External
Based on this selection, terrestrial data is clocked out of the buffer to the selected drivers
and on to the end user.
11.3.6 Loop Timing Operation

The appropriate RX buffer clock choice for loop timing is RX Satellite. This will clock
out the data from the modem using the recovered clock from the demodulator IF input.
The SCT clock output will be phase-locked to the RX Satellite clock when loop timing is
selected. The operator can use the clock developed from the RX Satellite IF for clocking
data into the user device. This would be using RX timing. The operator also can use the
ST clock, which is now phased-locked to the receiver, to clock the user data (Send Data)
to the modem.
11.3.7 Baseband Loopback Operation

A baseband loopback option is provided. When selected, the input terrestrial data and
clock from the operator are looped back to the user as the output terrestrial data and
clock. The terrestrial data and clock output from the DEMUX are also looped to the
terrestrial data and clock input at the MUX.
11–9
11.3.8 Non-ASYNC Operation

The ASYNC interface has pass-through capability. If ASYNC is turned off in the
Configuration: Interface menu, then a standard G.703, EIA-422, or V.35 interface is
selected. The modem will operate as a standard G.703, EIA-422, or V.35 interface with
no overhead. Instead of changing jumpers on the interface PCB to change polarities for
various signals, polarity inversion is available in the Utility Interface menu for the
following signals:
• Send Data (SD)

• Terminal Timing (TT)
• Request to Send (RS)
• Receive Data (RD)
• Receive Timing (RT)
• Receiver Ready (RR)
• Data Mode (DM)
• Monitor and Control (MC)
• Send Timing (ST)
11.4 ASYNC Channel EIA-485 2- and 4-Wire Operation

The ASYNC interface is compatible with either a 2- or 4-wire interface for the EIA-485
channel. The 2- or 4-wire operation is selected via the front panel.
• In the 2-wire mode, the EIA-485 receivers are disabled whenever the
data is to be transmitted down the 2-wire interface.
• In the 4-wire mode, the receiver is always on.
• The receive modem controls the transmit and receive data in two wire
operation. EIA-485 (2 wire) must be turned on in the UTILITY:
INTERFACE menu.
• The output driver will be turned on when the receive demux on the
overhead card detects ASYNC data. The input driver will be turned off at
the same time. This prevents the receive data from transmitting back to
the originating modem.
• For EIA-485 two wire, loop the highs (TX+, RX+) and then loop the
lows (TX-, RX-) at the connector for two-wire operation. These loops are
not accomplished inside the modem.
• EIA-485 four wire circuits will become 2 wire when you attach any
device that is EIA-485 two wire.
For example: The modem Async overhead at a site that has an RF terminal, must
be set to TX EIA-485 (two wire) because the RF terminal is only EIA-485 two
wire.
11–10
11.4.1 Valid ASYNC Baud Rates

The ASYNC baud rates are limited by the terrestrial data rates. The following table
shows the relationships between data and baud rates.
If DR ≤ 15.999K Maximum baud rate is 150

The following table lists examples.

If DR = 8.000K Baud rate can be 150 or lower
11.4.2 Front Panel Operation

For information on the additional front panel operations that are specific to the ASYNC
interface. The following menus are affected:
• Configuration Interface
• Configuration Local AUPC
• Utility Interface
• Remote AUPC Configuration
• Remote AUPC Monitor
11–11
11.4.3 ASYNC Remote Operation

Remote modems can be controlled over the ASYNC channel from the local (or “hub”)
modem. Refer to Table 11-2 for a list of combinations:
Table 11-2. ASYNC REMOTE OPERATION

Local To Remote
Configuration # Modem Modem Table #
1 EIA-232 EIA-232 Table 11 -3
2 EIA-232 EIA-485 (4-wire) Table 11-4
3 EIA-232 EIA-485 (2-wire) Table 11-5
4 EIA-485 (4-wire) EIA-232 Table 11-6
5 EIA-485 (4-wire) EIA-485 (4-wire) Table 11-7
7 EIA-485 (2-wire) EIA-232 Table 11-9
For each of the above combinations, front panel control settings and pinouts for local and
remote cables are listed in the following sections:
Before remote ASYNC communications can be implemented, the following must occur:
• At both the local and remote modems, front panel configuration

parameters must be set for each type of configuration.
• Industry-standard cables must be used at both modems.
To implement remote ASYNC operation, use the configuration information found in the
applicable section and perform the following steps:
1. Set the jumpers on the remote modem M&C/Display PCB according to the
information found in the applicable configuration section.
2. Set the local modem front panel controls according to the information found in
the applicable configuration section.
3. Connect the local modem 25-pin ASYNC connection (via breakout panel or Y
cable) to the terminal using the pinout information found in the applicable
configuration section. Refer to Figure 11-2.
4. Set the remote modem front panel controls according to the information found
in the applicable configuration section.
5. Connect the remote modem 25-pin ASYNC connection (via breakout panel or Y
cable) to the 9-pin J6 port at the rear of the modem using the pinout information
found in the applicable configuration section. Refer to Figure 11-2 and Figure
11-3.
11–12
WYSE
REMOTE TERMINAL
(OR EQUIVALENT)
V.35 V.35
DATA DATA
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
EIA-485
25-PIN CONNECTOR
25-PIN TO 25-PIN
ASYNC LOCAL EIA-485 9-PIN CONNECTOR REMOTE EIA-485 ASYNC
CONNECTOR (4-WIRE) (INDUSTRY STANDARD) (4-WIRE) CONNECTOR
CABLE CABLE
(9-PIN TO 25-PIN) (9-PIN TO 25-PIN)
CA/4056 CA/4056
TX -30 dBm RX
J6
J8 J8
50-PIN ASYNC INTERFACE ASYNC INTERFACE 50-PIN
RX TX -30 dBm
BENCH TEST
LOCAL END REMOTE END
Figure 11-2. Remote ASYNC Connection Diagram for Y-Cable
25-PIN
ASYNC
CONNECTOR
BREAKOUT PANEL
50-PIN
25-PIN
ASYNC
CONNECTOR
BREAKOUT PANEL
WYSE 50-PIN
REMOTE TERMINAL
(OR EQUIVALENT)
EIA-485
25-PIN CONNECTOR
TO
9-PIN CONNECTOR
(INDUSTRY STANDARD)
TX -30 dBm RX
J6
J8 J8
ASYNC INTERFACE ASYNC INTERFACE
RX TX -30 dBm
BENCH TEST
LOCAL END REMOTE END
Figure 11-3. Remote ASYNC Connection Diagram for Breakout Panel
11–13
11.4.3.1 Configuration #1 (Local EIA-232 to Remote EIA-232)
Table 11-3. Local EIA-232 to Remote EIA-232

#1. Local End Modem Settings for EIA-232
Utility Interface Menu
ASYNC TX and RX Type EIA-232
Configuration Interface Menu
ASYNC TX and RX Baud Rate 150 to 38400 (See 11.4.1)
ASYNC TX and RX Length 7 bits
ASYNC TX and RX Parity Even
ASYNC TX Stop 2 bits
#1. Remote End Modem Settings for EIA-232
Utility System Menu
Remote Baud Rate Equal to ASYNC TX and RX baud rate
Parity Even
Address 1 to 255
The local end cable connects the 25-pin female ASYNC connector (on either the
breakout panel or the Y cable) to the EIA-232 remote terminal (WYSE or laptop
computer). The pinout of the local cable is listed in the following table.
#1. Local End EIA-232

9-Pin 25-Pin
Female Connector Male Connector
RX 2 3 TX
TX 3 2 RX
GND 5 7 GND
The remote end cable connects the 25-pin female ASYNC connector (on either the
breakout panel or the Y cable) to the 9-pin female connector, J6, at the rear of the
modem. The pinout of the remote cable is listed in the following table.
#1. Remote End EIA-232

9-Pin 25-Pin
Male Connector Male Connector
RX 2 2 RX
TX 3 3 TX
GND 5 7 GND
11–14
11.4.3.2 Configuration #2 (Local EIA-232 to Remote EIA-485 [4-Wire])
Table 11-4. Local EIA-232 to Remote EIA-485 (4-Wire)

#2. Local End Modem Settings for EIA-232 (4-Wire)
#2. Remote End Modem Settings for EIA-485 (4-Wire)
ASYNC TX and RX Type EIA-485 (4-wire)
Utility System Menu
Parity Even
Address 1 to 255
breakout panel or the Y cable) to the EIA-232 (4-wire) remote terminal (WYSE or laptop

9-Pin 25-Pin
RX 2 3 TX
TX 3 2 RX
GND 5 7 GND
#2. Remote End EIA-485 (4-Wire)

Twisted Pair
9-Pin 25-Pin
TX+ 4 16 RX+
TX- 5 3 RX-
RX+ 8 14 TX+
RX- 9 2 TX-
11–15
11.4.3.3 Configuration #3 (Local EIA-232 to Remote EIA-485 [2-Wire])
Table 11-5. Local EIA-232 to Remote EIA-485 (2-Wire)

#3. Local End Modem Settings for EIA-232
Utility System Menu
Parity Even
Address 1 to 255
breakout panel or the Y cable) to the EIA-232 remote terminal (WYSE or laptop

9-Pin 25-Pin
RX 2 3 TX
TX 3 2 RX
GND 5 7 GND

9-Pin 25-Pin
TX/RX+ 4 14, 16 TX+, RX+
TX/RX- 5 2, 3 TX-, RX-
11–16
11.4.3.4 Configuration #4 (Local EIA-485 [4-Wire] to Remote EIA-232)
Table 11-6. Local EIA-485 (4-Wire) to Remote EIA-232

Utility System Menu
Parity Even
Address 1 to 255
#4. Local End EIA-485 (4-Wire) Twisted Pair

9-Pin 25-Pin
TX+ 4 14 TX+
TX- 5 2 TX-
RX+ 8 16 RX+
RX- 9 3 RX-

9-Pin 25-Pin
RX 2 2 RX
TX 3 3 TX
GND 5 7 GND
11–17
11.4.3.5 Configuration #5 (Local EIA-485 [4-Wire] to Remote

EIA-485 [4-Wire])
Table 11-7. Local EIA-485 (4-Wire) to Remote EIA-485 (4-Wire)

Utility System Menu
Parity Even
Address 1 to 255

9-Pin 25-Pin
TX+ 4 14 TX+
TX- 5 2 TX-
RX+ 8 16 RX+
RX- 9 3 RX-
#5. Remote End EIA-485 (4-Wire) Twisted Pair

9-Pin 25-Pin
TX+ 4 16 RX+
TX- 5 3 RX-
RX+ 8 14 TX+
RX- 9 2 TX-
11–18
11.4.3.6 Configuration #6 (Local EIA-485 [4-Wire] to Remote EIA-485

[2-Wire])

Utility System Menu
Parity Even
Address 1 to 255

9-Pin 25-Pin
TX+ 4 14 TX+
TX- 5 2 TX-
RX+ 8 16 RX+
RX- 9 3 RX-

9-Pin 25-Pin
TX/RX+ 4 14, 16 TX+, RX+
TX/RX- 5 2, 3 TX-, RX-
11–19
11.4.3.7 Configuration #7 (Local EIA-485 [2-Wire] to Remote EIA-232)
Table 11-9. Local EIA-485 (2-Wire) to Remote EIA-232

Utility System Menu
Parity Even
Address 1 to 255
11–20
#7. Local End EIA-485 (2-Wire)

9-Pin 25-Pin
TX/RX+ 4 14, 16 TX+/RX+
TX/RX- 5 2, 3 TX-/RX-
In addition, the following table lists the pinout for the WYSE terminal cable using an
EIA-232 to EIA-485 converter.
#7. Local End WYSE Cable With Converter

25-Pin 9-Pin
TX-/RX- 2, 5 5 TX/RX-
TX+/RX+ 14, 17 4 TX/RX+
(See Note) 18, 21
Note: Disables RD during TD.

9-Pin 25-Pin
RX 2 2 RX
TX 3 3 TX
GND 5 7 GND
11–21
11.4.3.8 Configuration #8 (Local EIA-485 [2-Wire] to Remote EIA-485

[4-Wire])

Utility Interface MENU
Utility System Menu
Parity Even
Address 1 to 255
11–22
#8. Local End EIA-485 (2-Wire)

9-Pin 25-Pin
TX/RX+ 4 14, 16 TX+/RX+
TX/RX+ 5 2, 3 TX-/RX-
In addition, the following table lists the pinout for the WYSE terminal cable using an
EIA-232 to EIA-485 converter.
#8. Local End WYSE Cable With Converter

25-Pin 9-Pin
TX-/RX- 2, 5 5 TX/RX-
TX+/RX+ 14, 17 4 TX/RX+
(See Note) 18, 21
Note: Disables RD during TD.

Twisted Pair
9-Pin 25-Pin
TX+ 4 16 RX+
TX- 5 3 RX-
RX+ 8 14 TX+
RX- 9 2 TX-
11–23
11.4.4 ASYNC/AUPC Modem Defaults
Table 11-11. ASYNC/AUPC Modem Defaults

IF Output OFF Descrambler ON
TX Power Level +0 dBm Differential Decoder ON
Scrambler ON RF Loop Back OFF
Differential Encoder ON IF Loop Back OFF
CW Mode Normal (OFF) BER Threshold NONE
RS Encoder OFF Sweep Center Freq. 0 Hz
Modulator Type EFD Closed Sweep Range 60000 Hz
Encoder Type Viterbi Sweep Reacquisition 0 seconds
Mod Spectrum Normal RS Decoder OFF
Mod Power Fixed 0 dB Demodulator Type EFD Closed
Decoder Type Viterbi
Interface
TX Clock Source TX Terrestrial Frame Structure E1 Data G.704
Buffer Clock Source RX Satellite Frame Structure T2 Data G.743
TX Clock Phase Auto Frame Structure E2 Data G.742
RX Clock Phase Normal TX Terr Interface G.703
EXT-REF Frequency 1544.000 kHz RX Terr Interface G.703
Baseband Loopback OFF TX Data Phase Normal
Interface Loopback OFF RX Data Phase Normal
Loop Timing OFF Async TX Baud 110 bps
TX Data/AIS Fault NONE Async RX Baud 110 bps
RX Data/AIS Fault NONE Async TX Length 7 Bits
TX 2047 Pattern OFF Async RX Length 7 Bits
RX 2047 Pattern OFF Async TX Stop 2 Bits
TX Coding Format AMI Async RX Stop 2 Bits
RX Coding Format AMI Async TX Parity EVEN
Buffer Programming Bits Async RX Parity EVEN
Buffer Size 384 TX Overhead Type Async
Frame Structure T1 Data G.704 RX Overhead Type Async
Local AUPC
AUPC ENABLE OFF Target Noise 6.0 dB
Nominal Power +0.0 dBm Tracking Rate 0.5 dB/MIN
Minimum Power -20.0 dBm Local CL Action Hold
Maximum Power +5 dBm Remote CL Action Hold
11–24
Chapter 12. Asymmetrical Loop
Timing
12.1 Introduction
Asymmetrical Loop Timing is the same timing method that is designed into the
SDM-650B TROJAN interfaces. Refer to Figure 12-1 and Figure 12-2 for TX and RX
Asymmetrical Loop Timing block diagram. There are two advantages for using
Asymmetrical Loop Timing:
Versatility: The user selects different TX and RX data rates, yet still clock the send data
with the receive satellite clock.
Fits easily into on site The user may clock the send data with a clock that is not necessarily
clocking schemes: operating at the same rate as the data rate.
The send timing may only be referenced from an external clock source that is equal to the
data rate in the basic modem.
The asymmetrical clock loop reference must be one of the following:
• TX terrestrial clock
• External clock input
• RX clock input
12–1
Asymmetrical Loop Timing MN/SDM300A.IOM
Notes:
1. The clock inputs are as follows:
a. ≥ 64 kHz shall be divisible by 8 kHz.
b. ≥ 32 kHz but < 64 kHz shall be divisible by 600 Hz or 8 kHz.
c. < 32 kHz shall be divisible by 600 Hz.
2. The transmit clock source can be the same at the RX digital data rate or EXT
CLOCK if they are ± 100 PPM. This is provided on the basic unit, with or
without the asymmetrical loop timing option.
The transmit data is normally clocked into the modem with the Terminal Timing (TT)
clock in typical EIA-422 operation. The received data is clocked out with the Receive
Timing (RT) clock. The asymmetrical loop timing option allows the transmit and receive
data to be clocked with the same, or a multiple of the same clock. The added benefit is
that the transmit and receive data rates do not have to be the same.
12–2
RXC
S1
MC PLL
INT
S2 S3 EXT
ST DDS
REF
S4 OUTPUT
TT TXC
TXD TXD
Clock Selection S1 set to: S2 set to: S3 set to: S4 set to:
TX TERR (TT) DDS INT TT
INT (SCT) DDS INT ST
SCT (INT) DDS EXT REF (See Note 2) ST
SCT (LOOP) DDS EXT REF (See Note 2) ST
INT (LOOP) RXC PLL ST
(See Note 1)
EXT CLOCK MC PLL ST
Notes:
1. When CONFIGURATION INTERFACE → LOOP TIMING is set to ON,
SCT(INT) will change to read: SCT(LOOP).
2. When CONFIGURATION MOD → MOD REF is set to EXT MOD, S3 will
switch to the EXT REF position.
Figure 12-1. Transmit Section of the Asymmetrical Loop Timing Block Diagram
12–3
RXD RXD
BUF
RT RXC
INT
SAT
INT EXT
PLL DDS
REF
TERR
EXT
MC
TT
Note: PLL will be bypassed when the RX data rate is set to the TX data rate. This will disable
the Asymmetrical Mode.
Figure 12-2. Receive Section of the Asymmetrical Loop Timing Block Diagram
12–4
Example:
Master/Slave Clocking Setup:
1. Master site has a 10 MHz clock that is needed as the clock source.
2. Unequal data rates: 4.096 Mbps and 2.152 Mbps (numbers divisible by 8).
Master Site Option:
1. Set Configuration/Modulator/Modem Reference to EXT 10 MHz.
2. Set Configuration/Interface/TX Clock Source to SCT (Internal).
Note: The SCT clock is slaved off the 10 MHz input. The 10 MHz reference should
be placed into CP3 of the modem.
3. Set Configuration/Interface/Buffer Clock to SCT (Internal).
Slave Site:
1. Set Configuration/Interface/Loop Timing to ON.
2. Set Configuration/Interface/TX Clock Source to SCT (LOOP)

or
TX Terrestrial, Only if the user equipment can provide the proper slaved clock to
the modem.
3. Set Configuration/Interface/Buffer Clock to RX Satellite (Buffer Bypass).
12–5
12–6
Chapter 13. Duplex-Reed
Solomon Card Option
13.1 Duplex Reed-Solomon Card Option
Refer to Chapter 3, paragraph 3.6 for removal and installation of the

Duplex Reed-Solomon card.
IMPORTANT
Changes to the remote control and menu structure are minimal. The following list
summarizes the changes with the Duplex Reed-Solomon card installed.
• Modem Type Select – CDM Modem type added for compatibility with
CDM-550 and CDM-600 (sets N, K values to 220, 200)
• Remote Command - >ADD/SMT_CDM’cr’
13–1
SDM-300A Sattellite Modem Revision 6
Duplex Reed-Solomon Code FEC MN/SDM300A.IOM
This pagfe is intentionally left blank.
13–2
Chapter 14. 8-Channel
Multiplexer
14.1 Introduction
The multiplexer (MUX) system (Figure 14-1) provides for 1 to 8 tributary channels to be
multiplexed onto a single aggregate carrier. Independent tributary data rates from 600 bps
to 4000 kbps in 100 bps increments are supported. This option is used primarily with the
SDR-54A receiver, with the 8-channel Demux option installed.
The 8-Channel Mux PCB can be installed in the factory or in the field. This MUX PCB is
used in conjunction with a compatible I/O card to provide a 100-pin subminiature D style
connector located on the rear panel of the SDM-300A modem. Tributary and aggregate
data is available at this 100-pin connector. An optional breakout panel (UB-54) can be
used to provide eight separate 15-pin D connectors for individual tributary circuits and
one 15-pin D connector for auxiliary circuits.
14–1
8-Channel Multiplexer MN/SDM300A.IOM
Figure 14-1. 8-Channel Multiplexer PCB (AS/5985)
14.2 Installation
The following tool is required to install the 8-Channel Mux PCB:
Install the 8-Channel Mux PCB as a daughter card (Figure 15-2) on the main PCB as
follows:

Step Procedure
1 Turn power off and unplug the power supply.
2 Remove the cover retaining screws. Remove the cover.
3 Install the 8-Channel Mux PCB to the main PCB by mating the male header connectors with the
female header connectors.
4 Align the 8-Channel Mux PCB standoffs with the main PCB mounting holes and install the
mounting screws and washers.
5 After completing the installation procedure, turn power on. If the 8-Channel Mux was installed
properly, the Configuration MUX menu will be available.
14–2
Figure 14-2. 8-Channel Multiplexer Installation
14–3
14.3 8-Channel Multiplexer Specifications
System Specification
Number of Channels 1 to 8, the data rate for each channel is independently configurable.
(Tributaries)
Tributary Type Synchronous (clock/data) or Asynchronous (data only).
Tributary Data Interface EIA-422 or EIA-232-C, selectable per tributary.
Tributary Data Rate Note: EIA-232-C maximum data rate is 64.0 kbps.
Synchronous 600 bps to 4000 kbps in 100 bps increments.
Asynchronous 600 baud to 64k K-baud in 100 bps increments.
MUX Overhead 1.3 kbps, fixed.
MUX Technique Data Interleaved Time Division.
Aggregate Data Rate 4001.3 kbps maximum, the aggregate data rate is the sum of all
tributary data rates plus the multiplex overhead.
MUX System Specification
Tributary Data Interface The MUX supports a synchronous data interface for each tributary.
(Synchronous Mode) The tributary data interfaces use DCE conventions with data (send
data) sourced by external equipment and clock (send timing) sourced
by the MUX.
Tributary Clock Output 50% duty cycle ± 10%, clock (send timing) is phase locked to the
(Synchronous Mode) aggregate clock supplied by the modem. Clock stability is based on
the reference source. The clock accuracy will nominally be
10E-5 when using the modem SCT clock. Higher stability can be
obtained by using the modem External Reference input.
Tributary Data Interface The MUX supports an asynchronous data interface for each tributary.
(Asynchronous Mode) The tributary data interfaces use DCE conventions with data (send
data) sourced by external equipment. The MUX samples the input
data and passes it across the communications channel. All data
formatting and framing is preserved, including start/stop bits and parity.
Note: CTS (clear to send) flow control is employed to prevent loss of

data caused by clock differences between the asynchronous source
and the synchronous satellite channel.
Receive Channel Pass Through The MUX provides an output path for the received clock/data from the
SDM-300A modem.
Interface Connector 96-pin female DIN connector (includes all tributary interfaces).
Interface I/O Card (PC/6029) 96-pin male DIN to 100-pin subminiature D conversion PC card.
Breakout Panel (UB-54) Optional 1 RU breakout panel converts 100-pin D interface to eight 15-
pin D separate tributary interfaces and one 15-pin D connector for
auxiliary circuits.
14–4
14.4 8-Channel Multiplexer 100-Pin Connector (J10)

Pin # Circuit Description Pin # Circuit Description
1 - N/A 51 GND GROUND
2 - N/A 52 TC232_5 EIA-232, TX CLK, TRIB5
3 - N/A 53 TD232_5 EIA-232, TX DAT, TRIB5
4 - N/A 54 CTS232_5 EIA-232, CTS, TRIB5
5 GND GROUND 55 TD422B_5 EIA-422, TX DATB (+), TRIB5
6 GND GROUND 56 TD422A_5 EIA-422, TX DATA (-), TRIB5
7 DF DEMOD FAULT 57 TC422B_5 EIA-422, TX CLKB (+), TRIB5
8 MF MOD FAULT 58 TC422A_5 EIA-422, TX CLKA (-), TRIB5
9 GND GROUND 59 CTS422B5 EIA-422, CTSB (+), TRIB5
10 RT+B RECEIVE TIMING B (+) 60 CTS422A5 EIA-422, CTSA (-), TRIB5
11 RT-A RECEIVE TIMING A (-) 61 GND GROUND
12 GND GROUND 62 TC232_4 EIA-232, TX CLK, TRIB4
13 RD+B RECEIVE DATA B (+) 63 TD232_4 EIA-232, TX DAT, TRIB4
14 RD-A RECEIVE DATA A (-) 64 CTS232_4 EIA-232, CTS, TRIB4
15 GND GROUND 65 TD422B_4 EIA-422, TX DATB (+), TRIB4
16 RR+B RECEIVER READY B (+) 66 TD422A_4 EIA-422, TX DATA (-), TRIB4
17 RR-A RECEIVER READY A (-) 67 TC422B_4 EIA-422, TX CLKB (+), TRIB4
18 GND GROUND 68 TC422A_4 EIA-422, TX CLKA (-), TRIB4
19 MCB MASTER CLOCK B 69 CTS422B4 EIA-422, CTSB (+), TRIB4
20 MCA MASTER CLOCK A 70 CTS422A4 EIA-422, CTSA (-), TRIB4
21 GND GROUND 71 GND GROUND
22 TC232_8 EIA-232, TX CLK, TRIB8 72 TC232_3 EIA-232, TX CLK, TRIB3
23 TD232_8 EIA-232, TX DAT, TRIB8 73 TD232_3 EIA-232, TX DAT, TRIB3
24 CTS232_8 EIA-232, CTS, TRIB8 74 CTS232_3 EIA-232, CTS, TRIB3
25 TD422B_8 EIA-422, TX DATB (+), TRIB8 75 TD422B_3 EIA-422, TX DATB (+), TRIB3
26 TD422A_8 EIA-422, TX DATA (-), TRIB8 76 TD422A_3 EIA-422, TX DATA (-), TRIB3
27 TC422B_8 EIA-422, TX CLKB (+), TRIB8 77 TC422B_3 EIA-422, TX CLKB (+), TRIB3
28 TC422A_8 EIA-422, TX CLKA (-), TRIB8 78 TC422A_3 EIA-422, TX CLKA (-), TRIB3
29 CTS422B8 EIA-422, CTSB (+), TRIB8 79 CTS422B3 EIA-422, CTSB (+), TRIB3
30 CTS422A8 EIA-422, CTSA (-), TRIB8 80 CTS422A3 EIA-422, CTSA (-), TRIB3
38 TC422A_7 EIA-422, TX CLKA (-) TRIB7 88 TC422A_2 EIA-422, TX CLKA (-), TRIB2
48 TC422A_6 EIA-422, TX CLKA (-), TRIB6 98 TC422A_1 EIA-422, TX CLKA (-), TRIB1
14–5
14–6
Chapter 15. Flex Mux
15.1 Introduction
Flex Mux (Figure 15-1) PCB is offered as a factory or field installable interface.
Simultaneous operation of a main data channel and three overhead channels are
supported. The main data channel is a G.703 type electrical interface at E1 (2048 kbps) or
T1 (1544 kbps) terrestrial data rate and supports both pass through and D&I modes of
operation. AUPC, ASYNC data and voice channels are supported in the three overhead
channels.
• Channel (Main Data) # 1: G.703 E1 or T1

• Channel (Overhead) # 2: ADPCM (Audio)
• Channel (Overhead) # 3: EIA-232, EIA-422, or AUPC
• Channel (Overhead) # 4: EIA-232, EIA-485 or AUPC
Flex Mux is designed to plug into the base board of the modem at two internal interfaces,
and provide a single 50-pin “D” sub-connector at the rear of the modem to replace the
non-overhead 25-pin connector. The particular overhead configuration of the PCB is
determined by software control via the front panel.
Connection to external terrestrial equipment is supplied through a 50-pin “D” sub-

connector located at the rear of the modem. The unit is compatible with the Comtech EF
Data:
• SMS-7000 switch
• SMS-301 switch
• UB-300 universal breakout panel (UB-530 is not compatible)
A 96-pin DIN connector and a 30-pin DIP header supply interface to the internal circuitry
of the base modem. These connectors provide data flow, control, status and power
between the modem and the unit.
15–1
Flex Mux MN/SDM300A.IOM
User control and status monitoring of the unit via the front panel or the EIA-232 or
EIA-485 remote port (J6) located on the back of the modem.
Note: The Flex Mux Channel 1, D&I, will operate with other modems set-up for D&I as
long as Channels 2, 3, and 4 are Off.
Figure 15-1. Flex Mux (AS/6450)
15–2
Table 15-1. System Specification

System Specification
Number of Channels 1 to 4, Each Channel is independently configurable.
User Channel #1 G.703 E1 with Nx64 kbps channels.
Drop and Insert G.703T 1 with Nx64 kbps channels.
User Channel #2 32 kbps audio channel 600Ω, balanced 4-wire.
ADPCM Audio Channel
User Channel #3 Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) is included to provide remote output power
AUPC Channel adjustment capability.
Note: AUPC can not be selected for Channels #3 and #4 simultaneously.

User Channel #3 EIA-422 SYNC/ASYNC with CTS flow control, 0.6 to 40000 kbps (in 100 bit steps).
Auxiliary Data Channel EIA-232 SYNC/ASYNC with CTS flow control, 0.6 to 64 kbps (in 100 bit steps).
User Channel #4 AUPC is included to provide remote output power adjustment capability.
AUPC Channel
Note: AUPC can not be selected for Channels #3 and #4 simultaneously.
User Channel #4 EIA-485 ASYNC, 0.6 to 64 kbps (in 100 bit steps).
Auxiliary Data Channel #2 EIA-232 SYNC/ASYNC with CTS flow control, 0.6 to 64 kbps (in 100 bit steps).
Aggregate Data Rate 4.8 to 4001.3 kbps, the aggregate data rate is the sum of all tributary data rates plus the
multiplex overhead.
Multiplex Overhead 1.3 kbps.
15–3
Table 15-2. Multiplexer Specification

Multiplexer Specific Specifications
Channel # 1 Satellite Data Rates E1 Data Rates
N = 1 through 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 16, 20, 24 or 30 (E1_CCS)
N = 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 30 (E1_CAS)
E1 (2048 kbps)
T1 Data Rates
N = 1 through 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 16, 20 or 24 (T1)
(add 9 or 18 for T1, using special IBS superframe)
T1 (1544 kbps)
Channel # 1 Terrestrial Framing G.732, G.733 and G.704
Channel # 1 Satellite Overhead 16/15 of data rate per IESS-308, Rev. 6 and IESS-309, Rev. 3.
Applies when only Channel # 1 is selected, all other channels are “disabled”.
Channel # 1 Timeslot Selection 1 to 24 (All T1 modes)
1 to 15, 17 to 31 (E1_CAS and E1_CCS)
1 to 31 (E1_31TS)(Slot 16 available)
Arbitrary order, non-contiguous available.
User Channel # 2 ADPCM Audio Channel 32 kbps audio channel 600Ω, balanced 4-wire.
Channel # 3 and # 4 Data Interface The multiplexer supports synchronous data from each tributary. The tributary
(Synchronous Mode) interface use DCE conventions with data (Send data) sourced by external
equipment and clock (Send timing) sourced by the multiplexer.
Channel # 3 and # 4 Clock Output (Synchronous 50% duty cycle ± 10%, clock (Send timing) is phase locked to aggregate clock
mode) supplied by the modem or an external reference supplied by the user
equipment. Clock stability is based on the reference equipment.
Channel # 3 and # 4 Data Interface The multiplexer supports asynchronous data interface for each tributary data
(Asynchronous mode) interface. The data interface uses (DCE) conventions with data (Send data)
sourced by external equipment. The multiplexer samples data and passes it
across the communications channel. All data formatting and framing is
preserved.
Note: CTS (Clear-to-Send) flow control is employed to prevent loss of data

caused by clock differences between the asynchronous source and the
asynchronous satellite channel.
15–4
Table 15-3. Demultiplexer Specific Specifications

Demultiplexer Specific Specifications
Channel # 1 Satellite Data Rates E1 Data Rates (N x 64 kbps)
N = 1 through 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 16, 20, 24 or 30 (E1_CCS)
N = 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 30 (E1_CAS)
E1 (2048 kbps)
T1 Data Rates
N = 1 through 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 16, 20 or 24 (T1)
(add 9 or 18 for T1, using special IBS superframe)
T1 (1544 kbps)
Channel # 1 Terrestrial Framing G.732, G.733 and G.704
Channel # 1 Satellite Overhead 16/15 of data rate per IESS-308, Rev. 6 and IESS-309, Rev. 3.
Applies when only Channel # 1 is selected, all other channels are “disabled”.
Channel # 1 Timeslot Selection 1 to 24 (All T1 modes)
1 to 15, 17 to 31 (E1_CAS and E1_CCS)
1 to 31 (E1_31TS)(Slot 16 available)
Arbitrary order, non-contiguous available.
Channel # 1 Plesiochronous Buffer Sizes 7.5, 15 and 30 ms (E1_CAS)
1, 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32 ms (E1_CCS)
6, 12, 24 and 32 ms (T1_S and T1_ESF_S)
1, 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32 ms (all other modes)
Channel # 1 Buffer Clock Reference Driven from Insert Data In (Insert Clock)
Receive Satellite Clock
External Clock
SCT from Modulator
User Channel # 2 ADPCM Audio Channel 32 kbps audio channel 600Ω, balanced 4-wire.
Channel # 3 and # 4 Data Interface The demultiplexer supports synchronous data for each tributary. The tributary
(Synchronous mode) interfaces use DCE conventions with data (Receive data) and clock (Receive
clock) sourced by the demultiplexer.
Channel # 3 and # 4 Data Interface The demultiplexer supports asynchronous data interface for each tributary. The
(Asynchronous mode) tributary data interface used (DCE) conventions with data (Receive data)
sourced by demultiplexer. Asynchronous mode at the demultiplexer is really no
different from synchronous mode, because the multiplex equipment does Async
to sync conversion prior to transmission over the satellite channel. The
asynchronous data is passed in a virtual transparent mode and retains the
same framing and formatting including start/stop and parity as the transmitting
equipment.
Channel # 3 and # 4 Clock Output 50% duty clock ± 10%, clock (Receive Timing) is phase locked to aggregate
clock recovered by the modem.
15–5
15.2 Installation
The following tool is required to install the Flex Mux PCB:
Install the Flex Mux PCB as a daughter card (Figure 15-2) on the main PCB as follows:

Step Procedure
1 Turn power off and unplug the power supply.
2 Remove the rear panel retaining screws. Using the finger pulls, slide the main modem
3 Install the Flex Mux PCB to the main PCB by mating the male header connectors with
the female header connectors.
4 Align the Flex Mux PCB standoffs with the main PCB mounting holes and install the
mounting screws and washers.
5 After completing the installation procedure, turn power on. If the Flex Mux was installed
properly, the Configuration MUX menu will be available.
15–6
Figure 15-2. Flex Mux Multiplexer Installation
15–7
15.3 Flex MUX 50-Pin Connector Definitions
Table 5-4. Flex Mux 50-Pin Connector Definition

Pin # G.703 ADPCM RS-232 RS-485 RS-422 General Use
1 GND GND GND GND GND GND
34 Drop Data Input (-) Ch.1 - - - - -
18 Drop Data Input (+) Ch.1 - - - - -
2 GND GND GND GND GND GND
35 - - - - - *EXT CLK IN (-)
± 2.5V
19 - - - - - *EXT CLK IN (+)
± 2.5V
3 - - - - - -
36 Insert Data Input (-) - - - - -
Ch.1
20 Insert Data Input (+) - - - - -
Ch.1
4 - - - - - -
37 Drop Dat Output (-) Ch.1 - - - -
21 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
5 - - TX Data Ch 4 TX Data (-) Ch.4 - -
38 Drop Dat Output (-) Ch.1 - - - - -
6 - - RX Data Ch.4 RX Data (-) Ch.4 - -
39 Insert Data Input (-) - - - - -
Ch.1
23 Not Used Not Used - - - -
7 - - - RX Data (-) Ch.4 - -
40 Insert Data Input (+) - - - - -
Ch.1
8 - - TX Data Ch.3 - TX Data(-) Ch.3 -
41 - - Clear to Send Ch.4 - - -
25 - - TX Timing Ch.4 - - -
9 - - - - TX Data (+) Ch.3 -
42 - - RX Data CH.3 - RX Data (-) Ch.3 -
26 - - RX Timing Ch.4 - - -
10 - - - - RX Data (+) Ch.3 -
43 - - TX Timing CH.3 - TX Timing (-) Ch.3 -
27 - - - - TX Timing (+) Ch.3 -
11 - - RX Timing CH.3 - RX Timing (-) Ch.3 -
44 - - - - RX Timing (+) Ch.3 -
28 - - Clear to Send Ch.3 - Clear to Send (-) Ch.3 -
45 - Audio In (-) Ch.2 - - - -
29 - Audio In (+) Ch.2 - - - -
46 - Audio Out (-) Ch.2 - - - -
30 - Audio In (+) Ch.2 - - - -
15 - - - - Clear to Send (+) Ch.3 -
49 - - - - - ***MOD Fault-Open
Collector
33 - - - - - ***DEMOD Fault-Open
Collector
15–8
Chapter 16. FAST Accessible
Options
16.1 Introduction
16.2 FAST Accessible Options

Comtech EF Data’s FAST system allows immediate implementation of these options
through the user interface keypad or remote port:
• Drop and Insert • IBS • Qffset QPSK

(D&I)
• ASYNC/AUPC • Asymmetrical loop • 8-PSK
timing
• Decoder / Encoder • G.703 operation
• IDR • Variable data rates
Some FAST options are available through the basic platform unit, while others require
that the unit be equipped with optional hardware or that the hardware be installed in the
field. Refer to Table 16-1 for a listing of possible configurations.
Other options are available through conventional changes such as installing daughter card
PCBs.
16–1
FAST Accessible Options MN/SDM300.IOM
Table 16-1. FAST Options and Required Configurations
Asymmetrical Loop Timing
ASYNC/AUPC Overhead
Open Network (IDR/IBS)

High Variable Data Rate
SYNC or ASYNC/SYNC
SYNC or ASYNC/SYNC
Low Variable Data Rate
Reed–Solomon Codec
8-Channel ASYNC,
Sequential Decoder
4-Channel ASYNC,
(up to 4.375 Mbps)
(up to 512 kbps)
Viterbi Decoder
Drop & Insert

Data Rate
Single
8PSK
Hardware
Basic Platform z z
SDM-300A 1 1
FAST Options z z z z z z
FAST Options with

z
Reed Solomon Hardware
FAST Options with z z z

Overhead Hardware 2 2 2
FAST Options with

Reed Solomon And z z z z
Overhead Hardware
z z
Mux
2 2
z z
Flex Mux 2 2
1 The basic modem is shipped with either Sequential or Viterbi decoder.
2 The overhead interface card and a compatible relay adapter card (connector personality card) are required for this option.
Refer to Table 1-3 for the applicable part numbers.
16–2
FAST Accessible Options MN/SDM300A.IOM
16.3 FAST System Theory

FAST is an enhancement feature available only in Comtech EF Data products, enabling
on-location upgrade of the operating feature set—in the rack—without removing a
modem from the setup. When service requirements change, the operator can upgrade the
topology of the modem to meet those requirements within minutes after confirmation by
Comtech EF Data. This accelerated upgrade can be accomplished only because of
FAST’s extensive use of programmable devices incorporating Comtech EF Data-
proprietary signal processing techniques. These techniques allow the use of a unique
access code to enable configuration of the available hardware. The access code can be
purchased at any time from Comtech EF Data. Once obtained, the access code is loaded
into the unit through the front panel keyboard or the rear remote port.
With the exclusive FAST technology, operators have maximum flexibility for enabling
functions as they are required. FAST allows an operator to order a modem precisely
tailored for the initial application, reducing risk and cost overruns during the application
integration process.
16.4 Implementation
FAST is factory-implemented in the modem at the time of order. Hardware options for
basic modems can be ordered and installed either at the factory or in the field. The
operator can select options that can be activated easily in the field, depending on the
current hardware configuration of the modem.
16.4.1 Activation Procedure
Unit will revert to factory default settings upon implementating any

FAST options.
IMPORTANT
16.4.1.1 Obtain Modem Serial Number

Step Procedure
1 Press [CLEAR] to return to the Main menu.
2 Use [←] and [→] to select Function Select menu.
3 Press [ENTER].
4 Use [←] and [→] to select Utility Modem Type menu.
5 Press [ENTER].
6 Use [←] and [→] to select Modem Serial # menu.
7 Record serial number:
16–3
16.4.1.2 Select Features:

Step Procedure
1 Use [←] and [→] to select Modem Options menu.
2 Press [ENTER].
3 Scroll through the Modem Options and check off all features that display a
“+” sign as follows:
HIGH POWER [] SINGLE RATE []

HIGH STABILITY [] LOW RATE VOLTAGE []
ASLT [] FULL RATE VARIABLE []
VITERBI [] CARD #1 PCB []
SEQUENTIAL [] CARD #2 PCB []
Notes:
1. If the menu displays a “0”, the unit will need to be returned to the
manufacturer for the desired hardware upgrade.
2. If the unit displays an “X,” the unit can be upgraded in the field.
3. If the unit displays a “+”, the feature is installed.
4. 4.If the unit displays a “-,” the feature is FAST accessible
4 Press [CLEAR].
5 Use [←] and [→] to select CARD #1 (Overhead Card) menu.
6 Record Card #1 serial number, if displayed:

7 Use [←] and [→] select CARD #2 (Reed-Solomon Card) menu.
8 Record Card #2 serial number, if displayed:
9 Press [CLEAR].
10 Contact a Comtech EF Data sales representative to order features.
11 Comtech EF Data Customer Support personnel will verify the order and
provide an invoice and instructions.
16–4
FAST Accessible Options MN/SDM300A.IOM
16.4.1.3 Entering Access Codes from the Front Panel

Step Procedure
1 Press CLEAR to return to Main menu.
2 Use the [←] [→] keys to go to the Function Select: Utility menu.
3 Press <ENTER>.
4 Go to Utility: Modem Type menu.
5 Press <ENTER>.
6 Go to Configuration Code-Modem menu.
7 Press <ENTER>.
8 Menu should display as follows:
1) AAAAAAAAAA
2) AAAAAAAAAA
9 To enter the code, press <ENTER> and use the [↑] [↓] keys to select an alpha numeric
character. Use [→] to move to the next character or to move to the next line. Repeat this
procedure until all 20 characters of the code have been entered.
10 After completing entry of the 20-character code, press <ENTER>. The unit should display
Modem Initialization and will reboot to the factory default settings with the new option
available.
11 If a wrong or invalid code is entered, the unit will display Wrong Code Entered! and no
changes will occur. Please retry the code, verify that the code is correct, or request
assistance from Comtech EF Data Customer Support.
16.4.1.4 Entering Access Codes from the Remote Control Port
Step Procedure
1 Establish remote communication with the unit. Display will show REMOTE MODE
(if applicable).
2 Enter the following commands as needed to enable the option related to each board:
3 The modem should re-initialize and boot up to the factory default settings.
Main Board: <x/CCMD_code

Overhead board: <x/CCOD_code x = address
Mux/Demux Board: <x/CCMX_code
code = 20 digit configuration code
TX-Reed-Solomon: <x/CCTR_code
RX-Reed-Solomon: <x/CCRR_code
16–5
16.4.1.5 Verify Upgrade
Step Procedure
1 Press [CLEAR] to return to the Main menu.
2 Use [←] and [→] to select Function Select: Utility menu.
3 Press [ENTER].
4 Use [←] and [→] to select Utility: Modem Type menu.
5 Press [ENTER].
6 Use [←] and [→] to select Modem: Options menu.
7 Press [ENTER].
8 Use [←] and [→] to scroll through features. Visually check selected features for a “+” sign. If a
“+” sign is evident, the upgrade is completed and the option is enabled.
16.5 Variable Data Rates

The basic platform modem comes with single data rate capabilities. At the time of
purchase, the customer can add optional variable data rate capabilities.
If variable rate requirements arise after the purchase of a basic platform modem, these
capabilities can be added in the field using FAST technology. The variable rate options
include one of the following:
• Rates up to 512 kbps

• Rates up to 4.375 Mbps
16–6
Chapter 17. FLASH Upgrading
17.1 Introduction
Contact Comtech EF Data Customer Support or return the modem to

Comtech EF Data or it’s authorized representative for flash upgrade
IMPORTANT
information.
17–1
Flash Upgrading MN/SDM300.IOM
17–2
Chapter 18. Troubleshooting
18.1 System Checkout

CAUTION PCBs.
The modem comes equipped with an internal self-test feature. This feature is designed to provide
the operator with maximum confidence that the modem is operational without installing external
equipment.
A 2047 pattern is generated by the modem and routed through all sections. This is accomplished
by placing the modem in IF and baseband loopbacks. Pseudo Gaussian noise is introduced to the
modulated IF section allowing the modem to check its indicated Eb/N0 against the known Eb/N0
of the demodulated input.
• If this measurement falls outside of a specified window, the modem declares a failed
test.
• If an overhead card and/or Reed-Solomon card are installed, the signal is routed through
the card, verifying their operation.
• Faults, if any, are stored in the Stored Fault menu.
18–1
Troubleshooting MN/SDM300A.IOM
18.2 Interface Checkout

Use the following procedure and the test setup in Figure 18-1 to inspect the interface.
Figure 18-1. Fault Isolation Test Setup
1. Connect a BER test set to the appropriate modem data connector as shown in Refer to
Figure 18-1 Chapter 5 for external modem connections.
2. Set up the modem for baseband loopback operation by using the Configuration:
Interface front panel menu (Chapter 5). The modem will run error free. Refer to
Chapter 3 for a block diagram of the baseband loopback operation.
3. Change the modem from baseband loopback to interface loopback operation by using
the Configuration: Interface front panel menu (Chapter 5). The modem will run error
free. Refer to Chapter 5 for a block diagram of the interface loopback operation.
18–2
18.2.1 Modulator Checkout

Use the following procedure to check out the modulator:
1. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 18-1.
2. Set up the modem for operation by using the Configuration: Modulator and
Configuration: Demodulator front panel menus.
3. Clear all TX faults by correct use of data and clock selection.
4. Measure the Eb/N0 with a receiver that is known to be properly operating. Refer to
Table 18-1 and Figure 18-2to check for proper Eb/N0 level. The (S+N)/N is measured
by taking the average level of the noise and the average level of the modem spectrum
top. Use this measurement for the first column on Table 18-1. Read across the page to
find the S/N and Eb/N0 for the specific code rate.
Once the demodulator has locked to the incoming signal, the Monitor menu will display
signal level, raw BER, corrected BER, and Eb/N0. Refer to Chapter 1 for examples of
BER performance curves.
5. Connect a spectrum analyzer to the modem as shown in Figure 18-1. Ensure the IF
output meets the appropriate mask and spurious specifications. Measure the power
output at different levels and frequencies.
A typical output spectrum is shown in Figure 18-3.
6. To check the frequency and phase modulation accuracy:
a. Set the modem to the continuous wave Normal mode by using the Carrier Mode
front panel menu (Chapter 5). This sets the Carrier mode in the off condition. A
pure carrier should now be present at the IF output. This should only be used for
frequency measurements. In this mode, spurious and power measurements will be
inaccurate.
b. Set the modem to the continuous wave Offset mode by using the Carrier Mode
front panel menu (Chapter 5). This generates a single, upper side-band-suppressed
carrier signal. Ensure the carrier and side-band suppression is < -35 dBc.
18–3
Table 18-1. Conversion to S/N and Eb/N0 Chart

(dB) Code Rate 1/2 Code Rate 3/4 Code Rate 7/8
(S+N)/N S/N Eb/N0 S/N Eb/N0 S/N Eb/N0
4.0 1.8 1.8 1.8 0.0 1.8 -0.6
4.5 2.6 2.6 2.6 0.8 2.6 0.2
5.0 3.3 3.3 3.3 1.6 3.3 0.9
5.5 4.1 4.1 4.1 2.3 4.1 1.6
6.0 4.7 4.7 4.7 3.0 4.7 2.3
6.5 5.4 5.4 5.4 3.6 5.4 3.0
7.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 4.3 6.0 3.6
7.5 6.6 6.6 6.6 4.9 6.6 4.2
8.0 7.3 7.3 7.3 5.5 7.3 4.8
8.5 7.8 7.8 7.8 6.1 7.8 5.4
9.0 8.4 8.4 8.4 6.7 8.4 6.0
9.5 9.0 9.0 9.0 7.2 9.0 6.6
10.0 9.5 9.5 9.5 7.8 9.5 7.1
10.5 10.1 10.1 10.1 8.3 10.1 7.7
11.0 10.6 10.6 10.6 8.9 10.6 8.2
11.5 11.2 11.2 11.2 9.4 11.2 8.8
12.0 11.7 11.7 11.7 10.0 11.7 9.3
12.5 12.2 12.2 12.2 10.5 12.2 9.8
13.0 12.8 12.8 12.8 11.0 12.8 10.3
13.5 13.3 13.3 13.3 11.5 13.3 10.9
14.0 13.8 13.8 13.8 12.1 13.8 11.4
14.5 14.3 14.3 14.3 12.6 14.3 11.9
15.0 14.9 14.9 14.9 13.1 14.9 12.4
15.5 15.4 15.4 15.4 13.6 15.4 12.9
16.0 15.9 15.9 15.9 14.1 15.9 13.5
16.5 16.4 16.4 16.4 14.6 16.4 14.0
17.0 16.9 16.9 16.9 15.2 16.9 14.5
17.5 17.4 17.4 17.4 15.7 17.4 15.0
18.0 17.9 17.9 17.9 16.2 17.9 15.5
18.5 18.4 18.4 18.4 16.7 18.4 16.0
19.0 18.9 18.9 18.9 17.2 18.9 16.5
19.5 19.5 19.5 19.5 17.7 19.5 17.0
20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 18.2 20.0 17.5
18–4
RL -49.00 dBm
ATTEN 10 dB
2.00 dB/DIV
RES BANDWIDTH
10.0 kHz
Modem Rate = 2144 kbit/s, 3/4 Rate Coding

with 7.8 dB Eb/No (S + N)/N = 10 dB
CENTER 70.000 MHz SPAN 1.000 MHz

*RB 10.0 kHz *VB 10.0 Hz ST 30.00 sec
Figure 18-2. Typical Output Spectrum (with Noise)
RL -20.29 dBm
ATTEN 10 dB PASS
5.00 dB/DIV
CENTER FREQUENCY
140.000 MHz
CENTER 140.000 MHz SPAN 5.000 MHz

*RB 30.0 kHz *VB 3.00 Hz ST 166.7 sec
Figure 18-3. Typical Output Spectrum (without Noise)
18–5
18.2.2 Demodulator Checkout

Use the following procedure to test the demodulator.
1. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 18-1.
2. Set up the modem with an external IF loop and level. Use a properly operating
modulator, and ensure that power levels, data rates, code rates, etc., are compatible.
3. Allow the modem to lock up. Depending on the data rate and overhead type, lock up
may take several seconds. When the green carrier detect LED is on and the DEMUX
lock fault has been cleared (where applicable), the modem will run at the specified error
rate. Run the TX power level (input amplitude) over the full range, and offset the TX
frequency from the RX frequency by 35 kHz. Ensure the modem still runs within the
specified error rate.
4. Set up the modem to check the constellation patterns with an oscilloscope that is set in
the X-Y mode. Typical constellation patterns with noise and without noise are shown in
Figure 19-4. These test points are available on the auxiliary connector (J9, pins 6 and
8). It is not necessary to open the modem to look at these test points.
18–6
WITH NOISE
WITHOUT NOISE
Figure 18-4. Typical Eye Constellations
18–7
18.3 Fault Isolation

The modem’s design allows a technician to repair a faulty modem on location.

CAUTION PCBs.
The fault isolation procedure lists the following categories of faults or alarms.
• Modulator
• Demodulator
• Transmit Interface
• Receive Interface
• Common Equipment
• Backward Alarms
Note: Each fault or alarm category includes possible problems and the appropriate action
required to repair the modem.
If any of the troubleshooting procedures mentioned earlier in this chapter do not isolate the
problem, and Comtech EF Data Customer Support assistance is necessary, have the following
information available for the representative:
• Modem configuration. Modem configuration includes the modulator, demodulator,

interface, or local AUPC sections.
• Faults (active or stored).
18.3.1 System Faults/Alarms

System faults are reported in the “Faults/Alarms ” menu, and stored faults are reported in the
“Stored Flts/Alms” menu. Refer to Chapter 4 for more information. To determine the
appropriate action for repairing the modem, refer to Table 18-2 and the list of possible
problems.
18–8
Table 18-2. SDM-300A Fault Tree
SECONDARY ALARM RELAY

SPARE RELAY ALARM #1
PRIMARY ALARM RELAY
DEFFERED MAIN ALARM

IBS BACKWARD ALARM
COM EQ FAULT RELAY
RX ALARM RELAY #3
TX ALARM RELAY #2
COM EQ FAULT LED
TX IF OUTPUT OFF
RX FAULT RELAY
TX FAULT RELAY
RX ALARM LED
TX ALARM LED
D&I TERR BWA

RX FAULT LED
TX FAULT LED
RX AIS
TX AIS
(6) (7) * *
(8)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) ** ** ** ** ** ***
MODULATOR FAULTS *
*** *** *** *** ***
IF SYNTHESIZER X X X X X X
DATA CLOCK SYN X X X X X X

I CHANNEL X X X X X X
Q CHANNEL X X X X X X
AGC X X X X X X
MODEM REF ACT X X
MODEM REF PLL X X X X X X
DEMODULATOR FAULTS
CARRIER DETECT X X X X X
IF SYNTHESIZER X X X X X
I CHANNEL X X X X X
Q CHANNEL X X X X X
BER THRESHOLD X X X X
MODULE X X X X X
Legend
Note Fault/Alarm Relay Test Points Connector/Pins
(1) TX FAULT Pin 4 (NO), 5 (COM), 6 (NC) ****
(2) RX FAULT Pin 7 (NO), 8 (COM), 9 (NC) ****
(3) COM EQ FAULT Pin 1 (NO), 2 (COM), 3 (NC) ****
(4) TX ALARM #2 Pin 4 (NO), 5 (COM), 6 (NC) ****
(5) RX ALARM #3 Pin 7 (NO), 8 (COM), 9 (NC) ****
(6) PRIMARY ALARM Pin 43 (NO), 10 (COM), 27 (NC) ****
(7) SECONDARY ALARM Pin 44 (NO), 11 (COM), 28 (NC) ****
(8) DEF MAINT ALARM Pin 17 *****
* IDR only.
** IBS only.
*** D&I only.
**** A connection between the common and N.O. contacts indicate no fault/alarm.
***** Signal is open collector high impedance if faulted.
18–9
Table 18-2. SDM-300A Fault Tree (Continued)

PRIMARY ALARM RELAY
DEFFERED MAIN ALARM

IBS BACKWARD ALARM
COM EQ FAULT RELAY
RX ALARM RELAY #3
TX ALARM RELAY #2
COM EQ FAULT LED
TX IF OUTPUT OFF
RX FAULT RELAY
TX FAULT RELAY
RX ALARM LED
TX ALARM LED
D&I TERR BWA

RX FAULT LED
TX FAULT LED
RX AIS
TX AIS
(6) (7)
(8) * *
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) ** ** **
* ** ** ***
TX INTERFACE FAULTS *** *** ***
*** ***
TX DROP X X X X X
TX DATA/AIS X X X X X
TX CLK PLL X X X X X
TX CLK ACTIVITY X X X X X
TX AUDIO 1 CLIP X X
TX AUDIO 2 CLIP X X
RX INTERFACE FAULTS
BUFFER UNDERFLOW X X
BUFFER OVERFLOW X X
RX DATA/AIS X X X X X X
FRAME BER X X X X X
BACKWARD ALARM X X X X
BUFFER CLK PLL X X X X
BUFFER CLK ACT X X X
DEMUX LOCK X X X X X
RX 2047 LOCK X X
BUFFER FULL X X
RX INSERT X X X X
RX AUDIO 1 CLIP X X X
RX AUDIO 2 CLIP X X X
Legend
Test Note Fault/Alarm Relay Test Points Connector/Pins
* IDR only.
** IBS only.
*** D&I only.
18–10
Table 18-2. SDM-300A Fault Tree (Continued)

PRIMARY ALARM RELAY
DEFFERED MAIN ALARM

IBS BACKWARD ALARM
COM EQ FAULT RELAY
RX ALARM RELAY #3
TX ALARM RELAY #2
COM EQ FAULT LED
TX IF OUTPUT OFF
RX FAULT RELAY
TX FAULT RELAY
RX ALARM LED
TX ALARM LED
D&I TERR BWA

RX FAULT LED
TX FAULT LED
RX AIS
TX AIS
(6) (7) * *
(8)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) ** ** ** ** ** ***
*
*** *** *** *** ***
COMMON EQUIP FAULTS
BATTERY/CLOCK X X X
-12V POWER SUPPLY X X X
+12V POWER SUPPLY X X X
+5V SUPPLY X X X
CONTROLLER X X X X X
SELF TEST X
INTERFACE MODULE X X X X X
BACKWARD ALARMS
(IDR OVERHEAD ONLY)
BW ALARM RX #4 X X X
BW ALARM TX #4 X X
BW ALARM TX #3 X X
BW ALARM TX #2 X X
BW ALARM TX #1 X X
Legend
Test Note Fault/Alarm Relay Test Points Connector/Pins
* IDR only.
** IBS only.
*** D&I only.
18–11
18.3.2 Faults/Alarms Display

General fault, status, and alarm information are indicated by 10 LEDs located on the modem’s
front panel.
• A fault (red LED) indicates a fault that currently exists in the modem.
• When a fault occurs, it is stored in the stored fault memory, and indicated by the single
yellow LED.
• The LED is turned off when the fault clears. If the fault clears, the occurrence is also
stored.
A total of 10 occurrences of any fault can be stored. Each fault or stored fault indicated by a
front panel LED could be one of many faults. To determine which fault has occurred, use the
Fault or Stored Fault front panel menu.
Alarms are considered minor faults, which will not switch the modem offline in a redundant
system. Alarms are shown in the Fault or Stored Fault front panel menu by a reversed contrast
(white on black) character that appears at the display panel.
18.3.3 Faults/Alarms Analysis

This section describes the possible problems and actions to take for the following faults:
• Modulator
• Demodulator
• Transmit interface
• Receive interface
• Common equipment
• Backward alarm
18–12
18.3.3.1 Modulator Faults

Fault/Alarm Possible Problem and Action
IF SYNTHESIZER Modulator IF synthesizer fault.
This is considered a major alarm, and will turn off the modulator output. Return the modem for repair.
DATA CLOCK SYN Transmit data clock synthesizer fault.
This fault indicates that the internal clock VCO has not locked to the incoming data clock, or the internal clock
synthesizer has not locked to the internal reference. This is considered a major alarm, and will turn off the
modulator output. Ensure the proper data rate has been set up and selected, and the incoming data rate
matches the modem selections.
In the IDR type configuration, the data rate must reflect any overhead bits that are added. In the IBS type, the
internal reference is changed to account for the IBS overhead of 16/15. A standard IDR type configuration
operating at Rev. 2 would be programmed to the input data rate. An IDR type operating at Rev. 3 would be
programmed to reflect the 96 kbps of overhead. A 1544 kbps Rev. 3 IDR is programmed to 1640 kbps. An IBS
type would be programmed for the input data rate to the channel unit. The modem accounts for the overhead
because of the change in internal reference. Use interface loopback for isolating the problem. Verify the
frequency of the input data clock to be within the lock range of 100 PPM.
I CHANNEL Activity alarm for the I channel digital filter.
This alarm is considered a major alarm, and will turn off the modulator IF output. An alarm in this
position indicates either a fault in the scrambler, or if the scrambler is disabled, the alarm indicates a
loss of incoming data. If the fault is active with the scrambler turned off, check for input data at the
DATA I/O connector.
Q CHANNEL Activity alarm for the Q channel digital filter.
Use the I channel procedure.
AGC LEVEL Output power AGC level fault.
This is a major alarm and will turn off the modulator IF output.
Indicates the level at the modulator output is not the programmed level.
INTERNAL SCT SYN Internal TX data clock synthesizer fault. The SCT has failed to lock to the internal reference.
EXT REF ACT External reference activity fault. Indicates clock reference not detected.
MODULE Modulator module fault.

Typically indicates that the modulator module is missing or will not program.
18–13
18.3.3.2 Demodulator Faults
CARRIER DETECT Carrier detect fault.
Indicates the decoder is not locked. This is the most common fault displayed in the modem. Any
problem from the input data on the modulator end of the circuit to the output of the decoder can cause
this alarm.
First, ensure the demodulator has an RF input at the proper frequency and power level. Ensure the
demodulator data rate is properly programmed. Refer to the fault isolation procedure for Data Clock
Syn in the modulator section. Verify the frequency of the data transmitted from the modulator is within
100 PPM.
IF SYNTHESIZER Demodulator IF synthesizer fault.
Indicates the demodulator IF synthesizer is faulted.

This fault is a hardware failure. Contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department.
I CHANNEL Indicates a loss of activity in the I channel of the quadrature demodulator.
Typically indicates a problem in the modulator side of the circuit. Check for proper RF input to the
demodulator. If the input to the demodulator is correct, then the problem is in the baseband
processing.
Q CHANNEL Indicates a loss of activity in the Q channel of the quadrature demodulator.
Follow the same procedure for the I channel fault.
BER THRESHOLD Indicates the preset BER threshold has been exceeded.
Setting of this alarm is done in the Utility menu. This is an alarm based on the corrected BER reading
on the front panel.
MODULE Demodulator module fault.
Typically indicates that the demodulator module is missing or will not program. Contact the Comtech
EF Data Customer Support Department.
18–14
18.3.3.3 Transmit Interface Faults
TX DROP Drop interface hardware fault (D&I only).
The typical cause of this fault is the drop phase-locked loop is not locked, or some other drop interface
hardware has malfunctioned. Contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department.
TX DATA/AIS Data or incoming AIS.
When the AIS is selected in the Interface Utility menu for TX data fault, the transmit interface fault TX
data/AIS is monitoring a fault condition of all 1s from customer data input to the modem. When data is
selected in the Interface Utility menu for TX data fault, the TX interface fault TX data/AIS is monitoring
a fault condition of all 1s or 0s. This is referred to as a data-stable condition (data is not transitioning).
This fault indicates there is trouble in the chain sending data to the modem. The modem passes this
signal transparently, and takes no other action. This indication is a monitor function only, and aids in
isolating the trouble source in a system.
TX CLOCK PLL Transmitter phase-locked loop fault.
Indicates the transmitter PLL is not locked to the reference of the interface transmit clock recovery
oscillator. Contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department.
TX CLOCK ACT Activity detector alarm of the selected interface transmit clock.
Indicates the selected TX clock is not being detected. Check the signal of the selected TX clock
source to verify the signal is present. The interface will fall back to the internal clock when this alarm is
active.
18–15
18.3.3.4 Receive Interface Faults
BUFFER Buffer underflow alarm.

UNDERFLOW
Indicates the plesiochronous buffer has underflowed. Buffer underflow is normally a momentary fault
(there are clock problems if this alarm is continuously present). This alarm is included in this section to
be consistent with the fault reporting system and to be correctly registered in the stored fault memory.
The time and date of the first 10 receive buffer underflow faults are stored in battery-backed memory
as an aid to troubleshooting. The interval between stored overflow/underflow events can be used to
determine relative clock accuracies.
BUFFER Buffer overflow alarm.

OVERFLOW
Indicates the plesiochronous buffer has overflowed. The problems and actions in the buffer underflow
section apply to this alarm.
RX DATA/AIS Data or incoming AIS. The data monitored for RX data is coming from the satellite.
When the AIS is selected for RX data fault in the Interface Utility menu, the RX data/AIS is monitoring
an alarm condition of all 1s from the satellite. When data is selected for RX data fault in the Interface
Utility menu, the RX data/AIS is monitoring a fault condition of all 1s or 0s. This is referred to as a
data-stable condition (data is not transitioning). The fault indicates trouble in receiving data from the
satellite. The modem passes this signal transparently, and can close a FORM C contact. The
indication is a monitor function only to help isolate the source of trouble in a system.
FRAME BER The receive decoded error rate has exceeded 10-3 over a 60-second period measured on the framing
bits.
This is defined as a major (prompt) receive alarm by INTELSAT specifications IESS-308. In a

redundant system, a switch-over will be attempted. Since some data must be correctly received to
indicate this fault, receive AIS will not be substituted. This fault is to be sent as a backward alarm to
the distant end. This must be wired externally, as faults other than from the modem may need to enter
the fault tree.
BACKWARD Backward alarm. Modem is receiving a backward alarm, indicating trouble at the distant end. The
ALARM alarm may be a result of improper transmission at the near end of the link.
This particular alarm is reported and recorded, but the modem takes no other action. In most cases,
the fault is due to some receive problem with the modem, so a real fault will probably be occurring if
backward alarm faults are being recorded.
BUFFER CLK PLL Buffer clock phase-locked loop fault. The buffer synthesizer is the wrong frequency or will not lock.
Ensure the selected buffer clock source is at the proper frequency and level. If the fault continues,
contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department.
BUFFER CLK ACT Activity detector alarm of the selected interface receive clock.
The interface will fall back to the satellite clock when this fault is active.
18–16
DEMUX_LOCK Demultiplexer synchronization lock fault. This fault means that the demultiplexer is unable to maintain
valid frame and multiframe alignment.
The usual cause is invalid or absent receive data. This is a major (prompt) alarm. The alarm will cause
insertion of receive AIS (all 1s) and the switch-over will be attempted. This fault is to be sent as a
backward alarm to the distant end. This fault will occur when no carrier is present, but will probably
never occur with a correct signal.
RX 2047 LOCK RX 2047 lock alarm.
Indicates the RX 2047 data test pattern is not being received by the decoder. The alarm probably
indicates the transmitter is not set correctly.
BUFFER FULL Buffer full alarm.
Indicates the buffer is < 10% or > 90% full.
RX INSERT Insert interface hardware fault (D&I only).
The typical cause of this fault is the insert phase-locked loop is not locked, or some other insert
interface hardware has malfunctioned. Contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department.
18.3.3.5 Common Equipment Faults

BATTERY/CLOCK M&C battery voltage or clock fault.
Indicates a low voltage in the memory battery. Typically, this fault will be active when a modem has been hard
reset or the firmware has been changed. When a hard reset has been executed or the firmware has been
changed, this fault will typically be active when the modem is first turned on.
-12 VOLT SUPPLY -12V power supply fault.
Indicates a high or low voltage condition. Level is ± 5%. Check for a short on the -12V line from the power supply
or on any of the plug-in boards.
+12 VOLT SUPPLY +12 VDC power supply fault. Use the same procedure as with -12V fault.
+5 VOLT SUPPLY +5V power supply fault.
Use the same procedure as with a -12V fault. The +5V supply requires a minimum load of 1A.
CONTROLLER Controller fault.
Indicates a loss of power in the M&C card. Typically indicates the controller has gone through a power on/off
cycle.
INTERFACE Interface module fault.
Indicates a problem in programming the interface card.
18–17
18.3.3.6 Backward Alarms Faults
BW ALARM RX4 Receive backward alarm #4. The distant end of the link is sending backward alarm #4. This indicates
trouble at the distant end, which may be a result of improper transmission at the near end of the link.
The modem will signal this event by setting the deferred maintenance alarm (open collector). This
alarm is a monitor function. The modem reports and records the event, but takes no other action.. If
the user does not wish to monitor the backward alarm faults, the backward alarm inputs must be
grounded at the breakout panel.
BW ALARM RX3 Receive backward alarm #3. Refer to BW Alarm RX4 for details.
BW ALARM TX4 Transmit backward alarm #4. The modem is being instructed to send backward alarm #4 to the distant
end of the link. This alarm is controlled by wiring the backward alarm inputs of the modem to the
demod fault relay and/or other fault outputs in the receive system (see IESS-308 for clarification). The
simplest implementation for single destination service is to wire the demod fault relay between ground
and the four backward alarm inputs This sends all four backward alarms in the event of any major
(prompt) receive fault. This particular alarm is transmitted, reported, and recorded, but the modem
takes no other action. In most cases, this will be sent due to some receive problem with the modem,
so a real fault will probably be occurring if backward alarms are being sent. The transmit backward
alarms are a symptom of trouble, not a cause.
BW ALARM TX3 Transmit backward alarm #3. Refer to BW Alarm TX4 for details.
18–18
18.3.4 Remove and Replace Power Supply
Ensure that all power to the modem is disconnected. Make certain technicians
performing the task are in compliance with all industry safety regulations. DC
WARNING modems may contain power within the modem; observe safety regulations
prior to performing the task.
Remove the Power Supply, as follows:
1. Disconnect all power to the modem.

2. Remove the modem from the rack and place modem on a workbench or equivalent area
to perform the task.
3. Remove the hardware securing the cover to the chassis.
4. Remove the cover.
5. Remove the cover from the power supply.
6. Disconnect the multiple wire-plug-in from the Power Supply.
7. Disconnect the plug-in from the Power outlet.
8. Disconnect the GREEN Ground plug-in from the Power supply PCB.
9. Remove the four screws securing the Power Supply to the chassis.
10. Remove the Power Supply.
Install Power Supply, as follows:
1. Position new power supply in the chassis and secure with the four screws.
2. Connect the GREEN Ground wire to the Power Supply PCB.
3. Connect the Power Outlet plug-in to the Power Supply PCB.
4. Connect the multiple wires-plug-in to the Power Supply PCB.
5. Install the Power Supply cover.
6. Install the modem cover and secure with the standard hardware.
7. Reinstall the modem in the rack.
18–19
18.3.5 Remove and Replace the Fan Assembly
Ensure that all power to the modem is disconnected. Make certain technicians
performing the task are in compliance with all industry safety regulations. DC
WARNING modems may contain power within the modem; observe safety regulations
prior to performing the task.
Remove the Fan Assembly, as follows:
1. Disconnect all power to the modem.

2. Remove the modem from the rack and place modem on a workbench or equivalent area
to perform the task.
3. Remove the hardware securing the cover to the chassis.
4. Remove the cover.
5. Remove the cover from the power supply.
6. Remove the Data I/O Interface connector, as follows:
a. Disconnect the Data I/O interface connector from the Main PCB.
b. Disconnect the hardware securing the Data I/O interface connector
c. Remove the Data I/O Interface connector.
7. Disconnect fan cable to the Main PCB.

8. Remove the four screws securing the fan assembly.
9. Remove the fan assembly.
Install the Fan Assembly, as follows:
1. Place fan assembly in the chassis and secure with the four screws.
2. Connect the fan assembly cable to the Main PCB.
3. Install the Data I/O Interface Connector as follows:
a. Insert the Data I/O Interface Connector into the chassis.

b. Connect the cable(s) and Data I/O to the Main PCB
c. Secure the Data I/O Interface Connector.
4. Install the Power Supply cover.

5. Install the chassis cover and secure with the hardware.
18–20
Chapter 19. Specifications
19.1 Specifications Summary
Table 19-1. Specification Summary

Operating Frequency Range 50 to 180 MHz
Synthesized in 1 Hz steps
Modulation Types 8-PSK
(Front panel selection) BPSK
QPSK
OQPSK (FAST upgrade, front panel selection)
Operating Channel Spacing Less than 0.5 dB degradation operating with two adjacent like channels (each 10
dB higher at 1.3 times the symbol rate)
A single adjacent carrier spaced 1.4 times the symbol rate, up to +20 dBm
Baseband Interface EIA-422/449
V.35
EIA-232
G.703 -1544
G.703 -2048
(Field-selectable)
Elastic Buffer 32 to 262144 bits, selectable from front panel in bits or ms
Digital Data Rate 2.4 kbps to 5.0 Mbps in 1 bps steps
(front panel selection)
Scrambling/Descrambling IESS 309 (Synchronous 215)
Types International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee (CCITT) V.35
Comtech EF Data/Comstream compatible
Fairchild compatible
19–1
Specifications MN/SDM300A.IOM
Table 19-1. General Specification (Continued)

Forward Error Viterbi K = 7: Rate 1/2, 3/4, 7/8, 2/3
Correction Reed-Solomon: Rate 225/205, 126/112, 219/201
IBS: 219/201/4
Turbo: Rate 5/16, 21/44, 1/2, 3/4
Sequential: Rate 1/2, 3/4, 7/8
(Code rates selectable from front panel)
Monitor and Control Front panel display (16 character by 2 rows), backlit
Filter Mask Types INTELSAT/EUTELSAT
Closed net (Comtech EF Data)
Closed net (Fairchild compatible), SDM-51 compatible
ESC IDR
IBS
None, field-selectable
Loopback Modes Baseband (near end and far end)
Interface (near end and far end)
D&I baseband (insert data into drop data out)
IF Loopback (near end)
RF Loopback (far end)
Diagnostic Features IF Loopback
RF Loopback
Baseband Loopback
Interface Loopback
Fault monitoring (includes current and stored faults)
BER monitoring
Input IF power monitoring
Buffer fill status monitoring
Remote control via serial port
19–2
19.2 Environmental and Physical Specifications
Table 19-2. Environmental and Physical Specification

Power Prime Power 90 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz
40W maximum, fused at 2A
38 to 64 VDC
Physical:
Size Pre-1999
1.75H x 19W x 14D inches (1 RU
(4.4H x 48W x 35.6D cm)
Weight Post -1999
1.75H x 19W x 15.15D inches (1RU)
(4.4H x 48W x 38.5 cm)
9 lbs (4 kg)
Shipping (including container):
Size 9H x 21W x 20D inches
(23H x 53W x 51D cm)
Weight 15.25 lbs (7 kg) Approxiamately)
Environment:
Temperature 0 to 50°C (32° to 122°F)
Humidity 0 to 95 % non-condensing
19–3
19.3 Remote Control Specifications
Table 19-3. Remote Control Specifications

Parameters Specifications
Serial Interface EIA-232 or EIA-485 (2- or 4-wire)
Baud Rate 150 to 19200 Mbps
Signals Controlled Acquisition Sweep Parameters
Baseband Loopback
Buffer Clock TX/RX/INT/INS (D&I only)
Buffer Size
Code/Decode Rate
Data Rate Select
Descrambler On/Off
Descrambler Type
Differential Encoding/Decoding
IDR Backward Alarm Control On/Off
IF Loopback
Interface Loopback
Local Modem AUPC On/Off
Mod/Demod Spectrum Norm/Invert
Reed-Solomon On/Off
Remote AUPC Enable On/Off
Rev Emulation Current/Functional
RF Loopback
RX Clock Normal/Invert
Scrambler On/Off
Scrambler Type
Self Test
Transmitter On/Off
TX Clock Internal/External
TX Power
TX/RXOverhead Type
TX/RX Filter Mask
TX/RX Frequency
Signals Monitored Corrected BER
Fault Status
Power Supply Voltages
Raw Error Rate
RX Eb/N0
RX Carrier Detect
RX Signal Level
Stored Fault Status
Configuration Retention Will maintain current configuration for at least one year without power
Addressing Programmable to 1 of 255 possibilities; address 0 is reserved for global addressing
Note: Local control of all remote functions is included by push-button entry.
19–4
19.4 Modulator Specifications
Table 19-4. Modulator Specification

Parameter Specifications
Data Clock Source Internal, ± 1 x 10-5 stability
Internal High Stability, ± 2 x 10-7 (Optional)
Output Frequency Stability ± 10 PPM
Output Impedance 75 Ω (50 Ω Optional)
Output Power -5 to –30 dBm, adjustable in 0.1 db steps
+5 to –20 dBm, high-power output (Optional)
Output Spurious -55 dBc in-band (0 to 500 MHz)
Output Return Loss 20 dB
19.4.1 Digital Data Rate

The digital data rate is selctable in 1 bps steps. The modem automatically calculates and sets
the symbol rate. Data rates entered that exceed the data rate or symbol rate specification are
rejectred at entry. The symbol rate range is 4.8 kHz to 2.5 MHz.
Table 19-5. Modulator Digital Data Rate

Data Rate Range
Modulation Type Encoding Type Min Max
BPSK 1/2 Viterbi 2.4 kbps 1.25 Mbps
{O}QPSK 1/2 Viterbi 4.8 kbps 2.5 Mbps
8-PSK 2/3 Viterbi 512 kbps 5.0 Mbps
BPSK 1/2 Sequential 2.4 kbps 1.25 Mbps
QPSK 1/2 Sequential 4.8 kbps 2.5 Mbps
BPSK 5/16 Turbo 2.4 kbps 781.25 kbps
BPSK 21/44 Turbo 2.4 kbps 1193 kbps
{O}QPSK 1/2 Turbo 4.8 kbps 2386 kbps
8-PSK 3/4 Turbo 384 kbps 5.0 Mbps
BPSK 1/2 Viterbi and Reed-Solomon 2.4 kbps 1.138 Mbps
{O}QPSK 1/2 Viterbi and Reed-Solomon 4.8 kbps 2.277 Mbps
8-PSK 2/3 Viterbi and Reed-Solomon 512 kbps 4.555 Mbps
19–5
Table 19-5. Modulator Digital Data Rate (Continued)

Data Rate Range
BPSK 1/2 Sequential and Reed-Solomon 2.4 kbps 1.138 Mbps
QPSK 1/2 Sequential and Reed-Solomon 4.8 kbps 2.277 Mbps
QPSK 1/2 IBS 64 kbps 2048 kbps
QPSK 1/2 IBS and Reed-Solomon 64 kbps 2048 kbps
QPSK 1/2 D&I 64 kbps 1920 kbps
QPSK 1/2 D&I and Reed-Solomon 64 kbps 1920 kbps
QPSK 1/2 ASYNC 4.8 kbps 2048 kbps
QPSK 1/2 ASYNC and Reed-Solomon 4.8 kbps 2048 kbps
BPSK 1/2 ASYNC 2.4 kbps 1024 kbps
BPSK 1/2 ASYNC and Reed-Solomon 2.4 kbps 1024 kbps
8-PSK 2/3 IBS 512 kbps 2048 kbps
8-PSK 2/3 IBS and Reed-Solomon 512 kbps 2048 kbps
8-PSK 2/3 ASYNC 512 kbps 2048 kbps
8-PSK 2/3 ASYNC and Reed-Solomon 512 kbps 2048 kbps
QPSK 3/4 IDR, T1 1544 kbps Fixed Rate
QPSK 3/4 IDR, T1, and Reed-Solomon 1544 kbps
QPSK 3/4 IDR, E1 2048 kbps
QPSK 3/4 IDR, E1, and Reed-Solomon 2048 kbps
8-PSK 2/3 IDR, T1 1544 kbps Fix Rate
8-PSK 2/3 IDR, T1, and Reed-Solomon 1544 kbps
8-PSK 2/3 IDR, E1 2048 kbps
8-PSK 2/3 IDR, E1, and Reed-Solomon 2048 kbps
BPSK 1/1 None 4.8 kbps 2.5 Mbps
{O}QPSK 1/1 None 9.6 kbps 5.0 Mbps
19–6
19.4.2 Modulation and Encoding Types

Table 19-6 shows combinations of modulation and forward error correction (FEC) encoding
types.
Table 19-6. Modulation and Encoding Types
Encoder Code Rate Modulation
Viterbi, K7 1/2 BPSK
Viterbi, K7 1/2 BPSK
Reed-Solomon 225/205 Closed
Viterbi, K7 1/2, 3/4, 7/8 QPSK, OQPSK
Viterbi, K7, TCM 2/3 8-PSK

Viterbi, K7 1/2, 3/4, 7/8 QPSK, OQPSK
Reed-Solomon 225/205 Closed or IDR T1,
126/112 IBS and D&I,
219/201 IDR E1
EFD 126/112 IBS and D&I,
Compatible 219/201 IDR E1
Reed-Solomon 219/201 [4] No Overhead,
IESS-310 219/201 [4] IBS and D&I,
Compatible 219/201 [8] IDR T1/E1
Sequential 1/2 BPSK
Sequential 1/2 BPSK
Sequential 1/2, 3/4, 7/8 QPSK, OQPSK
Sequential 1/2, 3/4, 7/8 QPSK, OQPSK
Reed-Solomon 225/205 Closed QPSK, OQPSK
Space Link Remote 1/2, 3/4, 7/8 BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK
(Independent)
Turbo 21/44, 5/16 BPSK
Turbo 1/2, 3/4 QPSK, OQPSK
Turbo 3/4 8-PSK
Uncoded 1/1 BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK
19–7
19.4.3 Scrambling Types

The operator can select one of the following scrambling types.
Modulation Type FEC or Framing Scrambling

EFD Closed, Sequential ITU V.35
CSC Closed
EFD Closed, Viterbi ITU V.35 Intelsat Modified
CSC Closed,
FDC Closed
EFD Closed Viterbi/RS Concatenated EFD Modified V.35
EFD Closed Turbo 212-1 Synchronous
EFD Closed Turbo IESS-315 Mode
EFD Closed ASYNC 215-1 Synchronous
FDC Closed Sequential FDC Modified V.35
Intelsat Open Viterbi IDR ITU V.35 Intelsat Modified
Intelsat Open Viterbi IDR with RS ITU V.35 Intelsat Modified
Intelsat Open IBS, D&I, IESS-310 215-1 Synchronous
19.4.4 Differential Encoder

The differential encoder (On or Off) takes care of one set of ambiguities due the error
correction codes being transparent.
19.4.5 BPSK Bit Ordering

The encoder has the ability to select whether I is the first bit or Q is the first bit in the symbol
word grouping for compatibility with any system. For standard operation Q is the first bit.
• Viterbi (Standard/Non-Standard)
• Sequential (Standard/Non-Standard)
• Turbo (Not Supported)
19.4.6 Interleaver (Reed-Solomon Codec)

• QPSK – Depth 4 (IBS, IDR, D&I)
• 8-PSK – Depth 4 (No Overhead, IBS, D&I) (IESS-310)
• QPSK/OPSK – Depth 4, 8, 16 (Closed Network, ASYNC)
• 8-PSK – Depth 8 (IDR) (IESS-310)
19–8
19.4.7 Transmit Frequency (IF)

The range of the output IF spectrum is selected by the operator from 50 to 180 MHz, in 1 Hz
steps.
19.4.8 Frequency Reference

SCT, RX Bit Clock, and IF output are locked to the Frequency Reference.
Frequency Reference Remarks

Internal (Standard Stability over the operating temperature range = ± 10 PPM.
Internal High Stability Stability over the operating temperature range = ± 0.2 PPM.
(Optional)
External Reference Input The External frequency reference connector is located on the back panel. This allows
(Standard) Frequency Reference to be locked to an external reference frequency standard.
Impedance 75Ω
Frequency 1, 5, 10 or 20 MHz
Amplitude ≥ +0 dBm < +20 dBm
DC offset Capacitively coupled
Connector BNC
Reference Frequency The External frequency reference connector can be used as an output when the
Output (Optional) High Stability option is installed. When selected from the front panel, this output
can be used to lock other equipment to the Internal High Stability Reference of
the selected modem. The output is 10 MHz, the level is +10 dBm ± 5 dBm.
19.4.9 Transmit Frequency Change Time

The time between the end of a remote command and the end of the modem reply for
frequency change and synthesizer lock is < 500 mS.
19.4.10 Phase Noise

The phase noise of the TX-IF output carrier is no worse than:
dBc/Hz Distance from Carrier

-66.0 100 Hz
-76.0 1 kHz
-86.0 10 kHz
-96.0 100 kHz
-96.0 1 MHz
Fundamental AC line spurious is –42 dBc or lower.

The sum of all the single sideband spurious, from 0 to 0.75 x symbol rate, is –42 dBc or
lower.
19–9
19.4.11 Transmit IF Output Switch

When set to Off, no signal present at the output is greater than –60 dBm, measured in a
3 kHz bandwidth from 0 to 500 MHz.
19.4.12 Transmit IF Power

The TX IF power is operator selectable from –5 to –30 dBm, in 0.1 dB steps, with an
accuracy of ± 0.5 dB. The maximum drift due to temperature change over the specified
range is ± 0.5 dB.
As an option the output can be selectable from +5 to –20 dBm, in 0.1 dB steps, with an
accuracy of ± 0.5 dB. The maximum drift due to temperature change over the specified
range is ± 0.5 dB.
19.4.13 Modulator Power Offset

An offset to the displayed IF output power may be entered from –99.0 to +99.0 dB, in 0.1 dB
steps.
19.4.14 Modulated IF Output Shape

The modem meets the following transmit output spectral mask specifications. The desired
mask is selectable from the front panel or remotely.
• INTELSAT/EUTELSAT
• Closed net (Comtech EF Data and Comstream)
• Closed net (Fairchild compatible)
• Closed net (SDM-51, SDM-52)
19.4.15 Spurious Emissions

Spurious emissions are measured relative to the power of the modulated carrier. The
measurement is done with the carrier on in continuous mode and modulated by the correct
data/clock signal. Spurious emissions measured in a 3 kHz bandwidth at the transmit IF
output are:
0 to 500 MHz (-5 to –30 dBm) -55 dBc

0 to 500 MHz (+5 to –20 dBm > 64 kbps) -50 dBc
0 to 500 MHz (+5 to –20 dBm < 64 kbps) -45 dBc
19.4.16 Modulator Phase Error

The modulator has less than 2° of phase error
19–10
19.4.17 Transmit IF Test Modes

Select from the following TX IF test modes. Spurious emissions in the following test modes
will be ≤ -30 dBc.
CW Outputs a single carrier at the defined frequency

Offset Dual sideband signal with lower sideband and
carrier suppressed ≤ -35 dBc (≤ -30 dBc for 8-PSK only)
Dual sideband Suppressed carrier ≤ -35 dBc (≤ -30 dBc for 8-PSK only)
19.4.18 Modulator Spectrum Rotation

Select Normal or Inverted spectrum of the of the Modulator Output.
19–11
19.5 Demodulator Specifications
19.5.1 Digital Data Rate

The digital data rate is selectable in 1 bps steps. The modem automatically calculates and
sets the symbol rate. Data rates entered that exceed the data rate or symbol rate specification
are rejected at entry. The symbol rate range is 4.8 kHz to 2.5 MHz.
Table 19-7. Demodulator Digital Data Rated

Data Rate Range
BPSK 1/2 Viterbi 2.4 kbps 1.25 Mbps
8-PSK 2/3 Viterbi 512 kbps 5.0 Mbps
BPSK 1/2 Sequential 2.4 kbps 1.25 Mbps
BPSK 5/16 Turbo 2.4 kbps 781.25 kbps
BPSK 21/44 Turbo 2.4 kbps 1193 kbps
8-PSK 3/4 Turbo 384 kbps 5.0 Mbps
BPSK 1/2 Viterbi and Reed-Solomon 2.4 kbps 1.138 Mbps
8-PSK 2/3 Viterbi and Reed-Solomon 512 kbps 4.555 Mbps
19–12
Table 19-7. Demodulator Digital Data Rate (Continued)

Data Rate Range
BPSK 1/2 Sequential and Reed-Solomon 2.4 kbps 1.138 Mbps
QPSK 1/2 IBS 64 kbps 2048 kbps
QPSK 1/2 IBS and Reed-Solomon 64 kbps 2048 kbps
BPSK 1/2 ASYNC 2.4 kbps 1024 kbps
BPSK 1/2 ASYNC and Reed-Solomon 2.4 kbps 1024 kbps
8-PSK 2/3 IBS 512 kbps 2048 kbps
8-PSK 2/3 IBS and Reed-Solomon 512 kbps 2048 kbps
8-PSK 2/3 ASYNC 512 kbps 2048 kbps
8-PSK 2/3 ASYNC and Reed-Solomon 512 kbps 2048 kbps
QPSK 3/4 IDR, T1 1544 kbps Fixed Rate
QPSK 3/4 IDR, T1, and Reed-Solomon 1544 kbps
QPSK 3/4 IDR, E1 2048 kbps
QPSK 3/4 IDR, E1, and Reed-Solomon 2048 kbps
8-PSK 2/3 IDR, T1 1544 kbps Fix Rate
8-PSK 2/3 IDR, T1, and Reed-Solomon 1544 kbps
8-PSK 2/3 IDR, E1 2048 kbps
8-PSK 2/3 IDR, E1, and Reed-Solomon 2048 kbps
BPSK 1/1 None 4.8 kbps 2.5 Mbps
{O}QPSK 1/1 None 9.6 kbps 5.0 Mbps
19–13
19.5.2 Demodulation and FEC Decoding Types

Table 19-8 shows combinations of demodulation and forward error correction decoding.
Table 19-8. Demodulation FEC Decoding

Decoder Code Rate Modulation
Viterbi, K7 ½ BPSK
Viterbi, K7 ½ BPSK
Viterbi, K7 ½, ¾, 7/8 QPSK, OQPSK
Viterbi, K7 ½, ¾, 7/8 QPSK, OQPSK
126/112 IBS and D&I,
219/201 IDR E1
EFD 126/112 IBS and D&I,
Compatible 219/201 IDR E1
Reed-Solomon 219/201 [4] No Overhead,
IESS-310 219/201 [4] IBS and D&I,
Compatible 219/201 [8] IDR T1/E1
Sequential ½ BPSK
Sequential ½ BPSK
Sequential ½, ¾, 7/8 QPSK, OQPSK
Sequential ½, ¾, 7/8 QPSK, OQPSK
Reed-Solomon 225/205 Closed QPSK, OQPSK
Turbo 21/44, 5/16 BPSK
Turbo ½, ¾ QPSK, OQPSK
Turbo ¾ 8-PSK
Uncoded 1/1 BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK
19–14
19.5.3 Descrambling Types

The operator can select one of the following descrambling types:
Demodulator Type FEC or Framing Scrambling

EFD Closed, Sequential ITU V.35
CSC Closed
EFD Closed, Viterbi ITU V.35 Intelsat Modified
CSC Closed,
FDC Closed
EFD Closed Viterbi/RS Concatenated EFD Modified V.35
EFD Closed Turbo 212-1 Synchronous
EFD Closed Turbo IESS-315 Mode
EFD Closed ASYNC 215-1 Synchronous
FDC Closed Sequential FDC Modified V.35
Intelsat Open Viterbi IDR ITU V.35 Intelsat Modified
Intelsat Open Viterbi IDR with RS ITU V.35 Intelsat Modified
Intelsat Open IBS, D&I, IESS-310 215-1 Synchronous
19.5.4 Differential Decoder

The differential decoder takes care of one set of ambiguities due the error correction codes
being transparent.
• On or Off
19.5.5 BPSK Bit Ordering

The decoder has the ability to select whether I is the first bit or Q is the first bit in the symbol
word grouping for compatibility with any system. For standard mode Q is the first bit.
• Viterbi (Standard/Non-Standard)
• Sequential (Standard/Non-Standard)
• Turbo (Not Supported)
19–15
19.5.6 Deinterleaver (Reed-Solomon Codec)

• QPSK - Depth 4 (IBS, IDR, D&I)
• 8-PSK - Depth 4 (No Overhead, IBS, D&I)
• QPSK/OQPSK - Depth 4, 8, 16 (Closed Network, ASYNC)
• 8-PSK - Depth 8 (IDR)
19.5.7 Demodulator Spectrum Rotation

Select Normal or Inverted spectrum for the Demodulator Input.
19.5.8 Receive Frequency (IF)

• The range of the input IF spectrum can be selected by the operator from 50 to 180 MHz,
in 1 Hz steps.
• The actual value of offset from the programmed frequency is available to the operator on
the front panel as well as the remote port. The resolution of this value is 1 Hz. Monitor
accuracy is ± 10 PPM.
19.5.9 Receive Input Power (Desired Carrier)

The modem can meet the specified BER and automatically adjust to a RX IF input power of
-30 to -55 dBm. Monitor accuracy is ± 2.5 dB.
19.5.10 Receive Input Power (Composite)

The modem can operate to its specified performance under all the following conditions:
• The sum of all carriers is ≤ -5 dBm.

• The sum of all carriers within 10 MHz from the desired is ≤ +30 dBc.
• The sum of all carriers is ≤ +40 dBc.
19.5.11 IF Input Overload

The modem will not be damaged by a continuous RX IF input of +20 dBm.
19–16
19.5.12 Demodulator IF Input Shape

The modem can be set to match any of the following spectral mask specifications.
• INTELSAT/EUTELSAT
• Closed net (Comtech EF Data and Comstream)
• Closed net (Fairchild compatible)
• Closed net (SDM-51/SDM-52)
19.5.13 Channel Spacing/Adjacent Carrier Performance

The modem bit error performance will be degraded ≤ 0.5 dB with the following receive IF
signal:
• Two like-modulated carriers spaced 1.3 times the symbol rate from the receive
frequency, and/or 1.2 times the acquisition range, whichever is larger.
• Each adjacent carrier up to 10 dBc higher in power than the desired carrier.
• A single adjacent carrier spaced 1.4 times the symbol rate, up to +20 dBc.
19.6 BER Performance Specifications

Table 19-9lists referenced tables that reflect the Bit Energy-to-Noise Ratio (Eb/N0) required
to achieve 10-3 to 10-10 BER.
Table 19-9. BER Performance Reference Tables

Table Option
Table 19-10 Viterbi Decoder with Open Network BER Data
Table 19-11 Viterbi Decoder with Closed Network BER Data
Table 19-12 Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon (Optional)
Table 19-13 Sequential Decoder (56 kbps) (Optional)
Table 19-14 Sequential Decoder (1544 kbps) (Optional)
Table 19-15 Sequential Decoder with Reed-Solomon (1544 kbps) (Optional)
Table 19-16 8-PSK With/Without Reed-Solomon
Table 19-17 Viterbi Decoder and OQPSK
Table 19-18 Uncoded (1/1) BPSK, QPSK, and OQPSK
19–17
19.6.1 Performance with Noise, Viterbi Decoder, and Open Network Mode
Table 19-10 lists the Viterbi specifications for the Eb/N0 required to achieve 10-3 to 10-8 BER
for different coding configurations. All values are for operating in QPSK mode. Without
coding, the modem provides QPSK operation within 0.8 dB of theoretical for BER in the
range 10-1 to 10-6. Performance measurements were recorded with transmit and receive IF
connected back-to-back through an additive white Gaussian noise channel.
Table 19-10. Viterbi Decoder with Open Network BER Data

Eb/N0 (dB) Specification
BER 1/2 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate
10-3 4.2 5.2 6.4
10-4 4.8 6.0 7.2
10-5 5.5 6.7 7.9
10-6 6.1 7.5 8.6
10-7 6.7 8.2 9.2
10-8 7.2 8.8 9.9
19.6.2 Performance with Noise, Viterbi Decoder, and Closed Network

Table 19-11 lists the Viterbi with Closed Network specifications for the Eb/N0 required to
achieve 10-5 to 10-10 BER for different configurations.
Table 19-11. Viterbi Decoder with Closed Network BER Data

10-3 3.8 4.9 6.1
10-4 4.6 5.7 6.9
10-5 5.3 6.4 7.6
10-6 6.0 7.2 8.3
10-7 6.6 7.9 8.9
10-8 7.2 8.5 9.6
19–18
19.6.3 Performance with Noise, Viterbi Decoder, and Reed-Solomon

(Optional)
Table 19-12 lists the Viterbi decoder with Reed-Solomon specifications for the Eb/N0
required to achieve 10-6 to 10-10 BER for different configurations.
Table 19-12. Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon

10-6 4.1 5.6 6.7
10-7 4.2 5.8 6.9
10-8 4.4 6.0 7.1
10-10 5.0 6.3 7.5
19.6.4 Performance with Noise, 56 kbps and Sequential Decoder

(Optional)
Table 19-13 lists the sequential specifications for the Eb/N0 required to achieve 10-3 to 10-8
BER at 56 kbps. All values are for operating in BPSK and QPSK modes.
Table 19-13. Sequential BER Data (56 kbps)

10-3 4.6 5.5
10-4 4.1 5.1 6.1
10-5 4.5 5.5 6.6
10-6 5.0 5.9 7.3
10-7 5.4 6.4 7.8
10-8 5.8 6.8 8.4
19–19
19.6.5 Performance with Noise, 1544 kbps and Sequential Decoder

(Optional)
Table 19-14lists the sequential specifications for the Eb/N0 required to achieve 10-3 to 10-8
Table 19-14. Sequential Decoder BER Data (1544 kbps)

10-3 4.8 5.2 6.0
10-4 5.2 5.7 6.4
10-5 5.6 6.1 6.9
10-6 5.9 6.5 7.4
10-7 6.3 7.0 7.9
10-8 6.7 7.4 8.4
19.6.6 Performance with Noise at 1544 kbps, Sequential Decoder, and

Reed-Solomon (Optional)
Table 19-15lists the sequential specifications for the Eb/N0 required to achieve 10-3 to 10-8
Table 19-15. Sequential Decoder BER (Reed-Solomon)

10-6 4.1 5.6 6.7
10-7 4.2 5.8 6.9
10-8 4.4 6.0 7.1
10-10 5.0 6.3 7.5
19–20
19.6.7 8-PSK Performance with Noise and With/Without Reed-Solomon

Table 19-16 lists the 8-PSK specification for performance with noise and with/without
Reed-Solomon. All values are for operating in 8-PSK mode.
Table 19-16. 8-PSK Specification

BER 2/3 Rate without 2/3 Rate with
Reed-Solomon Reed-Solomon
10-6 8.7 6.1
10-7 9.5 6.4
10-8 10.2 6.6
10-9 11 6.9
10-10 11.8 7.2
19.6.8 Performance with Noise, Viterbi Decoder, and Offset QPSK

Table 19-17 lists the Viterbi and Offset QPSK specifications for the Eb/N0 required to
achieve 10-3 to 10-8 BER for different configurations.
Table 19-17. Viterbi Decoder and Offset QPSK

10-3 4.1 5.2 6.4
10-4 4.9 6.0 7.2
10-5 5.6 6.7 7.9
10-6 6.3 7.5 8.6
10-7 6.9 8.2 9.2
10-8 7.5 8.8 9.9
19–21
19.6.9 Performance with Noise, Uncoded (1/1) BPSK, QPSK, and Offset
QPSK
Table 19-18 shows uncoded BPSK with scrambler/desrambler Off. Encoded QPSK and
Offset QPSK with scrambler/descrambler and differential encoder/decoder Off.
Table 19-18. Uncoded (1/1) BPSK, QPSK, and Offset QPSK

BER 1/1
10-3 8.0
10-4 9.6
10-5 10.8
10-6 11.6
10-7 12.4
19.6.10 Performance with Noise Turbo Product Codec (Optional)
Table 19-19. Turbo Product Codec

QPSK BPSK 8-PSK
BER 3/4 Rate 21/44 Rate 5/16 Rate 3/4 rate
10-6 3.9 2.8 see Note 7.0
10-7 4.1 3.1 see Note 7.3
10-8 4.3 3.3 see Note 7.6
10-9 4.8 3.7 4.0 8.0
Note: 5/16 BPSK is included for compatibility with other equipment but implementation
limitations prohibit optimum performance at low Eb/No. Performance is virtually error free
above 4 dB Eb/No. Performance below 4dB Eb/No is not guaranteed.
19.6.11 BER Threshold

The modem has a programmable BER threshold function. This allows the operator to set the
threshold from 1.0 E-3 to 1.0 E-8.
19–22
19.7 Acquisition Time

Refer to Table 19-20for acquisition time.
Table 19-20. Acquisition Time

Viterbi
6 dB Eb/N0 with ± 35 kHz Frequency Uncertainty
Code Rate Data Rate Tacq P(t < Tacq)
1/2 < 9.6 kbps < 10 sec 95%
1/2 ≥ 9.6 < 64 kbps < 5 sec 95%
1/2 ≥ 64 < 190 kbps < 1 sec 95%
1/2 ≥ 190 < 512 kbps < 10 sec 95%
1/2 ≥ 512 < 1000 kbps < 2.5 sec 95%
1/2 ≥ 1 < 2.5 Mbps < 1 sec 95%
Sequential
6 dB Eb/N0 with ± 35 kHz Frequency Uncertainty
Code Rate Data Rate Tacq P(t < Tacq)
1/2 2.4 < 4.8 kbps < 20 sec 95%
1/2 ≥ 4.8 < 9.6 kbps < 10 sec 95%
1/2 ≥ 9.6 < 64 kbps < 5 sec 95%
1/2 ≥ 64 < 190 kbps < 1 sec 95%
1/2 ≥ 190 < 512 kbps < 17 sec 95%
1/2 ≥ 512 < 1000 kbps < 2.5 sec 95%
1/2 ≥ 1 < 2.5 Mbps < 1 sec 95%
19.7.1 Receive IF Carrier Acquisition Range

The modem locks automatically to a correctly formatted carrier, which is within ± 35 kHz of
the displayed receive frequency. The operator can adjust the following:
Acquisition Range 0 to 70 kHz (in 1 Hz steps)

Center of the Acquisition Range -35 to +35 kHz (in 1 Hz steps)
19.7.2 Receive IF Carrier Reacquisition

The modem is programmed to delay the acquisition process upon loss of lock. This will
miniminize the acquisition time for a brief loss of the carrier. This delay can be programmed
from 0 to 999 seconds in 1-second steps.
19–23
19.7.3 AGC Output

A programmable DC output, proportional to the receive signal level, is located on the rear
panel at 10 mA maximum (0 to 10 volts).
Default Level 0 volts for –60 dBm

10 volts for –25 dBm
Low Level (0V) Programmed from 0 to 10V in 0.5V increments.
High Level (10V) Programmed from 0 to 10V in 0.5V increments.
19.8 Interface Specifications
19.8.1 Transmit Clock Source

Select the TX clock from the following sources.
• Terrestrial: ± 100 PPM of the programmed rate, ≤ 5% jitter.

• SCT (internal): ± 10 PPM or SCT (with high stability option). ± 0.2 PPM.
19.8.2 Send Clock Timing Source

The send clock timing output can be generated from the Frequency Reference (either via the
front panel or remotely).
• If loop timing is selected the send clock timing output can be:
• The external clock input must be ± 100 PPM of the selected data rate.
• The RX satellite clock, RX data rate must be ± 100 PPM of the TX data rate.
• If the Asymmetrical Loop Timing (ASLT) option is selected, either via the front panel or
remotely, the send clock timing output can be referenced from:
• The external clock input, (Master Clock), which can be any multiple of 8 kHz as
long as it is ≥ 64 kHz ≤ 4.376 MHz or any multiple of 600 Hz as long as it is
≥ 2.4 kHz ≤ 64 kHz.
• The RX clock which can be any multiple of 8 kHz as long as it is ≥ 64 kHz ≤ 4.376
MHz or any multiple of 600 Hz as long as it is ≥ 2.4 kHz ≤ 64 kHz.
19–24
19.8.2.1 Transmit Clock Switching Due to Failure of Selected Clock

The modem will automatically switch the TX clock source to SCT internal on failure of
terminal timing.
19.8.2.2 Transmit Clock Phase Adjustment

The operator can set the TX clock phase to Normal, Inverted, or Auto mode.
19.8.2.3 Transmit Data Phase Adjustment

The operator can set the TX data phase to Normal or Inverted.
19.8.2.4 Transmit Data Stable Condition

Transmitted data to the Modulator will be held stable (all 1’s) for the fault conditions shown
in the Fault Tree, then set TX AIS.
19.8.2.5 Doppler/Plesiochronous Buffer Clock Source

The operator can set the Doppler/Plesiochronous buffer clock reference from the following
sources.
• The RX satellite clock (Bypass Mode).
• The TX terrestrial clock (TT). Must be within ± 100 PPM of the nominal receive
data rate. Or it can be any multiple of 8 kHz as long as it is ≥ 64 kHz ≤ 4.376 MHz
or any multiple of 600 Hz as long as it is ≥ 2.4 kHz ≤ 64 kHz.
• The external clock (Master Clock) input, must be within ± 100 PPM of the
programmed value. Or it can be any multiple of 8 kHz as long as it is ≥ 64 kHz
≤ 4.376 MHz or any multiple of 600 Hz as long as it is ≥ 2.4 kHz ≤ 64 kHz.
• SCT/Internal, ± 10 PPM or (with high stability option), ± 0.2 PPM.
19–25
19.8.2.6 Doppler Tracking Performance

The modem tracks the Doppler shown below with less than 0.5 dB degradation for symbol
rates ≥ 64 ksym/s. The performance applies only to the QPSK rates of 1/2, 3/4, and 7/8 with
Viterbi decoding or Viterbi with Reed-Solomon decoding.
Doppler Offset 15 Hz
Doppler Rate 20 Hz/sec
Doppler Acquisition 35 Hz/sec2
19.8.2.7 Receive Clock Switching Due to Failure of Selected Clock

The modem will automatically switch the RX clock source to RX satellite on failure of the
selected clock.
19.8.2.8 Receive Clock Phase Adjustment

The operator can set the RX clock phase to Normal or Inverted.
19.8.2.9 Receive Clock Jitter

The RX clock will have less than 2% jitter.
19.8.2.10 Receive Data Phase Adjustment

The operator can set the RX data phase to Normal or Inverted.
19.8.2.11 Receive Data Stable Condition

Received data will be held stable (all 1’s) at the output of the modem for the fault conditions
listed in the Fault tree, then set RX AIS.
19–26
19.8.2.12 Receive Doppler/Plesiochronous Buffer Size

The RX Doppler buffer size can be set by the operator from:
• Bypass.
• 32 to 262,144 bits, in 16 bit steps.
• Selectable in ms, from 2 to 98 in 2 ms steps, based on the data rate.
• Selectable Frame Format G.704 or None.
19.8.2.13 Buffer Centering

The operator can set the buffer to 50% .The modem will automatically set the buffer to 50%
after receive signal acquisition or a buffer overflow/underflow.
19.8.2.14 Switch Faults
Modulator Fault Open collector output, 15V maximum, 20 mA maximum current

sink, fault is open circuit.
Demodulator Fault Open collector output, 15V maximum, 20 mA maximum current
sink, fault is open circuit.
19.9 Terrestrial Interface Types
19.9.1 Universal
The following interface types are available through the EIA-530 25-pin data I/O connector.
• EIA-232
• V.35
• EIA-422, MIL-188-114A
Optional mechanical interfaces are also available. See Chapter 5 for pinout information.
• 37-pin D (EIA-449)
• 34-pin Block (V.35)
• 50-pin D
• G.703 with DB9 and BNC (Closed Network with ASYNC)
• Eurocomm
19–27
The following interface types are available through the optional 50-pin data I/O connector
with overhead card installed. In order to meet the mechanical specification, the correct break
out panel must be connected to the modem.
• G.703
• IDR
• IBS
• Drop and Insert (G.703)
19.9.2 EIA-232 Specification
EIA-232 Specification
Circuit Supported TXD, TXC, ST, RXD, RXC, DSR, DCD, CTS, LL, RTS, MC
Driver Amplitude (RXD, RXC, True: 10V, ± 5V
ST, CTS, DM, DSR) False: -10V, ± 5V
Receiver Amplitude (TXD, True: Minimum +1V
TXC, RTS, LL, MC) False: Maximum -1V
Impedance 5000, ± 2000Ω < 2500 pF
Data Rate 9.6 to 120 kbps
Circuit Assignments
TXD Send Data
RXD Receive Data
RTS Request to Send
CTS Clear to Send
DM Data Mode
DSR Receiver Ready
MC Master Clock
LL Local Loopback
ST Send Timing
RXC Receive Timing
TXC Terminal Timing
MF Mod Fault (ttl)
DF Demod Fault (ttl)
19–28
19.9.3 V.35 Specification V.10, V.11 Specification, Circuit Supported
V.35 Specification V.10, V.11 Specification, Circuit Supported

Circuit Supported SD, SCT, SCTE, RD, SCR, DSR, RLSD, RTS, CTS,
MC, DSR, LL
Driver Amplitude (RD, SCR, SCTE, CTS, ± 0.5V-PK, ± 20% differential, into 100Ω
RLSD, DSR, SCTE)
Amplitude (SCT, SD, RTS, LL, MC) ± 0.2V Minimum into 100Ω
Polarity (SD, SCT, SCTE, RD, SCR) True when B positive with respect to A
False when A positive with respect to B
Polarity (RTS, CTS, DSR, RLSD) True when < -0.2V with respect to ground
False when > +0.2V with respect to ground
Phasing (SCTE, SCR) False-to-True transition nominally in center of data bit
Symmetry (SCT, SCTE, SCR) 50%, ± 5%
Circuit Assignments
SD-A, SD-B Send Data
SCT-A, SCT-B Serial Clock Transmit
RD-A, RD-B Receive Data
SCR-A, SCR-B Serial Clock Receive
SCTE-A, SCTE-B Transmitter Signal Timing
MC-A, MC-B Master Clock
RTS Request to Send
CTS Clear to Send
DSR Data Set Ready
RLSD Receive Line Signal Detect
LL Local Loopback
MF Mod Fault (ttl)
19–29
19.9.4 EIA-422/EIA-449 MIL-188-114A Specification
EIA-422/EIA-449 MIL-188-114A Specification

Circuit Supported SD, ST, TT, RD, RT, DM, RR, RS, CS, MC
Amplitude (RD, RT, ST, DM, RR) ± 2V differential into 100Ω
Impedance (RD, RT, ST, DM, Less than 100Ω, differential
RR)
Impedance (SD, TT, MC) 4kΩ
True when B is positive with respect to A
False when A is positive with respect to B
Phasing (RD, RT) False-to-true transition of RT nominally in center of RD
data bit
Symmetry (ST, TT, RT) 50%, ± 5%
Circuit Assignments
SD-A, SD-B Send Data
ST-A, ST-B Send Timing
RD-A, RD-B Receive Data
RS-A, RS-B Request to Send
RT-A, RT-B Receive Timing
CS-A, CS-B Clear to Send
DM-A, DM-B Data Mode
RR-A, RR-B Receiver Ready
TT-A, TT-B Terminal Timing
MC-A, MC-B Master Clock
MF Mod Fault (ttl)
19–30
19.9.5 G.703 (Optional with Overhead Card)
G.703 Specification
Primary Data Circuits Supported T1 SD, RD
E1 SD, RD
Data Rates T1 1544 kbps, ± 100 bps
E1 2048 kbps, ± 130 bps
Pulse Width T1 324, ± 50 Ns
E1 244, ± 25 Ns
SD Amplitude T1 3V +0.3/-1.5V-pk into 100Ω
E1 3V +0.3/-1.5V-pk into 120Ω
RD Amplitude T1 3V +0.3/-1.5V-pk into 100Ω
E1 3V +0.3/-1.5V-pk into 120Ω
E1 G.703.6
Jitter Attenuation T1 G.824
E1 G.823
Line Code AMI (T1 or E1)
B8ZS (T1 only)
HDB3 (E1 only)
19–31
19.10 System Specifications
19.10.1 Loopback Modes

The operator can select one of the following interface loopback test modes.
• Baseband: Near end and far end.

• Interface: Near end and far end (Reed-Solomon or Overhead only).
19.10.2 Test Modes

Note: The TX and RX data rates must be the same for the modem to lock.
Table 19-21. Test Modes

IF Loopback: Disconnects the IF input from the RX input connector and couples it to a sample of
the TX IF output. The IF output is not affected.
RF Loopback Sets the demodulator frequency to the same value as the modulator. For the
modem to lock, an external IF loop must be provided.
BIST (Built in Self Test) The modem has the ability to generate 211-1 (2047) PN data and pass the data
through the Interface, Modulator and Demodulator sections of the modem. The
modem can generate noise in the IF path to simulate a satellite environment. The
true BER can then be measured by the modems built in BER monitor. This feature
can be invoked on power up or by the operator and the result checked against
specification and a fault is flagged if the unit fails. The feature can be turned off at
the front panel if so desired to minimize initialization time. The RF output is off
during this self test
2047 Pattern Generator (must Inserts an Industry Standard 2047 pattern in lieu of the TX data stream.
have overhead card installed
and activated)
2047 Pattern Monitor (must Monitors the RX data for 2047 pattern. If 2047 pattern is present, this test mode
have overhead card installed provides an indication of Bit Error Rate (BER). The RX data is not interrupted.
and activated)
19–32
19.10.3 Remote Control

All modem functions can be controlled remotely through the remote connector on the rear
panel. See Appendix B for the complete command and response.
Interface type:
• EIA-485 (4- or-2-wire) or EIA-232

• Baud Rate Range 150 to 19.2 kbps.
• ASCII characters
• 11 bits per character
• 1 start bit
• Information bits
• 7 information bits, 1 parity bit (odd/even)
• 8 information bits, no parity bit
• 2 stop bits
• Operation mode TX only, RX only, or Duplex
For exact remote control information, refer to the latest firmware appropriate for this piece
of equipment.
19.10.4 Modem Remote Address

Note: The value of zero is defined as global.
The modem can be programmed for a remote address, ranging from 0 to 255. All other
addresses are unique, and should not have more than one modem assigned per EIA-485/232
bus.
19.10.5 Monitored Signals

The operator can display/read one of the following, continually updated, performance
monitors.
• Receive signal level -25 to -60 dBm, ± 2.5 dB accuracy

• Raw BER
• Corrected BER, range 1.0 E-3 to 1.0 E-12
• Eb/N0,.1 dB resolution, ± 0.5 dB accuracy, range 2.0 to 16.0 dB
• RX frequency offset, 1 Hz resolution, ± 10 PPM accuracy, range -35 to +35 kHz
• Buffer fill status, 1% resolution, 1% to 99%
• Frame Errors or 2047 BER * Only when Overhead Board is installed
19–33
19.10.6 Modem Emulation Modes

The modem has the ability to emulate the remote commands for the following modems:
SDM-100 Ver: 15.7.1

SDM-300 6.2.2
SDM-308-4 4.03
SDM-308-4 6.05
SDM-308-4 6.08
SDM-308-4 7.03
SDM-309 6.04
SDM-650 4.12A
SDM-650 4.16
SDM-6000 5.1.1
19.10.7 Interoperability Modes

The modem has inoperability modes that allow end-to-end operation with other modems in
Closed Network modes.
1
Mode P300 DMD 2400 CM 701 FDC CDM-550 CDM-600
Sequential
BPSK 1/2 X X X X X X
2
QPSK 1/2, 7/8 X X X X X X
QPSK 3/4 X N/A N/A N/A X X
8-PSK 2/3 X N/A N/A N/A N/A X
Viterbi
QPSK 1/2, 3/4, 7/8 X X X X X X
8-PSK 2/3 X X X
Viterbi with Reed-Solomon
QPSK 1/2, 3/4, 7/8 X X X X X X
8-PSK 2/3 X X X X N/A X
Sequential with Reed N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Solomon
Turbo
BPSK 21/44, 5/16 N/A N/A N/A N/A X X
QPSK 3/4 N/A N/A N/A N/A X X
8-PSK 3/4 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X
QPSK 1/2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X
1
Maintain existing_No new development
2
Sequential QPSK 3/4 is excluded for Radyne Comstream
19–34
19.11 Dimenionsal Envelope

All dimensions are in English units (centimeters are in parentheses).
The following figure represents the SDM-300A dimensional outline pre-1999.
1.75 14.0
(4.4) (36)
SDM-300A
19.0
(4.8)
1.25
(3.2)
3.0 3.625 3.625

(8) (9.2) (9.2)
Figure 19-1. Dimensional Envelope Pre-1999
19–35
The following figure represents the SDM-300A dimensional outline post-1999.
1.73
[43.84]
15.15
[384.68]
13.94
[354.13]
TX/IF OUTPUT
CP1
SDM-300A
SATELLITE MODEM
RX/IF INPUT
CP2
RECEIVE
TRANSMIT
CP3
EXT REF
STORED
COMMON
RECEIVE
TRANSMIT
J10
ALARM
TEST MO DE
CARRIER DETECT
TRA NS MITTER O N
POWER ON
AU X
J9
J7
FAULT
19.20 17.00
[487.58] [431.80]
REMOTE
J6
Figure 19-2. Dimensional Envelope Post-1999
19–36
Appendix A. Remote Control
Operation
This appendix describes the remote control operation of the SDM-300A.
• Firmware number: FW/6535-1AP

• Software version: 7.1.13
Note: The firmware referenced in this manual may be an earlier version of the actual firmware
supplied with the unit.
A.1 General
Remote control and status information is transferred via a RS-485(or RS-232) serial
communications link. Commands and data are transferred on the remote control
communications link as US ASCII encoded character strings. The remote communications link
is operated in a half duplex mode. A remote controller or terminal initiates communications on
the remote link. The SDM300A never transmits data on the link unless it is commanded to do
so.
A.2 Message Structure

The ASCII character format requires 11 bits/character: 1 start bit, 7 information bits with 1
parity bit (odd/even) or 8 information bits with no parity bits, and 2 stop bits.
Messages on the remote link fall into the categories of commands and responses. Commands are
messages transmitted to a satellite modem, while responses are messages returned by a satellite
modem in response to a command.The general message structure is as follows:
• Start Character
• Device Address 'add'
• Command/Response
• End of Message Character
A–1
Remote Control Operation MN/SLM3650.IOM
A.2.1 Start Character

A single character precedes all messages transmit on the remote link.
This character flags the start of a message. This character is:
'<' for commands

'>' for responses
A.2.2 Device Address

The device address is the address of the one satellite modem which is designated to receive a
transmitted command, or which is responding to a command. Valid device addresses are 1 to 3
characters long and in the range of 0 to 255. Address 0 is reserved as a global address which
simultaneously addresses all devices on a given communications link. Devices do not
acknowledge global commands.
Each satellite modem connected to a common remote communications link must be assigned its
own unique address. Addresses are software-selectable at the modem and must be in the range
of 1 to 255.
Note: 'add' is used to indicate a valid 1 to 3 character device address in the range between 0 and
255.
A–2
A.3 Commands/Responses Format

The command/response portion of the message contains a variable length
character sequence which conveys command and response data.
If a satellite modem receives a message addressed to it which does

not match the established protocol or can not be implemented a negetive
acknowledgement message is sent in response. This message is:
>add/?ER1_PARITY ERROR'cr''lf']
Error message for received parity errors.
>add/?ER2_INVALID PARAMETER'cr''lf'}
Error message for a recognized command which can not be implemented or has
parameters which are out of range.
+
>add/?ER3_UNRECOGNIZABLE COMMAND'cr''lf']
Error message for unrecognizable command or bad command syntax.
>add/?ER4_MODEM IN LOCAL MODE'cr''lf']
MODEM in local error, use the REM command to go to remote mode.
>add/?ER5_HARD CODED PARAMETER'cr''lf']
Error message indicating that the parameter is hardware dependent

and may not be changed remotely.
A.4 End Character

Each message is ended with a single character which signals the end
of message. This character is:
'cr' - Carriage return character for commands.

']' - End bracket for responses.
A–3
A.5 Modulator Configuration Commands
Modulator Command: <add/MF_nnn.nnnnnn'cr' Where: nnn.nnnnnn = Frequency in MHz, 50.000000 to

Frequency Response: >add/MF_nnn.nnnnnn'cr' 180.000000 in 1 Hz steps.
RF_OFF'cr''lf']
Note: When the modulator frequency is programmed, the RF
Status: <add/MF_'cr' output is switched off.
Response: >add/MF_nnn.nnnnnn'cr''lf']
RF Output Command: <add/RF_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

(IF Output) Response: >add/RF_xxx'cr''lf']
Status: <add/RF_'cr'
Response: >add/RF_xxx'cr''lf']
Modulator Command: <add/AMRx_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr' Where:

Rate Preset Response: >add/AMRx_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr''lf']
Assignment x = A, B, C, D, or V [preset designator].
Status: <add/AMRx_'cr'
(Sets the Response: >add/AMRx_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr''lf'] For Non-Turbo nnnn = 1/2 (QPSK 1/2), [coder rate], 3/4
pre- (QPSK 3/4), 7/8 (QPSK 7/8), BP12 (BPSK 1/2), OQ12
assigned (OQPSK 1/2), OQ34 (OQPSK 3/4), and OQ78 (OQPSK 7/8),
rates) OQSK (OQPSK 1/1), BPSK (BPSK 1/1), QPSK (QPSK 1/1),
and 8P23 (8PSK 2/3)
For Turbo nnnn= 8P34 (8PSK 3/4), 2144 (BPSK 21/44),

B516 (BPSK 5/16), 1/2 (QPSK 1/2), OQ12 (OQPSK 1/2), 3/4
(QPSK 3/4), and OQ34 (OQPSK 3/4)
mmmm.mmm = Data rate in kbps.
Modulator Command: <add/SMRx_'cr' Where: x = A, B, C, D, or V (preset designator).

Rate Preset Response: >add/SMRx_'cr'
Selection RF_OFF'cr''lf'] Note: Setting the modulator rate turns off the RF transmitter.
(Selects the Status: See MR command.

pre-
assigned
rates)
A–4
Modulator Command: <add/SMRV_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr' Where: mmmm.mmm = Data rate in kHz.

Rate Response: >add/SMRV_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr'
Variable RF_OFF'cr''lf'] For Non-Turbo nnnn = 1/2 (QPSK 1/2), [coder rate], 3/4
Assignment (QPSK 3/4), 7/8 (QPSK 7/8), BP12 (BPSK 1/2), OQ12
& Selection (OQPSK 1/2), OQ34 (OQPSK 3/4), and OQ78 (OQPSK 7/8),
Status: See MR command.
OQSK (OQPSK 1/1), BPSK (BPSK 1/1), QPSK (QPSK 1/1),
(Selects & and 8P23 (8PSK 2/3)
sets the
variable For Turbo nnnn= 8P34 (8PSK 3/4), 2144 (BPSK 21/44),
rate) B516 (BPSK 5/16), 1/2 (QPSK 1/2), OQ12 (OQPSK 1/2),
3/4 (QPSK 3/4), and OQ34 (OQPSK 3/4)
Note: Setting the modulator turns off the RF transmitter.
Set Command: <add/MPO_snn.n’cr’ Where: snn.n = +99.0 to –99.0, in 0.1 dB increments.

Modulator Response: >add/MPO_snn.n’cr’’lf’]
Power Note: The modulator power offset is added to the nominal
Offset power level to adjust the transmit power range.
Status: <add/MPO_’cr’
Response: >add/MPO_snn.n’cr’’lf’]
Set Command: <add/MOP_snn.n’cr’ Where: snn.n = -30.0 to –5.0, in 0.1 steps (nominal range in
Modulator Response: >add/MOP_snn.n’cr’’lf’] dBm).
Output
Power Notes:
Status: <add/MOP_’cr’
Level
Response: >add/MOP_snn.n’cr’’lf’] 1. The nominal power range is modified relative to the
value specified by the modulator power offset
(MPO_).
2. The MOP_ command will return status only when
local AUPC is enabled.
3. High power option range is –20 to + 5 dBm.
Scrambler Command: <add/SE_xxx’cr’ Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

Enable Response: >add/SE_xxx’cr’’lf’]
Status: <add/SE_’cr’
Response: >add/SE_xxx’cr’’lf’]
Differential Command: <add/DENC_xxx’cr’ Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

Encoder Response: >add/DENC_xxx’cr’’lf’]
Enable Note: Always Off in Turbo mode.
Status: <add/DENC_’cr’
Response: >add/DENC_xxx’cr’’lf’]
Modulator Command: <add/MT_xxxx’cr’ Where: xxxx = INTL (INTELSAT OPEN NETWORK), EFD
Type Response: >add/MT_xxxx’cr’’lf’] (EF DATA CLOSED NETWORK), CSC (COMSTREAM
CLOSED NETWORK), FDC (FAIRCHILD CLOSED
NETWORK), SDM51 (SDM51 COMPATIBLE).
Status: <add/MT_xxxx’cr’
Response: >add/MT_xxxx’cr’’lf’]
A–5
Modulator Command: <add/MET_xxx’cr’ Where: xxx = VIT (K-7 VITERBI ENCODER), SEQ
Encoder Response: >add/MET_xxx’cr’’lf’] (SEQUENTIAL ENCODER), TUR (TURBO ENCODER)
Type
Status: <add/MET_xxx’cr’
Response: >add/MET_xxx’cr’’lf’]
Modem Command: <add/MRC_xxxxx’cr’ Where: xxxxx = INT (INTERNAL), EXT1 (EXTERNAL 1

Reference Response: >add/MRC_xxxxx’cr’’lf’] MHz), EXT5 (EXTERNAL 5 MHz), EXT10 (EXTERNAL 10
Clock MHz), EXT20 (EXTERNAL 20 MHz), OUT10 (OUTPUT 10
MHz).
Status: <add/MRC_’cr’
Response: >add/MRC_xxxxx’cr’’lf’]
Note: Must have High Stability option installed to select OUT
10 (OUTPUT 10 MHz)
Modulator Command: <add/MSR_xxx’cr’ Where: xxx = NRM (normal spectrum), INV (inverted
Spectrum Response: >add/MSR_xxx’cr’’lf’] spectrum).
Rotation
Status: <add/MSR_’cr’
Response: >add/MSR_xxx’cr’’lf’]
Reed- Command: <add/RSEN_xxx’cr’ Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

Solomon Response: >add/RSEN_xxx’cr’’lf’]
Encoder Note: Always Off in Turbo mode.
Enable
Status: <add/RSEN_’cr’
Response: >add/RSEN_xxx’cr’’lf’]
Transmit Command: <add/TDA_xxx’cr’ Where: xxx = NRM (STANDARD), INV (NON-STANDARD).

BPSK Data Response: >add/TDA_xxx’cr’’lf’]
Ordering
Status: <add/TDA_xxx’cr’
Response: >add/TDA_xxx’cr’’lf’]
Carrier Command: <add/COM_xxxxxx’cr’ Where: xxxxxx = OFF (NORMAL-MODULATED), DUAL

Only Mode Response: >add/COM_xxxxxx’cr’’lf’] (DUAL-CW), OFFSET (OFFSET-CW), CENTER (CENTER-
CW).
Status: <add/COM_xxxxxx’cr’
Response: >add/COM_xxxxxx’cr’’lf’]
TX Reed- Command: <add/TRSI_xx’cr’ Where: xx = 4, 8, or 16.

Solomon Response: >add/TRSI_xx’cr’’lf’]
Interleave
Value
Status: <add/TRSI_’cr’
Response: >add/TRSI_xx’cr’’lf’]
A–6
TX 8PSK Command: <add/T310_xxx’cr’ Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

2/3 Response: >add/T310_xxx’cr’’lf’’]
IESS-310
Operation
Status: <add/T310_’cr’
Response: >add/T310_xxx’cr’’lf’’]
TX IESS- Command: <add/T315_xxx’cr’ Where: xxx = On or Off

315 Turbo Response: >add/T315_xxx’cr’’lf’’]
Mode Note: Turbo only.
Status: <add/T315_’cr’
Response: >add/T315_xxx’cr’’lf’]
A–7
A.6 Demodulator Configuration Commands
Set Command: <add/DF_nnn.nnnnnn'cr' Where: nnn.nnnnnn = Frequency in MHz, 50.000000 to

Demodulator Response: >add/DF_nnn.nnnnnn'cr''lf'] 180.000000 in 1 Hz steps.
Frequency
Status: <add/DF_'cr'
Response: >add/DF_nnn.nnnnnn'cr''lf']
Demodulator Command: <add/ADRx_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr' Where:

Rate Preset Response: >add/ADRx_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr''lf'] x = A, B, C, D, or V [preset designator].
Assignment
Status: <add/ADRx_'cr' For Non-Turbo nnnn = 1/2 (QPSK 1/2), [coder rate], 3/4
(Sets the Response: >add/ADRx_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr''lf'] (QPSK 3/4), 7/8 (QPSK 7/8), BP12 (BPSK 1/2), OQ12
pre-assigned (OQPSK 1/2), OQ34 (OQPSK 3/4), and OQ78 (OQPSK
rates) 7/8), OQSK (OQPSK 1/1), BPSK (BPSK 1/1), QPSK (QPSK
1/1), and 8P23 (8PSK 2/3)
For Turbo nnnn= 8P34 (8PSK 3/4), 2144 (BPSK 21/44),

B516 (BPSK 5/16), 1/2 (QPSK 1/2), OQ12 (OQPSK 1/2),
3/4 (QPSK 3/4), and OQ34 (OQPSK 3/4)
mmmm.mmm = Data rate in kHz.
Demodulator Command: <add/SDRx_'cr' Where: x = A, B, C, D, or V (preset designator).

Rate Preset Response: >add/SDRx_'cr''lf']
Selection
Status: See DR command.
(Selects the
pre-assigned
rates)
Demodulator Command: <add/SDRV_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr' Where:
Rate Response: >add/SDRV_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr''lf']
Variable For Non-Turbo nnnn = 1/2 (QPSK 1/2), [coder rate], 3/4
Assignment (QPSK 3/4), 7/8 (QPSK 7/8), BP12 (BPSK 1/2), OQ12
Status: See DR command.
& Selection (OQPSK 1/2), OQ34 (OQPSK 3/4), and OQ78 (OQPSK
7/8), OQSK (OQPSK 1/1), BPSK (BPSK 1/1), QPSK (QPSK
(Selects and 1/1), and 8P23 (8PSK 2/3)
sets the
variable rate) For Turbo nnnn= 8P34 (8PSK 3/4), 2144 (BPSK 21/44),
B516 (BPSK 5/16), 1/2 (QPSK 1/2), OQ12 (OQPSK 1/2),
3/4 (QPSK 3/4), and OQ34 (OQPSK 3/4)
mmmm.mmm = Data rate in kbps
A–8
Descramble Command: <add/DE_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

Enable Response: >add/DE_xxx'cr''lf']
Status: <add/DE_'cr'
Response: >add/DE_xxx'cr''lf']
Differential Command: <add/DDEC_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

Decoder Response: >add/DDEC_xxx'cr''lf']
Enable Note: Always Off in Turbo mode.
Status: <add/DDEC_'cr'
Response: >add/DDEC_xxx'cr''lf']
RF Command: <add/RFL_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

Loopback Response: >add/RFL_xxx'cr''lf']
Status: <add/RFL_'cr'
Response: >add/RFL_xxx'cr''lf']
IF Loopback Command: <add/IFL_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

Response: >add/IFL_xxx'cr''lf']
Status: <add/IFL_'cr'
Response: >add/IFL_xxx'cr''lf']
Sweep Command: <add/SCF_snnnnn'cr' Where: snnnnn = -35000 to +35000, in 1 Hz steps.

Center Response: >add/SCF_snnnnn'cr''lf']
Frequency
Status: <add/SCF_'cr'
Response: >add/SCF_snnnnn'cr''lf']
Sweep Width Command: <add/SWR_nnnnn'cr' Where: nnnnn = 0 to 70000, in 1 Hz steps.

Range Response: >add/SWR_nnnnn'cr''lf']
Status: <add/SWR_'cr'
Response: >add/SWR_nnnnn'cr''lf']
Sweep Command: <add/SR_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = 0 to 999 (number of seconds).

Reacquisi- Response: >add/SR_xxx'cr''lf']
tion
Status: <add/SR_'cr'
Response: >add/SR_xxx'cr''lf']
A–9
Bit Error Command: <add/BERT_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = NONE, or 1E-n, where n = 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8

Rate Response: >add/BERT_xxxx'cr''lf'] (exponent of threshold).
Threshold
Status: <add/BERT_'cr'
Response: >add/BERT_xxxx'cr''lf']
Demodulator Command: <add/DT_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = INTL (INTELSAT OPEN NETWORK), EFD
Type Response: >add/DT_xxxx'cr''lf'] (EF DATA CLOSED NETWORK), CSC (COMSTREAM
CLOSED NETWORK), FDC (FAIRCHILD CLOSED
NETWORK).
Status: <add/DT_xxxx'cr'
Response: >add/DT_xxxx'cr''lf']
Demodulator Command: <add/DDT_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = VIT (K-7 VITERBI ENCODER), SEQ
Decoder Response: >add/DDT_xxx'cr''lf'] (SEQUENTIAL ENCODER), TUR (TURBO DECODER).
Type
Status: <add/DDT_xxx'cr'
Response: >add/DDT_xxx'cr''lf']
Demodulator Command: <add/DSR_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = NRM (normal spectrum), INV (inverted
Spectrum Response: >add/DSR_xxx'cr''lf'] spectrum).
Rotation
Status: <add/DSR_'cr'
Response: >add/DSR_xxx'cr''lf']
Reed- Command: <add/RSDE_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON, OFF, or CORR_OFF.

Solomon Response: >add/RSDE_xxx'cr'lf']
Decoder Note: Always Off in Turbo mode.
Enable
Status: <add/RSDE_'cr'
Response: >add/RSDE_xxx'cr'lf']
Receive Command: <add/RDA_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = NRM (STANDARD), INV (NON-STANDARD).

BPSK Data Response: >add/RDA_xxx'cr''lf']
Ordering
Status: <add/RDA_xxx'cr'
Response: >add/RDA_xxx'cr''lf']
Reed- Command: <add/RRSI_xx'cr' Where: xx = 4, 8, or 16.

Solomon Response: >add/RRSI_xx'cr''lf']
Interleave
Value
Status: <add/RRSI_'cr'
Response: >add/RRSI_xx'cr''lf']
A–10
RX 8PSK 2/3 Command: <add/R310_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

IESS-310 Response: >add/R310_xxx'cr''lf']
Operation
Status: <add/R310_'cr'
Response: >add/R310_xxx'cr''lf']
RX IESS- Command: <add/R315_xxx’cr’ Where: xxx = On or Off

315 Turbo Response: >add/R315_xxx’cr’’lf’’]
Mode Note: Turbo only.
Status: <add/R315_’cr’
Response: >add/R315_xxx’cr’’lf’]
A.7 Interface Configuration Commands

Interface Command: <add/ITOT_xxxxx'cr' Where: xxxxx = NONE, IDR, IBS, DI, ASYNC,
Transmit Response: >add/ITOT_xxxxx'cr''lf'] AUPC, FLEX, or VSAT-IBS.
Overhead Type
Status: <add/ITOT_'cr'
Response: >add/ITOT_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Interface Receive Command: <add/IROT_xxxxx'cr' Where: xxxxx = NONE, IDR, IBS, DI, ASYNC,
Overhead Type Response: >add/IROT_xxxxx'cr''lf'] AUPC, FLEX, or VSAT-IBS.
Status: <add/IROT_'cr'
Response: >add/IROT_xxxxx'cr''lf']
TX Driver Type Command: <add/TXDR_xxxxx'cr' Where: xxxxx = G703, V35, RS422, or RS232.
Response: >add/TXDR_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Status: <add/TXDR_'cr'
Response: >add/TXDR_xxxxx'cr''lf']
RX Driver Type Command: <add/RXDR_xxxxx'cr' Where: xxxxx = G703, V35, RS422, or RS232.
Response: >add/RXDR_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Status: <add/RXDR_'cr'
Response: >add/RXDR_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Transmit Clock Command: <add/TC_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = INT (internal SCT clock), EXT
Response: >add/TC_xxx'cr''lf'] (external TX terrestrial clock), REF (external
clock-reference frequency).
Status: <add/TC_'cr'
Response: >add/TC_xxx'cr''lf']
A–11
External Clock- Command: <add/ERF_nnnnn.n'cr' Where: nnnnn.n = 8.0 to 10000.0 (external

Reference Response: >add/ERF_nnnnn.n'cr''lf'] clock frequency in kHz).
Frequency
Status: <add/ERF_'cr'
Response: >add/ERF_nnnnn.n'cr''lf']
Transmit Clock Command: <add/TCP_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = NRM (normal clock phasing),
Phase Response: >add/TCP_xxxx'cr''lf'] INV (inverted clock phasing), AUTO
(automatic clock phasing).
Status: <add/TCP_'cr'
Response: >add/TCP_xxxx'cr''lf']
Buffer Clock Command: <add/BC_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = INT (internal SCT clock), EXT
Response: >add/BC_xxx'cr''lf'] (external TX terrestrial clock), SAT (receive
satellite clock), REF (external clock-reference
frequency), INS (insert clock).
Status: <add/BC_'cr'
Response: >add/BC_xxx'cr''lf']
Receive Clock Command: <add/RCP_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = NRM (normal clock phasing),
Phase Response: >add/RCP_xxx'cr''lf'] INV (inverted clock phasing).
Status: <add/RCP_'cr'
Response: >add/RCP_xxx'cr''lf']
Baseband Command: <add/BBL_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

Loopback Response: >add/BBL_xxx'cr''lf']
Status: <add/BBL_'cr'
Response: >add/BBL_xxx'cr''lf']
Interface Command: <add/ILB_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

Loopback Response: >add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
Status: <add/ILB_'cr'
Response: >add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
Interface Loop Command: <add/ILT_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

Timing Response: >add/ILT_xxx'cr''lf']
Status: <add/ILT_'cr'
Response: >add/ILT_xxx'cr''lf']
A–12
Interface Buffer Buffer size programming is supported in two formats; bits, or milli-seconds. The selected format must be chosen
Size using the buffer programming command (IBP_). If the buffer is to be programmed in milli-seconds and
plesiochronous slips are required use the receive framing structure command (IRFS_) to define the proper framing
format.
Note: For Drop & Insert: Only milli-seconds format is allowed.
Interface Buffer Command: <add/IBS _nnnnnn'cr' Where: nnnnnn = 32 to 262144, in 16 bit

Size (Bit Format) Response: >add/IBS _nnnnnn'cr''lf'] increments.
Status: <add/IBS _'cr'

Response: >add/IBS _nnnnnn'cr''lf']
Interface Buffer Command: <add/IBS _nn'cr' Where: nn = 0 to 99 (buffer size in milli-

Size (Milli-second Response: >add/IBS _nn'cr''lf'] seconds).
Format)
Status: <add/IBS _'cr' Note: For Drop & Insert:
Response: >add/IBS _nn'cr''lf'] 1. nn = 7.5, 15, or 30 (milli-seconds) for
E1CAS format.
2. nn = 6, 12, 24, or 30 (milli-seconds) for
T1S/T1ESFS format.
3. nn = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 (milli-seconds)
for all other D&I formats.
Interface Buffer Command: <add/IBC_'cr'

Center Response: >add/IBC_'cr''lf']
Interface Buffer Command: <add/IBP_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = BITS or MS (milli-seconds).

Programming Response: >add/IBP_xxxx'cr''lf']
Note: For Drop & Insert: Only milli-seconds
Status: <add/IBP_'cr' format is allowed.
Response: >add/IBP_xxxx'cr''lf']
Interface Receive Command: <add/IRFS_ff_ssss'cr' Where:

Farming Response: >add/IRFS_ff_ssss'cr''lf'] ff = T1 or E1 (frame type).
Structure ssss = NONE or G704 (framing structure).
Status: <add/IRFS_ff'cr'
Response: >add/IRFS_ff_ssss'cr''lf']
Interface Command: <add/ISP_xxxxxx'cr' Where: xxxxxx = ON or OFF.

Substitute Pattern Response: >add/ISP_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Note: Transmit 2047 Pattern.
Status: <add/ISP_'cr'
Response: >add/ISP_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
A–13
Interface Read Command: <add/IRE_xxxxxx'cr' Where: xxxxxx = ON or OFF.

Error Select Response: >add/IRE_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Note: Receive 2047 Pattern.
Status: <add/IRE_'cr'
Response: >add/IRE_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Interface Coding Command: <add/ICFT_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = AMI, HDB3, or B8ZS.

Format Transmit Response: >add/ICFT_xxxx'cr''lf']
Status: <add/ICFT_'cr'
Response: >add/ICFT_xxxx'cr''lf']
Interface Coding Command: <add/ICFR_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = AMI, HDB3, or B8ZS.

Format Receive Response: >add/ICFR_xxxx'cr''lf']
Status: <add/ICFR_'cr'
Response: >add/ICFR_xxxx'cr''lf']
Transmit Data Command: <add/TDF_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = NONE, DATA, or AIS.

Fault Response: >add/TDF_xxxx'cr''lf']
Status: <add/TDF_'cr'
Response: >add/TDF_xxxx'cr''lf']
Receive Data Command: <add/RDF_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = NONE, DATA, or AIS.

Fault Response: >add/RDF_xxxx'cr''lf']
Status: <add/RDF_'cr'
Response: >add/RDF_xxxx'cr''lf']
Interface Service Command: <add/ISCL_xxx_snn'cr' Where:

Channel Level Response: >add/ISCL_xxx_snn'cr''lf']
xxx = TX1, TX2, RX1, or RX2 (service channel
Status: <add/ISCL_xxx'cr' designator).
Response: >add/ISCL_xxx_snn'cr''lf']
nnn = -20 to +10 in steps of 1 (service channel
level in dBm).
IDR Backward Command: <add/BW_xxx_nnn'cr' Where:

Alarm Enable Response: >add/BW_xxx_nnn'cr''lf']
xxx = TX1, TX2, TX3, TX4, RX1, RX2, RX3, or
Status: <add/BW_xxx_'cr' RX4 (backward alarm designator).
Response: >add/BW_xxx_nnn'cr''lf']
nnn = ON or OFF.
A–14
Drop Data Command: <add/DDF_xxxxxx'cr' Where: xxxxxx = T1, T1ESF, E1CCS, E1CAS,
Format Response: >add/DDF_xxxxxx'cr''lf'] E131TS, T1S, or T1ESFS.
Status: <add/DDF_'cr'
Response: >add/DDF_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Insert Data Command: <add/IDF_xxxxxx'cr' Where: xxxxxx = T1, T1ESF, E1CCS, E1CAS,
Format Response: >add/IDF_xxxxxx'cr''lf'] E131TS, T1S, or T1ESFS.
Status: <add/IDF_'cr'
Response: >add/IDF_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Insert E1 CRC Command: <add/ICRC_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

Enable Response: >add/ICRC_xxx'cr''lf']
Status: <add/ICRC_'cr'
Response: >add/ICRC_xxx'cr''lf']
Drop Channels Command: <add/DCA_dd;cc'cr' Where:

Assignment Response: >add/DCA_dd;cc'cr''lf']
dd = 1 to N (over the satellite drop channel)
Status: <add/DCA_dd'cr' where N = (Modulator Data Rate) divided by
Response: >add/DCA_dd;cc'cr''lf'] (64 kbps).
cc = 1 to 24 (terrestrial channel number for T1

data formats).
cc = 1 to 31 (terrestrial time slot number for E1

data formats).
Note: This command is not valid when the

drop data format is specified as E1CAS and
the modulator data rate is set to 1920.0 kbps.
A–15
Bulk Drop Command: <add/BDCA_dd;cc_dd;cc_dd;cc_dd;cc......'cr' Where:

Channels Response: >add/BDCA_dd;cc_dd;cc_dd;cc_dd;cc......'cr''lf']
Assignment dd = 1 to N (over the satellite drop channel);
Status: <add/BDCA_'cr' where N = (modulator data rate) divided by
Response: >add/BDCA_dd;cc_dd;cc_dd;cc_dd;cc......'cr''lf'] (64 kbps).

data formats).

data formats).
Notes:
1. The status response returns
programming information for 1 to N
drop channels.
2. This command is not valid when the
drop data format is specified as E1CAS
and the modulator data rate is set to
1920.0 kbps.
Insert Channels Command: <add/ICA_ii;cc'cr' Where:

Assignment Response: >add/ICA_ii;cc'cr''lf']
ii = 1 to N (over the satellite insert channel);
Status: <add/ICA_ii'cr' where N = (demodulator data rate) divided by
Response: >add/ICA_ii;cc'cr''lf'] (64 kbps).

data formats).

data formats).
cc = 0 if no insert is desired for the specified

insert channel.
Notes:
1. Time slot 16 (cc = 16) may not be
specified when the insert data format is
specified to be E1CAS.
2. This command is not valid when the
insert data format is specified as
E1CAS and the demodulator data rate
is set to 1920.0 kbps.
A–16
Bulk Insert Command: <add/BICA_ii;cc_ii;cc_ii;cc_ii;cc......'cr' Where:

Channels Response: >add/BICA_ii;cc_ii;cc_ii;cc_ii;cc......'cr''lf']
Assignment ii = 1 to N (over the satellite insert channel);
Status: <add/BICA_'cr' where N = (modulator data rate) divided by
Response: >add/BICA_ii;cc_ii;cc_ii;cc_ii;cc......'cr''lf'] (64 kbps).

data formats).

data formats).
cc = 0 if no insert is desired for the specified

insert channel.
Notes:
1.The status response returns programming
information for 1 to N insert channels.
2.Time slot 16 (cc = 16) may not be specified
when the insert data format is specified to be
E1CAS.
3.This command is not valid when the insert
data format is specified as E1CAS and the
demodulator data rate is set to 1920.0 kbps.
ASYNC Transmit Command: <add/TOBR_nnnnn'cr' Where: nnnnn = 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200,
Overhead Baud Response: >add/TOBR_nnnnn'cr''lf'] 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400.
Rate
Status: <add/TOBR_'cr' Note: TX ASYNC Overhead only.
Response: >add/TOBR_nnnnn'cr''lf']
ASYNC Receive Command: <add/ROBR_nnnnn'cr' Where: nnnnn = 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200,
Overhead Baud Response: >add/ROBR_nnnnn'cr''lf'] 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400.
Rate
Status: <add/ROBR_'cr' Note: RX ASYNC Overhead only.
Response: >add/ROBR_nnnnn'cr''lf']
ASYNC Transmit Command: <add/TCCL_n'cr' Where: n = 5, 6, 7, or 8 (characters).

Channel Response: >add/TCCL_n'cr''lf']
Character Length Note: TX ASYNC Overhead only.
Status: <add/TCCL_'cr'
Response: >add/TCCL_n'cr''lf']
ASYNC Receive Command: <add/RCCL_n'cr' Where: n = 5, 6, 7, or 8 (characters).

Channel Response: >add/RCCL_n'cr''lf']
Character Length Note: RX ASYNC Overhead only.
Status: <add/RCCL_'cr'
Response: >add/RCCL_n'cr''lf']
A–17
ASYNC Transmit Command: <add/TCSB_n'cr' Where: n = 1 or 2 (stop bits).

Channel Stop Bits Response: >add/TCSB_n'cr''lf']
Note: TX ASYNC Overhead only.
Status: <add/TCSB_'cr'
Response: >add/TCSB_n'cr''lf']
ASYNC Receive Command: <add/RCSB_n'cr' Where: n = 1 or 2 (stop bits).

Channel Stop Bits Response: >add/RCSB_n'cr''lf']
Note: RX ASYNC Overhead only.
Status: <add/RCSB_'cr'
Response: >add/RCSB_n'cr''lf']
ASYNC Transmit Command: <add/TOCP_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = ODD, EVEN, or NONE.

Overhead Response: >add/TOCP_xxxx'cr''lf']
Channel Parity Note: TX ASYNC Overhead only.
Status: <add/TOCP_'cr'
Response: >add/TOCP_xxxx'cr''lf']
ASYNC Receive Command: <add/ROCP_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = ODD, EVEN, or NONE.

Overhead Response: >add/ROCP_xxxx'cr''lf']
Channel Parity Note: RX ASYNC Overhead only.
Status: <add/ROCP_'cr'
Response: >add/ROCP_xxxx'cr''lf']
ASYNC Transmit Command: <add/TCT_xxxxxxxx'cr' Where: xxxxxxxx = RS232, RS485 (4- Wire),
Communica- Response: >add/TCT_xxxxxxxx'cr''lf'] RS485_2W (2-Wire).
tions Type
Status: <add/TCT_'cr' Note: TX ASYNC Overhead only.
Response: >add/TCT_xxxxxxxx'cr''lf']
ASYNC Receive Command: <add/RCT_xxxxx'cr' Where: xxxxx = RS232 or RS485.

Communica- Response: >add/RCT_xxxxx'cr''lf']
tions Type Note: RX ASYNC Overhead only.
Status: <add/RCT_'cr'
Response: >add/RCT_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Transmit Data Command: <add/TDP_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = NRM (normal data phasing),
Phase Response: >add/TDP_xxxx'cr''lf'] INV (inverted data phasing).
Status: <add/TDP_'cr'
Response: >add/TDP_xxxx'cr''lf']
A–18
Receive Data Command: <add/RDP_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = NRM (normal data phasing),
Phase Response: >add/RDP_xxxx'cr''lf'] INV (inverted data phasing).
Status: <add/RDP_'cr'
Response: >add/RDP_xxxx'cr''lf']
CTS Delay Time Command: <add/CTSD_xx'cr' Where: xx = 0 to 60 (number of seconds).

Response: >add/CTSD_xx'cr''lf']
Status: <add/CTSD_'cr'
Response: >add/CTSD_xx'cr''lf']
IDR Transmit Command: <add/TET_xxxxx'cr' Where: xxxxx = DATA (64K DATA) or AUDIO
ESC Type Response: >add/TET_xxxxx'cr''lf'] (2x32K AUDIO).
Status: <add/TET_'cr' Note: TX IDR Overhead only.

Response: >add/TET_xxxxx'cr''lf']
IDR Receive ESC Command: <add/RET_xxxxx'cr' Where: xxxxx = DATA (64K DATA) or AUDIO
Type Response: >add/RET_xxxxx'cr''lf'] (2x32K AUDIO).
Status: <add/RET_'cr' Note: RX IDR Overhead only.

Response: >add/RET_xxxxx'cr''lf']
A–19
A.8 System Configuration Commands
Time Of Day Command: <add/TIME_hh:mmxx'cr' Where:

Response: >add/TIME_hh:mmxx'cr''lf'] hh = 1 to 12 (hours).
mm = 00 to 59 (minutes).
Status: <add/TIME_'cr' xx = AM or PM.
Response: >add/TIME_hh:mmxx'cr''lf']
Date Command: <add/DATE_mm/dd/yyyy'cr' Where:

Response: >add/DATE_mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf']
mm = 1 to 12 (month).
Status: <add/DATE_'cr'
Response: >add/DATE_mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf'] dd = 1 to 31 (day).
yyyy = 00 to 99 (year) in 2 - digit year mode, and 1975 to 1999

and 2000 to 2075 in 4 - digit mode.
Remote Command: <add/REM_'cr' Configures the modem for remote operation.

Response: >add/REM_'cr''lf']
The SDM300A will respond to any status request at any time.
However, the SDM300A must be in 'Remote Mode' to change
configuration parameters.
Clear Stored Command: <add/CLSF_'cr' This command is used to clear all stored faults logged by the
Faults Response: >add/CLSF_'cr''lf'] SDM300A.
Modem Command: <add/MOM_xxxxxxx'cr' Where: xxxxxxx = TX_ONLY, RX_ONLY, or DUPLEX.

Operation Response: >add/MOM_xxxxxxx'cr''lf']
Mode This command configures the modem for simplex or duplex
Status: <add/MOM_'cr' operation modes. When transmit only mode is selected, receive
Response: >add/MOM_xxxxxxx'cr''lf'] faults are inhibited and when receive only mode is selected,
transmit faults are inhibited.
System Command: <add/SMT_xxxxxxx'cr' Where: xxxxxx = IDR, IBS, DI, ASYNC, AUPC, EFD, CUSTOM,
Modem Type Response: >add/SMT_xxxxxxx'cr''lf'] OR VSAT-IBS, or CDM.
Status: <add/SMT_'cr'
Response: >add/SMT_xxxxxxx'cr''lf']
Save Modem Command: <add/SMC_n'cr' Where: n = 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 (stored configuration number).

Config. Response: >add/SMC_n'cr''lf']
This command saves the current modem configuration for recall
at a later time using the 'RMC_' command. Up to five different
modem configurations can be saved.
A–20
Recall Command: <add/RMC_n'cr' Where: n = 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 (stored configuration number).

Modem Response: >add/RMC_n'cr''lf']
Config. This command causes the modem to be reprogrammed with
configuration parameters previously saved using the 'SMC_'
command. One of five saved configurations can be specified.
Local Modem Command: <add/LMA_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

AUPC Mode Response: >add/LMA_xxx'cr''lf']
This command configures the modem for the LOCAL MODEM
Status: <add/LMA_'cr' AUPC mode. When 'ON' is selected, the AUPC configuration can
Response: >add/LMA_xxx'cr''lf'] be entered.
RTS TX-IF Command: <add/RTSM_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

Control Mode Response: >add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
This command configures the modem for the RTS TX-IF control
Status: <add/RTSM_'cr' mode. If 'ON' is selected, the TX-IF output will only be turned on if
Response: >add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf'] the incoming RTS signal is asserted (also the TX-IF output has to
be programmed ON and no major modulator faults are present). If
'OFF' is selected, the TX-IF output will operate normal ignoring
the RTS signal.
RF Mode Command: <add/RFMD_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = NRM (Normal Mode), PWR (Turn RF off on power
Control Response: >add/RFMD_xxxx'cr''lf'] up), COMM (Turn RF off on power up and loss of remote
communications after 10 seconds), CD (Turn RF ON when carrier
is detected, turn RF OFF when no carrier is detected. For the RF
Status: <add/RFMD_xxxx'cr'
ON condition, the TX-IF must be programmed ON. Note: RTS
Response: >add/RFMD_xxxx'cr''lf'] TX-IF, when enabled over-rides CD).
This command allows for the RF output to be enabled or disabled

depending on the following described conditions. One application
for this command will be in demand network systems.
G.703 Line Command: <add/G7LT_xxxxx'cr' Where: xxxxx = UNBAL (Unbalanced) or BAL (Balanced)
Termination Response: >add/G7LT_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Note: Data is only returned if G.703 Personality PCB is installed.
Status: <add/G7LT_'cr'
Response >add/G7LT_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Built In Self Command: <add/BIST_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = OFF (self test disabled), RUN (run self test now),
Test Response: for (OFF or AUTO): AUTO (run self test on power up/software restart).
>add/BIST_xxxx'cr''lf']
for (RUN):
>add/BIST_xxxx'cr'
ST_xxx'cr''lf'] Self Test (OK/FLT)
Status: <add/BIST_xxxx'cr' Note: Allow 35 Seconds for response to RUN the Self Test.
Response: >add/BIST_xxxx'cr''lf']
A–21
A.9 Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC)
A.9.1 Local Modem AUPC Commands
AUPC Local Command: <add/LPC_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF.

Enable Response: >add/LPC_xxx'cr''lf']
Notes:
Status: <add/LPC_'cr' 1. When programmed ON, the MOP (Modulator Output
Response: >add/LPC_xxx'cr''lf'] Power) command is not allowed, only MOP status is
allowed.
2. ASYNC or AUPC Overhead only.
AUPC Command: <add/NOMP_snn.n'cr' Where: snn.n = -30.0 to -5.0, in 0.1 steps (nominal range in
Nominal Response: >add/NOMP_snn.n'cr''lf'] dBm).
Power Level
Status: <add/NOMP_'cr' Notes:
Response: >add/NOMP_snn.n'cr''lf'] 1. The nominal power range is modified relative to the
(MPO_).
AUPC Command: <add/MAXP_snn.n'cr' Where: snn.n = -30.0 to -5.0, in 0.1 steps (nominal range in
Maximum Response: >add/MAXP_snn.n'cr''lf'] dBm).
Power Limit
Status: <add/MAXP_'cr' Notes:
Response: >add/MAXP_snn.n'cr''lf'] 1. The nominal power range is modified relative to the
(MPO_).
AUPC Command: <add/MINP_snn.n'cr' Where: snn.n = -30.0 to -5.0, in 0.1 steps (nominal range in
Minimum Response: >add/MINP_snn.n'cr''lf'] dBm).
Power Limit
Status: <add/MINP_'cr' Notes:
Response: >add/MINP_snn.n'cr''lf'] 1. The nominal power range is modified relative to the
(MPO_).
AUPC Command: <add/ENSP_nn.n'cr' Where: nn.n = 3.2 to 16.0, in 0.1 increments (Eb/N0 in dB).
Eb/N0 Response: >add/ENSP_nn.n'cr''lf']
Target Set Note: ASYNC or AUPC Overhead only.
Point
Status: <add/ENSP_'cr'
Response: >add/ENSP_nn.n'cr''lf']
A–22
AUPC Command: <add/MAXT_n.n'cr' Where: n.n = 0.5 to 6.0, in 0.5 increments (max tracking rate
Maximum Response: >add/MAXT_n.n'cr''lf'] in dBm/minute).
Tracking
Rate Note: ASYNC or AUPC Overhead only.
Status: <add/MAXT_'cr'
Response: >add/MAXT_n.n'cr''lf']
AUPC Local Command: <add/LCL_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = HOLD, NOM, or MAX (power level setting
Carrier Loss Response: >add/LCL_xxxx'cr''lf'] when local carrier loss).
Action
Status: <add/LCL_'cr' Note: ASYNC or AUPC Overhead only.
Response: >add/LCL_xxxx'cr''lf']
AUPC Command: <add/RCL_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = HOLD, NOM, or MAX (power level setting
Remote Response: >add/RCL_xxxx'cr''lf'] when remote carrier loss).
Carrier Loss
Action Note: ASYNC or AUPC Overhead only.
Status: <add/RCL_'cr'
Response: >add/RCL_xxxx'cr''lf']
A.9.2 Remote Modem AUPC Commands

Remote Notes:
Modem 1. Always wait 3 seconds between consecutive remote modem command/status polls.
AUPC 2. If Local AUPC is not enabled, status commands will return last known condition. They will also request status
Commands from the remote modem. This allows a second request to return proper status.
Remote Command: <add/RPC_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF (remote AUPC enable).

AUPC Response: >add/RPC_xxx'cr''lf']
Enable Note: ASYNC or AUPC Overhead only.
Remote Command: <add/RISP_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF (remote transmit 2047 pattern
Interface Response: >add/RISP_xxx'cr''lf'] enable).
Substitution
Pattern Note: Transmit 2047 Pattern.
Status: <add/RISP_'cr'
Response: >add/RISP_xxx'cr''lf']
Remote Command: <add/RBBL_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = ON or OFF (remote baseband loopback

Interface Response: >add/RBBL_xxx'cr''lf'] enable).
Baseband
Loopback Note: ASYNC or AUPC Overhead only.
Status: <add/RBBL_'cr'
Response: >add/RBBL_xxx'cr''lf']
A–23
Remote Command: <add/RRES_'cr' Where:

Interface Response: >add/RRES_nE-e'cr''lf'] n = 1 to 9 (error rate number).
Read Error e = 2 to 6 (exponent).
Status
Example:
Command: <add/RRES_'cr' Note: Received 2047 Pattern.
Response: >add/RRES_2E-6'cr''lf']
This command returns 2047 BER from the remote AUPC
modem. If data is not valid, the message 'No_Data' is
returned in lieu of BER data.
A.10 MUX PCB Configuration Commands (MUX PCB Installed Only)
Mux Command: <add/MTDR_x_yyyyyy'cr' Where:

Tributary Response: >add/MTDR_x_yyyyyy'cr''lf']
Data Rate & x = 1 to 8 (tributary number).
Enable
Status: <add/MTDR_x'cr'
Response: >add/MTDR_x_yyyyyy'cr''lf'] yyyyyy = OFF (disabled), or 0.6 to 4000.0 (kbps in 100 bits
steps).
Mux Command: <add/MTIT_x_yyyyy'cr' Where:

Tributary Response: >add/MTIT_x_yyyyy'cr''lf'] x = 1 to 8 (tributary number).
Interface yyyyy = RS422 or RS232.
Type
Status: <add/MTIT_x'cr'
Response: >add/MTIT_x_yyyyy'cr''lf']
Mux Command: <add/MTCP_x_yyy'cr' Where:

Tributary Response: >add/MTCP_x_yyy'cr''lf']
Clock Phase x = 1 to 8 (tributary number).
Status: <add/MTCP_x'cr'
Response: >add/MTCP_x_yyy'cr''lf'] yyy = NRM (normal clock phasing), INV (inverted clock
phasing).
Mux Command: <add/MTDP_x_yyy'cr' Where:

Tributary Response: >add/MTDP_x_yyy'cr''lf']
Data Phase x = 1 to 8 (tributary number).
Status: <add/MTDP_x'cr'
Response: >add/MTDP_x_yyy'cr''lf'] yyy = NRM (normal data phasing), INV (inverted data
phasing).
Mux Command: <add/MTMD_x_yyyyy'cr' Where:

Tributary Response: >add/MTMD_x_yyyyy'cr''lf'] x = 1 to 8 (tributary number).
Mode yyyyy = SYNC or ASYNC.
Status: <add/MTMD_x'cr'
Response: >add/MTMD_x_yyyyy'cr''lf']
A–24
Mux Command: <add/MTAF_x_yyy'cr' Where:

Tributary Response: >add/MTAF_x_yyy'cr''lf'] x = 1 to 8 (tributary number).
Async yyy = 7E1, 7O1, 7N2, 7E2, 7O2, 8N1, or 8N2.
Format
Status: <add/MTAF_x'cr'
Response: >add/MTAF_x_yyy'cr''lf']
A.11 Flex Mux Configuration Commands (Flex Mux PCB Installed Only)
TX Channel Command: <add/TCEN_1_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = OFF (Disabled), DI (D&I Enabled), T1E1
#1 Enable Response: >add/TCEN_1_xxxx'cr''lf'] (T1/E1 Enabled).
Status: <add/TCEN_1'cr'
Response: >add/TCEN_1_xxxx'cr''lf']
TX Channel Command: <add/TCDR_1_xxxx.x'cr' Where: xxxx.x = 1544.0 or 2048.0 kbps for T1/E1 operation.
#1 Data Response: >add/TCDR_1_xxxx.x'cr''lf'] N * 64.0 kbps for D&I operation.
Rate
Status: <add/TCDR_1'cr'
Response: >add/TCDR_1_xxxx.x'cr''lf']
TX Channel Command: <add/TCEN_2_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = OFF (ADPCM Disabled), ON (ADPCM

#2 Enable Response: >add/TCEN_2_xxx'cr''lf'] Enabled).
Status: <add/TCEN_2'cr' This command enables channel #2 for ADPCM operation,

Response: >add/TCEN_2_xxx'cr''lf'] or can be disabled.
TX Channel Command: <add/TCEN_3_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = OFF (Channel Disabled), AUPC (Channel
#3 Enable Response: >add/TCEN_3_xxxx'cr''lf'] Enabled for AUPC), A232 (Channel Enabled for ASYNC
RS232), S232 (Channel Enabled for SYNC RS232), A422
(Channel Enabled for ASYNC RS422), S422 (Channel
Enabled for SYNC RS422).
Note: This command enables channel #3 for SYNC/ASYNC
RS232/RS422 operation, AUPC operation, or can be
disabled.
TX Channel Command: <add/TCDR_3_xxxx.x'cr' Where: xxxx.x = 0.6 to 4000.0 for Sync. RS422 (kbps in 100
#3 Data Response: >add/TCDR_3_xxxx.x'cr''lf'] bit/s steps). 0.6 to 64.0 for all other modes (kbps in 100 bit/s
Rate steps).
Response: >add/TCDR_3_xxxx.x'cr''lf']
A–25
TX Channel Command: <add/TCEN_4_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = OFF (Channel Disabled), AUPC (Channel
#4 Enable Response: >add/TCEN_4_xxxx'cr''lf'] Enabled for AUPC), A232 (Channel Enabled for ASYNC
(Channel Enabled for ASYNC RS485).
RS232 operation, ASYNC RS485 operation, AUPC
operation, or can be disabled.
TX Channel Command: <add/TCDR_4_xx.x'cr' Where: xx.x = 0.6 to 64.0 (kbps in 100 bit/s steps).
#4 Data Response: >add/TCDR_4_xx.x'cr''lf']
Rate
Response: >add/TCDR_4_xx.x'cr''lf']
TX Channel Command: <add/TCCP_x_yyy'cr' Where:

Clock Phase Response: >add/TCCP_x_yyy'cr''lf']
(Channels x = 3 or 4 (channel number).
#3 and #4)
Status: <add/TCCP_x'cr'
Response: >add/TCCP_x_yyy'cr''lf'] yyy = NRM (normal clock phasing) or INV (inverted clock
phasing).
TX Channel Command: <add/TCDP_x_yyy'cr' Where:

Data Phase Response: >add/TCDP_x_yyy'cr''lf']
#3 and #4)
Status: <add/TCDP_x'cr'
Response: >add/TCDP_x_yyy'cr''lf'] yyy = NRM (normal data phasing) or INV (inverted data
phasing).
RX Channel Command: <add/RCEN_1_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = OFF (Disabled), DI (D&I Enabled), T1E1
#1 Enable Response: >add/RCEN_1_xxxx'cr''lf'] (T1/E1 Enabled).
Status: <add/RCEN_1'cr' Note: This command enables channel #1 for D&I operation,
Response: >add/RCEN_1_xxxx'cr''lf'] T1/E1 operation, or can be disabled.
RX Channel Command: <add/RCDR_1_xxxx.x'cr' Where: xxxx.x = 1544.0 or 2048.0 kbps for T1/E1 operation.
#1 Data Response: >add/RCDR_1_xxxx.x'cr''lf'] N * 64.0 kbps for D&I operation.
Rate
Status: <add/RCDR_1'cr'
Response: >add/RCDR_1_xxxx.x'cr''lf']
RX Channel Command: <add/RCEN_2_xxx'cr' Where: xxx = OFF (ADPCM Disabled), ON (ADPCM

#2 Enable Response: >add/RCEN_2_xxx'cr''lf'] Enabled).
Status: <add/RCEN_2'cr' This command enables channel #2 for ADPCM operation,

Response: >add/RCEN_2_xxx'cr''lf'] or can be disabled.
A–26
RX Channel Command: <add/RCEN_3_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = OFF (Channel Disabled), AUPC (Channel
#3 Enable Response: >add/RCEN_3_xxxx'cr''lf'] Enabled for AUPC), A232 (Channel Enabled for ASYNC
(Channel Enabled for ASYNC RS422), S422 (Channel
Status: <add/RCEN_3'cr'
Enabled for SYNC RS422).
Response: >add/RCEN_3_xxxx'cr''lf']
RS232/RS422 operation, AUPC operation, or can be
disabled.
RX Channel Command: <add/RCDR_3_xxxx.x'cr' Where: xxxx.x = 0.6 to 4000.0 for Sync. RS422 (kbps in 100
#3 Data Response: >add/RCDR_3_xxxx.x'cr''lf'] bit/s steps). 0.6 to 64.0 for all other modes (kbps in 100 bit/s
Rate steps).
Response: >add/RCDR_3_xxxx.x'cr''lf']
RX Channel Command: <add/RCEN_4_xxxx'cr' Where: xxxx = OFF (Channel Disabled), AUPC (Channel
#4 Enable Response: >add/RCEN_4_xxxx'cr''lf'] Enabled for AUPC), A232 (Channel Enabled for ASYNC
(Channel Enabled for ASYNC RS485).
Status: <add/RCEN_4'cr'
Response: >add/RCEN_4_xxxx'cr''lf']
RS232 operation, ASYNC RS485 operation, AUPC
operation, or can be disabled.
RX Channel Command: <add/RCDR_4_xx.x'cr' Where: xx.x = 0.6 to 64.0 (kbps in 100 bit/s steps).
#4 Data Response: >add/RCDR_4_xx.x'cr''lf']
Rate
Response: >add/RCDR_4_xx.x'cr''lf']
RX Channel Command: <add/RCCP_x_yyy'cr' Where:

Clock Phase Response: >add/RCCP_x_yyy'cr''lf']
#3 and #4)
Status: <add/RCCP_x'cr'
Response: >add/RCCP_x_yyy'cr''lf'] yyy = NRM (normal clock phasing), INV (inverted clock
phasing).
RX Channel Command: <add/RCDP_x_yyy'cr' Where:

Data Phase Response: >add/RCDP_x_yyy'cr''lf']
#3 and #4)
Status: <add/RCDP_x'cr'
Response: >add/RCDP_x_yyy'cr''lf'] yyy = NRM (normal data phasing), INV (inverted data
phasing).
A–27
A.12 Modulator Configuration Status
Modulator Command: <add/MCS_'cr'

Config. Response: >add/MCS_'cr'
Status RF_xxx'cr' RF Output
MF_nnn.nnnnnnn'cr' Modulator Frequency
MR_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr' Modulator Rate
AMRA_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr' Preset 'A' Assignment
AMRB_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr' Preset 'B' Assignment
AMRC_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr' Preset 'C' Assignment
AMRD_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr' Preset 'D' Assignment
AMRV_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr' Preset 'V' Assignment
MPO_snn.n'cr' Modulator Power Offset
MOP_snn.n'cr' Modulator Output Power
SE_xxx'cr' Scrambler Enable
DENC_xxx'cr' Differential Encoder
MT_xxxxx'cr' Modulator Type
MET_xxx'cr' Modulator Encoder Type
COM_xxxxxx'cr' Carrier Only Mode
MRC_xxx'cr' Modulator Reference Clock
MSR_xxx'cr' Modulator Spectrum Rotation
RSEN_xxx'cr' Reed-Solomon Encoder
TDA_xxx'cr' Transmit BPSK Data Ordering
TRSI_xx'cr' TX Reed-Solomon Interleave Value
T310_xxx'cr''lf'] TX 8PSK 2/3 IESS-310 Operation
The modulator configuration status command causes a block of

data to be returned by the addressed modem. The block of data
reflects the current configuration status of the modulator module.
Additional configuration status of new options and features will
always be appended to the end.
A–28
Modulator/ Command: <add/MCP_'cr'

Coder Response: >add/MCP_'cr'
Config. SMT_xxxxxxx'cr' System Modem Type
Program ITOT_xxxxx'cr' Interface Transmit Overhead Type
Status
MOM_xxxxxxx'cr' Modem Operation Mode
MT_xxxxx'cr' Modulator Type
MET_xxx'cr' Modulator Encoder Type
TCEN_1_xxxx'cr' (Note 6) Flex Mux TX Channel #1 Enable
TCDR_1_xxxx.x'cr' (Note 7) Flex Mux TX Channel #1 Data Rate
TCEN_2_xxx'cr' (Note 6) Flex Mux TX Channel #2 Enable
TCCP_3_yyy'cr' (Note 8) Flex Mux TX Channel #3 Clock Phase
TCDP_3_yyy'cr' (Note 8) Flex Mux TX Channel #3 Data Phase
MF_nnn.nnnnnn'cr' Modulator Frequency
MR_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr' Modulator Rate
MPO_snn.n'cr' Modulator Power Offset
LPC_xxx'cr' (Note 10) AUPC Local Power Enable
MOP_snn.n'cr' (Note 4) Modulator Output Power
SE_xxx'cr' Scrambler Enable
DENC_xxx'cr' Differential Encoder
ILT_xxx'cr' Interface Loop Timing
ERF_nnnnn.n'cr' External Reference Frequency
TC_xxxx'cr' Transmit Clock (Source)
TCP_xxxx'cr' Transmit Clock Phase
BBL_xxx'cr' Baseband Loopback
ILB_xxx'cr' Interface Loopback
ICFT_xxxx'cr' Interface Coding Format Transmit
ISP_xxxxxx'cr' Interface Substitution Pattern (TX 2047)
ISP_xxx'cr' Interface Substitution Pattern (TX 2047)
TDF_xxxx'cr' Transmit Data Fault
ISCL_TX1_nnn'cr' Service Channel Level TX1
TDP_xxxx'cr' Transmit Data Phase
DDF_xxxxxx'cr' (Note 1) Drop Data Format
BDCA_dd;cc_dd;cc...'cr' (Note 1) Bulk Drop Channels Assignment
MRC_xxx'cr' Modulator Reference Clock
MSR_xxx'cr' Modulator Spectrum Rotation
RSEN_xxx'cr' Reed-Solomon Encoder
BW_TX1_nnn'cr' (Note 2) Backward Alarm Enable TX1
A–29

TXDR_xxxxxx'cr' TX Driver Type
TOBR_nnnnn'cr' (Note 3) ASYNC Transmit Overhead Baud Rate
TCCL_n'cr' (Note 3) ASYNC Transmit Channel Character Length
TCSB_n'cr' (Note 3) ASYNC Transmit Channel Stop Bits
TOCP_xxxx'cr' (Note 3) ASYNC Transmit Overhead Channel Parity
TCT_xxxxx'cr' (Note 3) ASYNC Transmit Communications Type
NOMP_snn.n'cr' (Note 10) AUPC Nominal Power Value
MINP_snn.n'cr' (Note 10) AUPC Minimum Power Value
MAXP_snn.n'cr' (Note 10) AUPC Maximum Power Value
LCL_xxxx'cr' (Note 10) AUPC Local Carrier Loss
RCL_xxxx'cr' (Note 10) AUPC Remote Carrier Loss
CTSD_xx'cr' CTS Delay Time
RTSM_xxx'cr' RTS TX-IF Control Mode
TDA_xxx'cr' Transmit BPSK Data Ordering
COM_xxxxxx'cr' Carrier Only Mode
TET_xxxxx'cr' (Note 2) IDR Transmit ESC Type
MTDR_1_yyyyyy'cr' (Note 5) Mux Tributary #1 Data Rate & Enable
MTIT_1_yyyyy'cr' (Note 5) Mux Tributary #1 Interface Type
MTCP_1_yyy'cr' (Note 5) Mux Tributary #1 Clock Phase
MTDP_1_yyy'cr' (Note 5) Mux Tributary #1 Data Phase
MTMD_1_yyyyy'cr' (Note 5) Mux Tributary #1 Mode
MTAF_1_yyy'cr' (Note 5) Mux Tributary #1 Async Mode
MTDR 6 yyyyyy'cr' (Note 5) Mux Tributary #6 Data Rate & Enable
A–30

TRSI_xx'cr' TX Reed-Solomon Interleave Value
T310_xxx'cr' TX 8PSK 2/3 IESS-310 Operation
G7LT_xxxxx’cr’ (Note 11) G.703 Unbalanced or Balanced
RF_xxx'cr''lf'] RF Output (ON/OFF)
Note: This command is used by the Comtech EF Data M:N

protection switch to collect information that is necessary to
configure back-up modems. Because this command (content
and/or order) can be changed at any time by Comtech EF Data, it
is advisable that other commands ('MCS_' and 'ICS_', or 'BCS_')
be used for M&C systems.
Notes:
1. Data is only returned for TX D&I Overhead (or Flex Mux D&I).
2. Data is only returned for TX IDR Overhead.
3. Data is only returned for TX ASYNC Overhead
4. Data not returned if Local AUPC is enabled & TX ASYNC overhead.
5. Data is only returned if MUX PCB (Card Slot #1) is installed.
6. Data is only returned if FLEX MUX PCB (Card Slot #1) is installed.
7. Data not returned if Channel #1 is disabled (with Flex Mux PCB installed)
8. Data not returned if Channel #3 is disabled or set for AUPC.
9. Data not returned if Channel #4 is disabled or set for AUPC (with Flex Mux PCB installed).
10 Data is only returned for TX ASYNC Overhead( or Flex Mux AUPC).
11 Data is only returned if G.703 Personality PCB is installed.
A–31
A.13 Demodulator Configuration Status
Demodulator Command: <add/DCS_’cr’

Config. Status Response: >add/DCS_’cr’
DF_nnn.nnnnnnn’cr’ Demodulator Frequency
DR_nnnn_mmmm.mmm’cr’ Demodulator Rate
ADRA_nnnn_mmmm.mmm’cr’ Preset ‘A’ Assignment
ADRB_nnnn_mmmm.mmm’cr’ Preset ‘B’ Assignment
ADRC_nnnn_mmmm.mmm’cr’ Preset ‘C’ Assignment
ADRD_nnnn_mmmm.mmm’cr’ Preset ‘D’ Assignment
ADRV_nnnn_mmmm.mmm’cr’ Preset ‘V’ Assignment
DE_xxx’cr’ Descrambler Enable
DDEC_xxx’cr’ Differential Decoder
RFL_xxx’cr’ RF Loopback
IFL_xxx’cr’ IF Loopback
SCF_snnnnn’cr’ Sweep Center Frequency
SWR_nnnnn’cr’ Sweep Width Range
SR_xxx’cr’ Sweep Reacquisition
BERT_xxxx’cr’ BER Threshold
DT_xxxx’cr’ Demodulator Type
DDT_xxx’cr’ Demodulator Decoder Type
DSR_xxx’cr’ Demodulator Spectrum Rotation
RSDE_xxx’cr’ Reed-Solomon Decoder
RDA_xxx’cr’ Receive BPSK Data Ordering
RRSI_xx’cr’ RX Reed-Solomon Interleave Value
R310_xxx’cr’’lf’] RX 8PSK 2/3 IESS-310 Operation
The demodulator configuration status command causes a block

of data to be returned by the addressed modem. The block of
data reflects the current configuration of the demod. Additional
configuration status of new options and features will always be
appended to the end.
A–32
Demod/ Command: <add/DCP_’cr’

Decoder Response: >add/DCP_’cr’
Config. SMT_xxxxxxx’cr’ System Modem Type
Program IROT_xxxxx’cr’ Interface Receive Overhead Type
Status
MOM_xxxxxxx’cr’ Modem Operation Mode
BERT_xxxx’cr’ BER Threshold
DT_xxxx’cr’ Demodulator Type
DDT_xxx’cr’ Demodulator Decoder Type
RCEN_1_xxxx’cr’ (Note 4) Flex Mux RX Channel #1 Enable
RCDR_1_xxxx.x’cr’ (Note 5) Flex Mux RX Channel #1 Data Rate
RCEN_2_xxx’cr’ (Note 4) Flex Mux RX Channel #2 Enable
RCCP_3_yyy’cr’ (Note 6) Flex Mux RX Channel #3 Clock Phase
RCDP_3_yyy’cr’ (Note 6) Flex Mux RX Channel #3 Data Phase
RCCP_4_yyy’cr’ (Note 7) Flex Mux RX Channel #4 Clock Phase
RCDP_4_yyy’cr’ (Note 7) Flex Mux RX Channel #4 Data Phase
DF_nnn.nnnnnn’cr’ Demodulator Frequency
DR_nnnn_mmmm.mmm’cr’ Demodulator Rate
DE_xxx’cr’ Descrambler Enable
DDEC_xxx’cr’ Differential Decoder
RFL_xxx’cr’ RF Loopback
IFL_xxx’cr’ IF Loopback
SCF_snnnnn’cr’ Sweep Center Frequency
SWR_nnnnn’cr’ Sweep Width Range
SR_xxx’cr’ Sweep Reacquisition
ILT_xxx’cr’ Interface Loop Timing
ERF_nnnnn.n’cr’ External Reference Frequency
BC_xxx’cr’ Buffer Clock
RCP_xxxx’cr’ Receive Clock Phase
BBL_xxx’cr’ Baseband Loopback
ILB_xxx’cr’ Interface Loopback
ICFR_xxxx’cr’ Interface Coding Format Receive
IRFS_T1_ssss’cr’ Interface Receive T1 Frame Structure
IRFS_E1_ssss’cr’ Interface Receive E1 Frame Structure
IBP_xxx’cr’ Interface Buffer Programming
IRE_xxxxxx’cr’ Interface Read Error (RX 2047)
RDF_xxxx’cr’ Receive Data Fault
ISCL_RX1_nnn’cr’ Service Channel Level RX1
ISCL_RX2_nnn’cr’ Service Channel Level RX2
RDP_xxxx’cr’ Receive Data Phase
IDF_xxxxxx’cr’ (Note 1) Insert Data Format
ICRC_xxx’cr’ (Note 1) Insert E1 CRC Enable
IBS _nnnnnn’cr’ Interface Buffer Size
BICA_dd;cc_dd;cc...’cr’ (Note 1) Bulk Insert Channels Assignment
A–33
DSR_xxx’cr’ Demodulator Spectrum Rotation

RSDE_xxx’cr’ Reed-Solomon Decoder
BW_RX1_nnn’cr’ (Note 2) Backward Alarm Enable RX1
RXDR_xxxxxx’cr’ RX Driver Type
ROBR_nnnnn’cr’ (Note 3) ASYNC Receive Overhead Baud Rate
RCCL_n’cr’ (Note 3) ASYNC Receive Channel Character Length
RCSB_n’cr’ (Note 3) ASYNC Receive Channel Stop Bits
ROCP_xxxx’cr’ (Note 3) ASYNC Receive Overhead Channel Parity
RCT_xxxxx’cr’ (Note 3) ASYNC Receive Communications Type
ENSP_nn.n’cr’ (Note 8) AUPC EBN0 Target Set Point
MAXT_n.n’cr’ (Note 8) AUPC Max. Tracking Rate
RDA_xxx’cr’ Receive BPSK Data Ordering
RET_xxxxx’cr’ (Note 2) IDR Receive ESC Type
RRSI_xx’cr’ RX Reed-Solomon Interleave Value
R310_xxx’cr’ RX 8PSK 2/3 IESS-310 Operation
G7LT_xxxxx’cr’’lf’] G.703 Unbalanced or Balanced
This command is used by the EF Data M:N protection switch to

collect information that is necessary to configure back-up
modems. Because this command (content and/or order) can be
changed at any time by EF Data, it is advisable that other
commands (‘DCS_’ and ‘ICS_’, or ‘BCS_’) be used for M&C
systems.
Notes:
1. Data is only returned for RX D&I overhead (or Flex Mux D&I mode).is installed.
2. Data is only returned for RX IDR Overhead.
3. Data is only returned for RX ASYNC Overhead.
4. Data is only returned if Flex Mux PCB (Card Slot #1) is installed.
5. Data not returned if Channel #1 is disabled (with Flex Mux PCB installed).
6. Data not returned if Channel #3 is disabled or set for AUPC.
7. Data not returned if Channel #4 is disabled or set for AUPC (with Flex Mux PCB installed).
8. Data is only returned for RX ASYNC Overhead (or Flex Mux AUPC mode).
9. Data is only returned if G.703 Personality PCB is installed.
A–34
A.14 Interface Configuration Status

Interface Command: <add/ICS_'cr'
Config. Response: >add/ICS_'cr'
Status TC_xxxx'cr' Transmit Clock (Source)
ERF_nnnnn.n'cr' External Reference Frequency
TCP_xxxx'cr' Transmit Clock Phase
RCP_xxxx'cr' Receive Clock Phase
BBL_xxx'cr' Baseband Loopback
ILB_xxx'cr' Interface Loopback
ICFT_xxxx'cr' Interface Coding Format Transmit
ICFR_xxxx'cr' Interface Coding Format Receive
BC_xxx'cr' Buffer Clock (Source)
IRFS_T1_ssss'cr' Interface Receive Frame Structure (T1)
IRFS_E1_ssss'cr' Interface Receive Frame Structure (E1)
IBP_xxx'cr' Interface Buffer Programming
IBS _nnnnnn'cr' Interface Buffer Size
ITOT_xxxxx'cr' Interface Transmit Overhead Type
IROT_xxxxx'cr' Interface Receive Overhead Type
ISP_xxxxxx'cr' Interface Substitution Pattern (TX 2047)
IRE_xxxxxx'cr' Interface Read Error (RX 2047)
TDF_xxxx'cr' Transmit Data Fault
RDF_xxxx'cr' Receive Data Fault
ISCL_RX1_nnn'cr' Service Channel Level RX1
ISCL_RX2_nnn'cr' Service Channel Level RX2
TDP_xxxx'cr' Transmit Data Phase
RDP_xxxx'cr' Receive Data Phase
DDF_xxxxxx'cr' (Note 1) Drop Data Format
BDCA_dd;cc_dd;cc...'cr' (Note 1) Bulk Drop Channels Assignment
ICRC_xxx'cr' (Note 2) Insert E1 CRC Enable
IDF_xxxxxx'cr' (Note 2) Insert Data Format
BICA_dd;cc_dd;cc...'cr' (Note 2) Bulk Insert Channels Assignment
BW_RX1_nnn'cr' (Note 4) Backward Alarm Enable RX1
TXDR_xxxxxx'cr' TX Driver Type
RXDR_xxxxxx'cr' RX Driver Type
TOBR nnnnn'cr' (Note 5) ASYNC Transmit Overhead Baud Rate
A–35
TCCL_n'cr' (Note 5) ASYNC Transmit Channel Character Length

TCSB_n'cr' (Note 5) ASYNC Transmit Channel Stop Bits
TOCP_xxxx'cr' (Note 5) ASYNC Transmit Overhead Channel Parity
TCT_xxxxx'cr' (Note 5) ASYNC Transmit Communications Type
ROBR_nnnnn'cr' (Note 6) ASYNC Receive Overhead Baud Rate
RCCL_n'cr' (Note 6) ASYNC Receive Channel Character Length
RCSB_n'cr' (Note 6) ASYNC Receive Channel Stop Bits
ROCP_xxxx'cr' (Note 6) ASYNC Receive Overhead Channel Parity
RCT_xxxxx'cr' (Note 6) ASYNC Receive Communications Type
LPC_xxx'cr' (Note 5) AUPC Local Power Enable
NOMP_snn.n'cr' (Note 5) AUPC Nominal Power Value
MINP_snn.n'cr' (Note 5) AUPC Minimum Power Value
MAXP_snn.n'cr' (Note 5) AUPC Maximum Power Value
LCL_xxxx'cr' (Note 5) AUPC Local Carrier Loss
RCL_xxxx'cr' (Note 5) AUPC Remote Carrier Loss
ENSP_nn.n'cr' (Note 6) AUPC EBN0 Target Set Point
MAXT_n.n'cr' (Note 6) AUPC Max. Tracking Rate
RTSM_xxx'cr' RTS TX-IF Control Mode
CTSD_xx'cr' CTS Delay Time
TET_xxxxx'cr' (Note 3) IDR Transmit ESC Type
RET_xxxxx'cr' (Note 4) IDR Receive ESC Type
MTCP 5 yyy'cr' (Note 7) Mux Tributary #5 Clock Phase
A–36

TCEN_2_xxx'cr' (Note 8) Flex Mux TX Channel #2 Enable
RCEN_1_xxxx'cr' (Note 8) Flex Mux RX Channel #1 Enable
RCDR_1_xxxx.x'cr' (Note 12) Flex Mux RX Channel #1 Data Rate
RCEN_2_xxx'cr' (Note 8) Flex Mux RX Channel #2 Enable
RCCP_3_yyy'cr' (Note 13) Flex Mux RX Channel #3 Clock Phase
RCDP_3_yyy'cr' (Note 13) Flex Mux RX Channel #3 Data Phase
RCCP_4_yyy'cr' (Note 14) Flex Mux RX Channel #4 Clock Phase
RCDP_4_yyy'cr''lf'] (Note 14) Flex Mux RX Channel #4 Data Phase
The Interface configuration status command causes a block of

data to be returned by the addressed MODEM. The block reflects
A–37
the current configuration of the interface. Additional configuration

status of new options and features will always be appended to
the end.
Notes:
1. Data is only returned for TX D&I Overhead.
2. Data is only returned for RX D&I Overhead.
3. Data is only returned for TX IDR Overhead.
4. Data is only returned for RX IDR Overhead.
5. Data is only returned for TX ASYNC Overhead.
6. Data is only returned for RX ASYNC Overhead.
7. Data is only returned if MUX PCB (Card Slot #1) is installed.
8. Data is only returned if FLEX MUX PCB (Card Slot #1) is installed.
9. Data not returned if TX Channel #1 is disabled (with Flex Mux PCB installed).
10. Data not returned if TX Channel #3 is disabled or set for AUPC (with Flex Mux PCB installed).
11. Data not returned if TX Channel #4 is disabled or set for AUPC (with Flex Mux PCB installed).
12. Data not returned if RX Channel #1 is disabled (with Flex Mux PCB installed).
13. Data not returned if RX Channel #3 is disabled or set for AUPC(with Flex Mux PCB installed).
14. Data not returned if RX Channel #4 is disabled or set for AUPC(with Flex Mux PCB installed).
A.15 Modem Fault Status

Modem Faults Command: <add/MFS_'cr'
Status Response: >add/MFS_'cr'
(Summary) DMD_xxx'cr' Demodulator (FLT/OK)
MOD_xxx'cr' Modulator (FLT/OK)
TX_xxx'cr' Interface Transmit Side (FLT/OK)
IRX_xxx'cr' Interface Receive Side (FLT/OK)
CEQ_xxx'cr' Common Equipment (FLT/OK)
BWAL_xxx'cr'’lf'] Backward Alarms (FLT/OK)
Modulator Command: <add/MS_'cr'

Status Response: >add/MS_'cr'
RF_xxx'cr' RF Output (ON/OFF) actual status not config
MOD_xxx'cr' Module (OK/FLT)
SYN_xxx'cr' IF Synthesizer (OK/FLT)
DCS_xxx'cr' Data Clock Synthesizer (OK/FLT)
ICH_xxx'cr' I Channel (OK/FLT)
QCH_xxx'cr' Q Channel (OK/FLT)
AGC_xxx'cr' AGC Level (OK/FLT)
SCT_xxx'cr' Modem Reference PLL Lock (OK/FLT)
EXT_xxx'cr' Modem Reference Activity (OK/FLT)
CONF_xxx'cr' Configuration (OK/FLT)
SFLT_xx'cr''lf'] Number of stored faults logged (0 to 10)
A–38
Demodulator Command: <add/DS_'cr'

Status Response: >add/DS_'cr'
MOD_xxx'cr' Demod Module (OK/FLT)
CD_xxx'cr' Carrier Detect (OK/FLT)
SYN_xxx'cr' IF Synthesizer Lock (OK/FLT)
BERT_xxx'cr' BER Threshold (OK/FLT)
Interface Command: <add/ITXS_'cr'

Transmit Side Response: >add/ITXS_'cr'
Status DRP_xxx'cr' D&I Drop (OK/FLT)
TXD_xxx'cr' Transmit Data/AIS (OK/FLT)
PLL_xxx'cr' Transmit Synthesizer PLL Lock (OK/FLT)
CLK_xxx'cr' Selected Transmit Clock Activity (OK/FLT)
TAC1_xxx'cr' Transmit Audio Clip Channel #1 (OK/FLT)
SFLT_xx'cr''lf'] Number of Stored Faults Logged (0 to 10)
Interface Command: <add/IRXS_'cr'

Receive Side Response: >add/IRXS_'cr'
Status UNFL_xxx'cr' Buffer Underflow (OK/FLT)
OVFL_xxx'cr' Buffer Overflow (OK/FLT)
RXD_xxx'cr' Receive Data Loss/AIS (OK/FLT)
FBER_xxx'cr' Frame BER (OK/FLT)
BWA_xxx'cr' Receive Backward Alarm (OK/FLT)
CLK_xxx'cr' Selected Buffer Clock Activity (OK/FLT)
PLL_xxx'cr' Buffer Clock PLL Lock (OK/FLT)
DMUX_xxx'cr' Demux Lock (OK/FLT)
2047_xxx'cr' 2047 Pattern Lock Detect (OK/FLT)
BUFF_xxx'cr' Buffer Full (OK/FLT)
INS_xxx'cr' D&I Insert (OK/FLT)
RAC1_xxx'cr' Receive Audio Clip Channel #1 (OK/FLT)
SFLT_xx'cr''lf'] Number of Stored Faults Logged (0 to 10)
A–39
Common Command: <add/CES_'cr'

Equipment Response: >add/CES_'cr'
Status M&C_xxx'cr' Monitor & Control Module (OK/FLT)
INT_xxx'cr' Data Interface/Overhead Module (OK/FLT)
BAT_xxx'cr' Battery/Clock (OK/FLT)
+5_xxx'cr' +5V Power Supply (OK/FLT)
-12_xxx'cr' -12V Power Supply (OK/FLT)
ST_xxx'cr' Self Test (OK/FLT)
MODE_xxxxxx'cr' Mode (LOCAL or REMOTE)
The common equipment status command causes a block of data

to be returned which indicates the status of the common
equipment.
Interface Command: <add/IAS_'cr'

Alarms Response: >add/IAS_'cr'
(Backward TXBWA1_xxx'cr' TX Backward Alarm 1 (FLT/OK)
Alarm)
TXBWA2_xxx'cr' TX Backward Alarm 2 (FLT/OK)
Status
RXBWA1_xxx'cr' RX Backward Alarm 1 (FLT/OK)
A–40
A.15 Error Performance Status
Raw BER Command: <add/RBER_'cr' Where:

Response: >add/RBER_xm.mE-ee'cr''lf'] x = < or > (data modifier to indicate that the error rate is
less than or greater than the returned value).
m.m = 1.0 to 9.9 (error rate mantissa).
ee = 1 to 99 (error rate exponent).
Notes:
1. The 'x' (< or >) parameter is only returned if the error
rate has exceeded the computational resolution of
the system.
2. 'No Data' is returned if the error rate cannot be
calculated.
3. 'Sampling' is returned if not enough data is currently
available to calculate the error rate.
Corrected Command: <add/CBER_'cr' Where:

BER Response: >add/CBER_xm.mE-ee'cr''lf']
x = < or > (data modifier to indicate that the error rate is
Notes:
1. The 'x' (< or >) parameter is only returned if the error
rate has exceeded the computational resolution of
the system.
calculated.
available to calculate the error rate.
A–41
Corrected Command: <add/CBEL_'cr' Where:

BER Log Response: >add/CBEL_t.t;s1,s2,s3 ... sn'cr''lf']
t.t = Time between corrected BER samples in seconds
Examples: [No new compiled data from last poll] ('0.1' to '9.9').
>add/CBEL_1.0'cr''lf']
; = At least one data point has been logged.
[Momentary lock in 32 time intervals: 2.0E-3,
5.2E-7, 1.0E-10, <1.0E-12] s1 to sn = Corrected BER samples in the format of
(xmmee).
>add/CBEL_1.0;,,,,,,,2003,5207,1010,<1012,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,'cr''lf'] x = The optional data modifier '<' or '>' (less than or
greater than).
mm = The corrected BER mantissa ('10' for 1.0 to '99 for

9.9).
ee = The corrected BER negative exponent ('00' to '99').
Error data (samples) are compiled at the nominal system

rate indicated by the time parameter (t.t). The samples
are stored in a thirty-two-element FIFO. When the
'CBEL_' command is received, the samples in the FIFO
are formatted and returned as indicated. The FIFO is
then flushed. If the FIFO becomes full, the oldest sample
will be lost as the current sample is written.
Notes:
1. The most recent sample is represented by 'sn' while
the least recent sample is represented by 's1'.
2. Data delimited by a comma (',') will be returned for
all time intervals logged.
3. The optional data modifiers '>' and '<' are only
present if the error rate exceeds the computational
resolution of the system.
A–42
Interface Command: <add/IRES_'cr' Where:

Read Error Response: >add/IRES_tttt_xn.nE-ee'cr''lf']
Status tttt = FRM (FRAME) or 2047 (indicates type of error
being read).
x = < or > (data modifier to indicate that the error rate is

This command returns frame or 2047 error rate. The

'IRE_' configuration command is used to select reading
of frame or 2047 errors.
Notes:
1. The 'x' (< or >) parameter is only returned if the
error rate has exceeded the computational resolution of
the system.
calculated.
3. 'Sampling' is returned if not enough data is
currently available to calculate the error rate.
Eb/No Command: <add/EBN0_'cr' Where:

Status Response: >add/EBN0_xnn.ndB'cr''lf']
x = < or > (data modifier to indicate that the Eb/N0 is less
than or greater than the returned value).
nn.n = 1.0 to 99.9 (Eb/N0 value).
Notes:
1.The 'x' (< or >) parameter is only returned if the Eb/N0
has exceeded the computational resolution of the
system.
2.'No Data' is returned if the Eb/N0 cannot be calculated.
3.'Sampling' is returned if not enough data is currently
available to calculate the Eb/N0.
A–43
Modulator Command: <add/MR_'cr' Where:.

Rate Status Response: >add/MR_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr''lf']
For Non-Turbo nnnn = 1/2 (QPSK 1/2), [coder rate], 3/4
(QPSK 3/4), 7/8 (QPSK 7/8), BP12 (BPSK 1/2), OQ12
(OQPSK 1/2), OQ34 (OQPSK 3/4), and OQ78 (OQPSK
7/8), OQSK (OQPSK 1/1), BPSK (BPSK 1/1), and QPSK
(QPSK 1/1)
For TPM FEC nnnn= 8P23 (8PSK 2/3), 8P34 (8PSK

3/4), 2144 (BPSK 21/44), B516 (BPSK 5/16), 1/2 (QPSK
1/2), OQ12 (OQPSK 1/2), 3/4 (QPSK 3/4), and OQ34
(OQPSK 3/4)
mmmm.mmm = Data rate in kHz
Demodulator Command: <add/DR_'cr' Where:

Rate Status Response: >add/DR_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr''lf']
For Non-Turbo nnnn = 1/2 (QPSK 1/2), [coder rate], 3/4
(QPSK 3/4), 7/8 (QPSK 7/8), BP12 (BPSK 1/2), OQ12
(OQPSK 1/2), OQ34 (OQPSK 3/4), and OQ78 (OQPSK
7/8), OQSK (OQPSK 1/1), BPSK (BPSK 1/1), and QPSK
(QPSK 1/1)
For TPM FEC nnnn= 8P23 (8PSK 2/3), 8P34 (8PSK

3/4), 2144 (BPSK 21/44), B516 (BPSK 5/16), 1/2 (QPSK
1/2), OQ12 (OQPSK 1/2), 3/4 (QPSK 3/4), and OQ34
(OQPSK 3/4)
mmmm.mmm = Data rate in kHz.
Receive Command: <add/RSL_'cr' Where:

Signal Level Response: >add/RSL_xsnn.ndBm'cr''lf']
Status x = < or > (data modifier to indicate that the receive
signal level is less than or greater than the returned
value).
s = + or - (receive signal level sign, plus or minus).
nn.n = 0.0 to 99.9 (receive signal level magnitude).
Notes:
1. The 'x' (< or >) parameter is only returned if the level
system.
2. 'No Data' is returned if the level cannot be
calculated.
3. Sampling' is returned if not enough data is currently
available to calculate the level.
A–44
Interface Command: <add/IBFS_'cr' Where: nn = 1 to 99 (relative to buffer depth).

Buffer Fill Response: >add/IBFS_nn%'cr''lf']
Status
Current Command: <add/CSV_'cr' Where:
Sweep Response: >add/CSV_xsnnnnn'cr''lf]
Value x = < or > (data modifier to indicate that the sweep offset
value is less than or greater than the returned value).
s = + or - (sweep offset from center).
nnnnn = 0 to 35000.
yyy = OK or FLT (decoder lock status OK or FAULT).
Notes:
1. The 'x' (< or >) parameter is only returned if the level
system.
2. No Data' is returned if the level cannot be calculated.
available to calculate the level.
A.16 Stored Faults

Information on stored faults is returned when requested. If no stored fault exists for a given fault
number, the words “NO Fault” will be returned instead of the normal time/date status
information.
The following symbols are commonly used to define the stored faults status commands:
• # Fault number (0 to 9). “0” is the first fault stored.

• hh Hours in 24-hr. format.
• mm Minutes.
• ss Seconds.
• MM Month.
• DD Day.
• YYYY Year.
A–45
Modulator Command: <add/MSF_#'cr'

Stored Faults Response: >add/MSF_# hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YYYYY'cr'
MOD_xxx'cr' Module (OK/FLT)
SYN_xxx'cr' IF Synthesizer (OK/FLT)
DCS_xxx'cr' Data Clock Synthesizer (OK/FLT)
AGC_xxx'cr' AGC Level (OK/FLT)
SCT_xxx'cr' Modem Reference PLL Lock (OK/FLT)
EXT_xxx'cr' Modem Reference Activity (OK/FLT)
CONF_xxx'cr''lf'] Configuration (OK/FLT)
Demodulator Command: <add/DSF_#'cr'

Stored Faults Response: >add/DSF_# hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YYYY'cr'
MOD_xxx'cr' Demod Module (OK/FLT)
CD_xxx'cr' Carrier Detect (OK/FLT)
SYN_xxx'cr' IF Synthesizer Lock (OK/FLT)
BERT_xxx'cr' BER Threshold (OK/FLT)
Interface Command: <add/ITSF_#'cr'

Transmit Side Response: >add/ITSF_# hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YYYY'cr'
Stored Faults DRP_xxx'cr' D&I Drop (OK/FLT)
TXD_xxx'cr' Transmit Data/AIS (OK/FLT)
PLL_xxx'cr' Transmit Synthesizer PLL Lock (OK/FLT)
CLK_xxx'cr' Selected Transmit Clock Activity (OK/FLT)
A–46
Interface Command: <add/IRSF_#'cr'

Receive Side Response: >add/IRSF_# hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YYYY'cr'
Stored Faults UNFL_xxx'cr' Buffer Underflow (OK/FLT)
OVFL_xxx'cr' Buffer Overflow (OK/FLT)
RXD_xxx'cr' Receive Data Loss/AIS (OK/FLT)
FBER_xxx'cr' Frame BER (OK/FLT)
BWA_xxx'cr' Receive Backward Alarm (OK/FLT)
CLK_xxx'cr' Selected Buffer Clock Activity (OK/FLT)
PLL_xxx'cr' Buffer Clock PLL Lock (OK/FLT)
DMUX_xxx'cr' Demux Lock (OK/FLT)
2047_xxx'cr' 2047 Pattern Lock Detect (OK/FLT)
BUFF_xxx'cr' Buffer Full (OK/FLT)
INS_xxx'cr' D&I Insert (OK/FLT)
Common Command: <add/CSF_#'cr'

Equipment Response: >add/CSF_# hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YYYY'cr'
Stored Faults M&C_xxx'cr' Monitor & Control Module (OK/FLT)
INT_xxx'cr' Data Interface/Overhead Module (OK/FLT)
BAT_xxx'cr' Battery/Clock (OK/FLT)
-12_xxx'cr' -12V Power Supply (OK/FLT)
ST_xxx'cr''lf'] Self Test (OK/FLT)
Interface Command: <add/IASF_#'cr'

Alarms Stored Response: >add/IASF_# hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YYYY'cr'
Faults TXBWA1_xxx'cr' TX Backward Alarm 1 (FLT/OK)
RXBWA4_xxx'cr''lf'] RX Backward Alarm 4 (FLT/OK)
Reed-Solomon Command: <add/RSSF_#'cr'

Unavailable Response: >add/RSSF_# hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YYYY'cr'
Seconds UNA_xxx'cr''lf'] Unavailable Seconds (FLT/OK)
A–47
A.17 Bulk Consolidated Analog Status

Bulk Consol. Command: <add/BCAS_'cr' This command is similar to the 'BCS_' command, but returns
Analog Response: >add/BCAS_p1,p2,p3, . . . pn'cr''lf'] modem analog parameters. Additional status of new options
Status and features will always be appended to the end.
Where 'pn' is the last parameter returned.
Parameter Parameter Name

Number (Command Reference) Description
1 Receive Signal Level p1 = xsnn.n, receive signal level in dBm.
(ref. 'RSL_' command).
2 Raw BER p2 = xm.mE-ee.

(ref. 'RBER_' command).
3 Corrected BER p3 = xm.mE-ee.

(ref. 'CBER_' command).
4 Interface Read Error Status p4 = tttt_xm.mE-ee.

(ref. 'IRES_' command).
5 EB/N0 p5 = xnn.n, EB/N0 in dB.

(ref. 'EBN0_' command).
6 Buffer Fill Status p6 = nn%, buffer fill status.

(ref. 'IBFS_' command).
Note: Parameters 2 through 6 are dependent on carrier acquisition, if the decoder is not locked empty data blocks are returned (,,,,,).
A–48
A.18 Bulk Consolidated Status

This command causes bulk modem status to be returned. To reduce the length of the response, message parameter
data are returned without identifiers. However, parameter identification can be determined by order of return. Each
status parameter is terminated with a ',' (comma) except for the last parameter which has the standard message
termination sequence ('cr''lf']). Most of the data returned is formatted the same way as the single command status
request (refer to the appropriate portions of this document in preceding sections). Additional configuration status of
new options and features will always be appended to the end.
Bulk Consol. Command: <add/BCS_'cr' Where 'pn' is the last parameter returned.
Status Response: >add/BCS_p1,p2,p3, . . . pn'cr''lf']
Parameter Parameter Name

Number (Command Reference) Description
1 Modulator RF output p1 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).
(ref. 'RF_' command).
2 Modulator IF frequency p2 = nnn.nnnnnn, IF frequency in MHz.

(ref. 'MF_' command).
3 Modulator rate p3 = nnnn_mmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbps.

(ref. 'MR_' command).
4 Modulator preset 'A' assignment p4 = nnnn_mmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbps.

(ref. 'ARMA_' command).
5 Modulator preset 'B' assignment p5 = nnnn_mmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbps.

(ref. 'ARMB_' command).
6 Modulator preset 'C' assignment p6 = nnnn_mmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbps.

(ref. 'ARMC_' command).
7 Modulator preset 'D' p7 = nnnn_mmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbps.

(ref. 'ARMD_' command).
8 Modulator preset 'V' assignment p8 = nnnn_mmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbps.

(ref. 'ARMV_' command).
9 Modulator power offset p9 = snn.n, modulator power offset in dB.

(ref. 'MPO_' command).
10 Modulator output power level p10 = snn.n, transmitter output power level in dBm.
(ref. 'MOP_' command).
A–49
11 Scrambler enable p11 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).

(ref. 'SE_' command).
12 Differential encoder enable p12 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).
(ref. 'DENC_' command).
13 Modulator type p13 = n, where 'n' is '0' (EFD), '1' (INTL), '3' (FDC), '4'
(ref. 'MT_' command). (CSC), or '6' (SDM51).
14 Modulator encoder type p14 = n, where 'n' is '0' ( SEQ), '1' (VIT), ‘2’ (Turbo)
(ref. 'MET_' command).
15 Carrier only mode ON/OFF. p15 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).
16 Demodulator IF p16 = nnn.nnnnnn, demodulator IF frequency in MHz.

(ref. 'DF_' command).
17 Demodulator rate p17 = nnnn_mmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbps.

(ref. 'DR_' command).
18 Demodulator preset A p18 = nnnn_mmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbps.

(ref. 'ADRA_' command).
19 Demodulator preset B assignment p19 = nnnn_mmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbps.

(ref. 'ADRB_' command).
20 Demodulator preset C assignment p20 = nnnn_mmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbps.

(ref. 'ADRC_' command).
21 Demodulator preset D assignment p21 = nnnn_mmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbps.

(ref. 'ADRD_' command).
22 Demodulator preset V assignment p22 = nnnn_mmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbps.

(ref. 'ADRV_' command).
23 Descrambler enable p23 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).

(ref. 'DE_' command).
24 Differential decoder p24 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).

(ref. 'DDEC_' command).
A–50
25 RF loopback p25 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).

(ref. 'RFL_' command).
26 IF loopback p26 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).

(ref. 'IFL_' command).
27 Sweep center frequency p27 = snnnnn, sweep center frequency in Hertz.

(ref. 'SCF_' command).
28 Sweep width range p28 = nnnnn, sweep range in Hertz.

(ref. 'SWR_' command).
29 Sweep reacquisition p29 = nnn, reacquisition time in seconds.

(ref. 'SR_' command).
30 BER threshold p30 = xxxx, BER threshold.

(ref. 'BERT_' command).
31 Demodulator type p31 = n, where 'n' is '0' (EFD), '1' (INTL), '3' (FDC), or '4'
(ref. 'DT_' command). (CSC).
32 Demodulator decoder type p32 = n, where 'n' is '0' (SEQ), '1' (VIT), ‘2’ (Turbo)
(ref. 'DDT_' command).
33 Transmit clock source p33 = n, where 'n' is '0' (INT), '1' (REF), '2' (EXT), or 6
(ref. 'TC_' command). (DATA).
34 External reference frequency p34 = nnnnn.n, external reference frequency in kHz.

(ref. 'ERF_' command).
35 Transmit clock phase p35 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM), '1' (INV), '2' (AUTO).
(ref. 'TCP_' command).
36 Receive clock phase p36 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM), '1' (INV).
(ref. 'RCP_' command).
37 Baseband loopback p37 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).

ref. 'BBL_' command).
38 Interface loopback p38 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).

(ref. 'ILB_' command).
39 Interface loop timing p39 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).
(ref. 'ILT_' command).
A–51
40 TX Interface coding format p40 = n, where 'n' is '0' (AMI), '2' (B8ZS), or '3' (HDB3).
(ref. 'ICFT_' command).
41 RX Interface coding format p41 = n, where 'n' is '0' (AMI), '2' (B8ZS), or '3' (HDB3).
(ref. 'ICFR_' command).
42 Buffer clock source p42 = n, where 'n' is '0' (INT), '1' (REF), '2' (EXT), '3' (SAT),
(ref. 'BC_' command). '5' (INS).
43 Interface RX-T1 frame structure p43 = n, where n is '0' (NONE) or '1' (G704).
(ref. 'IRFS_' command).
44 reserved null field.
45 Interface RX-E1 frame structure p45 = n, where n is '0' (NONE) or '1' (G704).
(ref. 'IRFS_' command).
47 Interface Buffer Programming p47 = n, where 'n' is '0' (BITS) or '1' (MS).
(ref. 'IBP_' command).
48 Interface buffer size p48 = nnnnnn, buffer size in bits or milli seconds.
(ref. 'IBS _' command).
49 Interface transmit overhead type p49 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NONE), '1' (IDR), '2' (IBS), '3' (DI),
(ref. 'ITOT_' command). '4' (ASYNC).
50 Interface receive overhead type p50 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NONE), '1' (IDR), '2' (IBS), '3' (DI),
(ref. 'IROT_' command). '4' (ASYNC).
Interface substitution pattern p51 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
51
(ref. 'ISP_' command).
Interface read error p52 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
52
(ref. 'IRE_' command).
Transmit data fault p53 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NONE), '1' (DATA), or '2' (AIS).
53
(ref. 'TDF_' command).
Receive data fault p54 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NONE), '1' (DATA), or '2' (AIS).
54
(ref. 'RDF_' command).
A–52
55 Interface service channel TX1 p55 = nnn, service channel level in dBm.
(ref. 'ISCL_' command).
56 Interface service channel TX2 p56 = nnn, service channel level in dBm.
57 Interface service channel RX1 p57 = nnn, service channel level in dBm.
58 Interface service channel RX2 p58 = nnn, service channel level in dBm.
59 System modem type p59 = n, where 'n' is '0' (IDR), '1' (IBS), ''2' (EFD), 3'
(ref. 'SMT_' command). (CUSTOM), '4' (DI), '5' (ASYNC), or ‘8’ (AUPC).
60 Modem operation mode p60 = n, where 'n' is '1' (TX_ONLY), '2' (RX_ONLY), '3'
(ref. 'MOM_' command). (DUPLEX).
61 MODEM REMOTE/LOCAL mode. p61 = n, where 'n' is '0' (LOCAL), '1' (REMOTE).
62 Transmit data phase p62 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM), '1' (INV).
(ref. 'TDP_' command).
63 Receive data phase p63 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM), '1' (INV).
(ref. 'RDP_' command).
(Note 1) 64 Drop Data Format p64 = n, where 'n' is '0' (T1), '1' (T1ESF), '2' (E1CCS), '3'
(ref. 'DDF_' command). (E1CAS), '6' (E131TS), '7' (T1S), and '8' (T1ESFS).
Insert Data Format p65 = n, where 'n' is '0' (T1), '1' (T1ESF), '2' (E1CCS), '3'
(Note 2) 65
(E1CAS), '6' (E131TS), '7' (T1S), and '8' (T1ESFS).
(ref. 'IDF_' command).
p66 = dd;cc_dd;cc_dd;cc_dd;cc......, as defined by the

(Note 1) 66 Bulk Drop Channels Assignment. BDCA_ command.
p67 = ii;cc_ii;cc_ii;cc_ii;cc......, as defined by the BICA_

(Note 2) 67 Bulk Insert Channels Assignment. command.
p68 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).

(Note 2) 68 Insert E1 CRC Enable
(ref. 'ICRC_' command).
A–53
69 Modem Reference Clock p69 = n, where 'n' is '0' (INT), '1' (EXT1), '2' (EXT5), '3'
(ref. 'MRC_' command). (EXT10), or '4' (EXT20), respectively.
70 Modulator Spectrum Rotation p70 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM), '1' (INV).
(ref. 'MSR_' command).
71 Demodulator Spectrum Rotation p71 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM), '1' (INV).
(ref. 'DSR_' command).
72 Reed-Solomon Encoder Enable p72 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).
(ref. 'RSEN_' command).
73 Reed-Solomon Decoder Enable p73 = n, where 'n' is '0'(OFF), '1' (ON), '2' (CORR_OFF).
(ref. 'RSDE_' command).
(Note 5) 74 Backward Alarm enable TX1 p74 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).
(ref. 'BW_TX1_' command).
(Note 5) 76 Backward Alarm enable p76 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).
(Note 6) 78 Backward Alarm enable RX1 p78 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).
(ref. 'BW_RX1_' command).
82 TX Driver Type p82 = n, where 'n' is '0' (G.703), '1' (V.35), '2' (RS422), or '3'
(ref. 'TXDR_' command). (RS232).
83 RX Driver Type p83 = n, where 'n' is '0' (G.703), '1' (V.35), '2' (RS422), or '3'
(ref. 'RXDR_' command). (RS232).
A–54
(Note 3) 85 ASYNC TX Overhead Baud Rate p85 = nnnnn, where 'nnnnn' is the currently programmed
(ref. 'TOBR_' command). baud rate.
(Note 4) 86 ASYNC RX Overhead Baud Rate p86 = nnnnn, where 'nnnnn' is the currently programmed
(ref. 'ROBR_' command). baud rate.
(Note 3) 87 ASYNC TX Channel Char. Length p87 = n, where 'n' is the currently programmed character
length.
(ref. 'TCCL_' command).
p88 = n, where 'n' is the currently programmed character

(Note 4) 88 ASYNC RX Channel Char. Length
length.
(ref. 'RCCL_' command).
(Note 3) 89 ASYNC TX Channel Stop p89 = n, where 'n' is the current number of stop bits
(ref. 'TCSB_' command). programmed.
ASYNC RX Channel Stop Bits p90 = n, where 'n' is the current number of stop bits
(Note 4) 90
programmed.
(ref. 'RCSB_' command).
p91 = xxxx, where 'xxxx' is the currently programmed

(Note 3) 91 ASYNC TX Channel Parity
parity.
(ref. 'TOCP_' command).
p92 = xxxx, where 'xxxx' is the currently programmed
(Note 4) 92 ASYNC RX Channel Parity parity.
(ref. 'ROCP_' command).
(Note 3) 93 ASYNC TX Communications Type p93 = n, where 'n' is '0' (RS232), '1' (RS485_4WIRE), '2'
(ref. 'TCT_' command). (RS485_2WIRE).
(Note 4) 94 ASYNC RX Communications Type p94 = n, where 'n' is '0' (RS232), '1' (RS485).
(ref. 'RCT_' command).
(Note 15) 95 AUPC Local Power enable ON/OFF p95 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).
(ref. 'LPC_' command).
(Note 15) 96 AUPC Nominal Power Value p96 = snn.n, where 'snn.n' Nominal Power Value in dBm.
(ref. 'NOMP_' command).
(Note 15) 97 AUPC Minimum Power Value p97 = snn.n, where 'snn.n' Minimum Power Value in dBm.
(ref. 'MINP_' command).
(Note 15) 98 AUPC Maximum Power Value p98 = snn.n, where 'snn.n' Maximum Power Value in dBm.
(ref. 'MAXP_' command).
A–55
(Note 16) 99 AUPC EBN0 Target Set Point p99 = nn.n, where 'nn.n' EBN0 Target Set Point in dB.
(ref. 'ENSP_' command).
(Note 16) 100 AUPC Max. Tracking Rate p100 = n.n, where 'n.n' is the Max. Tracking Rate in dB/Min.
(ref. 'MAXT_' command).
(Note 15) 101 AUPC Local Carrier Loss p101 = n, where 'n' is '0' (HOLD), '1' (NOMINAL), or '2'
(MAXIMUM).
(ref. 'LCL_' command).
p102 = n, where 'n' is '0' (HOLD), '1' (NOMINAL), or '2'

(Note 15) 102 AUPC Remote Carrier Loss
(MAXIMUM).
(ref. 'RCL_' command).

p105 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM), '1' (INV).
105 Transmit BPSK Data Ordering
(ref. 'TDA_' command).
p106 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM), '1' (INV).

106 Receive BPSK Data Ordering
(ref. 'RDA_' command).
p107 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).

107 RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref. 'RTSM_' command).
p108 = nn, CTS delay time in seconds.

108 CTS Delay Time
(ref. 'CTSD_' command).
p109 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF),'1' (CENTER-CW), '2'

109 Carrier Only Mode (DUAL-CW), '3' (OFFSET-CW).
(ref. 'COM_' command).
p110 = n, where 'n' is '0' (AUDIO), '1' (DATA).
(Note 5) 110 IDR TX ESC Type
(ref. 'TET_' command).
p111 = n, where 'n' is '0' (AUDIO), '1' (DATA).
(Note 6) 111 IDR RX ESC Type
(ref. 'RET_' command).
p112 = nn, Interleave value.
112 TX Reed-Solomon Interleave Value
(ref. 'TRSI_' command).
A–56
113 RX Reed-Solomon Interleave Value p113 = nn, Interleave value.

(ref. 'RRSI_' command).
117 TX 8PSK 2/3 IESS-310 Operation p117 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).
(ref. 'T310_' command).
118 RX 8PSK 2/3 IESS-310 Operation p118 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).
(ref. 'R310_' command).
(Note 8) 119 Flex Mux Channel #1 Enable p119 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Disabled), '1' (D&I), or '2' (for
(ref. "TCEN_1" command). T1/E1) operation.
(Note 9) 120 TX Flex Mux Channel #1 Data Rate p120 = nnnn.n, where 'nnnn.n' is the data rate in Kbps.
(ref. "TCDR_1" command).
(Note 8) 121 TX Flex Mux Channel #2 Enable p121 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Disabled), '1' (Enabled).
(ref. "TCEN_2" command).
(Note 8) 122 TX Flex Mux Channel #3 Enable p122 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Disabled), '1' (Sync RS422), '2'
(ref. "TCEN_3" command). (Async RS422), '3' (Sync RS232), '4' (Async RS232), or '5'
(AUPC operation).
(Note 10) 123 TX Flex Mux Channel #3 Data Rate p123 = nnnn.n, where 'nnnn.n' is the data rate in Kbps.
(Note 10) 124 TX Flex Mux Channel #3 Clock Phase p124 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Normal) or '1' (Invert).
(ref. "TCCP_3" command).
A–57
(Note 10) 125 TX Flex Mux Channel #3 Data Phase p125 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Normal) or '1' (Invert).
(ref. "TCDP_3" command).
(Note 8) 126 TX Flex Mux Channel #4 Enable p126 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Disabled), '1' (Sync RS232), '2'
(ref. "TCEN_4" command). (Async RS232), '3' (Async RS485), or '4' (AUPC operation).
p127 = nnnn.n, where 'nnnn.n' is the data rate in Kbps.

(Note 11) 127 TX Flex Mux Channel #4 Data Rate
p128 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Normal) or '1' (Invert).
(Note 11) 128 TX Flex Mux Channel #4 Clock Phase
(ref. "TCCP_4" command).
(Note 11) 129 TX Flex Mux Channel #4 Data Phase
(ref. "TCDP_4" command).
p130 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Disabled), '1' (D&I), or '2' (T1/E1
(Note 8) 130 RX Flex Mux Channel #1 Enable operation).
(ref. "RCEN_1" command).
(Note 12) 131 RX Flex Mux Channel #1 Data Rate
(ref. "RCDR_1" command).
p132 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Disabled), '1' (Enabled).
(Note 8) 132 RX Flex Mux Channel #2 Enable
p133 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Disabled), '1' (Sync RS422), '2'
(Async RS422), '3' (Sync RS232), '4' (Async RS232), or '5'
(AUPC operation).


(Note 13) 135 RX Flex Mux Channel #3 Clock Phase
(ref. "RCCP_3" command).
(Note 13) 136 RX Flex Mux Channel #3 Data Phase

(ref. "RCDP_3" command).
p137 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Disabled), '1' (Sync RS232), '2'
(Async RS232), '3' (Async RS485), or '4' (AUPC operation).
(ref. "RCEN_4" command). p138 = nnnn.n, where 'nnnn.n' is the data rate in Kbps.

A–58
(Note 14) 139 RX Flex Mux Channel #4 Clock Phase p139 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Normal) or '1' (Invert).
(ref. "RCCP_4" command).
(Note 14) 140 RX Flex Mux Channel #4 Data Phase p140 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Normal) or '1' (Invert).
(ref. "RCDP_4" command).
(Note 17) 141 G.703 Operation P141 = n, where ‘n’ is ‘0’ for UNBAL or ‘1’ for BAL.
(ref. “G7LT_”command)
Notes:
1. Data will only be returned if TX Overhead is programmed for D&I (or TX Flex MUX D&I). Comma is always returned.
2. Data will only be returned if RX Overhead is programmed for D&I (or RX Flex MUX D&I). Comma is always returned.
3. Data will only be returned if TX Overhead is programmed for ASYNC. Comma is always returned.
4. Data will only be returned if RX Overhead is programmed for ASYNC. Comma is always returned.
5. Data will only be returned if TX Overhead is programmed for IDR. Comma is always returned.
6. Data will only be returned if RX Overhead is programmed for IDR. Comma is always returned.
7. Not Used.
8. Data is only returned if Flex MUX PCB (Card Slot #1) is installed.. Comma is always returned.
9. Data not returned if TX Channel #1 is disabled. Comma is always returned.
10. Data not returned if TX Channel #3 is disabled or set for AUPC. Comma is always returned.
11. Data not returned if TX Channel #4 is disabled or set for AUPC. Comma is always returned.
12. Data not returned if RX Channel #1 is disabled. Comma is always returned.
13. Data not returned if RX Channel #3 is disabled or set for AUPC. Comma is always returned.
14. Data not returned if RX Channel #4 is disabled or set for AUPC. Comma is always returned (except for last parameter).
15. Data will only be returned if TX Overhead is programmed for ASYNC/AUPC. (or TX Flex Mux AUPC). Comma is always
returned.
16. Data will only be returned if RX Overhead is programmed for ASYNC/AUPC. (or RX Flex Mux AUPC). Comma is always
returned.
17. Data will only be returned if G.703 Personality PCB is installed. Comma is always returned.
A–59
A.19 Bulk Consolidated Status Faults
Bulk Command: <add/BCSF_'cr' This command causes all modem fault status to be returned.
Consoli- Response: >add/BCSF_abcdefghijklmnopqr'cr''lf'] To reduce the length of the response, fault status is embedded
dated Status into the bit structure of the characters that are returned. Faults
Faults are indicated by a binary 1 in the designated bit position.
Character 'a': Modulator fault status character 1.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Modulator module fault.
Bit 4 = RF output status, actual not programmed status
(1 = on, 0 = off).
Bit 3 through Bit 0 = Binary representation (0 to 10) of the
number of modulator stored faults.
Character 'b': Modulator fault status character 2.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = IF Synthesizer.
Bit 4 = reserved.
Bit 5 = Data Clock Synthesizer.
Bit 2 = I Channel.
Bit 1 = Q Channel.
Bit 0 = AGC Level.
Character 'c': Modulator fault status character 3.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Modem Reference PLL Lock.
Bit 4 = reserved.
Bit 3 = Configuration.
Bit 2 = Modem Reference Activity.
Bit 1 = reserved.
Bit 0 = reserved.
Character 'd': Demodulator fault status character 1.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Demod module fault.
Bit 4 = Carrier detect status (0 for decoder lock).
number of demodulator stored faults.
Character 'e': Demodulator fault status character 2.
A–60
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = IF Synthesizer Lock.
Bit 4 = reserved.
Bit 3 = I Channel.
Bit 2 = Q Channel.
Bit 1 = reserved.
Bit 0 = BER threshold.
Character 'f': Demodulator fault status character 3.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = reserved.
Bit 3 = reserved.
Bit 2 = reserved.
Bit 1 = reserved.
Bit 0 = reserved.
Character 'g': Interface transmit side faults character 1.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = reserved.
Bit 4 = reserved.
number of interface transmit side stored faults.
Character 'h': Interface transmit side faults character 2.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Transmit Data/AIS.
Bit 4 = Transmit Synthesizer PLL Lock.
Bit 3 = Selected Transmit Clock Activity.
Bit 2 = reserved.
Bit 0 = Drop fault.
Character 'i': Interface transmit side faults character 3.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = TX Audio Channel 1 Clip.
Bit 4 = TX Audio Channel 2 Clip.
Bit 3 = reserved.
Bit 2 = reserved.
Bit 1 = reserved.
Bit 0 = reserved.
Character 'j': Interface receive side faults character 1.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
A–61
Bit 5 = Insert fault.

Bit 4 = reserved.
number of interface receive side stored faults.
Character 'k': Interface receive side faults character 2.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Buffer Underflow.
Bit 4 = Buffer Overflow.
Bit 3 = Receive Data Loss/AIS.
Bit 2 = Frame BER.
Bit 1 = Receive Backward Alarm.
Bit 0 = Selected Buffer Clock Activity.
Character 'l': Interface receive side faults character 3.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Buffer Clock PLL Lock.
Bit 4 = Demux Lock.
Bit 3 = 2047 Pattern Lock Detect.
Bit 2 = Buffer Full.
Bit 1 = reserved.
Character 'm': Interface receive side faults character 4.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = RX Audio Channel 1 Clip.
Bit 4 = RX Audio Channel 2 Clip.
Bit 3 = reserved.
Bit 2 = reserved.
Bit 1 = reserved.
Bit 0 = reserved.
Character 'n': Common equipment fault status character 1.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Monitor & Control Module.
Bit 4 = Interface Module.
number of common equipment stored faults.
Character 'o': Common equipment fault status character 2.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Battery/Clock.
A–62
Bit 4 = +5V power supply.

Bit 3 = reserved.
Bit 2 = +12V power supply.
Bit 1 = -12V power supply.
Bit 0 = reserved.
Character 'p': Interface backward alarm status character 1.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = TX Backward Alarm 1.
number of backward alarm stored faults.
Character 'q': Interface backward alarm status character 2.

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 3 = RX Backward Alarm 1.
Character 'r': Interface Reed-Solomon Unavailable Seconds

Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = not used.
Bit 4 = not used.
number of Reed-Solomon Unavailable Seconds stored faults.
A–63
A.20 Miscellaneous Status
Change Command: <add/CS_'cr' Where:

Status Response: >add/CS_x'cr''lf']
The 'x' character is defined as follows:
'@' = no change since last BCS_ and BCSF_ polls.
'A' = BCS_ response has changed since last BCS_ poll.
'B' = BCSF_ response has changed since last BCSF_ poll.
'C' = Both responses have changed since last BCS_ and

BCSF_ polls.
This command indicates that a change has or has not occurred

on either the BCS_ or the BCSF_ response since the last
BCS_ or BCSF_ poll.
Equipment Command: <add/ET_'cr' Where:

Type Response: >add/ET_tttttttt_xxx.yyy.zzz'cr''lf'] tttttttt = Equipment type.
xxx.yyy.zzz = Software version.
Monitor & Command: <add/MCFI_'cr' Where:

Control Response: >add/MCFI_'cr'
Firmware VER_xxx.yyy.zzz'cr' xxx.yyy.zzz = Software version number (0.0.0 to 999.999.999).
Information
FW/nnnnnn-ddr'cr'
mm/dd/yy'cr''lf'] nnnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 999999).
dd = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
r = Firmware revision (-, or A to Z).
DATA ROM Command: <add/DFI_'cr' Where:

Firmware Response: >add/DFI_'cr' nnnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 999999).
Information FW/nnnnnn-ddr'cr' dd = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
mm/dd/yy'cr' r = Firmware revision (-, or A to Z).
TURBO: FW/nnnnnn-ddr’cr’’lf’]
Notes:
1. If Dash number is not used, '-dd' will be reported.
2. Turbo FW information returned only if TPC PCB is
installed
A–64
Boot M&C Command: <add/BFI_'cr' Where:

Firmware Response: >add/BFI_'cr'
Information VER_xxx.yyy.zzz'cr' xxx.yyy.zzz = Software version number (0.0.0 to 999.999.999).
FW/nnnnnn-ddr'cr'
mm/dd/yy'cr''lf'] nnnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 999999).
dd = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
r = Firmware revision (-, or A to Z).
Modem Command: <add/MOI_'cr'

Options/ Response: >add/MOI_'cr'
Misc. s,HGH_PWR'cr' (0 or +) High Power
Information s,HGH_STAB'cr' (0 or +) High Stability
s,ASLT'cr' (- or +) Asymmetrical Loop Timing
s,VIT'cr' (- or +) Viterbi Encoder/Decoder
s,SEQ'cr' (- or +) Sequential Encoder/Decoder
s,SR'cr' (- or +) Single Code/Data Rate
s,LRV'cr' (- or +) Low Rate Variable
s,FRV'cr' (- or +) Full Rate Variable
s,CARD_1_PCB'cr' (X or +) Card #1 Installed
s,8PSK_2/3'cr' (- or +) 8PSK 2/3 Code Rate
s,TX_ONLY'cr' (0 or +) TX Only Operation
s,RX_ONLY'cr' (0 or +) RX Only Operation
s,OQPSK’cr’’If’] (- or +) OQPSK 1/2, 3/4, 7/8
Notes:
1. S = 0 (Not Installed, Not Upgradable).
2. - (Not Installed, FAST Upgradable).
3. + (Installed).
4. X (Not Installed, Field Upgradable).
Card #1 Command: <add/C1TI_'cr' Where: ttttt = type (OH_01, MUX_01, FMUX_01, or

Type Response: >add/C1TI_'cr' NOT_INSTALLED).
Information ttttt'cr''lf']
Card #2 Command: <add/C2TI_'cr' Where: tttt = type (RS_02, RS_03,TURBO_INSTALLED,

Type Response: >add/C2TI_'cr' RS_DUPLEX, or NOT_INSTALLED).
Information tttt'cr''lf']
Card #3 Command: <add/C3TI_'cr' Where: tttt = type (RS_02, RS_03, TURBO_INSTALLED,

Type Response: >add/C3TI_'cr' RS_DUPLEX, or NOT_INSTALLED).
Information tttt'cr''lf']
A–65
Card #1 Command: <add/C1OI_'cr'

Options/ Response: >add/C1OI_'cr'
Misc.
Information OH_01 list:
s,G.703 'cr' (- or +)
s,IBS 'cr' (- or +)
s,ASYNC_AUPC'cr' (- or +)
s,D&I 'cr' (- or +)
s,IDR 'cr''lf'] (- or +)
MUX_01 list:
s,4_CHAN_SYNC'cr' (- or +)
s,8_CHAN_SYNC'cr' (- or +)
s,4_CHAN_ASYNC'cr' (- or +)
s,8_CHAN_ASYNC'cr''lf'] (- or +)
Notes:
1. Card #1 Installed Only.
2. s = - (Not Installed, FAST Upgradable).
3. + (Installed).

Misc.
Information RS_02 list:
s,INTELSAT'cr''lf'] (- or +)
s, AUPC’cr’’lf’]
RS_03 list: (- or +)
s,INTELSAT'cr''lf']
s, AUPC’cr’’lf’] Notes:
3. + (Installed).
A–66

Misc.
Information RS_02 list:
s,AUPC’cr’’lf’] (- or +)
RS_03 list:
s, AUPC’cr’’lf’] (- or +)
Duplex Reed-Solomon
Intelsat (- or +)
AUPC (- or +)
Notes:
3. + (Installed).
Serial Command: <add/SNUM_'cr' Where: xxxxxxxxx = Serial number 000000000 to 999999999.

Number Response: >add/SNUM_'cr'
MODEM_xxxxxxxxx'cr' Notes:
CARD_1_xxxxxxxxx'cr' (Note 1) 1. Data is only returned if Card #1 is installed.
CARD_2_xxxxxxxxx'cr' (Note 2) 2. Data is only returned if Card #2 is installed.
CARD_3_xxxxxxxxx'cr''lf'] (Note 3) 3. Data is only returned if Card #3 is installed.
A–67
State Of Command: <add/SOP_'cr'

Product Response: >add/SOP_'cr'
add'cr' Product Address: Where: add =- Address (1 to 255)
(Remove abc'cr' Data Format: abc = Explained below:
setup rrrrr bps'cr' Baud Rate:
information)
<var-string1>'cr' COMM Type: a = Number of data bits (7).
<var-string2>'cr''lf']
b = Parity type (O, E, N).
c = Number of stop bits (2).
rrrrr = baud rate ("150", "300", "600", "1200", "2400", "4800",

"9600", "14.4K", "19.2K").
communication hardware type "RS-485, 2 wire", "RS-485,

4 wire", "RS-232".
<var_string2> = Variable length strings explaining the intention

of the product. "Under normal system operation", "REFLASH
of BULK firmware required", "REFLASH of M&C firmware
required".
A–68
Glossary
The following is a list of acronyms and abbreviations that may be found in this manual.
Acronym Definition
Ω Ohms
8PSK 8 Phase Shift Keying
A Ampere
AC Alternating Current
ADJ Adjust
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
AM Amplitude Modulation
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASYNC Asynchronous
AUPC Automatic Uplink Power Control
BB Baseband
bps bits per second
BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying
C Celsius
CLK Clock
COM Common
CS Clear to Send
CTS Clear to Send
CW Continuous Wave
dB Decibels
dBc Decibels referred to carrier
dBm Decibels referred to 1.0 milliwatt
DC Direct Current
DCE Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
Demod Demodulator
DM Data Mode
DSR Data Signal Rate
g-1
Glossary MN/SDM300A.IOM
EIA Electronic Industries Association

EMC Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
ESC Engineering Service Circuit or Engineering Service Channel
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
EXT REF CLK External Reference Clock
FAST Fully Accessible System Topology
FIFO First in/First Out
FW Firmware
GND Ground
Hz Hertz (cycle per second)
I/O Input/Output
IF Intermediate Frequency
INV Invert
kbps Kilobits per second
kHz Kilohertz (103 Hertz)
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light-Emitting Diode
lf Line Feed
m mille (10-3)
M&C Monitor and Control
Max Maximum
Mbps Megabits per second
MC Monitor and Control
MFS Multiframe Sync
MHz Megahertz (106 Hertz)
Mod Modulator
MOP Modulated Output Power
MSB Most Significant Bit
MUX Multiplexer
n nano (10-9)
N/A Not Applicable
NC No Connection or Normally Closed
NO Normally Open
NRM Normal
OQPSK Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
p pico (10-12)
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PLL Phase-Locked Loop
PPM Parts Per Million
PSK Phase Shift Keying
QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
RAM Random Access Memory
RD Receive Data
RF Radio Frequency
RR Receiver Ready
RS Ready to Send
RT Receive Timing
RTS Request to Send
RX Receive (Receiver)
RXD Receive Data
s Second
SCT Serial Clock Transmit
SD Send Data
ST Send Timing
g-2
SYNC Synchronize
TT Terminal Timing
TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic
TX Transmit (Transmitter)
TXCLK Transmit Clock
TXD Transmit Data
UB Universal Brreakout box
US United States
V Volts
VAC Volts, Alternating Current
VCO Voltage-Controlled Oscillator
VDC Volts, Direct Current
VIT Viterbi
W Watt
g-3
g-4
Index
50-Pin Connector Assignments, 15-8

8-Channel Multiplexer, 14-1
8-Channel Multiplexer 100-Pin Connector (J10), 14-5
8-Channel Multiplexer Specifications, 14-4
8-PSK Performance with Noise and with/without
Reed-Solomon, 19-20
A C
Acquisition Time, 19-22 Channel Spacing/Adjacent Carrier Performance, 19-16
AGC Output, 21-23Alarms Connector and Pinouts (J10), 4-15 Closed Network, 2-14
Asymmetrical Loop Timing, 12-1 Closed Network Modes, 9-5
ASYNC, 11-7 Clocking Options, 7-1
ASYNC/AUPC Modem Defaults, 11-24 Commands/Responses Format, A-3
ASYNC/AUPC Operation, 6-5 Compatibility, 1-9
ASYNC Channel EIA-485 2-and 4-Wire Operation, 11-10 Comparison of all TPC Modes, 9-8
ASYNC Data Interfaces, 11-7 Comtech EF Data Part Numbers, 1-11
ASYNC Remote Operation, 11-12 Converting Between Bits and Seconds, 8-6
Asynchronous Interface/AUPC, 11-1 Custom Modem Defaults, 5-110
AUPC, 11-4 Custom Operation, 6-7
AUPC - Between Two Modems, 11-5
Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC), A-22 D
Auxiliary 1 Connector and Pinouts (J9), 4-14
Available Interfaces, 2-13 D&I Framing, 10-24
D&I Framing Formats, 10-20
B D&I G.703 Master/Master, 7-7
D&I Modem Defaults, 10-23
Backward Alarm, 10-20 D&I Operation, 6-4
Backward Alarm Theory and Connections, 2-15 D&I Primary Data Interface, 10-24
Baseband Loopback Operation, 11-9 D&I Specification, 10-14
BER Performance Specifications, 19-16 Data Interference, 10-18
BER Threshold, 19-21 Data I/O Interface Connector (J8), 3-17, 4-6
Bits to Seconds, 8-6 Data I/O Interface Connector (J8) Installation, 3-18
BPSK BIT Ordering, 19-8, 19-14 Data I/O Connector (J8) Removal, 3-17
Breakout Panels, 1-9 Deinterleaver (Reed-Solomon Codec), 19-15
Buffer Operation, 11-8 Demodulation and FEC Decoding Types, 19-13
Buffer Size, 8-4 Demodulator Checkout, 18-6
Buffering, 8-1 Demodulator Configuration Commands, A-8
Bulk Consolidated Status Faults, A-60 Demodulator Configuration Status, A-32
Demodulator IF Input Shape,19-16
i-1
Index MN/SDM300A.IOM
Demodulator Spectrum Rotation, 19-15 Functional Select: Configuration: Modulator, 5-8

Demodulator Specification, 19-12 Functional Select: Configuration: Mux, 5-47
Descrambling Types,19-14 Functional Select: Configuration: Recall, 5-55
Demux Operation , 11-8 Functional Select: Configuration: Save, 5-55
Description of Decoder, 2-10 Functional Select: Monitor, 5-56
Description of Demodulator, 2-8 Functional Select: Remote AUPC (Conditional), 5-68
Description of FAST Options, 1-8 Functional Select: Stored FLTS/ALMS, 5-64
Description of Interface, 2-11 Functional Select: Utility, 5-72
Description of Interface Functions, 1-4 Functional Select: Utility: Demodulator, 5-78
Description of Modulator, 2-5 Functional Select: Utility: Interface, 5-83
Description of Monitor and Control, 2-1 Functional Select: Utility: Modem Type, 5-98
Device Address, A-3 Functional Select: Utility: Modulator, 5-73
Differential Encoder, 19-8, 19-14 Functional Select: Utility: System, 5-91
Digital Data Rate,19-5, 19-12
Dimensional Evelope, 19-34 G
Doppler, 8-4
Drop & Insert (D&I), 10-13 G.703, 10-25, 19-30
Duplex Reed-Solomon Codec, 13-1 G.703 AYSNC Interface, 4-13
Duplex Reed-Solomon Codec Installation, 3-13 G.703, E1/ASYNC Interface Adaopter Removal/Installation, 3-23
General, A-1
E Gound Connector (GND), 4-16
EFD CLosed Network Configuration, 6-6 H

EIA-232, EIA-422, or V.35 Master/Master, 7-1
EIA-232, EIA-422, or V.35 Master/Slave, 7-1 Hardware Upgrades, 3-6, 3-8, 3-20
EIA-232 Specifications, 19-27
EIA-422/EIA-449 MIL-188-114A Specification, 19-29 I
End-to-End Processing Delay, 9-7
IBS Clock and Dejitter, 10-6
End Character, A-3
IBS Engineering Service Channel, 10-6
Engineering Service Channel, 10-20
IBS Framing. 10-6
Environmental and Physical Specifications, 19-3
IBS Modem Defaults, 10-5
Error Performance, A-41
IBS Operation, 6-3
External Connections, 4-1
IBS Primary Data Interface, 10-6
External Modem Connections, 4-1
IBS Scramblling, 10-6
External Reference (CP3), 4-16
IBS Specification, 10-5
IDR Engineering Service Channel, 10-12
F IDR Framing, 10-12
Factory-Installed Options, 1-7 IDR Modem Defaults, 10-11
Factory-or-user-Installed Options, 1-7 IDR Operation, 6-2
FAST Accessible Options, 16-1 IDR Primary Data Interface, 10-12
FAST System Theory, 16-3 IDR Specification, 10-10
Fault Connector and Pinouts (J7), 4-5 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master, 7-2
Faults/Alarms Analysis, 18-12 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave, 7-2
Faults/Alarms Display, 18-8 Inoperability Modes, 19-33
Fault Isolation, 18-8 Implementation, 16-3
Flash Upgrading, 17-1 Installation, 3-2, 3-6, 3-9, 14-2, 15-5
Flex MUX, 16-1 Installation/Upgrades, 3-1
Flex MUX Configuration Commands, A-25 Intelsat Business System (IBS), 10-1
Forward Error Correction (Options), 9-1 Interface Checkout, 18-2
Frame/Multiframe Length, 8-6 Interface Configuration Commands, A-11
Frequency Reference, 18-9, 18-15 Interface Specification, 19-23
Front Panel, 5-1 Interleaver (Reed-Solomon Codec), 19-8
Front Panel Keyboard, 5-3 Intermidiate Data Rate (IDR), 10-7
Front Panel Operation, 5-1 Introduction, 1-1, 9-1, 9-7, 10-1, 14-1, 15-1, 16-1
Functional Description, 2-1
Functional Select: Configuration, 5-7 L
Functional Select: Configuration: Demodulator, 5-14
LED Indicators, 5-2
Functional Select: Configuration: Flex Mux, 5-49
Loopback Modes, 19-31
Functional Select: Configuration: Interface, 5-22
LoopTiming Operation, 11-9
Functional Select: Configuration: Local AUPC, 5-42
i–2
M Plesiochronous Buffer, 10-19

Plesiochronous/Doppler/Buffer, 2-13
Main PCB Firmware Chips, 3-20 Power Entry, 4-16
Menu System, 5-4
Message Structure, A-2
Miscellaneous Status, A-64 R
Modem Emulation Modes, 19-33 Receive DEMUX, 10-19
Modem Features, 1-3 Receive IF Carrier Acquisition Range, 19-22
Modem Remote Address, 19-32 Receive IF Carrier Reacquisition, 19-22
Modem Types, 6-1 Reed-Solomon Modes, 6-10
Modes of Operation, 1-4 Reed-Solomon Outer Codec, 9-4
Modulation and Encoding Types, 19-7 Reed-Solomon PCB, 3-6
Modulator Checkout, 18-3 Remote Address, 2-4
Modulator Configuration Commands, A-4 Remote Baud Rate, 2-4
Modulator Configuration Status, A-28 Remote Connector and Pinouts (J6), 4-4
Modulator Phase Error, 19-10 Remote Control, 19-32
Modulator Power Offset, 19-10 Remote Control Specification, 19-4, A-1
Modulator Spectrum Rotation, 19-11 Remove and Replace Power Supply, 18-19
Modulator Specifications, 19-5 Remove and Replace the Fan Assembly, 18-20
Monitored Signals, 19-32 Revision Emulation Operation, 5-5
Multiples of the Frame Length, 8-6 RF Input Connector (CP2), 4-16
MUX Operation, 11-8 RF Output Connector (CP1), 4-15
MUX PCB Configuration Commands, A-24
S
N
Scrambling Types, 20-8
New in this Manual, 1-14 SDM-100 Emulation Operation, 6-8
Non-ASYNC Operation, 11-10 SDM-6000 Emulation Operation, 6-9
Seconds to Bits, 8-6
O Self-Monitoring Local Modem AUPC Control, 11-6
Send Clock Timing Source, 20-23
Offset QPSK Decoding (Optional), 10-4 Sequential, 9-3
Open Network, 2-14 Software and hardware Installation/Upgrades, 3-4
Open Network Modes, 9-5 Specification, 20-1
Open Netwrok Operations, 10-1 Specification Summary, 20-1
Opening Screen, 5-7 Spurious Emissions, 20-10
Options, 1-7 Standard Features, 1-3
Overhead Interface PCB, 3-22 Start Character, A-2
Overhead Interface PCB Installation, 3-2, 3-4 Stored Faults, A-45
Overview, 1-3 System Checkout, 19-1
System Configuration Commands, A-20
P System Faults/Alarms, 19-8
Phase Noise, 19-9, 19-15 System Specifications, 20-31
Performance with Noise at 1544 kbps and Sequential
Decoder, 19-19 T
Performance with Noise at 1544 kbps and Sequential Terrestrial Data Interfaces, 11-7
Decoder and Reed-Solomon, 19-19 Terrestrial Interface Types, 19-26
Performance with Noise, 56 kbps, and Sequential Test Modes, 19-31
Decoder , 19-17 Theory of Modulation Types, 2-7
Performance with Noise Turbo Product Codec, 19-21 Theory of Operation, 2-1, 2-6, 10-18
Performance with Noise, Viterbi Decoder, and Closed Network Transmit Clock Source, 19-23
Mode, 19-17 Transmit Frequency (IF), 19-9
Performance with Noise, Viterbi Decoder, and Offset Transmit Freqency Change Time, 19-9, 19-15
QPSK, 19-21 Transmit IF Output Switch, 19-10, 19-15
Performance with Noise, Viterbi Decoder, and Open Network Transmit IF Power, 19-10
Mode, 19-17 Transmit IF Test Modes, 19-11
Performance with Noise, Viterbi Decoder, and Total Buffer Length, 8-6
Reed-Solomon , 19-18 Transmitted MUX, 10-18
Performance with Noise, Uncoded (1/1) BPSK, QPSK, and Offset Trellis Coding (FAST Option), 9-6
QPSK, 19-21 Troubleshooting, 18-1
Plesiochronous, 8-5 Turbo Codec Installation, 3-8
i-3
U Valid ASYNC Baud Rates, 11-11

Variable Data Rates, 16-6
UB-300 Universal Breakout Panel, 1-9 Viterbi, 9-2
UB-530 Breakout Panel, 1-9
UB-54 Breakout Panel, 1-10
Uncoded Operation (No FEC), 9-9
Unpacking, 3-1, 3-6, 3-8
Universal, 19-26
Utility: Factory Setup, 5-109
V
V.35 Specification V.10, V.11 Specification, Circuit
Supported, 20-28
i–4
METRIC CONVERSIONS
Units of Length
Unit Centimeter Inch Foot Yard Mile Meter Kilometer Millimeter
1 centimeter — 0.3937 0.03281 0.01094 6.214 x 10-6 0.01 — —
1 inch 2.540 — 0.08333 0.2778 1.578 x 10-5 0.254 — 25.4
1 foot 30.480 12.0 — 0.3333 1.893 x 10-4 0.3048 — —
1 yard 91.44 36.0 3.0 — 5.679 x 10-4 0.9144 — —
1 meter 100.0 39.37 3.281 1.094 6.214 x 10-4 — — —
1 mile 1.609 x 105 6.336 x 104 5.280 x 103 1.760 x 103 — 1.609 x 103 1.609 —
1 mm — 0.03937 — — — — — —
1 kilometer — — — — 0.621 — — —
Temperature Conversions
Unit ° Fahrenheit ° Centigrade Formulas
0
— C = (F - 32) * 0.555
32° Fahrenheit (water freezes)
100
— F = (C * 1.8) + 32
212° Fahrenheit (water boils)
273.1
—
-459.6° Fahrenheit (absolute 0)
Units of Weight
Ounce Ounce Pound Pound
Unit Gram Avoirdupois Troy Avoir. Troy Kilogram
1 gram — 0.03527 0.03215 0.002205 0.002679 0.001
1 oz. avoir. 28.35 — 0.9115 0.0625 0.07595 0.02835
1 oz. troy 31.10 1.097 — 0.06857 0.08333 0.03110
1 lb. avoir. 453.6 16.0 14.58 — 1.215 0.4536
1 lb. Troy 373.2 13.17 12.0 0.8229 — 0.3732
1 kilogram 1.0 x 103 35.27 32.15 2.205 2.679 —

2114 WEST 7TH STREET TEMPE ARIZONA 85281 USA
480 • 333 • 2200 PHONE
480 • 333 • 2161 FAX

Mn-Sdm300a r6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mn-Sdm300a r6

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mn-Sdm300a r6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SDM-300A

Part Number MN/SDM300A.IOM Revision 6

Subject: Appendix A. Remote Control Operation

Date: June 21, 2005

A.2 Message Structure

• Start Character ‘<’

Subject: Correct RS reference in 4.1.1 Remote Connector and Pinouts (J6)

Date: June 21, 2005

4.1.1 Remote Connector and Pinouts (J6)

Part Number MN/SDM300A.IOM

• Product support or training

A Customer Support representative may be reached at:

480.333.2200 (Main Comtech EF Data Number)

or, E-Mail can be sent to the Customer Support Department at:

Contact us via the web at www.comtechefdata.com.

To return a Comtech EF Data product (in-warranty and out-of-warranty) for repair or

1. Request a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number from the Comtech EF

Be prepared to supply the Customer Support representative with the model

3. Ship the product back to Comtech EF Data. (Shipping charges should be

Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................1–1

1.2 Options ........................................................................................................................................................1–6

1.3 Description of FAST Options.....................................................................................................................1–8

1.4 Compatibility ...............................................................................................................................................1–9

1.5 Breakout Panels..........................................................................................................................................1–9

1.6 Comtech EF Data Part Numbers..............................................................................................................1–10

1.7 New in this Release ..................................................................................................................................1–13

CHAPTER 2. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................2–1

2.1 Description of Monitor and Control (M&C) ...............................................................................................2–1

2.2 Decription of the Modulator .......................................................................................................................2–5

2.3 Description of the Demodulator ................................................................................................................2–8

2.4 Description of the Decoder ......................................................................................................................2–10

2.5 Description of the Interface .....................................................................................................................2–11

2.6 Backward Alarm Theory and Connections.............................................................................................2–15

3.2 Installation ...................................................................................................................................................3–2

3.3 Software and Hardware Installation/Upgrades.........................................................................................3–4

3.4 Reed-Solomon PCB ....................................................................................................................................3–6

3.5 Turbo Codec Installation............................................................................................................................3–8

3.6 Duplex Reed-Solomon Codec Installation..............................................................................................3–13

3.7 Data I/O Interface Connector (J8) Removal/Installation ........................................................................3–17

3.8 Hardware Upgrades ..................................................................................................................................3–20

CHAPTER 4. EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS......................................................................................................4–1

4.1 External Modem Connections....................................................................................................................4–1

CHAPTER 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION.....................................................................................................5–1

5.1 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................................................5–1

5.2 Menu System...............................................................................................................................................5–4

5.3 Revision Emulation Operation...................................................................................................................5–5

5.4 Opening Screen ..........................................................................................................................................5–7

5.4.1.1 Functional Select: Configuration: Modulator................................................................................5–8

5.4.2 Functional Select: Monitor..................................................................................................................5–56

5.4.6.1 Functional Select: Utility: Fixed Modem Rate ............................................................................5–74

5.4.6.8 Utility: Factory Set-Up..............................................................................................................5–109

5.5 Custom Modem Defaults........................................................................................................................5–110

CHAPTER 6. MODEM TYPES..........................................................................................................................6–1

6.1 Modem Types ..............................................................................................................................................6–1

6.2 Reed-Solomon Modes ..............................................................................................................................6–10

CHAPTER 7. CLOCKING OPTIONS ................................................................................................................7–1

7.1 Clocking Options ........................................................................................................................................7–1

8.1 Buffering ......................................................................................................................................................8–1

8.2 Buffer Size ...................................................................................................................................................8–4